QUANTUM® Q1000 Multifunction Meter

Technical Reference Guide

Maximum Flexibility
SchlumbergerSema Utilities
Electricity
313-B North Highway 11
West Union, SC 29696
USA
Tel : 864-638-8300
Fax : 864-638-4950

EL - 0012.1 - GB - 09.01
© Copyright 1999, 2001 Schlumberger Resource Management Services, Inc.
 QUANTUM® Q1000
Multimeasurement Meter
Technical Reference Guide

Revision 2.0

Effective Date: December 31, 2001

 Proprietary Rights Notice

This manual is an unpublished work and contains the trade secrets and confidential infor-
mation of Schlumberger Resource Management Services, Inc., which are not to be divulged
to third parties and may not be reproduced or transmitted in whole or part, in any form or by
any means, electronic or mechanical for any purpose, without the express written permis-
sion of Schlumberger RMS, Inc. All rights to designs or inventions disclosed herein, includ-
ing the right to manufacture, are reserved to Schlumberger RMS, Inc.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Schlum-
berger RMS, Inc. reserves the right to change the product specifications at any time without
incurring any obligations.

Trademarks Used in This Manual

EnergyPAC is a trademark of Schlumberger Resource Management Services, Inc.

FULCRUM, QUANTUM and PC-PRO+ are registered trademarks of Schlumberger Resource
Management Services, Inc.
Protocol Editor is a trademark of Schlumberger Resource Management Services, Inc.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
LonWorks and LonTalk are trademarks of Echelon Corporation.
Hyperterminal is a copyright of Hilgraeve, Inc.
Hayes, Smartcom, Smartmodem, Accura, & Optima, are trademarks of Hayes Microcom-
puter Products, Inc.
USRobotics, Sportster, Megahertz, Courier, & RapidComm are trademarks of U.S. Robotics.

QUANTUM® Q1000 Multimeasurement Meter

Technical Reference Guide
EL-0012.1-GB-12.01

SchlumbergerSema - Utilities Copyright© 2000, 2001

313-B North Highway 11 Schlumberger Resource Management Services, Inc.
West Union, SC 29696 All rights reserved.
Tel: (864) 638-8300
Fax: (864) 638-4950

ii
 Compliance With FCC Regulations

FCC Part 68, Class B Registration

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. The label affixed to this equipment
contains, among other information, the FCC Registration Number and Ringer Equivalence
Number (REN) for this equipment. Upon request, you must provide this information to your
telephone company.
The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices you can connect to your telephone
line and still have all of those devices ring when your telephone number is called. In most,
but not all areas, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to one line should not exceed
five (5.0). To determine the number of devices your can connect to your line in your calling
area—as determined by the REN—contact your local telephone company.
The following jacks must be ordered from the telephone company to interconnect this prod-
uct with the public communication network: RJ31.
If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the Telephone Com-
pany can discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you in advance.
If advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be
informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Your telephone company can make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or proce-
dures that could affect the proper function of your equipment. If they do, you will be noti-
fied in advance. You will then have an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone
service.
If you have trouble with this equipment, please contact us at the address below for informa-
tion on obtaining service or repairs. The telephone company may ask that you disconnect
this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure
that the equipment is not malfunctioning.
This product is not field-repairable; however, the maintenance section of this manual
described troubleshooting steps that you can take in the even of equipment problems.This
equipment can not be used on coin service lines provided by the telephone company.
Connections to party lines are subject to state tariffs. Contact your local telephone com-
pany if you plan to use this equipment on party lines.
The installation of this product does not require any connections or changes to the internal
wiring of other registered terminal equipment.

iii
 Factory Repair of Meters

SchlumbergerSema recommends that all repairs be performed at the factory. Certain repairs
may be performed by the user; however, unauthorized repairs will void any existing war-
ranty. All surface mounted parts must be replaced by the factory.

Repair of Meters Under Warranty

If the meter is under warranty, then SchlumbergerSema will repair the meter at no charge if
the meter has failed due to components or workmanship. A return authorization number
must be obtained before the equipment can be sent back to the factory. Contact your
SchlumbergerSema RMS Sales Representative for assistance.

Repair of Meters Not Under Warranty

The same procedure as above applies. SchlumbergerSema will charge for the necessary
repairs based on the failure.

Replacement Parts

Refer to Chapter 10 for a list of available parts and SchlumbergerSema part numbers.

Service Return Address

SchlumbergerSema
Customer Repair Department
313 North Highway 11 Dock C
West Union, SC 29696

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions manual, this equipment can cause interference to radio
communications. The equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
A computing device pursuant to FCC Part 15, Class A registration of FCC Rules, which are de-
signed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commer-
cial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference in
which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. The user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help

ATTENTION
The product you have purchased contains a battery (or batteries), circuit
boards, and switches. The batteries are recyclable. At the end of the meter’s
useful life, under various state and local laws, it may be illegal to dispose of
certain components into the municipal waste system. Check with your
local solid waste officials for details about recycling options or proper dis-
posal.

iv
 North American Business Offices
United States SchlumbergerSema - Utilities
313-B North Highway 11
West Union, SC 29696
Tel: 864-638-8300
Fax: 864-638-4950

v
 Electricity Technical Support

For support subscriptions, please contact your local SchlumbergerSema

Sales Representative.

Contact Numbers

866-877-2007 Toll-free in the U.S. and Canada

770-368-3532 Direct-dial number

Email Address

elecsupt@norcross.sema.slb.com

Hours of Operation

8 A.M. - 6 P.M. EST Monday through Thursday

8 A.M. - 5 P.M. EST Friday

vi
Table of Contents

Proprietary Rights Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

Trademarks Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Compliance With FCC Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
FCC Part 68, Class B Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Factory Repair of Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Repair of Meters Under Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Repair of Meters Not Under Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Service Return Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Electricity Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Contact Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Email Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Hours of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi

Chapter 1 General Information

How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
General Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Register Data and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Load Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Totalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Voltage Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Harmonic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Time Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
System Loss Compensation (SLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Billing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Time of Use/Multi-Tariff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Co-Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Interruptible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Real Time Pricing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Web-based Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Compensated Billing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Summary Billing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Conjunctive Billing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Timekeeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide vii

Table of Contents

Auxiliary Power and Meter Rated Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Burdens (Per Element) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Universal Plug and Play Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
ANSI Plug and Play Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
IEC Plug and Play Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Meter-to-Meter Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
I/O Binding Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
I/O Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
I/O Module Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Data Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
LonWorks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
System Measurements, Planning, and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Load Balancing and Feeder Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Transformer Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
SCADA Interfacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
System Loss Compensating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
System Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40

Chapter 2 Installation
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Meters with Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Meter Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Site Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Meter Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
A-base Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Socket Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Case Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
DIN Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Installing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Connecting the Standard Single Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Socket, A-Base, DIN, Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Rackmount Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
PC-PRO+ 98 Programming Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Site Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Auxiliary Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Socket Base Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
DIN Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

viii QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table of Contents

A-base Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Case Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Meter Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Meter Enclosure and Meter Enclosure Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Equipment Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Single-Point Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Example Ground Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Connection to Ground Grid Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Case Ground of the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
CT and VT Circuit Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
At the CTs and VTs in the Substation Yard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
At the Test Block Below the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
External Meter Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Optical Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Q1000 Meter DB-25 Connector (Meter Interface Connector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Communications Splitter Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Post-December 1999 Version Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Pre-December 1999 Version Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable (Discontinued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Q1000 Programming Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
I/O Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Internal Modem Connection—A-base, DIN, and Socket Base Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Internal Modem Connection—Switchboard and Rackmount Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
RS-485 Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
DIN Flushmount Adapter Installation Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Internal Modem Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Internal Modem Installation in Socket Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Internal Modem Installation in DIN/A-base Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Internal Modem Installation in Switchboard Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Internal Modem Installation in Rackmount Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Internal Modem and Internal RS-485 Boards in Pre-December 1999 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Internal RS-485 Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
RS-485 / RS-232 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Internal RS-485 Board Installation in Socket Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Internal RS-485 Board Installation in DIN/A-base Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Internal RS-485 Board Installation in Switchboard Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Internal RS-485 Board Installation in Rackmount Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Replacing a Display Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Socket Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
DIN/A-base Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Switchboard Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Rackmount Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Replacing a Power Supply Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Socket Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
DIN/A-base Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide ix

Table of Contents

Switchboard Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

Rackmount Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Installing QUANTUM Q1000 Switchboard Meter at QUANTUM STQ Switchboard Meter Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72

Chapter 3 Operating Instructions

Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Application of Power/Power-Up Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Power Down Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Normal Turn-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Power Outage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Cold Load Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Interval Make-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Recovery Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Alternate Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Remote Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Display Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Scroll Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Demand Reset Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Alternate Display Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Test Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Infrared LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
DIP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Security Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Implementing Security Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Clearing Security Codes—Customer Default Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Contrast Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Three Button Reset—Customer Default Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Energy Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Demand Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Present Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Previous Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Projected Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Cumulative Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Continuous Cumulative Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Minimum Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Maximum Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Load Profile Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Instantaneous Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Non-Register Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Communication Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
I/O Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Meter Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

x QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table of Contents

Metering Point Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Program Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Time-of-Use Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
User Data Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Programmable Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Device Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Time-of-Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Quantity Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Register Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Communications Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Device Multipliers/CT and VT Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
System Loss Compensation (SLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Displayable Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Normal Mode Register Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Test Mode Register Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Switch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
LED Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Standard Load Profile Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Voltage Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Time-of-Use Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Event Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Threshold Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Threshold Alarm Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Output Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Input Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Call Window Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Phone Home Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Phone Home Event Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Self Read Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Service Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
User Data Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
I/O Module Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
I/O Module Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
IEC 2-wire KY Pulse Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
IEC 2-Wire KY or KYZ Pulse Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Analog Output Module Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
Loss of Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
QUANTUM Q1000 Meter Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
Firmware Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
Firmware Upgrade Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
Helpful Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide xi

Table of Contents

CT/VT Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85

Chapter 4 Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and
Event Summary
Memory Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Standard Load Profile Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Interval Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Channel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Pulse Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Example Calculation of kWh Pulse Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Standard Load Profile Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Bit Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Data Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Extended Load Profile Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Meter Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Timekeeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Adjusting Meter Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
GPS Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Time Synchronization Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Message Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Example Message Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
GPS Port Baud Rate Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Data Backup During Power Outage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Auxiliary Power Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Event Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Time-of-Use Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
TOU Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Implementing TOU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Event Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
TOU Calendar Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
TOU Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Import/Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
TOU Energy Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
TOU Demand Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Chapter 5 Power Quality

Voltage Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Voltage Interruptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Voltage Sags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Voltage Sag Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Voltage Swells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Voltage Swell Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Voltage Imbalances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Voltage Imbalance Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Voltage Imbalance Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Voltage Imbalance Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Voltage Imbalance Example 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

xii QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table of Contents

Harmonic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

THD Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Fundamental Power Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Harmonic Registers and Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
General Harmonics Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Voltage Amplitude Harmonics Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Voltage Phase Angle Harmonics Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Current Amplitude Harmonics Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Current Phase Angle Harmonics Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Chapter 6 Communications
Simultaneous Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Optical Port (OPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Dual Port RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Internal Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
External Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
External Modem Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Practical Peripherals P114MT II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Hayes Accura 144 + Fax 144 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
U.S. Robotics Sportster 336 Faxmodem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
RS-485 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
RS-232 to RS-485 Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
B&B Electronics—485TBLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Aten—IC-485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
IC-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Default Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
BPS Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Off-Hook Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Call Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Answer Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Answer in Call Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Answer Outside Call Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Ring Answer Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Tip and Ring Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Telephone Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Dedicated Phone Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Parallel Off-Hook Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Dialing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Retry Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Number of Redials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Minutes to Wait Between Retry Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Phone Home on Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Changing Meter Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Programming Software Time Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Advanced Protocol Time Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
GPS Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide xiii

Table of Contents

Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Basic Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Mini-DLMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
QDIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
IEC 1107 (SIRP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
SCS (factory use only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Advanced Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
DNP 3.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
IEC 60870-5-102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
IEC 60870-5-102 Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
MODBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Protocol Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Input and Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Pulse Outputs (KYZ, or IEC 2-wire KY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Digital State Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Pulse Inputs (KYZ, or IEC 2-wire KY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Digital State Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Input / Output Modules (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
I/O Network Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
LonTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
LonWorks Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
I/O Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
I/O Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Meter Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
I/O Module Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Binding Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
I/O Module Functionality for the Plug and Play Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Network Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
I/O Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

Chapter 7 System Loss Compensation

System Loss Compensation - Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Elements of System Loss Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Transformer Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
No-load Var Loss Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Full-load Var Loss Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Transmission Line Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Substation Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Total System Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Calculation of System Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Transformer Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Calculation of Transformer Var Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Transmission Line Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Substation Conductor Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Total System Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

xiv QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table of Contents

Three-Phase, 4-Wire Meter Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Watt Loss Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Var Loss Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Three-Wire, Delta Load, 2-Element Meter Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Two-Element Meter Percentage Loss Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Testing Meters with System Loss Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
3 Element Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
2 Element Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Definition of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Chapter 8 Theory of Operation

Major Function Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
VTs and MOV Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
CTs and Transducer Board (Front End) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Main Board (Back End) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Data Calculation and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Downloadable Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
LonWorks Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Optical Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
RS-232 with Multiple Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Measurement Techniques and Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Active Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Fixed Sampling and FFTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Front End / Back End: Calculations and Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Calculated Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Energy Quantity IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Demand Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Voltage Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
System Loss Compensation (SLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Totalized Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
External Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Load Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Power Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Voltage Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Voltage Interruptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Voltage Sags and Swells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Time-of-Use (TOU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Chapter 9 Testing and Maintenance

General Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Battery Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide xv

Table of Contents

Battery Handling Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

System Error Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Non-Fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Meter Operations Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Register Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Infrared LED Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
KYZ Pulse Output Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Demand Reset Lockout Time Verifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Alternate Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Field Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Verification of Bidirectional Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Cold Load Pickup (Demand Delay) Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Battery Carryover Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
General Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Infrared LED/Test Pulse Adapter Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Energy Register Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Meter Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Accuracy Equations and Load Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Loss of Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
No Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Display Frozen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Infrared LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Not Pulsing Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Infrared LED Is Not Operational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Reset Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
RESET Push Button Does Not Initiate Demand Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
ALT Push Button Does Not Initiate Alternate Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
SCROLL Push Button Mechanism Does Not Initiate a Scroll Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Remote Demand Reset Not Operational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Initialization of Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Cannot Initialize Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Meter Loses Its Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
System Loss Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
System Loss Compensation Not Operating Properly in Field Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Input/Output (I/O) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
No Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
No Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
No KYZ Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Communication Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Optical Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Direct Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
RS-485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

xvi QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table of Contents

Chapter 10 Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Meter Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Communications Splitter Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Optical Port Programming Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Q1000 Optional Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Modem Retrofit Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
RS-485 Retrofit Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Plug and Play Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Drawings and Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Appendix A Diagnostic Errors

Diagnostic Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Appendix B Status Codes

Harmonics Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Voltage Quality Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Standard Load Profile Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Extended Load Profile Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide xvii

Table of Contents

Notes:

xviii QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

List of Figures

Figure Figure Titles Page

1.1 Q1000 Meter Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2 Q1000 Product Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1.3 Meter Dimensions Socket Base Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
1.4 Meter Dimensions DIN Base Meter with Short Terminal Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
1.5 Meter Dimensions DIN Base Meter with Extended Terminal Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1.6 Meter Dimensions DIN Flushmount Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
1.7 Meter Dimensions A-base/Bottom Connected Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
1.8 Meter Dimensions Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
1.9 Meter Dimensions Rackmount Meter Without Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
1.10 Dimensions Rackmount Case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
1.11 Input/Output Module Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
1.12 Typical Q1000 I/O Module - Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
1.13 Typical Q1000 I/O Module - Front and Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
2.1 Standard Single Battery - All Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2 Dual Battery Configuration - Socket Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3 Access Door Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.4 Dual Socket Meter Battery - Side 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.5 Dual Socket Meter Battery - Side 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.6 Battery Access Door - DIN, A-base Meters (Hatch Closed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.7 Battery Access Door - DIN, A-base Meters (Hatch Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.8 Installing the Standard Battery (Socket Meter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.9 Installing the Standard Battery (DIN Meter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.10 Standard Battery Cable Connection (DIN Meter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.11 Installing the Standard Battery (Switchboard Meter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.12 Installing the Standard Battery (Switchboard Meter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.13 Installing the Standard Battery (Rackmount Meter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.14 Installing the Standard Battery (Rackmount Meter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.15 Socket Base Meter with Auxiliary External Power Plug-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.16 9S Socket Base Meter with Auxiliary Power Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.17 DIN Meter with Auxiliary Power Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.18 A-base Auxiliary Power Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.19 Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Auxiliary Power Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.20 Q1000 Socket Meter Form 5 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.21 Q1000 Socket Meter Form 9 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.22 Q1000 A-base Meter Form 5 Service Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.23 Q1000 A-base Meter Form 9 Service Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.24 Q1000 DIN Meter Form 5 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.25 Q1000 DIN Meter Form 9 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.26 Q1000 Switchboard Meter Form 5 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2.27 Q1000 Switchboard Meter Form 9 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2.28 Q1000 Rackmount Meter Form 5 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.29 Q1000 Rackmount Meter Form 9 Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.30 I/O Module (3 Dimensional View). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2.31 I/O Modules Mounted on DIN Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.32 Meter Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.33 Example Ground Bar for Meter Cabinet “Single Point” Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.34 IEC Optical Probe Example Cable and Meter’s Optical Port Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
2.35 ANSI Optical Probe Example Cable and Meter’s Optical Port Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide xix

List of Figures

Figure Figure Titles Page

2.36 Standard Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable, Terminated Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.37 Pre-December 1999 Communications Splitter Cable, Unterminated Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.38 Socket Meter with Internal Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.39 A-base Meter with Internal Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.40 Modem Connection on Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2.41 Modem Connection on Rackmount Meter Case (2 meters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.42 DIN Flushmount Adapter Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2.43 Flush Mounting Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
2.44 DIN Meter in Flushmount Kit - Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.45 DIN Meter in Flushmount Kit - Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2.46 Meter Panel Cut Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2.47 Completed Flush Mounting Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.48 Internal Modem Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.49 Modem Module Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.50 Modem Module Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2.51 DIN/A-base Modem Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2.52 DIN/A-base Modem J2 and J3 Connector Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2.53 Switchboard Modem Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
2.54 Switchboard J2, J3, and J4 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2.55 Rackmount Modem Board Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
2.56 Rackmount Modem Board Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.57 RS-485 Board Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
2.58 RS-485 Board Insertion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
2.59 RS-485 Board Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
2.60 DIN/A-base RS-485 Board Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
2.61 DIN/A-base RS-485 Board J2 and J3 Connector Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
2.62 Switchboard RS-485 Board Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
2.63 Switchboard J1, J2, and J3 Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
2.64 Rackmount RS-485 Board Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
2.65 Rackmount RS-485 Board Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
2.66 Display Board (Bottom View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
2.67 Display Board Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
2.68 DIN/A-base Display Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
2.69 Switchboard Display Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
2.70 Power Supply Board Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
2.71 Power Supply Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
2.72 Rear Plate Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
2.73 Power Supply Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
2.74 Switchboard Power Supply Board Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
3.1 Controls and Indicators, Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Controls and Indicators, DIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3 Warning Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.4 Test Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.5 Example Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.6 Status Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.7 Q1000 DIP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.8 Device Security Codes Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.9 Contrast Adjustment, DIN Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.10 Contrast Adjustment, Socket Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.11 Q1000 Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.12 Quantity Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.13 PC-PRO+ 98 Device Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

xx QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 List of Figures

Figure Figure Titles Page

3.14 Normal Mode Threshold Alarm Example 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
3.15 Inverted Mode Threshold Alarm Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.16 Normal Mode Threshold Alarm Example 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.17 Inverted Mode Threshold Alarm Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.18 I/O Module Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.19 I/O Module Terminal Strip Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
3.20 I/O Module Center Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
3.21 I/O Module Power Supply Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
3.22 IEC 2-wire KY Output Board DIP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
3.23 Pulse Input Module Input Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
3.24 Pulse Input Board Jumper Locations (JP1 & JP4-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
3.25 Pulse Input Board Jumper Locations (JP2 & JP3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
3.26 DIP Switch and Jumper Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
4.1 Time Synchronization Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.2 GPS Synchronization Message Timeline Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.3 Time Synchronization Message Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
5.1 Voltage Interruptions Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Voltage Interruptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3 Voltage Sags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.4 Voltage Sag Example of One Phase Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.5 Voltage Sag Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.6 Voltage Swells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.8 Voltage Swell Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.9 Voltage Imbalances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.10 Voltage Imbalance Example of VA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.13 Harmonics Configuration—General Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.14 Harmonics Configuration—Voltage Amplitude Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.15 Harmonics Configuration—Voltage Phase Angle Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.16 Harmonics Configuration—Current Amplitude Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.17 Harmonics Configuration—Current Phase Angle Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
6.1 Q1000 Phone Line Multi-drop Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 RS-485 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.3 Three Communication Rates for Modem Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.4 Internal Modem Off-Hook Detect Enable/Disable Jumper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.5 Dedicated Phone Line Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.6 Meter Sharing Customer Phone Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.7 I/O Module Mounted on DIN Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.8 I/O Network with Terminated QUANTUM Q1000 (at one of the bus ends) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6.9 I/O Network with Unterminated QUANTUM Q1000 (in between) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6.10 I/O Network with Two Unterminated Q1000 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
7.1 System Loss Compensation Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 SLC Basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.3 Diagram of QUANTUM Q1000 SLC Metering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.4 Simplified Transformer Equivalent Circuit and Loss Power Triangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.5 System Schematic; 3-Phase 3-Wire with 2-Element QUANTUM Q1000 Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
9.1 Rear of Display Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.2 Typical Q1000 Class 2 Amp Load Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.3 ANSI Meter; Class 2 Amp Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.4 Typical Q1000 Class 10 Amp Load Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.5 IEC Meter; Class 5 (10) Amp Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.6 Typical Q1000 Class 20 Amp Load Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.7 ANSI Meter; Class 20 Amp Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide xxi

List of Figures

Figure Figure Titles Page

10.1 Main Board Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.2 Display Board Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10.3 Modem Board Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.4 RS-485 Board Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.5 Transducer Board Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10.6 Power Supply Board Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.7 MOV Board Diagram (S-Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.8 MOV Board Diagram (DIN/A-base/Switchboard/Rackmount). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.9 Digital State Outputs (1-8) Module 1 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10.10 Digital State Outputs (9-16) Module 2 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
10.11 Digital Pulse Outputs KYZ (1-4) and Digital State Output 1 Module 3 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10.12 Digital Pulse Outputs IEC 2-Wire KY (5-8) and Digital State Outputs (1-4) Module 4 (Universal Binding). . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10.13 Analog Outputs (1-4) Module 5 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10.14 Analog Outputs (5-8) Module 6 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10.15 Digital Pulse Inputs KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY (1-4) Module 7 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10.16 Digital Pulse Inputs KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY (5-8) Module 8 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
10.17 Digital State Inputs (1-8) Module 11 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
10.18 Digital State Inputs (9-16) Module 12 (Universal Binding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

xxii QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

List of Tables
Table Table Titles Page
1.1 Manual Chapter Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Meter Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.3 Time Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.4 Meter Rated Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.5 Q1000 Meter High Current Error Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.6 Q1000 Meter Low Current Error Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.7 DIN, DIN Flushmount, A-base, Switchboard, Rackmount Meter Burden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.8 Socket Meter Burden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.9 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.10 I/O Module Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1.11 Pulse and State Output Module Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1.12 Output Pulse Rate Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1.13 Pulse and State Input Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1.14 Input Pulse Rate Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1.15 Relative Value to Physical Output Translation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1.16 I/O Module Current Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1.17 I/O Module Voltage Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1.18 Loss of Communication Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1.19 Q1000 Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
1.20 Error Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
2.1 Battery Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 QUANTUM Q1000 Meter Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3 External Meter Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.4 External Meter Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
2.5 Q1000 Meter DB-25 Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
2.6 Standard Q1000 Communication Splitter Cable Part Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.7 Standard Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.8 Pre-December 1999 Communications Splitter Cable Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
2.9 Switchboard and Rackmount DB-9 Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2.10 Internal Modem Kit Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.11 Internal RS-485 Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
3.1 Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.2 Status Line Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.3 DIP Switch Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.4 Q1000 Security Code Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.5 Q1000 Energy Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.6 Energy Registers (Watthours, Varhours, VAhours, Qhours). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.7 Energy Registers (volthours, amphours) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.8 Parameters, Device Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3.9 Parameters, Time-of-Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.10 Quantity Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.11 Communication Setup Dialog Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3.12 General Tab Parameters, Communications Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3.13 Optical Port Tab Parameters, Communications Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.14 Serial Ports Tab Parameters, Communications Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
3.15 Advanced Protocols Tab Parameters, Communications Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.16 Time Synchronization Tab Parameters, Communications Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.17 Parameters, Device Multipliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide xxiii

List of Tables

Table Table Titles Page

3.18 Parameters, Basic System Loss Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.19 Parameters, Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.20 Parameters, Displayable Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.21 Parameters, Normal Mode Register Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.22 Parameters, Test Mode Register Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3.23 Parameters, Switch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.24 Parameters, LED Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.25 Parameters, Standard Load Profile Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3.26 Parameters, Voltage Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.27 Parameters, Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3.28 Time-of-Use Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.29 Parameters, Event Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.30 Parameters, Threshold Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
3.31 Parameters, Output Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.32 Parameters, Input Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.33 Parameters, Call Window Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
3.34 Parameters, Phone Home Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
3.35 Parameters, Phone Home Event Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3.36 Parameters, Self-Read Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3.37 Parameters, Service Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.38 Parameters, User Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.39 IEC 2-wire KY Pulse Output Module DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
3.40 Pulse Input KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY Jumper Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
3.41 Wetting Voltage Jumper Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
3.42 Input Pulse Duration Jumper Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
3.43 Relative Value to Physical Output Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
3.44 I/O Module Current Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
3.45 I/O Module Voltage Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3.46 Loss of Communication Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3.47 Output Type DIP Switch and Jumper Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3.48 Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3.49 Time Out Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3.50 Firmware Revisions as of December 2001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3.51 Firmware Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
3.52 LOADER Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
4.1 Standard Load Profile Data Recording Capacity (in days) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2 Time Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
6.1 B&B Electronics—485TBLED RS-485 Converter Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.2 Aten—IC-485 RS-485 Converter Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.3 IC-11 RS-485 Converter Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.4 Default Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.5 Dial Modifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.6 Phone Home Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.7 QDIP Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
7.1 System Losses Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.2 Definition of Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
9.1 Coil Factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2 Balance Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
B.1 Harmonics Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.2 Voltage Quality Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.3 Voltage Interruption Reset Reasons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

xxiv QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 List of Tables

Table Table Titles Page

B.4 Standard Load Profile Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B.5 Extended Load Profile Status Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide xxv

List of Tables

Notes:

xxvi QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 1 General Information

This instruction manual explains the installation, operation, and maintenance of

the SchlumbergerSema QUANTUM® Q1000 Multimeasurement Meter (hereafter
referred to simply as the meter or Q1000). SchlumbergerSema urges you to read
the entire manual before attempting installation, tests, operations, or maintenance.
To operate Schlumberger’s PC-PRO+® 98 Programming Software, refer to the PC-
PRO+® 98 Getting Started Guide, the PC-PRO+ 98 Online Help, and the PC-
PRO+® 98 Online Manual. To configure any of the Advanced Protocols, refer to
the Protocol Editor™ software, the Protocol Editor Online Help, and the Protocol
Editor Getting Started Guide.

How to Use This Manual

This manual includes development updates through PC-PRO+ 98 Version 2.3
software and Firmware Version 5.x.1 The following information is contained in this
manual.

Table 1.1 Manual Chapter Layout

Chapter Title
1 General Information
2 Installation
3 Operating Instructions
4 Standard and Extended
Load Profiles, Time-of-
Use, Meter Time, event
Log, and Log Summary
5 Power Quality
Description
Provides a general description of the Q1000 meter,
information about the meter’s features, metering
applications, meter specifications, and system
planning.
Provides instructions for storing, unpacking, and
installing the Q1000 meter, including wiring, and
option module connections.
Provides instructions for operating the meter including
meter displays, DIP switches, reset mechanisms,
calibration, and programmable functions. Also
provides information on optional Input/Output
Modules and the MeterKey feature.
Provides information about the capabilities of
Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use
metering, meter timekeeping and time
synchronization, the Event Log , and Event Log
Summaries.
Provides information about power quality
measurement, including voltage quality sags, swells,
imbalances, and interruptions as well as information
on harmonic analysis and recording.

1. The final version of the 5.x firmware was not available at the time of publishing.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-1

General Information

Table 1.1 Manual Chapter Layout

Chapter Title Description
6 Communications Provides information about meter communications,
the Modem Module, the RS-485 Module, and Basic
and Advanced Protocols. Also provides information on
I/O networks and bi9ndings.
7 System Loss Provides information about system loss compensation
Compensation including calculations, examples, and SLC testing
procedures.
8 Theory of Operation Provides high-level descriptions of circuit board
functionality as well as information on measurement
techniques and power quality analysis.
9 Testing and Maintenance Provides procedures for testing, troubleshooting, and
maintaining the Q1000 meter.
10 Standard and Provides part numbers for standard and replacement
Replacement Parts; parts and communication cables, and block diagrams
Schematics and Drawings of the circuit boards.
Appendix Diagnostic Errors Provides a complete list of all Q1000 diagnostic
A errors, including descriptions and causes of the errors
as well as additional detailed information and
recommended user actions.
Appendix Status Code Provides a complete list of all Q1000 status codes,
B including Harmonics, Voltage Quality, and Standard
and Extended Load Profile statuses.
Glossary Provides a description of some of the most commonly
used Q1000-related terms.
Index Along with the Table of Contents, List of Figures, and
List of Tables, the Index provides a tool to assist users
in locating information in this manual.

General Product Description

The QUANTUM Q1000 intelligent electronic device (IED) is an unsurpassed
accurate solid-state electronic multimeasurement meter designed to be used at
bulk power flow points including power plants, substations, intertie points, and
large commercial and industrial sites.
The QUANTUM Q1000 was designed for maximum flexibility. PC-PRO+ 98, the
Windows® based programming software, is both easy to use and flexible. This
software can be used to create a program whether the software is connected to a
meter or not. This allows greater flexibility to customers needing to work on
programs in the shop for meters that will be installed at a future time. User
downloadable firmware makes it possible to upgrade the meter’s internal software
with future enhancements. Dynamic allocation of the meter’s memory at program
time allows the user to allocate memory to the features being used at each
metering point, resulting in maximum utilization of the resources available. As the
needs of today’s electric industry change and grow, the QUANTUM Q1000 is ready
to grow to answer those needs.

1-2 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

The Q1000 can be programmed to display over 300 user-selected parameters on a

versatile four line dot matrix liquid crystal display (LCD). The display can be
customized to display alphanumeric characters and ID codes. There are over 1,000
display quantities from which to choose. Flexibility is the rule here, too. This
allows users to build displays to fit their needs—even label quantities in Spanish,
French, or Portuguese to simplify display reading in non-English locations.
The Q1000 meter is a totally solid state, multimeasurement, transformer-rated,
polyphase meter. It measures and displays the per phase real and reactive power in
all four quadrants. It is capable of local and/or remote programming and
interrogation. Register information is displayed on a four line liquid crystal display
and recorded interval data is available for translation by an external computer.
Data may also be retrieved through one of the many protocols supported in the
Q1000 meter, allowing versatile communication to a wide variety of systems and
equipment.
Because the device can measure bidirectional power flow, quantities such as
Watts, Vars, and VA can be metered in all four quadrants. Power Quality can be
measured, recorded and acted upon utilizing subcycle voltage and individual
harmonic measurements.
The Load Profile capabilities of the Q1000 meter take data storage to a new level.
Two types of load profiles are supported—standard load profile and extended load
profile. The standard load profile includes two fully independent load profile
recorders, with independent interval lengths and 24 channels each. The extended
load profile includes eight additional load profiles each with up to 24 additional
channels of data. The extended load profiles also include some new abilities. For
more details, see Chapter 4. Maximum flexibility of load profile recording
combined with Schlumberger’s EnergyAudit™ software provides a complete
solution for monitoring customer loads.
The meter features a modular design, consisting of electronic circuit boards that fit
together to perform various functions including:
• Transformer input for voltage and current
• Analog to digital conversion, and measurement processing
• Register, load profile, real time clock and communications processing
• Inputs and Outputs for pulse, digital state, and analog data
• Internal telephone modem function
• Simultaneous communication ports, allowing WEB/RTU/SCADA/PC data
management system communication interface functions
A full complement of intelligent input/output modules, including pulse inputs and
outputs, digital state inputs and outputs and analog inputs and outputs, are all
available or under development. I/O modules are separate from the meter and
communicate over a LONWORKs® twisted pair network.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-3

General Information

Packaging
The Q1000 meter is available in Socket, DIN, A-base, Switchboard and Rackmount
configurations.

DIN Meter
A-base Meter
w/IEC Optical Port
w/IEC Optical Port
(shown with short terminal cover; long
cover also available)

Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Meter
w/ANSI Optical Port

Socket Meter
w/ANSI Optical Port

19” Rackmount Meter (shown with two meters)

w/IEC Optical Port
Note: The case of the Rackmount meter will hold 2 meters side-by-side (shown here). If only one meter is ordered, then a blank plate will cover the
empty slot in the case.

Figure 1.1 Q1000 Meter Packages

1-4 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

Features
Register Data and Display
The QUANTUM Q1000 allows over 300 displayable items from a selection of
thousands on the four line liquid crystal display. The display annunciators and data
are fully programmable by the user. The meter is capable of measuring and
displaying the following registers:

Energy: Wh (net, delivered, received, per phase, aggregate)

varh (net, delivered, received, 4 quadrant varh, per phase, aggregate)
VAh (Vectorial and Arithmetic, 4 quadrant VAh, delivered, received, per
phase, aggregate, distortion unbalance)
Pfh (per phase and aggregate)
Hzh
Qh (net, delivered, received)
Vh (per phase, average)
Ah (per phase, Neutral, average)
%THD Ah (per phase, ANSI, IEC)
%THD Vh (per phase, ANSI, IEC)
Fundamental and Compensated SLC values
Totalized Quantity hours
Input Quantity hours
Demand: Maximum demand
Minimum demand
Present demand
Previous demand
Projected demand
Cumulative demand
Continuous cumulative demand
User-selected groups of 4 coincident demand values (Block/Rolling/Thermal)
Block and Rolling demand intervals with programmable interval and
subinterval lengths
Demand intervals are synchronized to an internal clock. Additionally, the
calculation of thermal demand is available
Instantaneous: Watts (net, delivered, received, per phase, aggregate)
vars (net, delivered and received and 4 quadrant var, per phase, aggregate)
VA (Vectorial and Arithmetic, 4 quadrant VA, delivered, received, per phase,
aggregate, distortion unbalance)
Q (net, delivered, received)
Volts (per phase, average)
Amperes (per phase, Neutral, average)
Power Factor (per phase and 3 phase)
Instantaneous registers update at sub-second frequency (except for
compensated instantaneous registers, which are updated once every second)
Instantaneous peaks and minimums are also available for display

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-5

General Information

Self Read: The self-read function is available to freeze register data at programmed
times. 32 sets of self-read data can be stored in the QUANTUM Q1000.
A self read can be programmed to occur via a number of ways, including: at a
regular interval, after a demand reset, at test mode entry and exit, at season
change (TOU meters only), and/or triggered by an external input.
Power Quality: The magnitude and phase angle of all individual harmonics through the 20th
are available for retrieval and display, including the calculation of percent
total harmonic distortion (% THD).
Both types of % THD are supported—ANSI and IEC.

Harmonics
Avg. per phase Fundamental current
Avg. per phase Fundamental voltage
Avg. per phase Fundamental current phase angle
Avg. per phase Fundamental voltage phase angle
Avg. Harmonic current
Avg. Harmonic voltage
Avg. per phase Harmonic current phase angle
Avg. per phase Harmonic voltage phase angle
Avg. per phase Harmonic voltage % of Fundamental
Avg. per phase Harmonic current % of Fundamental
Instantaneous per phase %THD European (IEC) current
Instantaneous per phase %THD European (IEC) voltage
Instantaneous per phase Fundamental current
Instantaneous per phase Fundamental voltage
Instantaneous per phase Fundamental power
Instantaneous per phase Fundamental current phase angle
Instantaneous per phase Fundamental voltage phase angle
Instantaneous per phase %THD U.S. (ANSI) current
Instantaneous per phase %THD U.S. (ANSI) voltage
Instantaneous per phase Harmonic current
Instantaneous per phase Harmonic voltage
Instantaneous per phase Harmonic current phase angle
Instantaneous per phase Harmonic voltage phase angle
Instantaneous per phase Harmonic voltage % of Fundamental
Instantaneous per phase Harmonic current % of Fundamental

1-6 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

Power Quality: The most recent voltage quality events and count values pertaining to voltage
(continued) quality events are also available for retrieval and display.

Voltage Quality Imbalances

Imbalance Count
Imbalance per phase Last Avg. %
Imbalance per phase Last Duration
Imbalance per phase Last End Date
Imbalance per phase Last End Time
Imbalance per phase Last Start Date
Imbalance per phase Last Start Time
Imbalance per phase Pending
Imbalance per phase Pending Avg. %
Imbalance per phase Pending Start Date
Imbalance per phase Pending Start Time

Voltage Quality Interruptions (Classes 1, 2 and 3)

Interruption Class 1/2/3 Count
Interruption Class 1/2/3 Last Duration
Interruption Class 1/2/3 End Date
Interruption Class 1/2/3 End Time
Interruption Class 1/2/3 Reason
Interruption Class 1/2/3 Start Date
Interruption Class 1/2/3 Start Time

Voltage Quality Sags/Swells (Levels 1 and 2)

Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Pending
Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Pending Duration
Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Pending End Date
Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Pending End Time
Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Pending Start Date
Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Pending Start Time
Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Pending Voltage Extreme
Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Pending Average Current
Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Count
Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Last Average Current
Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Last Duration
Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Last End Date
Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Last End Time
Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Last Start Date
Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Last Start Time
Sag/Swell Level 1/2 Last Voltage Extreme

CT/VT Correction CT/VT Correction allows the meter to correct for the errors in the current and
voltage instrument transformers on a per phase basis.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-7

General Information

Load Profile
The Q1000 has 240 channels of load profile split into two standard load profiles of
24 channels per profile and 8 extended load profiles of 24 channels per profile.
Channels are available for totalized registers as well as registers for the recording
of pulse input information. Virtually every measured quantity can be recorded in
load profile. Both load profiles can have their own interval lengths (i.e. one interval
length of 15 minutes could be used for billing and a second interval length of 5
minutes for load study data gathering). Each standard load profile interval length is
programmable from 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, or 30 seconds or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12,
15, 20, 30, or 60 minutes. Standard load profile intervals of data retains a maximum
of 65,535 pulses, or 16 bit resolution; this extended degree of resolution allows for
a significant improvement in billing data accuracy.
Interval data and time is maintained by a battery during power outages or through
the use of the optional (AC/DC) Auxiliary Power Supply. Battery carryover life is a
minimum of 180 days.
For more information about Extended Load Profile, see Chapter 4.
Interval data storage is maintained in the meter’s RAM storage. The meter has
around 440 Kbytes of dynamically allocated RAM available. This memory is shared
between load profile, the event log, power quality information, self reads, and
register storage. This flexibility allows the user to customize the meter’s memory
usage to each metering point.
Important load profile quantities include:
• Wh (delivered and received, net, per phase or 3 phase)
• Varh (delivered and received, net, per phase or 3 phase)
• Varh Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 (per phase or 3 phase)
• Vh, V2h (average or per phase)
• Ah, I2h (average or per phase)
• Neutral Ah
• Qh
• %THD Ah and Vh (per phase, ANSI or IEC)
• fundamental Wh and Varh (all values available as per phase or 3 phase)
• SLC values
• Hzh
• Pfh (per phase or 3 phase)
• VAh Vectorial (delivered and received, per phase or 3 phase)
• VAh Vectorial Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 (per phase and 3 phase)
• VAh Arithmetic (delivered and received, per phase or 3 phase)
• VAh Arithmetic Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 (per phase and 3 phase)
• VAh Arithmetic Unbalance
• VAh Arithmetic Distortion
• Eight (Totalized Quantity) h
• Eight (Pulse Input) h
• Eight (Analog Input) h1

1. Analog Inputs are not currently available in the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for a future
release.

1-8 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

Totalization
The QUANTUM Q1000 meter is capable of maintaining up to 8 totalized registers.
Each totalized register may be programmed to add or subtract internally
calculated quantities as well as external pulse inputs. In addition, a new button is
being added in the 4.01i Q1000 firmware and PC-PRO+98 v2.1 software release to
enable the totalized quantities to perform a Pythagorean Theorem calculation, i.e.,
a square root of the sum of the squares. Totalized registers are treated just like any
other register quantity and can be stored to energy, demand and/or load profile
registers.

Voltage Quality
The QUANTUM Q1000 is capable of measuring subcycle voltage quality events of
sags, swells, interruptions and imbalances. Each event type has an independently
programmable magnitude threshold, hysteresis and minimum duration of the
event. Pertinent information is stored with each event, such as duration, minimum/
maximum extreme values and a time stamp to mark when the event occurred. The
number of events to be recorded is also programmable. Sag and swell
measurements are based on a half-cycle, sliding window algorithm. Two levels of
sag and swell events may be programmed.

Harmonic Analysis
The QUANTUM Q1000 measures and provides user definable recording and
display of individual harmonics for each phase of voltage and current up to the
20th harmonic using Fast Fourier Transforms (FFT). Both magnitude and phase
angle measurements are calculated and stored as part of the harmonic analysis.
The QUANTUM Q1000 calculates average and instantaneous percent total
harmonic distortion (%THD) for each phase of voltage and current using both
ANSI and IEC formulas.
The time averaged value of harmonic voltage and currents up to the 20th harmonic
may be recorded and displayed.
The QUANTUM Q1000 energy and demand measurements include harmonic
content up to the 32nd harmonic.

Communications
The meter provides five-port, multiple protocol communications support. Port 1 is
a RS-232 port. Port 2 is selectable between RS-232, or an internal modem, or a RS-
485 port.1 The third port is an IEC 1107 or ANSI optical port located on the device
cover. The fourth port is a LONWORKS port that can be expanded to support 64
inputs and outputs.2 The fifth port is the LEDs of the meter face. Simultaneous
communication on all five ports is supported.
• OPTICAL PORT—The meter is capable of being interrogated through an IEC
1107 or ANSI GE Opticom optical port located on the cover at 9600 bits/
second. The meter supports all communication protocols through this user-
configurable port.
• RS-232—The meter comes standard with two RS-232 ports which operate at
rates up to 115,200 bits/second.

1. The internal modem or RS-485 port require their respective internal option boards that can either be ordered
with the meter or ordered later as a kit.
2. Separate LonWorks I/O modules can either be ordered with the meter or ordered later as a kit. Up to 12
modules are supported.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-9

General Information

The meter supports multi-drop physical networks through the use of external
devices (fiber optic modems, frame relay, radios, and dial-up telephones).
Several of the protocols support multi-drop operation.
• RS-485 - The optional RS-485 module provides either 1 RS-485 port or 1 RS-
232 port. The data rate can be up to 115,200 bits per second for either type.
An internal RS-485 board is always connected to through Port 2.
The RS-485 port supports a multi-drop network of up to 32 devices with a cable
length of up to 4000 feet. The RS-232 port supports up to 255 devices with a
cable length of up to 50 feet (normal wiring) or more depending on
communication technology (fiber, radio, and so forth).
• MODEM—The optional internal modem is software programmable to operate
at rates from 1,200 up to 33,600 bits/second with autobaud sensing capability.
The internal modem is configured as either an auto-answer or an auto-dial
unit. If the unit is programmed to be an auto-answer unit, it will answer
incoming calls. If it is programmed to be an auto-dial unit, it will initiate and
receive phone calls.
An internal modem is always connected to through Port 2.
The internal modem has off-hook detect capabilities; it will not dial if an
extension phone is off hook. The modem releases the phone line if an
extension phone is picked up and the handset is toggled once.
The meter has the ability to perform an auto-dial function to a PC central
station, based on a programmable set of events such as loss of potential,
demand reset, and digital state input.
• LONWORKS NETWORK—The inputs to and outputs from the meter utilize a
LONWORKS Network connection. This easily expandable twisted pair
technology allows multiple signals to be passed between devices about every
second.
• LEDs—Two LEDs are supported on the meter face. Any energy value can be
programmed to these LEDs and different energy quantities can be
programmed in Normal and Test modes. The LEDs can be ordered either
Infrared or Visible. The visible light LED is red.

Inputs and Outputs

The Q1000 has a flexible LONWORKS compatible networked I/O subsystem. The
standard configuration allows up to 12 SchlumbergerSema I/O modules to be
connected to one meter with plug-and-play connections. Optional I/O module
selections include: 16 digital state outputs, 8 pulse outputs, 8 analog outputs, 16
digital state inputs, 8 pulse inputs and 8 analog inputs1.

Time Adjustment
The time in the meter can be adjusted in several ways. Meter initialization will set
the time in the meter to the time in the PC being used. In the event of an
initialization, the time can be set to any time regardless of the previous meter
setting. Initialization clears all meter data.2
A second method for changing the time in the meter is the time adjustment; this
adjustment can be made in several ways. The PC-PRO+ 98 programming software
can be used, or one of several Advanced Protocols can be used, or the GPS time

1. Analog Inputs are not currently available in the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for a future
release.
2. Billing data may be retained or discarded using a prompt in the initialization process.

1-10 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

synchronization capability can be used. When a time adjustment is performed, the

meter’s time can be changed forward or backward up to one hour each time
(depending on the method used); multiple time adjustments can be done. During a
time adjustment, demand and load profile data are maintained but are modified to
accommodate the time change. In this way, the load profile structure remains
consistent in spite of the time change.
If time is moved backward, the ending time for the current interval remains the
same as it was before the adjustment, so it will simply be extended to make a
larger interval. When the meter’s time reaches the time for end of interval, the
meter will begin with normal interval lengths again. The extended interval will be
flagged to indicate the time adjustment.
If time is moved forward, the old interval ending times will be maintained and
empty intervals will be added to fill in the time that was skipped. Each affected
interval will be flagged to indicate the time adjustment occurrence.
Additional time adjustment methods are included in several of the Advanced
Protocols. Refer to the respective protocol for more information.
GPS time synchronization allows for sophisticated control and setup of time
changes. Frequencies of daily, hourly, and 5 minutes are supported, as well as 61
world time zones. 5 GPS message formats are simultaneously monitored, and four
time adjustment windows may be configured. Time can be adjusted up to +/- 30
minutes using this method.
See Chapter 4 for more information.

Programming
The software for programming this meter (PC-PRO+ 98) is a 32-bit Windows 95/NT
application.
User definable security codes in both the programming software and the meter
prevent unauthorized reprogramming of the meter. In addition, a programming
lockout switch is provided on the meter to prevent reprogramming regardless of
security codes used.
Programming and/or interrogation of the meters can be accomplished locally or
remotely in several ways, including a direct link via the RS-232 or RS-485
connection, an internal or external telephone modem communication link, or
through the optical port using a laptop PC.
The meter also has downloadable firmware allowing for easy upgrades to the
meter.

System Loss Compensation (SLC)

The Q1000 meter is capable of providing system loss compensation. System loss
compensation for active and reactive power losses includes transformer, bus,
conductor, transmission line, and auxiliary equipment losses. Transformer no-load
core losses, and load losses for winding resistance and leakage reactance are
included. Transmission line resistive and inductive load loss calculations, and
charging current vars may also be included.
For QUANTUM STQ meter users, the values entered into the QUANTUM Q1000
meter are the same as the ones used in the QUANTUM STQ meter.1

1. If you are a PC-PRO+ Version 1.0 users, call your SchlumbergerSema Representative. Version 1.0 worked
differently; Versions 2.0 and above work as described.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-11

General Information

All compensated registers are updated once every second. The meter allows for
measurement, recording, and display of both compensated and uncompensated
registers simultaneously.
See Chapter 7 for more information.

Applications
The QUANTUM Q1000 is designed to be used for revenue billing, power quality,
information collection and retrieval, and system measurement applications. The
meter’s capability for complex measurements is ideal for large commercial,
industrial, and utility power exchange points. A metering point’s system accuracy
can be affected by:
1 The meter’s accuracy.
2 The CT/VT accuracy.
3 The difference in readings between the metering point and the billing point.
The Q1000 has the capability to meet these potential concerns to allow the user to
have the most accurate billing data available on the market today.
The in-depth voltage quality and individual harmonic measurements allow ongoing
power quality studies to be performed on a proactive basis allowing the user to
perform traditional billing functions while simultaneously studying the other
aspects of a metering site. The per phase measurement and recording capability
and the multi-port, multi-protocol interfaces can provide real-time information to
allow the user the ability to run their operations efficiently to monitor load usage
and PF (and so forth) to help reduce power bills.
A flexible architecture and superior meter features combined with state of the art
programming and data retrieval software make the QUANTUM Q1000 the meter of
choice for the deregulated market place.

Billing
The QUANTUM Q1000 provides unsurpassed accuracy for applications in revenue
billing. For customers billed on any number of rate structures, a time-of-use rate,
an interruptible rate, a real time pricing rate, with or without transformer loss
compensation, all traditional billing quantities are provided by the Q1000 in
addition to the extended features which extend meter capabilities to new heights.
Nonvolatile memory retains critical billing registers during power outages.
Security passwords, meter seals, and lockout switches protect register and profile
data. On-site and remotely accessed error conditions including a time tagged event
log provide a high degree of confidence and protection of critical information.

Time of Use/Multi-Tariff
The QUANTUM Q1000 provides support for basic and extended time-of-use rate
structures including variations on the active/reactive energy and demand rates
used for industrial customer applications.1
See Chapter 4 for more information.

Co-Generation
The Q1000 meter is ideal for large and small utilities or industrial customers whose
exchanges of power must be measured precisely. The QUANTUM Q1000 meter
provides on-line measurement of bi-directional power flow including watts, vars,

1. Time-of-use is a planned enhancement to the Q1000 meter. It is currently planned for release in 2001.

1-12 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

volt-amperes, and power factor. Register multipliers and scale factors of kilo(k)
and mega(M) can be selected to display actual primary readings rather than
secondary readings that must be multiplied manually. Register self read
capabilities combined with on-line measurements of bi-directional power flow
make real-time energy pricing data available to the utility. Data can be retrieved
from load profile memory for interval by interval analysis of system performance
such as changes in power flow.
Increased capability of pulse output functionality provides for up to 40 pulses per
second of any energy value, thereby increasing pulse resolution. Per phase
measurements coupled with standard energy, demand and instantaneous register
data make the Q1000 meter a complete measurement package for intertie points.

Interruptible
Interruptible rates provide industrial customers a signal to reduce load under a
contracted demand at critical times. To comply with the contract and receive the
rate benefit, the customer must dynamically reduce loading by turning off
unnecessary loads or, more drastically, shutting down production lines.
Overshooting and undershooting the load reduction can be detrimental to both the
utility and the customer. The Q1000’s projected demand quantities and
Schlumberger’s wide range of application software combine to provide for on-site
access to metering data allowing the dynamic ability to be constantly aware of
contract compliance. This information provides for accurate load reduction while
minimizing the impact on the customer’s business. By ensuring proper load
reduction per contract, large penalties may also be avoided.
Additionally, at large installations, multiple delivery points are likely. Using one
Q1000 as a master meter, inputs from other site meters can be combined allowing
for the projected demand to be calculated from a coincident demand for more
accurate load reduction.

Real Time Pricing

There are trends in competitive markets for real time pricing or day before hourly
pricing driving a need for greater communications. Also, in a deregulated market,
enhanced communications capabilities are needed throughout the industrial
segment allowing simultaneous reading by both the utility and customer. Load
profile information can be utilized by both entities to calculate month to date
billing as well as forecast upcoming load impact of the real time pricing structure.
The Q1000 meter meets these needs.

Web-based Information
In today’s fast paced electricity marketplace, loads and generation are often
distributed over non-contiguous areas. SchlumbergerSema and the Q1000 meter
offer exciting web solutions to your data access needs. Consolidate your
generation levels and customer loads on fast, targeted web screens customized to
meet your needs for operation in real-time.

Compensated Billing
System Loss Compensation is a metering scheme that provides for adding (or
subtracting) losses to meter registration when it is more economical to install the
metering equipment at a point that is different from the contractual billing point.
Often called “transformer loss compensation,” it is more accurately called “system
loss compensation” to recognize the inclusion of transmission line and station
losses. These losses can be quite significant.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-13

General Information

When rate schedules and service contracts permit, many metering installations are
placed on the low voltage side of the transformer. A significant savings in the
installed cost of the lower voltage instrument transformers as compared to the
cost of the higher voltage instrument transformers is achieved. Also, the metering
point may be located a considerable distance from the billing point. The associated
transformer, bus, auxiliary power usage, line, and/or conductor losses can be
included in the Q1000 meter readings.
Additionally, phase angle and ratio error corrections associated with the
instrument CT and VT transformers affecting the overall accuracy of the metering
point can also be applied to the meter registers in the Q1000, increasing the
accuracy of the load information by a substantial factor.

Summary Billing
Summary billing is simply adding energy usage together from several users. With
its multiple communications options and ability to totalize many inputs, the Q1000
is ideally suited for this new billing application. One meter can act as the overall
billing meter for a site. This meter will receive inputs from other meters and
provide summarized or totalized usage figures.
For summary billing of sites in different locations, see your SchlumbergerSema
Sales Representative to learn about exciting options for correlating your data
through software retrieval and PC display or web presentation of data.

Conjunctive Billing
As the impact of deregulation continues to affect large industrial accounts, rates
begin to allow a customer to benefit from a diversified demand. When supplied at
multiple delivery points, individually metered demands are likely non-coincident in
time. Providing for inputs from these individual meters, a Q1000 master meter can
calculate a true conjunctive or coincident demand for site billing. This conjunctive
demand provides for both internal additive or subtractive totalization thus
supporting even the most complicated rates.
When metering point locations prohibit the use of a master meter to calculate
conjunctive demand on site, the standard Q1000 provides up to 48 channels of load
profile allowing the easy calculation of conjunctive demand by the reading system
at the end of the billing cycle. With two independent load profiles, the use of one
profile for billing recorded at the billing demand interval length eliminates the
interference with system loading studies that are likely being performed on a fine
time resolution. Time synchronization among these multiple meters can be
provided through the use of a global end-of-interval signal.

1-14 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

Specifications
Operating Conditions
Table 1.2 Meter Operating Conditions

Temperature -40 to + 85 degrees C

Humidity: 0 to 95%, non-condensing
Frequency 57-63 hertz (60 Hz model) or 47-53 hertz (50 Hz model). a
Current Rating ANSI: Class 10 or 20 (Current maximum = 22A)
ANSI: Class 2 (Current maximum = 6A)
IEC: IN = 5A, IMAX = 20A (Current maximum = 22A)
IEC: IN = 1A, IMAX = 6A (Current maximum = 6A)
Power Supply Voltage The power supply can be connected internally to the voltage phases
Input or brought out through an optional external auxiliary AC or DC
power source. b
Socket power supply is single phase. DIN/A-base/Switchboard/
Rackmount power supply is three phase. c
Optional Auxiliary AC or DC supply, 100 to 240V +25%, -20%
Power Supply Inputd
Starting Current 1A Meters—Prior to current reaching 1mA.
10A Meters—Prior to current reaching 5mA.
20A Meters—Prior to current reaching 5mA.

a
All Q1000 meters can be programmed for 60 or 50 Hz, but the meters are calibrated at
the factory at the Frequency selected on the Hardware Specification Form.
b
This connection is made at the factory from a choice made on the Hardware
Specification Form; it cannot be changed in the field.
c
Socket meters without auxiliary power are powered from the A phase voltage terminals.
DIN, A-base, Switchboard, and Rackmount meters have a three-phase power supply.
Without auxiliary power, these meter forms are powered from any of the three phases -
A, B, or C phase voltage terminals.
d
A meter with Aux Power Supply is always powered through this method. A common field
implementation method for improving reliability of the meter’s power supply voltage
source is to use a throwover scheme to use an AC supply to power the meter’s auxiliary
terminals normally and a DC supply to power the meter during outages to the AC source.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-15

General Information

Timekeeping
The QUANTUM Q1000 real time clock is either synchronized to line frequency or
its own crystal. The crystal allows accurate time keeping to be maintained in the
event of an outage or a location with line varying frequency.

Table 1.3 Time Accuracy

Time Accuracy Temperature

+/-0.0022% -10°C to +45°C

+/-0.02% -40°C to +85°C

The time in the meter can be updated via communication ports at any time using a
variety of methods.

Batteries
See "Meters with Batteries" on page 2-2 and "Main Board (Back End)" on page 8-3
for battery option information.

Auxiliary Power and Meter Rated Voltage

The Auxiliary Power option allows the meter to be powered from an external
source and does not rely on line voltage to power the meter. A meter with the
Auxiliary Power option is always powered from the Auxiliary Power terminals1 and
works for both AC and DC; the same hardware is used for both types. The
auxiliary power supply has an auto-ranging input allowing voltages from 100-240 V
AC or DC across the auxiliary terminals.

Table 1.4 Meter Rated Voltage

Meter Rated Voltage Table a

Form 5 [3 phase, 3 wire delta (2 element)] Phase to Phase Voltage

Socket

o 58-69Vb o 100-120V o 220-240V

DIN/DIN Flushmount/A-base/Switchboard/Rackmount

o 58-69Vb o 100-120V o 220-240V

Form 9 [3 phase, 4 wire wye (3 element)] Phase to Neutral Voltage

Socket

o 58-69Vb o 100-120V o 220-240V

DIN/DIN Flushmount/A-base/Switchboard/Rackmount

o 58-69V o 100-120V o 220-240Vb

1. A meter with Aux Power Supply is always powered through this method. A common implementation method is
to use a throwover scheme to use an AC supply normally and a DC supply to power the meter during outages
to the AC source.

1-16 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

a
Meter Rated Voltage is the nominal voltage that is to be measured
by the voltage sensing circuitry within the meter. This choice has no
effect on the meter’s hardware; however, this choice will determine
the voltage that the meter is calibrated at in the factory, and it will
impact the nameplate data.
b
Meters operating within these ranges are only available when
ordered with Auxiliary Power.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-17

General Information

Accuracy
The QUANTUM Q1000 meter Class 10, Class 20, 5(10), 5(20) amp meters meet the
error limits in Table 1.5.

Table 1.5 Q1000 Meter High Current Error Limits

Measured Quantity Phase Angle % Error of Reading

Volts (0.75Vn - 1.15Vn) All Phase Angles ±0.2%
Amps (0.1A - 0.25A) All Phase Angles ±0.4%
Amps (0.25A - 20A) All Phase Angles ±0.2%
Watts (0.05A - 0.25A) 0°, 180° ±0.2%
Watts (0.25A - 20A) 0°, 180° ±0.1%
Watts (0.1A 0.5A) -60°, +60°, -120°, +120° ±0.3%
Watts (0.5A - 20A) -60°, +60°, -120°, +120° ±0.2%
Vars (0.05A - 0.25A) -90°, 90° ±0.2%
Vars (0.25A - 20A) -90°, 90° ±0.1%
Vars (0.1A 0.5A) -30°, +30°, -150°, +150° ±0.3%
Vars (0.5A - 20A) -30°, +30°, -150°, +150° ±0.3%
Q (0.1A - 0.25A) -60°, 120° ±0.4%
Q (0.25A - 20A) -60°, 120° ±0.3%
Q (0.1A 0.5A) -30°, +30°, -150°, +150° ±0.6%
Q (0.5A - 20A) -30°, +30°, -150°, +150° ±0.4%
VA arithmetic (0.1A 0.5A) All Phase Angles ±0.3%
VA arithmetic (0.5A - 20A) All Phase Angles ±0.2%
VA vectorial (0.1A - 0.25A) -30°, +30°, -150°, +150° ±0.4%
-60°, +60°, -120°, +120°
VA vectorial (0.25A - 20A) -30°, +30°, -150°, +150° ±0.3%
-60°, +60°, -120°, +120°

1-18 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

The Q1000 Class 2, 1(6) amp meters meet the error limits in Table 1.6.

Table 1.6 Q1000 Meter Low Current Error Limits

Measured Quantity Phase Angle % Error of Reading

Volts (0.75Vn - 1.15Vn) All Phase Angles ±0.2%
Amps (0.02A - 0.1A) All Phase Angles ±0.4%
Amps (0.1A - 6A) All Phase Angles ±0.2%
Watts (0.01A - 0.02A) 0°, 180° ±0.4%
Watts (0.02A - 0.1A) 0°, 180° ±0.2%
Watts (0.1A - 6A) 0°, 180° ±0.1%
Watts (0.02A - 0.04A) -60°, +60°, -120°, +120° ±0.5%
Watts (0.04A 0.2A) -60°, +60°, -120°, +120° ±0.3%
Watts (0.2A - 6A) -60°, +60°, -120°, +120° ±0.2%
Vars (0.01A - 0.02A) -90°, 90° ±0.4%
Vars (0.02A - 0.1A) -90°, 90° ±0.2%
Vars (0.1A - 6A) -90°, 90° ±0.1%
Vars (0.02A - 0.04A) -30°, +30°, -150°, +150° ±0.5%
Vars (0.04A 0.2A) -30°, +30°, -150°, +150° ±0.3%
Vars (0.2A - 6A) -30°, +30°, -150°, +150° ±0.3%
Q (0.02A - 0.05A) -60°, 120° ±0.4%
Q (0.05A - 6A) -60°, 120° ±0.3%
Q (0.02A - 0.1A) -30°, +30°, -150°, +150° ±0.6%
Q (0.1A - 6A) -30°, +30°, -150°, +150° ±0.4%
VA arithmetic (0.02A - 0.1A) All Phase Angles ±0.3%
VA arithmetic (0.1A - 6A) All Phase Angles ±0.2%
VA vectorial (0.02A - 0.1A) -30°, +30°, -150°, +150° ±0.4%
-60°, +60°, -120°, +120°
VA vectorial (0.1A - 6A) -30°, +30°, -150°, +150° ±0.3%
-60°, +60°, -120°, +120°

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-19

General Information

Reference conditions for Rated Accuracy:

Voltage: Rated Voltage ±3%

Frequency: As Rated (50 or 60 Hz)
Waveform: Distortion Factor less than 3%
Ambient Temperature: 23°C ± 3°C

The above accuracy specifications apply upon completion of 2 hour warmup

period. Prior to completion of the warmup period, the meter conforms to IEC
Publication 60687 Class 0.2 and ANSI C12.20.

Burdens (Per Element)

Table 1.7 DIN, DIN Flushmount, A-base, Switchboard, Rackmount Meter
Burden

Parameter 5D With 5D 9D With 9D

Auxiliary Without Auxiliary Without
Power Auxiliary Power Auxiliary
Power Power

Watts Loss - Auxiliary Supply 9 - 9 -

Watt Loss Potential Circuit A .05 5 .05 3.5

Watt Loss Potential Circuit B - - .05 3.5

Watt Loss Potential Circuit C .05 5 .05 3.5

VA Loss - Auxiliary Supply 10 - 10 -

VA Loss Potential Circuit A .05 6 .05 4

VA Loss Potential Circuit B - - .05 4

VA Loss Potential Circuit C .05 6 .05 4

VA Loss Current Circuit A .05 .05 .05 .05

VA Loss Current Circuit B - - .05 .05

VA Loss Current Circuit C .05 .05 .05 .05

These meter forms have a true polyphase power supply. The power for the meter
is pulled from all of the voltage inputs so that the meter can power from any phase.
These typical values in the above tables are taken when the meter is in single-
phase operation.

1-20 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

Table 1.8 Socket Meter Burden

Parameter 5S With 5S 9S With 9S

Auxiliary Without Auxiliary Without
Power Auxiliary Power Auxiliary
Power Power

Watts Loss - Auxiliary Supply 9 - 9 -

Watt Loss Potential Circuit A .05 9 .05 9

Watt Loss Potential Circuit B - - .05 .05

Watt Loss Potential Circuit C .05 .05 .05 .05

VA Loss - Auxiliary Supply 10 - 10 10

VA Loss Potential Circuit A .05 10 .05 -

VA Loss Potential Circuit B - - .05 .05

VA Loss Potential Circuit C .05 .05 .05 .05

VA Loss Current Circuit A .05 .05 .05 .05

VA Loss Current Circuit B - - .05 .05

VA Loss Current Circuit C .05 .05 .05 .05

For meters without auxiliary power, the meter’s power supply is connected to
phase A in the socket-base version.
The losses listed in Table 1.7 and Table 1.8 are typical values measured with input
voltages of 120V and currents of 5A.
The QUANTUM Q1000 meter is much more than just a kWh type of electronic
metering device. It provides the user with extensive circuitry to measure, store and
display many functions not commonly found on an electronic meter.
Some of these functions include the ability to measure several hundred different
energy quantums. The total number of measurement quantities available in the
Q1000 is in the thousands. In addition to these quantities, the meter also provides
the ability to perform Network Analysis, Harmonic Analysis, Voltage Quality
Analysis, up to 240 channels of Load Profile Recording, Event Recording,
Threshold Alarm Recording, as well as a host of other functions.
The computing power required to calculate these additional quantities is much
higher than a typical electronic meter. In order to provide the additional
computations, the meter design incorporates a pair of microprocessors that
dissipate substantially more power than a typical electronic meter, which in turn
results in an increase in the meter's burden on the voltage source.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-21

General Information

Standards
The QUANTUM Q1000 meter passes the following standards:

Table 1.9 Standards

Standard Description

ANSI C12.1: 1995a Code for Electrical Metering

ANSI C12.20: 1998 Accuracy Class 0.2 and 0.5

ANSI C37.90.1: 1989 Surge Withstand Capability for Protective Relays

ANSI C62.41: 1991 Surge Voltage in Low Voltage Power Circuits

ANSI/UL 50: 1992 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

ASTM B117: 1994 Salt Spray, Fog Testing

ASTM D999: 1991 Vibration Testing of Shipping Containers

FCC Part 15 Conducted and Radiated Emissions

FCC Part 68 REN Telephone Interface

IEC 60687 (1992-06) Active Energy Class 0.2

IEC 61000-4-2 (1995-01) Electrostatic Discharge

IEC 61000-4-4 (1995-01) Electrical Fast Transients

IEC 60068-2-6 (1995-03) Vibration (Sinusoidal)

IEC 60068-2-27 (1987-06) Shock Test

IEC 61268 (1995) Reactive Energy for Class 2.

Industry Canada CS03 Canadian Telephone Interface

NSTA Project 1A: 1990 Pre-shipment Procedures - Drop and Vibration

SLB-QTS 3.2 and 4.1 SchlumbergerSema Qualification Test Specification for Solid
State Metering Products

a
The Q1000 meets ANSI C12.1 with the exception of Section 4.7.2.8 “Meter losses” and Section
4.7.2.13 “Radio frequency conducted and radiated emission”.

1-22 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

Approvals
At the time of publishing, the QUANTUM Q1000 had received the following
approvals:
• California ISO, USA
• New England ISO, USA
• Texas ISO - ERCOT, USA
• Red Eléctrica De España, Spain
• KEMA, Registered Quality B.V. Calibration Laboratory, The Netherlands
• Measurement Canada, Canada
• Comision Federal De Electricidad, Mexico
• Electricité De France, France
• Ontario IMO, Canada
• LAPEM, Mexico
• INTI, Argentina
• Demand Side Solutions, Inc., USA
• IRAM, Argentina
• Subnet Solutions, Inc., Canada

Inputs and Outputs

Almost any quantity, event or value can be assigned to an I/O point. For example a
demand reset or end-of-interval may be assigned to state output, energy may be
assigned to pulses, and instantaneous volts/current to an analog output.

A standard configured Q1000 meter can have up to 64 I/Os. These I/Os are provided on 12
optional I/O modules. One of each type of I/O module may be attached to the meter. Each
module is available in 120v and 240v. Three different I/O configurations are currently available.

Q1000 meters and I/O modules of the three plug and play bindings will appear
nearly identical. For this reason, the specification or part number on each meter
and I/O module is used to identify the binding configuration of the device. On
meters, the specification number appears on the meter nameplate. On I/O modules,
this part number is printed on a label and applied to the top of the I/O module on
older modules (pre-July 2001) and on the front on newer modules.
I/O modules of one LonWorks binding configuration cannot be mixed with I/O
modules or meters of any other LonWorks binding configuration.
QUANTUM Q1000 meters and their I/O modules are currently offered in three
standard plug and play binding configurations. These plug and play bindings allow
up to twelve I/O modules to be connected to one meter. Two or more I/O modules
of the same module number cannot be connected to the same meter. For example,
a LonWorks® network may use one I/O module #1 and one I/O module #2 to total
16 digital state outputs, but two I/O module #1s will not work. All three Plug and
Play Bindings below allow one meter to be configured with up to 64 I/Os. See
Chapter 6 for a graphical representation of these bindings.
A Meter-to-Meter binding is also available.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-23

General Information

Universal Plug and Play Binding

Twelve (12) I/O modules can be used with the Universal Plug and Play Binding. The
following ten are currently available: two digital state output modules, one KYZ
digital pulse output module, one IEC 2-wire KY digital pulse output module, two
analog output modules, two digital pulse input modules, and two digital state input
modules.1

ANSI Plug and Play Binding

The ANSI Plug and Play Binding incorporates all features of the Universal Plug and
Play binding with two exceptions. The IEC 2-wire KY digital pulse output module is
replaced with an additional KYZ digital pulse output module and the IEC 2-wire
KY digital pulse input module is configured as an additional KYZ digital pulse input
module. This configuration allows for a total of eight KYZ digital pulse inputs and
outputs, in addition to the other I/O types.1

IEC Plug and Play Binding

The IEC Plug and Play Binding incorporates all features of the Universal Plug and
Play binding with two exceptions. The KYZ digital pulse output module is replaced
with an additional IEC 2-wire KY digital pulse output module and the KYZ digital
pulse input module is configured as an additional IEC 2-wire KY digital pulse input
module. This configuration allows for a total of eight IEC 2-wire KY digital pulse
inputs and outputs, in addition to the other I/O types.1

Meter-to-Meter Binding
The Meter-to-Meter Binding adds the ability to have two Q1000 meters
communicating directly over the same twisted pair I/O network. Each meter can be
configured to send the other one four energy values without I/O modules. In
addition, each meter also supports 10 I/O modules. The 10 supported I/O modules
in this configuration are: two digital state output modules, one KYZ digital pulse
output module, two analog output modules, one digital pulse input module, and
two digital state input modules.1

I/O Binding Identification

Meter Part Numbers

The part numbers of the meters always follow a predefined pattern:

36 xxx yyyy-000
Determines the physical characteristics of the
xxx meter (i.e., voltage, current rating, form, and
so forth.)
yyyy Signifies the binding of the meter.

1. This binding includes the Analog input module. When this optional hardware is available, it can be added to a
LonWorks network with this binding.

1-24 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

I/O Module Part Numbers

The part numbers of the I/O modules always follow a predefined pattern:

369xxyyyy-000
Determines the physical characteristics of the
xx module (i.e., Digital State Output, Digital
Pulse Input, and so forth.)
yyyy Signifies the binding of the I/O module.

Binding Codes
The I/O binding options and the respective binding codes are:

Binding Option Binding Code

Meter-to-Meter 005A, 005Ba

ANSI Plug and Play 0004

IEC Plug and Play 0003

Universal Plug and Play 0000

a
Meter-to-Meter Binding is one binding. One meter and its 10 I/O modules have
binding 005A; the second meter and its 10 I/O modules have binding 005B.

I/O Module Specifications

Table 1.10 I/O Module Power Supply Specifications

Voltage
120V version AC: 100 to 120 Volts; DC: 125 Volts ±10%
240V Version AC: 200 to 240 Volts

Frequency 50 or 60 Hz ±5 Hz

Temperature -40° to +85°C

Table 1.11 Pulse and State Output Module Specifications

Output Voltage (solid state relay) 120 VAC

170 VDC

Output Current (solid state relay) 100 mA AC

100 mA DC

Output Power (solid state relay) 12 VA AC

17 VA DC

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-25

General Information

Table 1.12 Output Pulse Rate Specifications

Output Pulse Rate: KY Output Pulse Rate: KYZ

Pulse Length Maximum Pulse

Rate

10 ms 40 Hz 40 Hz maximum

20 ms 25 Hz

40 ms 12 Hz

80 ms 6 Hz

Table 1.13 Pulse and State Input Module Specifications

Input Voltage Rating (open circuit) 10 VDC Nominal

Input Current Rating (open circuit) 5 mA DC Nominal

Table 1.14 Input Pulse Rate Specifications

Input Pulse Rate: KY Input Pulse Rate: KYZ

Pulse Length Maximum Pulse

Rate

10 ms 40 Hz 40 Hz maximum

20 ms 25 Hz

40 ms 12 Hz

80 ms 6 Hz

Analog Output

Ranges
Each channel can be configured to output a DC voltage or a DC current, selectable
by hooking up analog wires to the correct terminals and by a DIP switch on a per-
channel basis. Regardless of which configuration you select, you should
disconnect the unused wires from the I/O module terminal strip. The current
terminals are separate from the voltage terminals.

When you select a current output, the voltages on the voltage terminals outputs have undefined
values; you should not connect any device to the voltage terminal outputs to limit susceptibility
to transients.
When you select a voltage output, the current on the current terminals outputs have undefined
values; you should not connect any device to the current terminal outputs to limit susceptibility to
transients. You need to short the unused current terminals to preserve immunity to transient
influences. Shorting tabs are shipped with the module.

1-26 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

The meter sends values between -100% and 100% to the module. These values must
be translated into physical current or voltage on the module's terminals. The
generic (linear) transfer function is shown in Table 1.15.

Table 1.15 Relative Value to Physical Output Translation

Network Variable Value Current or Voltage Output Value

-100% Range’s “Min Value”

0% Range’s “Zero Value”

100 % Range's “Max Value”

When power is not applied to the module, the output goes to a “Zero Value”.
The “Min Value”, “Max Value”, “Zero Value” are described in the next paragraphs.

Current Ranges
These selections are available when the “Current / Voltage” DIP switch is on the
“Current” position. The range selection is on a per-channel basis (2 DIP switches
per channel). You can select between 3 current ranges using the switches on the
module.

Table 1.16 I/O Module Current Ranges

Range ID Min Value Zero Value Max Value

Range 0 0 mA 0 mA 1 mA

Range 1 -1 mA 0 mA 1 mA

Range 2 a 4 mA (0 mA) 12 mA (4 mA) 20 mA (20 mA)

a
The 4 mA to 20 mA range may be used either of these two ways.

Voltage Ranges
These selections are available for analog voltage outputs. The user is able to select
3 voltage ranges with switches on the module.

Table 1.17 I/O Module Voltage Ranges

Range ID Min Value Zero Value Max Value

Range 0 0V 0V 5V

Range 1 0V 0V 10 V

Range 2 -5 V 0V 5V

The I/O Modules receive network variable updates from the Q1000 meter. After the
network variable is received, the analog output (current or voltage) will reach a
stable level in 500 milliseconds or less. This time includes the firmware processing

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-27

General Information

of the network variable value, the correction with calibration parameters, and
communication with the Digital to Analog converter and the converter’s settling
time.
The meter updates each channel of the module every second.

Loss of Communication
When the module loses communications with the meter, the behavior of the analog
output is controlled by two LC (Loss of Communication) switches. Table 1.18
shows the configurations of the switches that are available.

Table 1.18 Loss of Communication Switch Settings

Setting Switches Comments

Zero after 10 seconds OFF, OFF Factory Default

Zero after 20 seconds OFF, ON

Zero after 60 seconds ON, OFF

Maintain Value ON, ON Output stays at last update’s value

In the “ON, ON” position, the module outputs the last value received from the
meter. This value is maintained until the power is removed or communication is re-
established.
In the other positions, the module maintains the value for a predefined time, and
then the value goes to the “Zero Value”.
This behavior is defined for ALL channels by these two switches. However, the
channels are independent and maintain an interval timer (in firmware) to keep
track of the updates. This means that a particular channel may time out and set its
value to the “Zero Value” without affecting the other channels.

Processing
The Q1000 combines the power of two 32-bit microprocessors: one specialized for
digital signal processing (DSP) of the line signal and one specialized in multi-port,
multi-protocol communications. Four megabytes of program memory and around
440 kilobytes of data memory provide room for expansion and storage of large
amounts of data.

Measurements
Active transformer technology combined with a 14-bit analog to digital converter
produces fundamental accuracy of the meter of 0.1% of reading. The meter
samples at 64 samples per line cycle synchronous to the line for a fixed sampling
rate of 3840 samples/sec at 60Hz line frequency. The Q1000’s measurements
include harmonics up to the 32nd. The DSP processor performs a Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT) to provide the user with a Harmonic Analysis of the waveform up
to the 20th harmonic. Voltage Quality (sags, swells, interruptions, and imbalances)
Events can also be captured or used to trigger alarms. 340 quantities are calculated
for use in energy registers and demand values and two independent standard load
profiles enable the user to specify different interval lengths for different uses each
using up to 24 channels.

1-28 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

Communications
The meter includes the choice of standard ANSI or IEC optical ports and two
independent, high-speed RS-232 ports that allow multiple simultaneous
interrogations. In addition, every meter is equipped with a two wire twisted pair
LONWORKs network that can be used to allow a meter to exchange up to 64 inputs
and outputs with other devices. An optional internal 1200 to 33,600 baud modem is
available to provide high speed telephone communications. An optional 4-wire
RS-485 board allows interfacing with RS-485 networks. A new 4 line LCD allows for
simultaneous display of up to four metering quantities or other status messages.
Two infrared LEDs provide fully programmable pulse outputs for meter testing.

Dimensions
Dimension drawings for all QUANTUM Q1000 meter types are shown below.
Dimensions are in inches (and millimeters).

Figure 1.2 Q1000 Product Family

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-29

General Information

Figure 1.3 Meter Dimensions Socket Base Meter

Figure 1.4 Meter Dimensions DIN Base Meter with Short Terminal Cover

1-30 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

12.2
[309.8]

3.9
[99.9]

7.0
[178.0]
Side View

Front View

6.0
[153.9]

Top View

Figure 1.5 Meter Dimensions DIN Base Meter with Extended Terminal Cover

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-31

General Information

Figure 1.6 Meter Dimensions DIN Flushmount Frame

Figure 1.7 Meter Dimensions A-base/Bottom Connected Meter

1-32 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

Rear View Screws Side View

Screws

Rear View

Front View

Meter Panel
Cut Out

Figure 1.8 Meter Dimensions Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Meter

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-33

General Information

8.37 4.13
(212.5) (63)

5.08
(129) 5.08
(105)

Front View 8.03

(204)
Rear View

10.75
(273)
0.13
(3.2)

1.34 1.18
(34) (30)

Side View

Figure 1.9 Meter Dimensions Rackmount Meter Without Case

1-34 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

Front View

Top View

3D View

Figure 1.10 Dimensions Rackmount Case

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-35

General Information

I/O Module Dimensions

DIN Rail Mounting Slot—see

kits for DIN Rail Mounting Kit
information (see Figure 6.7 on
page 6-33)

Figure 1.11 Input/Output Module Dimensions

Weights
Weights for the Q1000 meter are shown in Table 1.19.

Table 1.19 Q1000 Weights

Meter Type Meter Weight Shipping Weighta

Socket Meter 5 lb 5 oz 9 lb 1 oz
DIN Meter 6 lb 8 lb 14 oz
A-base Meter 5 lb 3 oz 8 lb
Switchboard Meter 6 lb 13 oz 10 lb 9 oz
Switchboard Meter in Case 17 lb 8 oz 21 lb 4 oz
Rackmount Meter 6 lb 2 oz 8 lb 15 oz
Rackmount Meter in Case 18 lb 2 oz 23 lb 1 oz
Typical I/O Module 1 lb 10 oz 1 lb 15 oz
a
Complete with box, packing materials, cables, and so forth.

1-36 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

Battery
Data in the memory and the real time clock will be preserved during power
outages by battery back-up. The battery is a 2/3A package, lithium carbon-
monofluoride non-rechargeable 3.0V battery. The battery is designed to maintain
data continuously for a minimum of 180 days under rated operating conditions.
As with any battery technology, high temperatures and high humidity can cause an
increase in internal battery self-discharge and thus reduced battery life. The
battery is designed to maintain data for a minimum of 180 days under rated
operating conditions and has a 10 year shelf life.
The battery voltage is monitored by the Transducer Board. It provides an ongoing
profile of the Battery Voltage and therefore enables the Register Board to judge the
remaining battery life. Due to the battery technology, the battery terminal voltage
alone is not sufficient to measure the battery’s life. To further enhance battery life
estimates, the firmware also includes an accumulated time on battery.

Data Integrity
As a further enhancement of data security, critical metering data is stored in
NOVRAM. The NOVRAM retains its data even in the event of loss of power and the
loss of battery back-up. NOVRAM is an EEPROM in RAM that is written to
automatically at power down.
The meter performs a number of self-diagnostic checks daily to confirm proper
operation. The types of errors are defined as:

Table 1.20 Error Types

Fatal Errors: These errors will cause the meter to discontinue normal operation.a
Non-Fatal Errors: The meter shall display the corresponding error code for each mode in which
non-fatal error codes are chosen for display. During the time the error
condition exists, the meter shall continue to operate. The error message will
be displayed until the error condition is cleared.a
a
PC-PRO+ 98 allows the user to Lock, Scroll, or Ignore fatal and non-fatal errors on the meter’s
display; see Appendix A for descriptions of these error codes.

Grounding
The QUANTUM Q1000 meter complies with many standards (high potential
dielectric, surge withstand capability, fast transient, static discharge, EMI, EMC,
etc.) as specified in the hardware specification section. However, the meter must
be installed in the substation, at the customer metering location, and in the
laboratory during testing by the user in such a way that the protection circuitry and
isolation practices of the meter function as they were intended. The Socket/DIN/A-
base meters have been designed to be ungrounded. The Switchboard and
Rackmount meters have been designed to use external grounding connections.

LONWORKs
LONWORKs technology is a complete platform for implementing control network
systems. These networks consist of intelligent devices or nodes that interact with
their environment, and communicate with one another over a variety of
communications media using a common, message-based control protocol.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-37

General Information

The LONWORKs port allows for a meter to communicate with I/O modules.
Traditional “I/O in the meter” devices would require 124 wires at the meter to
connect all of the I/Os available through the two wires of the LONWORKs network.
In addition to less wiring, the LONWORKs solution is more flexible and easier to
integrate into a system.

Sub-module Type I/O Module

Module Type Description
Part Number Nominal Voltage

I/O Module Specification Number

I/O Module Number
I/O Module Serial Number *Shown here on I/O modules after October 2001;
older I/O modules have the specification number
on a label on the top of the module.

Figure 1.12 Typical Q1000 I/O Module - Front View

Specification Number on Label

Figure 1.13 Typical Q1000 I/O Module - Front and Top View

1-38 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 General Information

System Measurements, Planning, and Controls

The QUANTUM Q1000 can assist utilities in improving the efficiency of the
existing power delivery infrastructure. A small incremental investment for
additional capabilities in a revenue meter can allow a utility to avoid large capital
expenditures through targeting expenditures to areas in greatest need.
The system measurement and controls capability of the QUANTUM Q1000 meter
allows the user to determine, in real time, the existing circuit loading on a per
phase basis as well as control capacitor banks for proper VAR loading. The
planning application features such as load profiling on a per phase basis are
targeted at providing the needed substation loading history information.

Load Balancing and Feeder Monitoring

Bus loading and feeder loading can be monitored on an instantaneous per phase
basis with the QUANTUM Q1000 meter. Per phase power factor information can be
utilized for a power factor correction program. Additional power delivery capacity
can be obtained with the use of per phase voltage, current, watt, VAR, and VA
measurements to more evenly distribute the load.

Transformer Loading
Per-phase information, both recorded and real time can help the utility extend the
life of existing transformers through proper loading. The QUANTUM Q1000 per
phase voltage, current, and energy measurements can be provided in real time to
allow the user to dynamically reallocate loads in order for the system’s
transformers operate at the most efficient loading. The harmonics measurement
capability can also provide information to determine if there is excessive
harmonics present which could overload the power transformer.

SCADA Interfacing
Efficiency of the utility is becoming an important goal today and will remain
important in the future. In regulated and deregulated markets, the Distribution,
Transmission, and Generation companies must have real-time data to maximize
their efficiency. The QUANTUM Q1000, utilizing protocols such as DNP 3.0, IEC
60870-5-102, and MODBUS RTU can provide digital readings directly into SCADA
systems which can be utilized to manage the efficiency of the distribution and
generation systems. For older SCADA systems, where digital inputs are not
available, an output from the meter can be provided to the local RTU to provide
real time voltage, current and power measurements. Information directly from the
meter to the SCADA system proves to be a more accurate and less costly
alternative to the high calibration maintenance of individual transducers.

System Loss Compensating

In order to improve the efficiency of a system, a user must first understand the
problem areas. By strategically locating the QUANTUM Q1000 meters, a user can
measure the actual power transformer and transmission line losses versus
Planning’s calculated losses. Reduction in these losses results in reduced system
loading, increased system power factor and increased revenues since more real
power is able to be delivered to the end customer through the existing electrical
system. In addition, electrical system capital upgrade projects may be postponed
resulting in additional savings.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 1-39

General Information

System Planning
To properly forecast areas of growth for new construction, information needs to be
accurate and up to date. In order to forecast system peak demands, load research
data is used to build models of the system peaks. Hourly load research estimates
for each customer segment are summed to simulate system hourly load shapes,
and statistical models are utilized to project changes in class peak contributions.
The QUANTUM Q1000 is designed for installation at the large industrial customer
and bulk power flow points. By utilizing the load profile capability, historical
studies can be performed and analyzed on these customer classes using actual
data. In addition, long term studies can be performed on transformer efficiency
and loading with per phase recording of voltage and current.

1-40 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Installation

This section provides information and instructions to correctly store, unpack, and
install all versions of the QUANTUM Q1000 meter.

Storage
Store the Q1000 meter in a clean, dry environment. Temperatures should remain
between -40° C and +85° C (-40° F and +185° F). Avoid prolonged storage, for more
than one year, in temperatures above +70° C (+158° F).
If the meter is to be stored, verify that the battery is disconnected and store in a
separate place if storage is to exceed 45 days. Or, if the battery is to be connected
to the meter sealed, but not installed for more than 45 days, then power the meter
through the phase or auxiliary voltage connections to prevent excess drain on the
battery.
Inspect damaged cartons upon receipt and check contents prior to storage.

Unpacking
As with all precision electronic instruments, the Q1000 meter should be handled
with care; however, special handling is unnecessary. A demand reset mechanism is
supplied and is secured with a wire seal. Do not remove the seal until necessary.
The meter should be inspected for damage. If reshipment is necessary, use the
original cardboard box and packing material.

Inspection
Upon receipt of the meter, inspect the meter as follows:
1 Inspect for shipping damage to the cover, demand reset mechanism, ALT and
SCROLL LOCK buttons.
2 Ensure that the RESET mechanism, ALT, and SCROLL LOCK buttons are
secure and operational.
3 Ensure that the optical port is connected to the meter and not damaged.
4 From the meter nameplate, verify that the following information is specified as
per the order:
• Meter type
• Current Class
• Service Type
• Voltage (Range)
• Form

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-1

Installation

• LONWORKS Terminated or Unterminated

• Test Amps
• Frequency
• Serial Number
• Bar Code Data
• Options Installed—Modem or RS-485 board, etc.
5 Ensure that the Communications Splitter Cable is the correct type and that its
connectors are not damaged.
If the meter appears to be defective, or proves to be defective upon installation,
notify your SchlumbergerSema Sales Representative.

Meters with Batteries

The Q1000 battery is available in a single-battery or dual-battery configuration. The
battery is packaged with the meter. To preserve the capacity of the battery, the
battery is not connected to the meter during shipping. Upon receipt of the meter,
take the following steps:
1 Inspect for obvious shipping damage to the battery and the connector.
2 If desired, the battery voltage can be checked prior to installation by placing
the probes of a voltmeter directly onto the soldered terminal connection of the
battery. The measured voltage should be between 2.95 and 3.30 volts. If the
voltage is below 2.95 volts, then replace the battery.
3 Three different battery choices are available depending on the meter’s form.
The first battery is the standard one and normally comes with all meter forms
(see Figure 2.1 and Figure 2.8 through Figure 2.14).
The second battery is optional and is available for the Socket form. It doubles
the life of the standard battery (see Figure 2.2).
The third battery is optional and is available for the DIN and A-base forms.
This battery is installed in the meter’s cover using the battery access hatch and
allows the battery to be replaced without breaking the meter’s seal. The
battery access hatch can also be sealed. This battery is smaller than the
standard, single battery and has one-half the battery life (see Figure 2.6).

Table 2.1 Battery Options

Meter Type Standard Single Dual Battery Meter Cover

Battery Battery

Socket Yes Yes No

DIN Yes No Yes

A-base Yes No Yes

Switchboard Yes No No

Rackmount Yes No No

After you connect the new battery, it is important to set the number of minutes on the battery to
zero. This is done using the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software.

2-2 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Ensure that the voltmeter probes do not short the battery terminals and that the
voltmeter is set to the proper voltage range.

The product you have purchased contains a lithium battery. The battery is recyclable. At the end
of its useful life, under various country, state, and local laws, it may be illegal to dispose of this
battery into the municipal waste system. Check with your local area solid waste officials for
details about recycling options or proper disposal.

Figure 2.1 Standard Single Battery - All Meters

Figure 2.2 Dual Battery Configuration - Socket Meter

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-3

Installation

Figure 2.3 Access Door Battery

Battery #1

Figure 2.4 Dual Socket Meter Battery - Side 1

2-4 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Battery Connection

Battery #2

Figure 2.5 Dual Socket Meter Battery - Side 2

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-5

Installation

Figure 2.6 Battery Access Door - DIN, A-base Meters (Hatch Closed)

Figure 2.7 Battery Access Door - DIN, A-base Meters (Hatch Open)

2-6 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Meter Preparation
Site Selection
The Q1000 meter should be installed and operated in environments where the
meter’s temperature does not exceed -40° C and +85° C (-40° F and +185° F) and
the humidity does not exceed 0-95%, non-condensing. Installation and operation in
moderate temperatures increases reliability and product life. Product reliability
can also be improved by avoiding installation in direct sunlight.

Do not power up the meter without the protective cover in place. High voltages are
present in the meter.

Meter Cover Removal

To gain access to the meter electronics, the meter cover must first be removed.

A-base Meters
1 Remove the meter seal(s) (if installed).
2 Remove the terminal block cover.
3 Slide the cover bracket to the right and pull off. This will expose the meter
cover’s screws.
4 Unscrew the cover screws and remove the cover.
5 To reinstall the cover, reverse the procedure.

Socket Meters
1 Check the bottom of the meter for a meter seal. Remove the seal (if one is
installed).
2 Turn the cover counterclockwise to release the cover from the base.
3 Slowly remove the cover.
4 To reinstall the cover, reverse the procedure.

Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Case Meters

1 Remove the meter seal (if one is installed).
2 Turn the cover retaining screw counterclockwise to release the bottom of the
cover from the base.
3 Lift the cover from the meter.
4 With the cover off, grasp and pull the interconnection paddles from the top and
bottom of the meter case.
5 Release the upper and lower thumb latches; then pull the meter assembly
straight from its case.
6 To reinstall the meter, reverse the procedure.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-7

Installation

DIN Meters
1 Remove the meter seal(s) (if installed).
2 For DIN meters, unscrew the two faceplate screws to release the cover from
the base.
3 To reinstall the cover, reverse the procedure.

Installing the Battery

If the battery is plugged into the meter with the meter power turned off, the meter should be
powered up at least once in the first five minutes to initialize the meter’s battery circuitry. This
initial power up allows the battery input circuitry in the meter to reset itself to a low power state.
Failure to power the meter up will result in the battery remaining in a drain state which will
discharge the battery prematurely.

The battery must be connected to the Main Board before you program the meter.
As part of programming, the number of minutes on the battery must be set to zero.
If this is not done correctly, the meter may show a LO BAT message on the display.
Leave the battery connected as long as the meter remains in service. The battery
provides backup during power outages. Additionally, if auxiliary power is used,
this source (either AC or DC) would maintain power to the whole meter in case of
the loss of voltage from the VTs at the metering point.

Connecting the Standard Single Battery

Removing battery without power (All Models) or before the second new battery is connected
(Rackmount only) will result in loss of meter data including Mass Memory (Load Profile) data.

Socket, A-Base, DIN, Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Models

1 Remove the cover.
2 Snap the battery into the battery housing.
3 Plug the 2-pin connector into the circuit board at the location labeled
“BATTERY”. The connector is keyed to ensure proper orientation of the
connector.

Rackmount Model
1 Remove meter from case.
2 Remove the 12 screws on the sides and back of the meter with a Phillips head
screwdriver.
3 Insert new battery 2-pin connector into the available battery connection at the
rear of the meter. Remove old battery (if present). Snap new battery into
battery location.
4 Reverse steps 1 and 2 to reinstall meter.

2-8 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Battery Connection

Battery Slot

Figure 2.8 Installing the Standard Battery (Socket Meter)

Battery
Connector
routed through
hole here

Battery Slot

Figure 2.9 Installing the Standard Battery (DIN Meter)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-9

Installation

Battery
Connection

Battery
Connector
comes out of
hole here

Figure 2.10 Standard Battery Cable Connection (DIN Meter)

Battery Battery Slot

Connection

Figure 2.11 Installing the Standard Battery (Switchboard Meter)

2-10 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Battery Battery
Connection Slot

Figure 2.12 Installing the Standard Battery (Switchboard Meter)

Battery
Connections

Battery Slot

Figure 2.13 Installing the Standard Battery (Rackmount Meter)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-11

Installation

Battery
Connections

Battery
Slot

Figure 2.14 Installing the Standard Battery (Rackmount Meter)

Two battery connections are provided in the Rackmount meter. Use either connection when
initially installing the battery. When replacing an old battery, be sure to connect the new battery
to the second (unused) connection prior to disconnecting the old battery to ensure meter data is
retained.

PC-PRO+ 98 Programming Software

The Q1000 meter may be programmed using the Windows-based PC-PRO+ 98
software via the modem, optical port, RS-232, or RS-485 serial port connections. Be
sure to install the battery prior to programming the meter and set the number of
minutes on battery to zero during programming.

Before programming or interrogation by the PC can occur, power must be applied to the meter
electronics.

Use an optical probe to communicate through the meter’s optical port.

Select the optical cable type that you will use in the PC-PRO+ 98 software.

Use a null modem cable to communicate through the meter’s RS-232 serial ports.

2-12 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Site Installation
The Q1000 meter is available in five mounting types:
• Socket base
• DIN
• A-base
• Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount case
• Rackmount
Compatible with transformer-rated electromechanical polyphase meters, the
Q1000 meter is available in the configurations detailed in Table 1.4.

Table 2.2 QUANTUM Q1000 Meter Configurations

Current Rating (ANSI) ANSI Class 2, ANSI Class 10, ANSI Class 20 a
Current Rating (IEC) IEC In=1A, Imax = 6A; IEC In=5A, Imax = 10A; IEC In=5A, Imax = 20A a
A-base Forms 5A (3PH, 3W, Delta), 9A (3PH, 4W, Wye)
Socket base Forms 5S (3PH, 3W, Delta), 9S (3PH, 4W, Wye)
Switchboard Forms 5F (3PH, 3W, Delta), 9F (3PH, 4W, Wye)
DIN Forms 5D (3PH, 3W, Delta), 9D (3PH, 4W, Wye)
Rackmount Forms 5R (3PH, 3W, Delta), 9R (3PH, 4W, Wye)

a
The Rackmount meter is available only in the low current and 10A versions.

Auxiliary Power
The Q1000 Socket base, A-base, DIN, and Switchboard case and Rackmount type
meters may be ordered with an auxiliary power supply, supporting AC or DC
voltage inputs. The auxiliary power supply has an autoranging input allowing
nominal voltages from 100 - 240V AC or DC across the terminals. The auxiliary
power input may be connected to a separate source or may be connected to any
phase that is attached to the meter.

Socket Base Meters

A Socket base Q1000 meter is installed in the same manner as a socket base
transformer rated electromechanical polyphase meter. To install, place the meter
in the socket. For internally (non-auxiliary) powered meters, the meter is powered
off phase A.
Socket base meters can be ordered with auxiliary power through a pigtail or
through the fourteenth and fifteenth potential terminal (see Figure 2.16). This
configuration allows for a cleaner installation at sites where the meter socket can
be wired for the AUX connectors.
Those meters ordered with the auxiliary power through the pigtail will have a two
prong plug-in on a cable extending from the meter’s base (see Figure 2.15). This
configuration allows a meter with AUX to be added to an installation where it is
not desirable to re-wire an existing meter socket.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-13

Installation

Figure 2.15 Socket Base Meter with Auxiliary External Power Plug-in

Auxiliary Power
Terminals

Figure 2.16 9S Socket Base Meter with Auxiliary Power Terminals

DIN Meters
The DIN meter may be either powered internally or through a separate auxiliary
input.
If it uses auxiliary power, the fifteenth and seventeenth terminals on the right of
the terminal block are connected to the auxiliary power source. These two
terminals power the meter. Connect the two terminals to an auxiliary AC or DC
circuit or jumper them to any of the phase voltages.

2-14 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

For meters without the AUX power connection, the DIN meter comes with a three
phase power supply. DIN meters with this configuration are automatically
powered from any one of the three phases.

Auxiliary Power Terminals

(15 & 17)

Figure 2.17 DIN Meter with Auxiliary Power Terminals

A-base Meters
An A-base Q1000 meter may be powered internally or through a separate auxiliary
power input. If it uses auxiliary power, the two center terminals on the lower row
of a fifteen terminal base are connected to the auxiliary power source. These two
terminals power the meter. Connect the two terminals to an auxiliary AC or DC
circuit or jumper them to any of the phase voltages.
For meter without the AUX power connection, the A-base meter comes with a
three phase power supply. A-base meters with this configuration are automatically
powered from any one of the three phases.

Auxiliary Power
Terminals

Figure 2.18 A-base Auxiliary Power Terminals

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-15

Installation

Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Case Meters

Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount case Q1000 meters may be powered internally
or through a separate auxiliary power input. If it uses auxiliary power, connect the
auxiliary AC or DC power source to the two auxiliary power terminals (terminals
15 & 16) on the back of the meter case, or jumper them to any of the phase
voltages.
For meter without the AUX power connection, the Switchboard meter comes with
a three phase power supply. Switchboard meters with this configuration are
automatically powered from any one of the three phases.

Auxiliary Power Terminal 15

Auxiliary Power Terminal 16

Figure 2.19 Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Auxiliary Power Terminals

2-16 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Service Connections
The figures in this section show the various Q1000 service connections.

Figure 2.20 Q1000 Socket Meter Form 5 Service Connections

Figure 2.21 Q1000 Socket Meter Form 9 Service Connections

The neutrals of the Socket meter are tied together. The Auxiliary Power supply is isolated from
the A, B, and C phase inputs in the meter. The Auxiliary Power may be fed from any of the phases
if desired.
The user should remember to open the A, B, and C phase inputs to power down the meter. A
meter with Auxiliary Power will also need to have the Auxiliary terminals opened as well to
power down the meter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-17

Installation

Figure 2.22 Q1000 A-base Meter Form 5 Service Connections

Figure 2.23 Q1000 A-base Meter Form 9 Service Connections

2-18 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

The neutrals of the DIN, A-base, Switchboard, and Rackmount meters that are without Auxiliary
Power are tied together. The power supply in these meters is three-phase redundant and will
continue to power the meter with the loss of any phase or loss of any two phases. If the user
desires a meter without the neutrals tied together, then use a meter with Auxiliary Power. The
Auxiliary Power supply is isolated from the A, B, and C phase inputs in the meter. The Auxiliary
Power may be fed from any of the phases if desired.
The user should remember to open the A, B, and C phase inputs to power down the meter. A
meter with Auxiliary Power will also need to have the Auxiliary terminals opened as well to
power down the meter.

Form 5D

Figure 2.24 Q1000 DIN Meter Form 5 Service Connections

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-19

Installation

Figure 2.25 Q1000 DIN Meter Form 9 Service Connections

The neutrals of the DIN, A-base, Switchboard, and Rackmount meters that are without Auxiliary
Power are tied together. The power supply in these meters is three-phase redundant and will
continue to power the meter with the loss of any phase or loss of any two phases. If the user
desires a meter without the neutrals tied together, then use a meter with Auxiliary Power. The
Auxiliary Power supply is isolated from the A, B, and C phase inputs in the meter. The Auxiliary
Power may be fed from any of the phases if desired.
The user should remember to open the A, B, and C phase inputs to power down the meter. A
meter with Auxiliary Power will also need to have the Auxiliary terminals opened as well to
power down the meter.

2-20 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Figure 2.26 Q1000 Switchboard Meter Form 5 Service Connections

Figure 2.27 Q1000 Switchboard Meter Form 9 Service Connections

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-21

Installation

The neutrals of the DIN, A-base, Switchboard, and Rackmount meters that are without Auxiliary
Power are tied together. The power supply in these meters is three-phase redundant and will
continue to power the meter with the loss of any phase or loss of any two phases. If the user
desires a meter without the neutrals tied together, then use a meter with Auxiliary Power. The
Auxiliary Power supply is isolated from the A, B, and C phase inputs in the meter. The Auxiliary
Power may be fed from any of the phases if desired.
The user should remember to open the A, B, and C phase inputs to power down the meter. A
meter with Auxiliary Power will also need to have the Auxiliary terminals opened as well to
power down the meter.

Figure 2.28 Q1000 Rackmount Meter Form 5 Service Connections

2-22 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Figure 2.29 Q1000 Rackmount Meter Form 9 Service Connections

The neutrals of the DIN, A-base, Switchboard, and Rackmount meters that are without Auxiliary
Power are tied together. The power supply in these meters is three-phase redundant and will
continue to power the meter with the loss of any phase or loss of any two phases. If the user
desires a meter without the neutrals tied together, then use a meter with Auxiliary Power. The
Auxiliary Power supply is isolated from the A, B, and C phase inputs in the meter. The Auxiliary
Power may be fed from any of the phases if desired.
The user should remember to open the A, B, and C phase inputs to power down the meter. A
meter with Auxiliary Power will also need to have the Auxiliary terminals opened as well to
power down the meter.

Meter Inputs and Outputs

The optional I/O modules used with the Q1000 meter reside outside of the meter.
This improved design allows for up to 64 I/Os to be connected to the Q1000.
If using more than one module, SchlumbergerSema recommends a UL Level 4, 22
AWG shielded twisted pair of cable to connect the modules together. The
maximum number of modules that can be used with the Q1000 standard “plug and
play” versions is 12.
The modules and meters interface to one another through a LONWORKs network.
To properly install the LONWORKS Network, the physical ends of the network need
to be terminated. The standard maximum distance between terminated ends is 500
feet. The network may be set up to start with the Q1000 meter and end with an I/O
module, where both meter and last I/O module need to be terminated. Or, the
network may also start with an I/O module and end with an I/O module, where the
last modules, beginning and ending, need to be terminated. Refer to Chapter 6,
Communications for more system connection information.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-23

Installation

The standard Q1000 meter comes terminated; however, the meter can be ordered
with or without termination. If you wish to terminate an existing unterminated
meter, you will need to use an external LONWORKS network termination connector.
Also, you will need to specify unterminated on your meter order. Refer to Chapter
10, Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings. For more
information, see Chapter 6, Communications.

DIN Rail
Mounting Groove

Also see Figure 6.7 on

page 6-33 and Figure
1.11 on page 1-36.

Figure 2.30 I/O Module (3 Dimensional View)

2-24 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Mounting
I/O modules mount on a DIN rail. See "Q1000 Optional Kits" on page 10-3 for
information on a kit to mount the modules. Figure 2.31 shows two I/O modules
mounted on a DIN rail.

Figure 2.31 I/O Modules Mounted on DIN Rail

Configuration
Some of the I/O modules have internal jumpers or DIP switches that can be set by
the user. See "Drawings and Schematics" on page 10-5 for more information.

A maximum of three I/O modules can be mounted on a single DIN rail.

Grounding
This section is intended as a reference for the grounding of QUANTUM Q1000
meters. For more information on general grounding practices, refer to the
Installation and Grounding of the QUANTUM Meters: A Suggested Practice
Guide. This publication has extensive information on general grounding
techniques both for the QUANTUM meter as well as other electronic meters.
This section presents grounding and bonding practices for meter enclosures and
various types of circuits.

Meter Enclosure and Meter Enclosure Bonding

It is recommended that the meter be installed in a steel meter enclosure or steel
equipment rack since steel provides both electric and magnetic field protection.
The steel meter enclosure or equipment rack should be properly treated and
coated (painted) so that it does not rust, or the enclosure or rack should be made
of a non-rusting type of steel (though not necessarily stainless steel). An aluminum
enclosure is acceptable, but while it does provide electric protection, it does not
provide the protection against magnetic fields that a steel enclosure provides.
The meter enclosure must be solidly bonded to the grounding system where the
meter is mounted in the substation, power pole, power plant, or industrial plant
site.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-25

Installation

The ground wire from the meter enclosure or equipment rack to the ground grid
should be a large (i.e. #4/0 AWG) stranded wire, and it should connect to the
ground grid with a good connector (i.e. Burndy type clamping connector or
Cadwelded connection). The ground connection should not be simply wrapped
around the ground grid’s conductor.
The bonding wire from the ground grid of the substation to the meter enclosure
should terminate on the outside of the meter enclosure on and in a Burndy type
connector that goes through a hole in the meter enclosure.

Ground here only if CTs and VTs are

not grounded outside in the yard!

Figure 2.32 Meter Enclosure

Equipment Racks
When the Q1000 is installed in an equipment rack within the substation, that rack is
usually already bonded to the station ground grid before the user (Meter
Department personnel) arrives at the site. The grounding of the rack is
accomplished by a copper bus bar that runs through the rack and through all of the
adjacent racks. In this case the “single-point” ground becomes a bolt, or series of
adjacent bolts and screws, tapped into the bus bar running the length of the racks.

Single-Point Ground
Inside the meter enclosure the stud of the Burndy type connector that comes
through the wall of the meter enclosure becomes the “single-point” ground that
will be referred to in the rest of this section.
As will be described below, a series of bonding wires are terminated at this “single-
point”. Therefore, some method of terminating a series of wires needs to be
developed by the user.
Suggestion: Take a strip of copper bus bar about 1 inch wide, about 3/8 inch thick,
and about eight to twelve inches long and drill a big hole in one end for the Burndy
connector. Then drill about a dozen smaller holes in a row (or staggered pattern)
for the bonding wires that will be brought to this bus bar.
The user can develop other similar, acceptable methods of terminating all of the
ground wires to one point.

2-26 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Example Ground Bar

1 inch wide

3/8 inch thick

8 to 12 inches long

Figure 2.33 Example Ground Bar for Meter Cabinet “Single Point” Ground

Connection to Ground Grid Wires

The wire (# 4/]0 AWG, stranded, copper) from the meter enclosure or equipment
rack to the wires of the ground grid should be connected to the wires of the ground
grid with either a Burndy type connector or Cadwelded.
The wire from the meter enclosure or equipment rack should not be connected to
the wires of the ground grid by simply wrapping the wires or strands together.
The wire from the meter enclosure or equipment rack to the ground grid of the
substation (or ground rod) should be connected in the most direct way. Twists,
bends and turns should be avoided or minimized, since these twists, bends and
turns add inductance to the ground wire and add reactive impedance to the
impedance of the ground wire. This reactive impedance resists the flow of the
noise and the surges down the ground line to the ground grid. A large wire with no
twists or bends is used for this connection in order to develop a very, very low
impedance path for noise to go to ground.

Case Ground of the Meter

The Socket, DIN, and A-Base forms of the Q1000 meter have been designed to not
require case grounds for the meter.
The Switchboard and Rackmount forms have a case ground. This point on the
meter should be connected to the “single-point” ground in the meter enclosure or
equipment rack. This wire shall be #10 AWG or larger, stranded, copper and
properly terminated in a spade or ring lug connector.
The wire should be included in the laced bundle of wires (CT, VT, Auxiliary Power)
in the meter enclosure. The grounding wire should not be dangling through the
meter enclosure. Also, this ground wire, including the laced bundle, should be as
near to the metal wall of the meter enclosure or equipment rack as possible.
The case ground terminal should not be used as a Common point for any other
circuits (VT, CT, Auxiliary Power Circuits, telephone protection devices, shield
grounds). These other circuits should have their shields and safety grounds tied
directly to the “single-point” grounding stud in the meter enclosure or equipment
rack.

CT and VT Circuit Grounding

The CT and VT circuits must be grounded at one point, and they must not be
grounded at more than one point. If these circuits are grounded at more than one
point, then ground currents can develop, and the overall metering accuracy of the
installation is compromised. Also the CTs (in the meter and in the yard) may
saturate if there is a DC component in the ground currents.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-27

Installation

Users must choose the point of grounding of the CT and VT circuits based upon
their company’s safety and operating practices. There are two acceptable locations
for the grounds, but the circuits can be grounded at only one point (not both).
Users usually have a tradition of grounding at one location or the other. This
tradition should not be changed lightly, for change now may result in confusion for
meter and wire persons in the future as they have to work on many different
installations of varying practices.

At the CTs and VTs in the Substation Yard

This method will ground the CT and VT circuits in the yard, and so confine fault
currents to the yard. However, this method will present high voltages inside the
meter enclosure (where personnel are likely to be working) during faults and
switching transients.

These high voltages could result in flash-overs between the wires, equipment,
enclosures, and racks.

At the Test Block Below the Meter

This method will ground the CTs and VTs at the test switch in the metering
enclosure or equipment rack. The advantage of this method is that the meter
enclosure and the circuits are at about the same potential during a fault or
switching transient so that if personnel are working on or near the metering
installation at the time of the fault they are not exposed to high voltages and
possibly flash-overs.
This method requires that the CT and VT circuits are brought into the meter
enclosure and control house ungrounded. This connection method permits easier
testing in the meter enclosure or control house, and it permits easier re-wiring of
the metering installation if new equipment is added or existing equipment is
changed.

External Meter Connections

All Q1000 meters come equipped with the following external connectors:
• an optical port
• a 25 pin connector (DB-25)
If a Q1000 meter is ordered with the optional modem board, then an additional
external connector will be provided, phone connector RJ-11 or DB-9, depending on
the meter configuration. The Rackmount and Switchboard meters have a DB-9
connector. The Socket, DIN, and A-base meters have an RJ-11 connector on a cable
coming out of the meter base. The optional internal modem board also has
connections to start a RS-485 4-wire bus plus ground wire that is used for multi-
drop phone line connections. See Chapter 6 for more information.
The Socket base meter can also be ordered with an optional auxiliary AC/DC
power input. This optional feature comes in several versions. Refer to "Auxiliary
Power" on page 2-13 for more information.

2-28 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

If the meter is ordered with the optional RS-485 board (which can be configured to
have a RS-485 port or a RS-232 port), then a 4-wire RS-485 bus plus ground wire is
also available.
The availability and function of each of the above connectors is listed in Table 2.4.

Table 2.3 External Meter Communication Options

Internal Modem

Internal RS-485
Meter External
Compatible?a b c

Compatible?a c d
RS-232 COM 1

RS-232 COM 2

RS-485 4-Wire

Compatible?a c
Optional Ext.

Cable Option
Optical Port

Connection
Meter Type

Aux Power

Available?
Optional

Optional
Modem
Port

Port

Bus
Socket Yes Yes Yes Yes RJ-11 Yes Yes Yes

DIN Yes Yes Yes Yes RJ-11 Yes No Yes

A-base Yes Yes Yes Yes RJ-11 Yes No Yes

Switchboard Yes Yes Yes Yes DB-9 (Female) Yes No Yes

Rackmount Yes Yes Yes Yes DB-9 (Male) Yes No Yes

a
All meters built since December 17, 1999 are internal modem board, internal RS-485 board, and RS-485 bus
compatible. Meters built prior to this date must be returned to the factory for upgrading. Consult your
SchlumbergerSema Sales Representative.
b
The internal modem, when installed, uses the COM 2 port. In this configuration, the RS-232 on COM 2 is not
available.
c
The Q1000 meter has one internal option board slot. Either the modem board or the RS-485 board may be
installed, but not both. The RS-485 bus is used by both the internal modem or the internal RS-485 board. See
Chapter 6 for more information.
d
The RS-485 option board is configurable to be either a RS-485 port or a RS-232 port.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-29

Installation

Table 2.4 External Meter Connections

Connector (with Rate Function

Connection Type)

Optical Port on meter front 19.2 Kbps maximuma Direct connect to PC

DB-25 Connector, DB-25
Connectors on
Communications Splitter
Cable and meter’s DB-25
Connector
115.2 Kbps maximum Direct RS-232 connection to any
hardware utilizing RS-232
communication

I/O Network, Twisted Pair(s) 1.25 Mbps Meter to I/O module(s)

connection for pulse, digital
state, and analog connections

Internal Modem, DB-9 or 1.2 up to 33.6 Kbps Internal modem connection to

RJ-1 Connector phone system wiring

RS-485 bus, Loose Wires (5) 115.2 Kbps maximum Direct RS-485 connection to
from Communications Splitter local RS-485 bus or into master
Cable Q1000 meter with modem
connection to phone system

a
The Q1000 optical port hardware can operate up to 19,200 bps, but some optical port cables
limit communication to 9600 bps.

Optical Port
The optical port is mounted on the meter cover. The optical port is a
communication interface from the meter to a PC. Interface to a PC is accomplished
through an optical probe cable, which plugs into the optical port on one end and
the PC’s serial port on the other end.
All five meter types may be ordered with either the ANSI or IEC optical port.

Figure 2.34 IEC Optical Probe Example Cable and Meter’s Optical Port Connection

2-30 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Figure 2.35 ANSI Optical Probe Example Cable and Meter’s Optical Port Connection

Q1000 Meter DB-25 Connector (Meter Interface Connector)

All Q1000 meters have a DB-25 connector. This connector contains the majority of
the communication wiring. Users can either connect directly to this connector
using a Q1000 Programming Cable, or they can connect to the Communications
Splitter Cable. Both cables are described in the following sections.
The pin-outs for the DB-25 Connector are described in Table 2.5.
On the A-base and DIN meter, this connector is located on the right hand side of
the meter’s base. On the Socket base meter, a cable extends through the base and
terminates in the DB-25 connector. On the Switchboard and Rackmount cases, the
connector is on the back of the meter case.

Table 2.5 Q1000 Meter DB-25 Connector Pin Assignments

Meter Meter Signal Meter Port Signal Description

DB-25 Pin Name Number

1 Shield Modem/RS-485a Common for RS-485 Busb

2 TXD 1 1 Transmitted Data for Port 1

3 RXD 1 1 Received Data for Port 1

4 RTS 1 1 Request To Send for Port 1

5 Not Used

6 Not Used

7 GND 1 1 Signal Ground for Port 1

8 DCD 1 1 Data Carrier Detect for Port 1

9 TXD Y Modem/RS-485 Transmitted Data (Y),

RS-485 4-wire Bus

10 TXD Z Modem/RS-485 Transmitted Data (Z),

RS-485 4-wire Bus

11 RXD B Modem/RS-485 Received Data (B),

RS-485 4-wire Bus

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-31

Installation

Table 2.5 Q1000 Meter DB-25 Connector Pin Assignments

Meter Meter Signal Meter Port Signal Description

DB-25 Pin Name Number

12 DCD 2 2 Data Carrier Detect for Port 2

13 Not Used

14 TXD 2 2 Transmitted Data for Port 2

15 RXD A Modem/RS-485 Received Data (A),

RS-485 4-wire Bus

16 RXD 2 2 Received Data for Port 2

17 Not Used

18 GND 2 2 Signal Ground for Port 2

19 RXD 2 2 Request To Send for Port 2

20 Not Used

21c NN_OUT- I/O I/O Network

22 Not Used

23c NN_OUT+ I/O I/O Network

24c NN_IN- I/O I/O Network

25c NN_IN+ I/O I/O Network

a
The RS-485 bus is used by both the internal modem and/or the internal RS-485 board. See
Chapter 6 for more information.
b
Ground this common wire at only one end. See "Grounding" on page 2-25 and the
publication “Installation and Grounding of the QUANTUM Meters: A Suggested Practice
Guide” for more information.
c
Pins 24 and 25 are used with standard, terminated Q1000 meters. Pins 21, 23, 24 and 25 are
used with unterminated Q1000 meters.

Communications Splitter Cable

There are two versions of the Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable; a version that
was manufactured prior to December 1999, and a version that was manufactured
after that date. The following sections describe these cables.

Post-December 1999 Version Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable

Q1000 meters manufactured after December 17, 1999 can be retrofitted to support
the internal modem option or internal RS-485 option. The "Internal Modem Kit" on
page 2-44 shows the Modem Retrofit Kit part numbers. "Internal RS-485 Kit" on
page 2-55 shows the RS-485 Retrofit Kit part numbers for each meter type. Both
kits may be field-retrofitted in newer meters. Meters built before this date must be
returned to the factory for upgrading—consult your SchlumbergerSema Sales
Representative. To determine if your Q1000 was manufactured before this date,

2-32 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

check the date code on the right side of the meter’s nameplate. Depending on the
type of meter you have, the nameplate will be above or below the TEST switch.
The date code is in the format mmyy.

Standard Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable

DB-25 Connector attaches to

Serial Port 1 Q1000 meter’s DB-25 Connector

Serial Port 2

I/O Pigtail

RS-485 Pigtail

Figure 2.36 Standard Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable, Terminated Meter

The Standard Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable comes in the box with new
meter purchases. It splits the output from the meter’s DB-25 connector into two
RS-232 ports1, RS-485 pigtail and a LonWorks twisted pair pigtail. Use Table 2.6 to
find the appropriate part number.
The two RS-232 ports are identifiable by the color sleeve.

Serial Port 1 has either a Tan or White sleeve and Serial Port 2 has a Black sleeve.

Table 2.6 Standard Q1000 Communication Splitter Cable Part Numbers

Part Number Meter Form Meter Network Internal

Connection Type

441885-001 Socket, DIN, DIN Flushmount, Terminated

A-Base, Rackmount

441885-003 Socket, DIN, DIN Flushmount, Unterminated

A-Base, Rackmount

441885-005 Switchboard Terminated

441885-006 Switchboard Unterminated

1. The serial port 1 sleeve is either white (as shown in Figure 2.36) or tan.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-33

Installation

Table 2.7 Standard Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable Pin Assignments

Meter DB-25 Pin Meter Signal Meter Port Signal Description Splitter
Name Number Cable Pin

RS-232 Port 1
(DB-25) White or Tan Sleeve

2 TXD 1 1 Transmitted Data 2

3 RXD 1 1 Received Data 3

4 RTS 1 1 Request To Send 4

7 GND 1 1 Signal Ground 7

8 DCD 1 1 Data Carrier Detect 8

RS-232 Port 2
(DB-25) Black Sleeve

14 TXD 2 2 Transmitted Data 2

16 RXD 2 2 Received Data 3

19 RTS 2 2 Request To Send 4

18 GND 2 2 Signal Ground 7

12 DCD 2 2 Data Carrier Detect 8

(5-Wire) Black Sleeve

1 SHLD RS-485 Shield Yellow/White

9 TXD Y RS-485 Transmitted Data (Y) White/Brown

10 TXD Z RS-485 Transmitted Data (Z) Brown/White

15 RXD A RS-485 Received Data (A) Red/White

11 RXD B RS-485 Received Data (B) White/Red

Twisted Pair (2 or 4-Wire) Black Sleeve

21a NN_OUT- I/O LonWorks I/O Network Violet

23a NN_OUT+ I/O LonWorks I/O Network Brown

24a NN_IN- I/O LonWorks I/O Network Black/White

25a NN_IN+ I/O LonWorks I/O Network White/Orange

a
Pins 24 and 25 are used with standard, terminated Q1000 meters. Pins 21, 23, 24, and 25 are used with unterminated Q1000
meters.

2-34 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Pre-December 1999 Version Q1000 Communications Splitter Cable (Discontinued)

Serial Port 2

Serial Port 1 I/O Pigtails

Figure 2.37 Pre-December 1999 Communications Splitter Cable, Unterminated Meter

This cable splits the output from the meter interface connector into two RS-232
ports and a LONWORKs twisted pair pigtail. This cable is also available with a
second LONWORKs twisted pair pigtail for unterminated meters. The pin-outs for
this cable are shown in Table 2.8.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-35

Installation

Table 2.8 Pre-December 1999 Communications Splitter Cable Pin Assignments

Meter DB-25 Pin Signal Port Number Description Splitter

Name Cable Pin

RS-232 Port 1
(DB-25) Tan Sleeve

2 TXD1 1 Transmitted Data 2

3 RXD1 1 Received Data 3

4 RTS1 1 Request To Send 4

7 GND1 1 Signal Ground 7

8 DCD1 1 Data Carrier Detect 8

RS-232 Port 2
(DB-25) Black Sleeve

14 TXD2 2 Transmitted Data 2

16 RXD2 2 Received Data 3

19 RTS2 2 Request To Send 4

18 GND2 2 Signal Ground 7

12 DCD2 2 Data Carrier Detect 8

Twisted Pair

21a NN_OUT- I/O LonWorks I/O Network Violet

23a NN_OUT+ I/O LonWorks I/O Network Brown

24a NN_IN- I/O LonWorks I/O Network Black/White

25a NN_IN+ I/O LonWorks I/O Network White/Orange

a
Pins 24 and 25 are used with standard, terminated Q1000 meters. Pins 21, 23, 24, and 25 are used with unterminated Q1000
meters.

Q1000 Programming Cable

The Q1000 meter has been designed to allow out-of-the-box programming. Meters
are shipped in the Customer Default Mode which puts Mini-DLMS protocol on all
three ports.
Use an optical port cable or a null modem cable to log on to the meter’s optical
port or COM port 1, respectively.

I/O Network
The Q1000 meter uses LonWorks to connect the meter to its optional, external I/O
modules. The meter’s DB-25 connector has the LonWorks twisted pair(s). These
wires are split off in the Communication Splitter Cable. See "I/O Network Protocol"
on page 6-34 for more information on LonWorks, I/Os, and connection information.

2-36 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Internal Modem Connection—A-base, DIN, and Socket Base Meters

Meters ordered with an internal modem are shipped with a modem cable
extending from the body of the meter. This cable protrudes from the base of the
Socket Base meters and from the right hand side of the A-base and DIN meters.
This cable is equipped with a RJ-11 connector.
Meters ordered without internal modems may be retrofitted using the Internal
Modem Retrofit Kit. Holes are provided with removable plugs on all meters for this
purpose.

Figure 2.38 Socket Meter with Internal Modem

Figure 2.39 A-base Meter with Internal Modem

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-37

Installation

Internal Modem Connection—Switchboard and Rackmount Meters

The Switchboard and Rackmount meters also have a 9 pin connector that is used
for modem communication. The meter can interface to the phone line through this
connector. The DB-9 connector is mounted on the rear of the switchboard (Figure
2.40) meter cases. Refer to Table 2.9 for pin assignment.

Table 2.9 Switchboard and Rackmount DB-9 Connector

Switchboard Meter Rackmount Meter Phone Line

Connections Connections

Pin Function Pin Function Function

5 Tip 3 Tip Tip

4 Ring 2 Ring Ring

If a modem is ordered with a switchboard or rackmount meter, a DB-9 to RJ-11

cable will be shipped with the meter. This cable has a DB-9 connector on one end
and a RJ-11 connector on the other end. If an internal modem is desired after the
purchase of the meter, this cable will be provided in the Internal Modem Retrofit
Kit.

DB-9 Connector DB-25 Connector

Figure 2.40 Modem Connection on Switchboard/Drawout/Flushmount Meter

2-38 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

DB-9 Connectors

DB-25 Connectors
Figure 2.41 Modem Connection on Rackmount Meter Case (2 meters)

RS-485 Bus
Meters manufactured after December 1999 are “RS-485 bus” ready. The RS-485
4-wire bus may be used in two ways.
1 With an internal RS-485 board, the RS-485 bus is used as a means to make a
direct connection to the meter.
2 With an internal modem board, the RS-485 bus is started on the internal
modem in the Q1000 meter (master meter). With Firmware Version 5.X or
greater, up to 31 Q1000 meters (with RS-485 boards) can be connected
together on the RS-485 bus and share the one phone line attached to the meter
with the internal modem (master meter).

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-39

Installation

Kits
The following sections describe each of the kits available for the Q1000 meter.

DIN Flushmount Adapter Installation Kit

DIN Flushmount adapter (part number K442177-001) may be used with the DIN
meter package.

M6 Nut (large)

M4 Nut (small)

Frame
Washers

Hexagonal Rods

Figure 2.42 DIN Flushmount Adapter Kit

Components
The DIN Flushmount Adapter Kit consists of the following components:

Component Quantity
Frame 1
Hexagon Rod 3
M6 Nut 3
M4 Nut 3
Washer 3

Installation
1 Drill three locating holes and cut out a section on the meter panel where the
meter will mount as shown in Figure 2.44 and Figure 2.46. The diameter of the
holes are 0.55 inches (14mm).
2 Position the frame on the meter panel over the cut out. Line up locating holes
in the meter panel with threaded recesses in the frame.
3 Screw the M6 nut into the half length position of the hexagon rod's M6 thread.
4 Screw the hexagon rod (M6 thread side) onto the frame from the rear of the
meter panel. Do not overtighten, as this may damage the frame (4-6 turns
only).

2-40 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

5 Turn the M6 nut in the counter-clockwise direction until the nut is tight to the
frame.
6 The hexagon rods should now be attached to the frame (90° to meter panel).
7 Install the meter onto the hexagon rods. (Ensure the wiring of the meter has
been completed.)
8 Install the washers onto the hexagon rods' M4 thread side (behind base of
meter) and then install the M4 nuts in the clockwise direction until the nuts
tighten on the meter base. Refer to Figure 2.47 for completed installation
drawings.

Figure 2.43 Flush Mounting Frame

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-41

Installation

Figure 2.44 DIN Meter in Flushmount Kit - Front View

2-42 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Figure 2.45 DIN Meter in Flushmount Kit - Side View

Figure 2.46 Meter Panel Cut Out

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-43

Installation

Figure 2.47 Completed Flush Mounting Installation

Internal Modem Kit

An Internal Modem Kit is available for all five Q1000 meter forms.

Table 2.10 Internal Modem Kit Part Numbers

Meter Type Internal Modem Kit Part

Number

Socket K442123-001

DIN / A-base K442123-002

Switchboard K442123-003

Socket (Canada) K442123-007

DIN / A-base (Canada) K442123-008

Rackmount K442123-009

Rackmount (Canada) K442123-010

2-44 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Switchboard/Rackmount Cable
(DB-9 to RJ-11)

Socket/DIN/A-base Cable

Ribbon Cable

FCC Label

Modem Board
Strain Relief Bushing

Figure 2.48 Internal Modem Kit

The Internal Modem Kit consists of the following components:

Table 2-1 Internal Modem Kit Components

Part Switch- Rack-

Description Socket DIN A-base
Number board mount

Modem Board 442192-001 X X X X X

Ribbon Cable 512736-001 X X X X X

Modem Cable 441342- 006 007 007 - 012

Modem Cable 440927-002 - - - X -

Strain Relief Bushing 511899-002 X X X - -

FCC Label 512411-005 X X X X X

D.O.C. Certification Labela CA34898-003 X X X X X

a
D.O.C. Certification Label included instead of FCC label on Canadian meters.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-45

Installation

Internal Modem Installation in Socket Meter

To install an internal modem, follow these steps:
1 Power down the meter.
2 Remove the meter’s external cover, the two internal cover panels on each side,
the nameplate, the display cover panel, and the display board.

The two internal cover panels are identical except for a small hole near the meter’s front on one
of the panels. This hole provides access to the LCD contrast adjustment potentiometer. When re-
installing the cover panels, be sure to install the panel with the hole on the correct side of the
meter.

3 Slide the internal modem into the available slot on the left side of the meter, as
shown in Figure 2.49.

Option Board
Mounting Slots

Figure 2.49 Modem Module Insertion

2-46 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

RS-485 Bus
Cable

RJ-11 Phone
Line Connection

Ribbon Cable

Figure 2.50 Modem Module Installed

4 With the modem in place, connect the ribbon cable from the connector J3 at
the front of the modem board to the left serial port connector J4 on the
underside of the meter.

When re-installing the cover, be careful not to pinch the modem ribbon cable.

5 Connect the modem cable to the connector J2 at the lower front of the modem
board.
6 (Optional) If a RS-485 bus connection is needed, then connect the RS-485 bus
cable to J4.
7 Replace the Display Board, internal cover panels, nameplate, and external
cover.
Reverse this process to remove the internal modem.

Meter Programming
1 Launch the PC-PRO+ 98 software, and open an existing Q1000 program.
2 In the Communications Settings component of the program, select the number
of rings for Outside Call Windows and Inside Call Windows in the General tab.
3 The internal modem is connected to port 2. Go to the COM Port 2 tab.
4 Select the Mini-DLMS protocol.
5 Choose the baud rate (1200 to 33,600 bps).
6 Select the option for Internal or External Modem Only.
7 Save the program.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-47

Installation

8 From the Communications menu, log on to the meter and initialize the meter
with the program just created. Log off the meter.

The communications settings are re-programmed only after the software logs off from the meter.

Initializing the meter will delete any existing data that the meter has accumulated. It is
recommended that the user save any desired data prior to updating communications
parameters and initializing.

Verifying Operation of Internal Modem

1 Connect the meter’s phone line to an analog phone line or phone line
simulator.
2 Use PC-PRO+ 98 to call the meter. This step will verify that the modem was
properly installed and that the meter was programmed correctly.
3 Refer to Chapter 6, Communications for additional Communications
information.

Internal Modem Installation in DIN/A-base Meter

To install the internal modem, follow these steps:
1 Power down the meter.
2 Remove the meter's external cover, nameplate, and internal cover.

You must disconnect a ribbon cable in the back of the meter before you can remove the internal
cover.

3 Two plastic braces will be standing above the boards and between the boards
and the transformers such that the modem board will be held perpendicular to
the registration board. Gently insert the modem between the two raised plastic
braces. The modem should be inserted with its transistor side facing the
terminal block with the two pin connectors (J3 & J4) on top as shown in Figure
2.51.

2-48 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Braces lock into

these holes

Figure 2.51 DIN/A-base Modem Board Installation

4 Push down gently on the modem until the two braces lock the modem into
position.
5 Connect the gray 10-pin cable from connector (J3) on the top of the modem to
the connector (J2) on the right side of the top board directly behind the
modem, as seen in Figure 2.52.

RJ-11 Phone
Line Connection

Ribbon Cable RS-485 Bus

Cable

Figure 2.52 DIN/A-base Modem J2 and J3 Connector Location

6 Connect the 6-pin cable end to the available connection (J2) on the top of the
modem.
7 (Optional) If a RS-485 bus connection is needed, then connect the RS-485 bus
cable to J4.
8 Securely arrange cables and replace the nameplate and covers.
Reverse this process to remove the modem.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-49

Installation

Internal Modem Installation in Switchboard Meter

To install an internal modem, follow these steps:
1 Power down meter.
2 Remove front cover, paddles, and meter from case.
3 Remove display panel using the clips on both sides. Press clips in to release
panel. The display panel will tilt down toward you, pivoting from the bottom.
4 The modem board fits into the available slot at the top of the meter. Push back
on the modem until the 2 clasps shown in Figure 2.53 lock the modem into
position.

RJ-11 Phone
Line Connection

Ribbon Cable

RS-485 Bus Cable

Figure 2.53 Switchboard Modem Board Installation

5 Connect the gray 10-pin cable from connector (J3, right), on the front of the
modem, to the connector (J2), on the left side of the main board.
6 Connect the 6-pin cable end to the available connection (J2, left) on the front
of the modem.
7 Connect the 5-pin cable end to the available connection (J4, middle) on the
front of the modem.
8 (Optional) If a RS-485 bus connection is needed, then connect the RS-485 bus
cable to J4.

2-50 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

J2

J4
J3

Figure 2.54 Switchboard J2, J3, and J4 Location

9 Securely arrange cables and replace display panel, insert meter back into case,
replace paddles, and replace front cover.

Internal Modem Installation in Rackmount Meter

To install an internal modem, follow these steps:
1 Power down meter.
2 Remove the four screws holding the meter in the case. Pull meter out of case.
3 Remove the 6 screws on the back and 6 screws on the sides of the meter with a
Philip's head screwdriver.
4 Remove the top cover by sliding it back and then lifting it up.
5 Insert the modem board, face forward and connections up, into the available
slot at the front of the meter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-51

Installation

Modem
Slot

Modem
Locks

Figure 2.55 Rackmount Modem Board Placement

6 Slide the black locks back to secure the board

7 Attach the modem's gray 10-pin ribbon cable to connector J3 (right) on the
modem and connect J4 on the left side of the main board.
8 Attach the 6-pin cable end to connector J2 (left) of the modem.
9 (Optional) If a RS-485 bus connection is needed, then connect the RS-485 bus
cable to J4.

2-52 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

RJ-11 Phone Line

Connection

RS-485 Bus Cable

Ribbon Cable

Figure 2.56 Rackmount Modem Board Installed

10 Replace top cover, screws, meter in case, and screws holding meter in case.

Internal Modem and Internal RS-485 Boards in Pre-December 1999 Meters

Q1000 meters manufactured before December 17, 1999 do not support the internal
modem option or internal RS-485 option, but they can be returned to the factory
for upgrading - consult your SchlumbergerSema Sales Representative. To
determine if your Q1000 was manufactured before this date, check the date code
on the right side of the meter’s nameplate. Depending on the type of meter you
have, the nameplate will be above or below the TEST switch. The date code is in
the format mmyy.
Units built after this date can be field retrofitted. The "Internal Modem Kit" on
page 2-44 shows the Modem Retrofit Kit part numbers for each meter type.
"Internal RS-485 Kit" on page 2-55 shows the RS-485 Retrofit Kit part numbers for
each meter type.
Units returned to the factory for upgrading require the following four changes to
be modem compatible:
1 A firmware upgrade to revision 2.06e or above.
2 A Main Board upgrade to revision 19 or above.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-53

Installation

Components L1 and
JP1 should have black
ferrite beads
surrounding the
component per ECN
ELE01206, Board rev.

3 A Power Supply Board upgraded to revision 16 or above.

Component T1 should be
labeled 512743-002 per ECN
ELE01050, Board rev. 15.

4 Replacement of the internal wiring harness to support Modem/RS-485 output

through the DB-25 connector.

2-54 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Internal RS-485 Kit

An Internal RS-485 Kit is available for all five Q1000 meter forms. The same kit
works in all meter forms. The kit part number is K442523-001.
The Internal RS-485 Kit consists of the following components:

Table 2.11 Internal RS-485 Kit

Description Part Number Socket DIN A-base Switch- Rack-

board mount

RS-485 Board 442380-001 X X X X X

Ribbon Cable 512736-001 X X X X X

RS-485 / RS-232 Configuration

The RS-485 board, when installed, uses COM port 2. The RS-485 board can be
configured to support either RS-232 or RS-485 signaling.
With the board configured as an RS-485 connection, an external conversion back
to RS-232 may be required in some cases. See Chapter 6, Communications for
more information.
Once the RS-485 kit is installed, you can either connect using RS-485 or RS-232.
Refer to Figure 2.57 while reading about these options.
• To connect using RS-485, connect to the board through J3. Add a jumper
between pins 5 & 6 of JP1. This is labeled RS485 on the board next to the
jumper. For long connection lengths between RS-485 modules, a jumper may
be added between pins 1 & 2 (XMIT TERM) and pins 3 & 4 (REC TERM) of
JP1. These are the Transmit and Receive outputs of the RS-485. These jumpers
will provide about 120 ohms of termination impedance for these lines. For
short connection, these jumpers may be removed.
• To connect using RS-232, connect to the board through J2. Add a jumper
between pins 7 & 8 of JP1. This is labeled RS232 on the board next to the
jumper.

R14
RS-485

JP1
J3

R13
XMIT TERM 1 2
REC TERM 3 4
RS485 5 6
RS232 7 8
RS-232

J2

J1

Figure 2.57 RS-485 Board Configuration Information

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-55

Installation

Internal RS-485 Board Installation in Socket Meter

To install an internal RS-485 board, follow these steps:
1 Power down the meter.
2 Remove the meter’s external cover, the two internal cover panels on each side,
the nameplate, the display cover panel, and the display board.

The two internal cover panels are identical except for a small hole near the meter’s front on one
of the panels. This hole provides access to the LCD contrast adjustment potentiometer. When re-
installing the cover panels, be sure to install the panel with the hole on the correct side of the
meter.

3 Slide the internal RS-485 board into the available slot on the left side of the
meter, as shown in Figure 2.58.

Figure 2.58 RS-485 Board Insertion

4 With the RS-485 board in place, connect the ribbon cable from the connector
J1 at the front of the RS-485 board.

2-56 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

RS-485 Bus
Cable (shown in
RS-232 position)

Figure 2.59 RS-485 Board Installed

5 Do one of the following:

• To configure the board in the RS-485 mode, connect the RS-485 bus cable
to connector J3 and add a jumper between pins 5 & 6 of JP1.
• To configure the board in the RS-232 mode, connect the RS-485 bus cable
to connector J2 and add a jumper between pins 7 & 8 of JP1.
6 Replace the Display Board, internal cover panels, nameplate, and external
cover.
Reverse this process to remove the RS-485 board.

Meter Programming
1 Launch the PC-PRO+ 98 software, and open an existing Q1000 program.
2 In the Communication Setup component of the program, select the tab that
matches the serial port your RS-485 connection will use.
3 Select the option for Direct Connect.
4 Save the program with a new name.
5 From the Communications menu, log on to the meter and initialize the meter
with the program just created. Log off the meter.

The communications settings are re-programmed only after the software logs off from the meter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-57

Installation

Initializing the meter will delete any existing data that the meter has accumulated. It is
recommended that the user save any desired data prior to updating communications
parameters and initializing.

Verifying Operation of the RS-485 Board

1 Connect the RS-485 connector to the RS-485 bus.
2 Use PC-PRO+ 98 to call the meter. This step will verify that the RS-485 board
was properly installed and that the meter was programmed correctly.
3 Refer to Chapter 6 of this manual for additional Communications information.

Internal RS-485 Board Installation in DIN/A-base Meter

To install the internal RS-485 board, follow these steps:
1 Power down the meter.
2 Remove the meter's external cover, nameplate, and internal cover.

You must disconnect a ribbon cable in the back of the meter before you can remove the internal
cover.

3 Two plastic braces will be standing above the boards and between the boards
and the transformers such that the RS-485 board will be held perpendicular to
the registration board. Gently insert the RS-485 board between the two raised
plastic braces. The RS-485 board should be inserted with its component side
facing the terminal block with the three pin connectors (J1, J2 & J3) on top as
shown in Figure 2.60.

2-58 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Figure 2.60 DIN/A-base RS-485 Board Insertion

4 Push down gently on the RS-485 board until the two braces lock the RS-485
board into position.
5 Connect the gray 10-pin cable from connector (J1) on the top of the RS-485
board to the connector (J2) on the right side of the top board directly behind
the RS-485 board, as seen in Figure 2.61.

RS-485 Bus Cable

(shown in the RS-232
Position)

Figure 2.61 DIN/A-base RS-485 Board J2 and J3 Connector Location

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-59

Installation

6 Do one of the following:

• To configure the board in the RS-485 mode, connect the RS-485 bus cable
to connector J3 and add a jumper between pins 5 & 6 of JP1.
• To configure the board in the RS-232 mode, connect the RS-485 bus cable
to connector J2 and add a jumper between pins 7 & 8 of JP1.
7 Securely arrange cables and replace the nameplate and covers.
Reverse the above process to remove the RS-485 board.

Internal RS-485 Board Installation in Switchboard Meter

To install an RS-485 board, follow these steps:
1 Power down meter.
2 Remove front cover, paddles, and meter from case.
3 Remove display panel using the clips on both sides. Press clips in to release
panel.
4 The RS-485 board fits into the available slot at the top of the meter. Push back
on the RS-485 board until the 2 clasps shown in Figure 2.53 lock the RS-485
board into position.

Figure 2.62 Switchboard RS-485 Board Insertion

5 Connect the gray 10-pin cable from connector (J1, right), on the front of the
RS-485 board, to the connector (J2), on the left side of the main board.
6 Do one of the following:
• To configure the board in the RS-485 mode, connect the RS-485 bus cable
to connector J3 and add a jumper between pins 5 & 6 of JP1.
• To configure the board in the RS-232 mode, connect the RS-485 bus cable
to connector J2 and add a jumper between pins 7 & 8 of JP1.

2-60 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

J3

J2 (Connection shown in RS-232 Position) J1

Figure 2.63 Switchboard J1, J2, and J3 Location

7 Securely arrange cables and replace display panel, insert meter back into case,
replace paddles, and replace front cover.

Internal RS-485 Board Installation in Rackmount Meter

To install an RS-485 board, follow these steps:
1 Power down meter.
2 Remove the 4 screws holding the meter in the case. Pull meter out of case.
3 Remove the 6 screws on the back and 6 screws on the sides of the meter with a
Phillips head screwdriver.
4 Remove the top cover by sliding it back and then lifting it up.
5 Insert the RS-485 board, face forward and connections up, into the available
slot at the front of the meter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-61

Installation

Figure 2.64 Rackmount RS-485 Board Insertion

6 Slide the black locks back to secure the board

7 Attach the RS-485 board’s gray 10-pin ribbon cable to connector J1 (right) on
the RS-485 board.
8 Do one of the following:
• To configure the board in the RS-485 mode, connect the RS-485 bus cable
to connector J3 and add a jumper between pins 5 & 6 of JP1.
• To configure the board in the RS-232 mode, connect the RS-485 bus cable
to connector J2 and add a jumper between pins 7 & 8 of JP1.

2-62 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

RS-485 Bus Cable (shown

in RS-232 Position)

Ribbon Cable

Figure 2.65 Rackmount RS-485 Board Installed

9 Replace top cover, screws, meter in case, and screws holding meter in case.

Board Replacement
The following description applies to all meter versions:
If the Main board, MOV board, or Transducer board on any version of the Q1000
meter needs to be replaced, the meter must be returned to the factory.
These boards would affect calibration data and impact meter accuracy if replaced
with a different board. After one of these boards is replaced, the meter must be
recalibrated; the meter should be returned to the factory.
The following sections describe replacement of the Display board and the Power
Supply board. These boards can be replaced in the field; the must does not need to
be recalibrated after these boards are replaced.

Replacing a Display Board

The following sections describe how to install a Display board in the various Q1000
meter forms.

Socket Meter
To replace a Display board, follow these steps:
1 Power down the meter.
2 Remove the meter’s external cover, the two internal cover panels on each side,
the nameplate, and the display cover panel.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-63

Installation

The two internal cover panels are identical except for a small hole near the meter’s front on one
of the panels. This hole provides access to the LCD contrast adjustment potentiometer. When re-
installing the cover panels, be sure to install the panel with the hole on the correct side of the
meter.

3 The display board is held in place with four plastic clasps, two at the top of the
board and two at the bottom. Firmly pinch one of these clasps and gently raise
that corner of the display board as much possible. Repeat for each of the
remaining clasps until the display board pulls free from the rest of the meter.
4 Align the new display board so that connector J1 on the underside of the
board, seen in Figure 2.66, lines up with connector J7 of the main board and
the four clasps line up with the corresponding holes in the display board.

Figure 2.66 Display Board (Bottom View)

5 Firmly push the new display board straight into the rest of the meter until the
four plastic clasps fasten the board into place, as seen in Figure 2.67.

2-64 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Figure 2.67 Display Board Placement

6 Replace the cover panel over the display board, the two side cover panels, the
nameplate, and the external cover.

Check the nameplate after re-installing. Ensure that the TEST switch has been properly aligned
with the nameplate and is rising through the hole cut for it in the nameplate.

DIN/A-base Meter
To replace a Display board follow these steps:
1 Power down the meter.
2 Remove the meter's external cover and display casing (held in place with four
screws).
3 Detach the cables connecting the display board to the meter body as shown in
Figure 2.68.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-65

Installation

These screws hold Cable connects to

the display board in rest of meter here
place

Figure 2.68 DIN/A-base Display Board Removal

4 The display board is held in place with two screws. With a Philip's head
screwdriver remove the two screws holding the display board to its casing and
gently raise the board.
5 Place the new display board in the casing, pressing firmly on the board until it
sits into the casing, and then replace the two screws.
6 Reconnect the cable to connector J1 (with the red strip towards the top of the
casing) to the display board.
7 Replace the display casing and external cover.

Switchboard Meter
To replace a Display board, follow these steps:
1 Power down meter.
2 Remove front cover, paddles, and meter from case.
3 Remove display panel using the clips on both sides. Press clips in to release
panel. Display panel will tilt down toward you, pivoting from bottom.
4 Detach the cables connecting the display board to the meter body. Remove the
display panel.
5 The display board is held in place by two screws. With a Philip's head
screwdriver remove the two screws holding the display board to its casing (see
Figure 2.69). Pull out on the side of the panel and up on the display board to
remove it from its casing.

2-66 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Screws to be removed

Figure 2.69 Switchboard Display Board Removal

6 Place the new board in the casing by pressing firmly on the board until it sits
into the casing, and then replace the two screws.
7 Reconnect the cables to the new display board. The cable to connector J1
should have the red strip towards the top of the display board.
8 Place meter in case, replace paddles, and replace front cover.

Rackmount Meter
If the Rackmount Display board needs to be replaced, the meter must be returned
to the factory.
Due to decreased internal space, the Rackmount meter is constrained with respect
to field retrofitting. The Rackmount internal component boards are designed not to
be removed unless by the factory. Installation and/or removal of internal boards,
other than an option board (if present), will void the meter's factory warranty.

Replacing a Power Supply Board

The following sections describe how to replace a Power Supply board in the
various Q1000 meter forms.

Socket Meter
To replace the power supply board, follow these steps:
1 Power down the meter.
2 Remove the meter’s external cover, the two internal cover panels on each side,
the nameplate, the display cover panel, and the display board.
3 The power supply board is shown in Figure 2.70.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-67

Installation

Figure 2.70 Power Supply Board Placement

Figure 2.71 Power Supply Board

4 Disconnect the ribbon cable at connector J2 from the transducer board by

gently lifting the tab and pulling the ribbon cable out.
5 Disconnect the connector J1 by firmly pinching the two tabs on the sides of the
connector and pulling away from the power supply board.
6 The power supply board can be removed by pulling the board straight forward
along the plastic tracks holding it in place.
7 Slide the new power supply board into position in the guide tracks.
8 Connect the cable at connector J1, and connect the ribbon cable at J2 of the
new power supply to the transducer board.
9 Replace the display board, the display cover panel, the nameplate, the two
internal cover panels on each side, and the external cover.

2-68 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

DIN/A-base Meter
To replace the power supply board, follow these steps:
1 Power down the meter.
2 Remove the meter's external cover.
3 The rear plastic plate is held in place by two plastic clasps. Firmly pull back
on the clasps and remove the rear plate as seen in Figure 2.72.

Clasps

Figure 2.72 Rear Plate Removal

4 The power supply board is the third one from the top. Detach the two flat,
blue cables connected to the second board as shown in Figure 2.72 by pulling
up on the blue fasteners and pulling out the cables.
5 The board is physically held in place by two plastic clasps on the side of the
meter. Pull up firmly on each clasp and pull out the board.
6 Pull out the board about 1½” and then detach the white power cable on the
underside, and then completely remove the board from the physical meter.
7 Insert the new power supply board shown in Figure 2.73, face down about half
way. Reattach the power cable on the underside and fully insert the new
board. The two plastic clasps on the side should both click when the board is
inserted correctly.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-69

Installation

Figure 2.73 Power Supply Board

8 Reattach the two flat, blue cables and their respective fasteners.
9 Replace the rear plastic panel and the external cover.

Switchboard Meter
To replace a power supply board, follow these steps:
1 Power down meter.
2 Remove front cover, paddles, and meter from case.
3 Remove display panel using the clips on both sides. Press clips in to release
panel.

Disconnecting the battery will cause the meter to lose all stored meter data. Download all
needed meter information prior to disconnecting the battery.

4 Completely remove display panel by detaching all cables connecting display

board to meter body, including battery cable that is connected to the main
board on the left side of the meter.
5 The power supply board is the third from the top. Detach the 2 flat, blue cables
connected to the transducer board (second board) by pulling out on the blue
fasteners and down on the cables.
6 The board is physically held in place be two plastic claps on the sides of the
meter. Pull out firmly on each clasp and pull out the board.
7 Pull the board out about 1½” and then detach the white power cable on the
underside, and then completely remove the board from the meter.

2-70 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Installation

Blue
Fasteners

Power Cable

Figure 2.74 Switchboard Power Supply Board Placement

8 Insert the new power supply board; face down, about half way. Reattach the
power cable on the underside and then fully insert the board. The two plastic
clasps on the side should click when the board is inserted completely.
9 Reattach the two flat, blue cables in their respective fasteners.
10 Reattach the display panel and cables. The cable to connector J1 on the
display board should have the red strip towards the top of the board.
11 Place the meter back in case. Replace paddles and front cover.

Rackmount Meter
If the Rackmount Power Supply board needs to be replaced, the meter must be
returned to the factory.
Due to decreased internal space, the Rackmount meter is constrained with respect
to field retrofitting. The Rackmount internal component boards are designed not to
be removed unless by the factory. Installation and/or removal of internal boards,
other than an option Modem board (if present), will void the meter's factory
warranty.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 2-71

Installation

Installing QUANTUM Q1000 Switchboard Meter at QUANTUM STQ Switchboard Meter

Location
The Q1000 Switchboard meter has been designed for retrofit installation into an
existing QUANTUM STQ switchboard location.
Use the following procedure to upgrade your STQ QUANTUM to a Q1000 meter.
Removing existing QUANTUM STQ meter:
1 Get all information desired from the existing QUANTUM STQ meter.
2 Remove STQ meter cover and set aside. This cover will not be re-used.
3 Remove the two paddles from the meter case.
The meter will now power down.
4 Unlock the two connections (at top and bottom) on the meter cradle.
5 Slide the STQ meter toward you and remove it from the case. Set the meter
aside.
6 Remove the DB-25 cable from the back of the meter case.
7 Verify good current, voltage, and ground connections at the back of the meter
case.
8 Install new Q1000 DB-25 splitter cable to DB-25 connector on back of case.

Installing new QUANTUM Q1000 meter:

9 Verify that the Form (Form 9 [3-phase, 4-wire wye] or Form 5 [3-phase, 3-wire,
delta]) of Q1000 meter is the same as the STQ meter. SchlumbergerSema
recommends that the site’s meter form requirements always match the meter
being installed.
10 Connect meter battery (if not already connected).
11 Slide Q1000 meter into existing STQ case.
12 Lock two connections on meter cradle.
13 Slide the two paddles back into the meter case.
The meter will power up.
14 Install new Q1000 meter cover.
15 Connect:
• communications cables.
• I/O Network wires on splitter cable to installed I/O modules.
• RS-485, RS-232, and/or phone connections.
16 Program meter (if not already programmed.

2-72 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 3 Operating Instructions

This section describes the basic operations of the Q1000 meter. For information on
specific functions or modules, refer to the appropriate section.

Controls and Indicators

Controls and indicators available on the meter face are shown in Figure 3.1 and
Figure 3.2.
• There are three switches accessible from outside of the meter cover. From left
to right on the cover, they are scroll lock, demand reset, and alternate display.
A fourth switch, which places the meter in test mode, is located on the lower
right side of the meter nameplate and can only be accessed with the meter
cover removed.
• The optical port tower is located to the left of the switch assembly. Two types
of optical probes are available: ANSI or IEC.
• Two test LEDs are mounted just above the meter serial number, which is above
the main display. These LEDs may be programmed to pulse for any energy
value. The default values are Varh and Wh. These LEDs can be ordered as
either visible or infrared.
• DIP switches can be accessed with the meter cover removed. They are located
inside the meter, behind the nameplate on the bottom left side.
• A display contrast adjustment screw is located inside a hole near the top of the
left side meter housing (see Figure 3.10). It can be adjusted with a small flat-
head screwdriver (preferably plastic).

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-1

Operating Instructions

Test LEDs

SchlumbergerSema
Serial Number

Month and Year

of Manufacture

Installed
Liquid Crystal
Options
Display (LCD)
Matrix
Internal Option Board Indicator
M = Internal Modem
Meter with Auxiliary Power
R = Internal RS-485 Board
Meter with Optional Internal
Modem Board Test Switch

Optical Communications Alternate

Port (ANSI Type) Display
Scroll Demand
SchlumbergerSema Meter Specification
Lock Reset
Number (partially under Optical Port in this

Figure 3.1 Controls and Indicators, Socket

Test LEDs

SchlumbergerSema
Serial Number
Month and Year of Manufacture
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)

Internal Option Board Indicator

M = Internal Modem
Optical Communications Port
R = Internal RS-485 Board
(IEC Type)
Test Switch

Alternate Display
Installed
Options Demand Reset
Matrix
Scroll Lock

Meter with Auxiliary Power

SchlumbergerSema Meter Specification

Number (partially under Optical Port in
this view)

Figure 3.2 Controls and Indicators, DIN

3-2 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Application of Power/Power-Up Functions

The Q1000 meter is powered in a manner similar to transformer-rated
electromechanical polyphase meters. Refer to Chapter 2, Installation, for proper
connections.
Upon application of power, the Q1000 meter goes through a series of diagnostic
checks, including:
• Shadow RAM
• System RAM check
• EEPROM check
• I/O module(s) (auto-detect)
• Real time clock
• Battery check
• Modem check
• Transducer Board check
• Display Segment check
Shadow, system ram and EEPROM are checksummed on all data blocks. I/O
modules are continually tested for presence and are installed and uninstalled when
a change in status is detected. Modem presence is verified when in self-sensing
mode. Transducer Board presence is verified and data validated via checksum
communication.
Refer to Chapter 9, Testing and Maintenance, for more detailed information on
possible error messages that are displayed.

Do not remove the electronic housing while the meter is powered up. Line-level
voltages are present on some circuit boards. Failure to follow this procedure could
result in serious personal injury or death. The warning label, shown in Figure 3.3,
should always be visible on the electronics housing.

Figure 3.3 Warning Label

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-3

Operating Instructions

Power Down Procedures

The meter is turned off when power is disconnected from the meter electronics.
Power is disconnected by removing the meter from its installation or by a power
outage at its installation.

Normal Turn-off
To manually de-energize all of the meters electronics, remove power from the
meter:
1 For a socket-base version, disconnect A-phase voltage if the meter is not
auxiliary powered, or disconnect the auxiliary voltage supply. If you will be
working inside the meter, also disconnect B- and C-phase voltages.
2 For DIN, A-base, Switchboard, and Rackmount versions, disconnect all three
phases and the auxiliary voltage supply (if present).
The display will go blank when power is removed from the meter electronics. If the
display is not blank, the meter is still powered.

The display might be blank even if power is present. This can happen if the current display list is
empty, the display is between screens, or if the display component of the meter is not active
which is possible in some error conditions.

Power Outage
A power outage occurs whenever line voltage drops below 50 volts or auxiliary
power is removed from the meter for auxiliary powered meters. Upon reception of
the early power fail signal from the power supply monitoring circuit, the metering
firmware:
• completes any critical active task, primarily saving the last piece of data to
battery backed RAM or NOVRAM.
• posts billing registers and other critical data to NOVRAM, This includes any
information that must survive a power down with a low battery.
• sets the real time clock chip for crystal synchronization and low-power mode,
and then goes to reset.
Once power is restored, the processor returns from reset. All meter variables and
processor registers are initialized. Saved registers are restored to RAM and the
actual time is read from the real time clock chip. The meter synchronizes the
change from one second to the next to avoid loss of significant partial seconds due
to the outage. The firmware checks for fatal and nonfatal errors. All time
dependent functions are resynchronized with the current date and time. Any tasks
that were missed due to the outage (self read, season change, DST change) are
performed. Once all power up tasks are completed, the meter begins normal
operation.
During meter component startup, the display shows a segment test with all pixels
in all character positions darkened. When normal operation begins at the end of
power-up, the display shows the protocols enabled in the meter’s configuration of
the optical port and communication ports 1 and 2. Next, the meter starts the
normal mode display list.

3-4 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Cold Load Pickup

Normally, when power is restored to the meter after an outage, a new demand
interval is started and demand calculations begin immediately. The customer can,
however, program the meter to recognize a demand delay or cold load pickup
(CLPU) time, as well as a minimum power outage duration which must occur in
order for the CLPU to be used. If a CLPU is programmed into the meter, the meter
will delay demand calculations for the programmed amount of time. For example,
if a CLPU time of five minutes and a minimum power outage length before CLPU of
30 seconds is programmed into the meter, a power outage of at least 30 seconds
will cause the meter to wait five minutes after power restoration before resuming
demand calculations.

Interval Make-up
Before the end of power-up processing, meter components that store interval data,
including load profile and harmonics, make up any intervals that may have been
missed during the outage, to maintain the normal progression of interval end
times. Intervals inserted for makeup are inserted with zero data and an outage
status if the length of the outage was greater than the programmed component
interval length, or else the intervals are not given a status.
Interval makeup due to outage is done if the end of interval is controlled by the
meter clock. It is also possible for the user to set the intervals to be tied to external
end of interval without backup, in which case there is no make up.

Recovery Power-up
If the battery is removed or its voltage is too low while the meter is not powered,
the contents of battery backed RAM will be invalid on power-up. The meter detects
this condition by checking the validity of stored memory at several locations
during a normal power-up. If more than half of the locations are invalid, the meter
does a recovery power-up instead of the normal power-up procedure.
In recovery power-up, the meter configuration is recovered from Flash, the battery
backed RAM is re-initialized, billing registers are restored from NOVRAM, and the
meter restarts. The result is as if the meter had been re-initialized with its existing
configuration, but billing registers are restored, and the recovery power-up non-
fatal error event will be set.
If one or more of the locations are invalid, but less than half, then the meter will
complete a normal power up. The meter will show a fatal LOBAT error if the
battery’s voltage is low, or it will show a fatal RAMFS error if the battery does not
test low.

Operating Modes
There are two operating modes in the QUANTUM Q1000: normal and test. The
normal mode incorporates two separate display sequences: normal display and
alternate display. The test mode has its own display sequence. Each display
sequence (normal, alternate, and test) may be independently programmed to show
desired billing quantities and informational data. For information on programming
the meter, refer to the PC-PRO+ 98 Online User's Guide.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-5

Operating Instructions

Normal Mode
Once power-up procedures are complete, the QUANTUM Q1000 operates in
normal mode. In this mode, the meter measures instantaneous values, accumulates
energy in the energy registers, performs normal I/O, and carries out all other
programmed tasks. The display scrolls continuously through the normal display
screens. The meter operates in the normal display mode until power is
disconnected, the alternate display sequence is initiated, or test mode is enabled.
A maximum of 34 displayable screens, each of which can include up to 4 lines of
data and/or annunciators, can be viewed in the normal display sequence. A total of
136 register and non-register data parameters can be displayed in this mode. The
status line is optional on each display screen. When enabled in normal display
mode, the letters “NRM” appear on the status line. All programmed registers and
non-register information scroll continuously according to the programmed display
parameters until one of three actions takes place:
• the alternate display switch is depressed
• the test switch is engaged
• the scroll lock switch is depressed

Alternate Display
The alternate mode, or more properly the alternate display, is functionally identical
to the normal display mode. The meter itself still operates in normal mode, but the
display sequence is programmed to show a different set of data screens from those
in the normal display mode. Like in the normal display mode, a maximum of 34
displayable screens with up to 4 lines of data and annunciators can be viewed in
the alternate display mode.
The alternate display mode allows the user to display additional meter information
without affecting normal meter operation.
To switch the meter into the alternate display, press the plunger button to the right
of the demand reset on the face of the meter cover.
The status line is optional on each display screen. When enabled in the alternate
display mode, the letters “ALT” appear on the status line to designate activation of
the alternate display mode. Upon completion of one scroll sequence through the
information to be displayed in the alternate display mode, the meter automatically
returns to the normal display mode.
Depression of the scroll lock button to the left of the demand reset will stop the
scroll sequence until depressed again to continue. The meter will still return to the
normal display mode at the completion of one complete scroll sequence.

Test Mode
The meter can be placed into test mode either manually or through PC-PRO+ 98
software communications. Test mode is a separate operating mode from normal
mode. In test mode, normal billing mode calculations are stopped.
• To perform this function manually, remove the meter cover and slide the test
mode switch on the right side of the faceplate to the ON position. The status
line is optional on each display screen. When enabled in test mode, the letters
“TST” are displayed on the status line.
• To activate the test mode through communications, use PC-PRO+ 98 software
to log on to the meter and select Communications, Change Display Modes.

3-6 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

The meter will show the test mode displays when test mode is activated. The test
mode display sequence can be programmed with up to 15 four-line screens of
information. The meter returns to normal display mode when test mode is
deactivated. If test mode is activated but the test mode display list is empty, the
display screen will remain blank. This condition can be avoided by programming at
least one screen consisting of at least a status line.
When the test mode is activated, all normal mode billing registers and certain
billing registers are preserved in battery-backed RAM until test mode is exited.
Test mode demand registers run in Test mode, but they are discarded upon
returning to Normal mode. Time-of-Use does not operate during test mode.
The user may configure the following functions to operate differently during test
mode in the meter’s PC-PRO+ 98 program:
• Energy collection can be disabled.
• Demand intervals and subintervals can be set to different durations than in
normal mode.
• Global EOI can be enabled or disabled.
• Switches (demand reset, scroll lock, alternate display mode) can be disabled.
• LEDs are configurable to different registers and pulse weights than in normal
mode.
• Load profiles 1 and 2 (24 channels each) can be independently disabled.
• Voltage quality can be disabled.
• Harmonics can be disabled.
• Thresholds can be independently disabled.
• Analog, digital state, and pulse inputs and outputs can each be independently
disabled.
The meter remains in test mode until the switch is moved back to the OFF position
or until a programmed amount of time has passed in test mode. If this time is
exceeded, the meter automatically returns to normal mode, even though the test
mode switch is still ON. The message “FORCING OUT OF TEST MODE” is
displayed on the screen when this change occurs. This action prevents someone
from accidentally leaving a meter in test mode and thus losing billing data for an
extended time.
To reenter test mode:
1 Turn the test switch OFF.
2 Then, turn the test switch back ON.
The meter keeps a running total of the number of times test mode is entered and
the time of the last test mode entry.

Figure 3.4 Test Switch

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-7

Operating Instructions

Remote Test Mode

Test mode can also be entered remotely by sending a command from the
PC-PRO+ 98 programming software. The remote test mode command includes the
number of minutes the meter will be in test mode, which overrides the
programmed setting.
The remote test mode has precedence over the test mode switch. This means that
the test mode command sent over communication takes action regardless of the
state of the test mode switch.

Having a transition from ON to OFF of the test mode switch does not put the meter out of test
mode if a remotely activated test mode is currently in progress. Also, when the remote test mode
time-out expires with the test mode switch ON, the meter exits test mode.

To put the meter back in test mode again:

1 Turn the switch to OFF.
2 Then turn the switch to ON again.

Display
The Q1000 display module coordinates the activity of displaying information on
the LCD screen. The display screen is refreshed every second and serves as the
visual interface to the meter registers and statuses.

Display Lists
The Q1000 meter has three display lists: normal, alternate, and test. The meter uses
the normal display list unless it is switched to another display mode. The meter can
be switched to either of the other display modes at any time. A separate display list
is used for each of the three display modes. If the meter is in test mode, the display
sequence is defined by the test display mode. If the meter is in normal mode, the
display sequence is defined by the normal display mode or alternate display mode.
Only one display mode is active at a time. Each display mode has its own list of
programmed display screens. The display module shows one screen at a time,
scrolling to the next one in the predefined sequence according to the programmed
display ON and display OFF parameters.

Screen Configuration
Each line of the display screen contains one programmable item, for a total of four
lines per screen. Each line can be 16 characters long. The four lines on a particular
screen do not have to correlate in any way to each other; however, for ease of use,
it is recommended that the user put related quantities on the same screen.
There are many types of displayable items, including:
• Energy registers
• Demand registers
• Date/Time of Min./Max. Demand
• Instantaneous registers
• Peak and Minimum Values
• Coincident Values

3-8 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

• Informational items
• Diagnostics
• Harmonic registers
• Voltage Quality registers
• Last Self Read
Numerical values can be displayed in various formats depending on configuration.
For example, units, kilo units, or mega units. Also, fixed decimal point, floating
decimal point, and leading zeros can all be configured on a per-display line basis.
The user can program the behavior that the meter should exhibit for every specific
error condition. The possible actions in order of increasing severity are ignore the
error (don't display its error code), display its error code on the error screen (an
error screen is automatically displayed at the end of each display sequence), or
lock the screen, showing only the error code (don't display anything else).

Display Formats
The Q1000 meter features a versatile four-line by 16 character LCD display. Table
3.1 describes the choices available for formatting each of the four lines of the
display. Note that each line of a particular display may have its own format.

Table 3.1 Display Formats

Format Description

Annunciator Only Display only text in this line. The text is programmed by the user
and can also be a blank line.

Annunciator, Data Display text, programmed by the user, in the first part of the line,
then the register’s value in the last part.

Data Only (1-8 digits) Display 1 to 8 digits of data, programmed by the user, centered on
the line.

Data Only (16 digits) Display 1 to 16 digits of data, programmed by the user,.

ID Code, Data Display a 3 digit ID code programmed by the user, then the register
value.

ID Code, Data, Display a 3 digit ID code programmed by the user, then the
Annunciator register’s value, and then text programmed by the user.

ID Code, Annunciator, Display a 3 digit ID code programmed by the user, then text
Data programmed by the user, and then the register’s value.

ID Code, Annunciator Display a 3 digit ID code programmed by the user and then text
programmed by the user.

Status Line Display symbols representing the current meter status. This
selection can be made for any display line. Selecting the “Status
Line” for a line converts that line to a Status Line.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-9

Operating Instructions

Figure 3.5 shows sample displays.

Analog I/O Display Current Display

Status Line with

Scroll Lock ON in
Normal Mode

Digital State I/O Display Voltage & Status Line Display

Status Line with
Scroll Lock ON in
Normal Mode

Date, Time, Firmware Revision, Pulse I/O Display

Status Line Display

Status Line in
Normal Mode

Power Factor Display Annunciator, Whr, VARhr,

Status Line Display

KYZ and Analog Output Current Display #2

Status Display

Figure 3.5 Example Displays

3-10 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Figure 3.6 shows the status line. To display a status line, it must be explicitly
selected in the meter programming software for each display line on which it is to
appear.

Status Line
->XXX *SDR ABC->

Figure 3.6 Status Line

Following are explanations of the symbols on the status line, going from left to
right.

Table 3.2 Status Line Symbols

Symbol Description

-> Watt load indicator (-- for zero, -> for delivered, <- for received)

XXX Current display mode (NRM=NoRMal, ALT=ALTernate, TST=TeST)

* Port 2 is on-line. This meter’s Port 2 (COM2) is on-line.

+ Port 2 is on-line. Used by a master meter with an internal modem. The “+”
means that this meter is monitoring communications on the Port 2 (COM2)
RS-485 bus passing through its modem board.

S Scroll lock indicator

D Current Time-of-Use day type (0 to number of day types minus 1)

R Current active rate indicator (A-G according to the active rate) a

ABC Indicators for phase voltages being present

-> Var load indicator (-- for zero, -> for delivered, <- for received)

a
The Q1000 meter’s TOU allows overlapping rates. If more than one rate is on,
then the first alpha character will be displayed here. For example, if both Rate B
and Rate F are active, the display status line will show a ‘B’ here.

Messages
There are several messages that are displayed on the bottom line of the meter to
indicate when an end of interval, a demand reset, or a register freeze event occurs.
Other informational messages may also be displayed. These events are enabled or
disabled through the PC-PRO+ 98 software when the user configures the Display
Configuration component by setting the Display Options tab parameters. When
one of these events occurs, the corresponding message flashes on the bottom line
of the display for several seconds, regardless of what mode the meter is currently
displaying.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-11

Operating Instructions

Display Options
The Display Options tab of the Display Configuration component of the
PC-PRO+ 98 software also provides the capability to configure other options, such
as the Date Format, the Display Scroll On Time, the Display Scroll Off Time, and
the Annunciators.

Scroll Lock Switch

The scroll lock switch is a plunger-style button and can always be accessed from
outside the meter. Pushing this switch does not affect the billing quantities in any
way. It is provided to the user for controlling the meter’s display.
When the switch is pressed, the display locks on the current screen. If there is a
status line on this display, the letter “S” appears in the middle, indicating that the
scroll lock is active. Whatever values are displayed on this locked screen will
continue to be updated every second. Pushing the scroll lock button again
terminates the scroll lock, allowing the display sequence to continue to scroll
through the screens.
When the meter display is scroll locked, pressing the Alternate Display button once
will advance the active display mode one screen. The display will remain scroll
locked, but will now show this second screen. Each additional press of the
Alternate Display mode button will advance the display to the next screen, and the
display will remain scroll locked on that screen.
If the scroll lock button has been programmed to be disabled (using the
PC-PRO+ 98 software), the meter will display a message “SCOLL MODE SWITCH
DISABLED” whenever the scroll lock button is pressed.

Demand Reset Switch

The demand reset switch is used to initiate a demand reset. This switch can be
physically locked with a meter seal to prevent manual demand resets. The switch
can also be disabled by the PC-PRO+ 98 software.

The demand reset switch must be turned clockwise approximately ¼ turn before it can be pushed
down.

There are three methods of triggering a demand reset. When the demand reset
switch is pressed, a demand reset is immediately performed. A demand reset can
also be done using the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software communicating directly
with the meter. Finally, a digital state input line can also be programmed to trigger
a demand reset.
The following actions occur with a demand reset:
• “Demand Reset!” is displayed on the screen.
• The demand registers are processed and reset.
• The date and time of last demand reset is updated.
• The number of demand resets is incremented.
• Any other programmed functions, such as a self read, occur.
The meter can be programmed with a demand reset lockout time. This is the
minimum time required to pass between demand resets. If a demand reset is
attempted before this amount of time elapses since the last demand reset, a
message “DmdReset Lockout” is displayed and no demand resets occur.

3-12 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Alternate Display Switch

The alternate display mode switch is a plunger-style button and can always be
accessed from outside the meter. Pushing this switch does not affect the billing
quantities in any way. It is provided for accessing the alternate display list.
When the switch is pressed, the Q1000 switches the display to the alternate display.
While scrolling through data of the alternate display, the letters “ALT” appear on
the status line (if programmed). Upon completion of one scroll sequence through
the information to be displayed in the alternate display list, the meter returns to the
normal display mode.
If the alternate display mode button has been programmed to be disabled, the
meter will display a message “ALT MODE SWITCH DISABLED” whenever the
button is pressed.

Test Mode Switch

The test mode switch is located on the lower right side of the meter nameplate
inside the meter cover and is not accessible from outside the meter. Sliding the test
switch to the ON position activates test mode.
If the test mode button has been programmed to be disabled, the meter will display
a message “TEST MODE SWITCH DISABLED” whenever the button is pressed.

Infrared LEDs
Two infrared LEDs (light emitting diodes) are located near the top of the meter
nameplate. The left one is labeled “VARh” and the right is “WATTh”. These LEDs
are normally configured for varhours and watthours respectively, but can be
programmed to pulse based on any energy value. The Kh value, or energy per
pulse, is also programmable for each LED.
When the meter enters test mode, a different LED configuration is allowed. This
test LED configuration allows the user to redefine both the energy registers
programmed by the LEDs and their respective pulse weights.
The LEDs may be ordered as either infrared or visible light types. The visible light
LED is red.

DIP Switches
A six- position DIP switch is located on the bottom left hand side of the Display
Module. This switch is easily accessed with the meter cover removed, as shown in
Figure 3.7. There is no need to remove the meter side panel housing to access
these switches; they are accessible through the housing. The OFF position of each
switch is away from the front of the meter and away from the DIP switch number.
The ON position is toward the front of the meter and toward the DIP switch
number.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-13

Operating Instructions

OFF

ON

Figure 3.7 Q1000 DIP Switches

The function of each DIP switch is given in the table below. Q1000s are shipped
from the factory with all DIP switches in the OFF position.

Table 3.3 DIP Switch Configuration

DIP Normal Description

Switch Position

1 OFF Reserved for future use.

2 OFF Reserved for future use.

3 OFF Reset programming to factory default. If the meter is turned on with

this switch in the ON position, the meter program resets to the
factory default state.a
Notes:
• Factory default erases all meter data. Prior to using this switch, save
all pertinent data from the meter. See Chapter 6 for a list of factory
default settings.
• If this switch is left ON, every time the meter powers off and on it will
return to the Factory Default state and all meter data and programming
will be lost.

4 OFF Program protect mode. If ON, meter programming is disabled. If OFF,

the meter can be programmed normally.

5 OFF Test mode switch. This duplicates the function of the front-mounted
test switch and is used by the factory.

6 OFF Alternate display switch. This duplicates the function of the front-
mounted alternate display switch and is used by the factory.

a
The I/O network bindings are not affected by this switch; they are maintained.

3-14 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Security Codes
Along with the Program Protect Mode switch (DIP switch 4), the meter security
codes provide protection for meter register and mass memory data. Four levels of
security are inherent in the QUANTUM Q1000 meter. The table below describes the
level of access to the meter provided by each device security code. Once security
codes are programmed and stored in the meter, they are required to logon to the
meter. The user may choose to not use security codes in the meter’s program.

Table 3.4 Q1000 Security Code Levels

Level Access Level Description

Primary Read/Write access All read/write functions are available except the ability
to download new firmware to the meter. New security
codes can be programmed into the meter using this
security code.

Secondary Read-only access plus Read-only access is provided as well as the ability to
selected functions reset Demand Registers, reconfigure communications,
and change the meter’s Display Mode to Alternate.

Tertiary Read-only access Access to the meter is limited to reading information

from the meter. No operation that writes information to
the meter is available.

Firmware Read/Write access Access to the meter is unrestricted. All read/write

Download and firmware functions are available including the ability to
download download new firmware to the meter.

Implementing Security Codes

When a customer file is created, security codes are entered by the software
operator. Each security code may be from 1 to 20 characters long. For example, the
primary code is selected to be ABC and the secondary code is to be 123. When the
software first attempts communication with a meter that has just been delivered
from the factory, the meter has only null security codes. The software downloads
and unlocks the meter with these null security codes. When the meter is initialized,
the software downloads security codes ABC and 123 to the meter.
When unlocking a meter with security codes, the software downloads the primary
code that is in the PC-PRO+ 98 Q1000 Device Security Codes dialog— in this case
ABC. If this code matches the meter primary code, the operator can read and/or
program the meter. If it does not match the primary, but matches the secondary,
123, the operator can only read data from the meter.
For example:
Three PCs are set up to interrogate Q1000 meters. One PC is designated as the
Master PC. The Master PC programs Q1000 meters for installation and interrogates
meters in the field. In this example, the Master PC programs a meter with a
primary security code of Q1K and a secondary security code of 222. The Master PC
can then read data from and reprogram the meter. The remaining two PCs are
configured so that the same customers are in each database, but each PC-PRO+ 98
software is configured with a security code that matches the meter’s secondary
security code only. In this case, the two additional PCs have been given security
code 222. When the two PCs interrogate the meter, the security code they
download provides them with secondary security code privileges only.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-15

Operating Instructions

Figure 3.8 Device Security Codes Dialog

To set up a meter so that the Master PC can perform all meter functions, but any
other PC has limited access, program the meter through the Master PC with a
primary security code, but leave the secondary security code blank. Any PC other
than the Master PC will connect to the meter using a blank security code and
thereby gain secondary access only.

Clearing Security Codes—Customer Default Mode

To clear the existing security codes in the meter; return the meter to the Customer
Default Mode. See "Three Button Reset—Customer Default Mode" on page 3-18.
If security codes are cleared from the meter in this manner, the PC will have no
record of a security code change. The PC will go through the following attempts to
gain access to the meter: (see Figure 3.8)
• If the Options | Default Values | Device Security Codes | Override
Security Code menu option IS NOT checked, PC-PRO+ 98 will:
a Use the security code in the device Primary field.
b Use the security code in the device Previous Security Code field.
c Use all nulls.
• If the Options | Default Values | Device Security Codes | Override
Security Code menu option IS checked, PC-PRO+ 98 will:
a Use the security code entered in the Security Code field on the logon
screen.
b Use the security code in the device Previous Security Code field.
c Use all nulls.

3-16 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Contrast Adjustment
If the LCD display is too light or too dark, it can be adjusted with the display
contrast adjustment screw. The screw is a 10-turn screw; 2 turns are significant in
changing the meter’s contrast.
To access the screw:
1 Remove the meter cover.
The adjustment screw is located inside a small hole near the left front top of
the meter housing. The screw can be adjusted with a small flat-head
screwdriver (preferably plastic).
2 Turn the screw clockwise to increase intensity and counter-clockwise to
decrease intensity.
Figure 3.9 shows the contrast adjustment screw location for the DIN meter;
Figure 3.10 shows the contrast adjustment screw location for the Socket
meter.

Figure 3.9 Contrast Adjustment, DIN Meter

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-17

Operating Instructions

Figure 3.10 Contrast Adjustment, Socket Meter

Also, see Figure 9.1 on Page 9-8 for a picture of the Display Board and display
contrast adjustment potentiometer.

Three Button Reset—Customer Default Mode

The purpose of the three button reset is to allow the customer to reset the meter
configuration to the customer default mode.

A three button reset erases all meter data. Prior to using this reset, be sure to save all pertinent
data from the meter.

To do a three button reset, perform the following steps:

1 Power down the meter.
2 Take the external cover off the meter and move the TEST switch to ON.
3 Replace the cover.
4 Press and hold the ALT and Demand RESET buttons.
5 Power up the meter.
6 Wait several seconds then release ALT and Demand RESET buttons.
7 Power down the meter.
8 Remove the cover.
9 Move the TEST switch to OFF.
10 Replace the cover.
11 Power up the meter.
The display will light up and all three ports (optical, COM1, COM2) will come
up set to DLMS.
A three button reset will erase the customer configuration in the meter and replace
it with the customer default program. See Chapter 6, Communications for a
detailed list of customer default settings.

3-18 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Registers
There are four register types in the Q1000: energy registers, demand registers,
instantaneous registers, and load profile registers. All of these types of registers
measure how much of a quantity has been used by counting the quantity as it is
used.

Figure 3.11 Q1000 Quantities

Q1: Watts Delivered, VARS Delivered

Q2: Watts Received, VARS Delivered
Q3: Watts Received, VARS Received
Q4: Watts Delivered, VARS Received

Watts net = Watts delivered - Watts received

Watts total = Watts delivered + Watts received
VA total = (VA Q1) + (VA Q2) + (VA Q3) + (VA Q4)
VAR net = VARs delivered - VARs received
VAR total = VARs delivered + VARs received

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-19

Operating Instructions

QUANTITY DIRECTION PHASES

Watts
Delivered
Fundamental Watts
Received
SLC Watts
Net
Fundamental SLC Watts
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Vars Delivered Aggregate
Fundamental Vars Received
SLC Vars Net
Fundamental SLC Vars Quadrants

Delivered
Received Phase A
Vectorial VA
Quadrants Phase B
RMS VA
Distortion Phase C
SLC vectorial VA
Unbalance Aggregate
Total

Phase A
Phase B
Volts
Phase C
Aggregate

Phase A
Phase B
Amps Neutral Amps
Phase C
Aggregate

Delivered
Q
Received
SLC Q
Net

Phase A
Phase B
Power Factor
Phase C
Aggregate

Hertz

Phase A
Phase B
Average Power Factor Quadrants 1-4
Phase C
Aggregate

Totalized Quantities

Phase A
THD - ANSI % THD Volts
Phase B
THD - IEC % THD Amps
Phase C

Figure 3.12 Quantity Flow Chart

3-20 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Energy Registers
Energy registers always accumulate. In normal operation, they are never reset to
zero. The Q1000 contains 30 energy registers—a maximum of 24 can be used for
TOU energy measurement. These registers, like all others, are completely
programmable by the user to monitor any energy quantity (or TOU energy
quantity) and are independent from the other registers.
The Q1000 tracks several hundred quantities, and it would be tedious to list them
all. Instead, Table 3.5 describes the quantities available for each type of register.
For example, one of the various available watthour quantities can be accumulated
to an energy register; a block, thermal, or peak demand register; a load profile
channel; and/or an analog output, and pulse output.

Table 3.5 Q1000 Energy Quantities

Measured Quantity Energy Demand Load Analog Pulse

Type Registers Registers Profile Outputs Outputs
Channels

Watthours yes BTP yes yes yes

Varhours yes BTP yes yes yes

VA-hours yes BTP yes yes yes

Volt-hours yes BTP yes yes yes

Amp-hours yes BTP yes yes yes

Q-hours yes BTP yes yes yes

Power Factor (hours) BP yes yes yes

Hertz (hours) yes yes

Average Power Factor

Totalized Values (hours) yes B yes yes yes

Total Harmonic Distortion yes yes

(THD) hours

External Inputs (hours) yes B yes yes yes

Demand Register Calculation Types:

B: Block (and rolling) demand
T: Thermal demand
P: Peak instantaneous demand

In a given row, any value from each column can be combined to form a valid
register. For example, fundamental SLC watthours delivered is one register.
Table 3.6 shows which register types can be used to store each energy type.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-21

Operating Instructions

Table 3.6 Energy Registers (Watthours, Varhours, VAhours, Qhours)

Energy Calculation Phases Directions

Values Types

watthours normal (includes all aggregate net

varhours harmonic content up phase A delivered
to 32nd harmonic) phase B received
phase C quadrants (vars only)
fundamental only SLC (system loss compensation
- aggregate)

VAhours vectorial aggregate delivered

arithmetic (RMS) phase A received
phase B quadrants
phase C total
SLC (vectorial only)
distortion (arithmetic only)
unbalance (arithmetic only)

Qhours normal net

SLC delivered
received

Other registers can be used to make energy-like calculations. These other

registers, traditionally thought of as instantaneous values, just accumulate in an
energy register in the same manner as instantaneous watts are counted to make
watthours. Table 3.7 shows these values and phases.

Table 3.7 Energy Registers (volthours, amphours)

Energy Values Phases

volthours average
amphours phase A
phase B
phase C
neutral (amphours only)

Demand Registers
Demand is the average value of a measured quantity over a specified time. There
are 60 demand registers available in the Q1000; 25 block registers, 10 thermal
registers, and 25 peak registers—a maximum of 24 can be used for TOU demand
measurement. There are three types of demand in the Q1000 meter:
Block Demand—Demand calculations are made at the end of each completed
interval. The user may select up to 25 block demand registers to measure. Block
intervals are enabled when the number of subintervals in the demand interval
length is equal to one. The user may set the interval length and number of
subintervals in both normal and test modes in the PC-PRO+ 98 program.

3-22 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Rolling Demand— Rolling intervals are enabled when the number of subintervals
in the demand interval length is greater than one. A selected number of
subintervals make up the demand interval. At the end of every subinterval, new
demand calculations occur based on the last full demand interval. For example, a
fifteen minute demand interval can consist of three five minute subintervals. Every
five minutes, demand calculations are made based on the previous fifteen minutes
worth of energy accumulation. The user may set the interval length and number of
subintervals in both normal and test modes in the PC-PRO+ 98 program.
Instantaneous Demand—Instantaneous demand is the calculation of a demand
value every second. The user may select up to 25 Instantaneous Demand registers
to measure.
Thermal Demand—Thermal demand simulates the operation of a thermal
demand meter. The user may select up to 10 Thermal Demand registers to
measure.
The demand registers are processed according to the demand type defined in the
meter program. Most demand values are reset at a demand reset, but some provide
other functionality. The type of demand values available are described in the
following sections.

Present Demand
Present demand is the current value of the demand register. For block demand
calculations, the demand register is reset to zero at the beginning of every demand
interval. For rolling demand calculations, the oldest subinterval’s energy is
discarded from the demand calculation at the end of each new subinterval.
Present demand is not affected by a demand reset.

Previous Demand
Previous demand is the demand from the most recently completed demand
interval. When a demand interval ends, the present demand is transferred to the
previous demand. When using rolling demand, this quantity is updated after each
subinterval. For thermal demand types, the previous demand value is equal to the
present demand.

Projected Demand
Projected demand is an estimate of the demand the meter will have accumulated
by the end of the current interval. This value is calculated by dividing the
accumulated energy by the amount of time accumulated in the interval. Projected
demand is updated every second based on the equation variables. Projected
demand is available for block and rolling demand only.

Cumulative Demand
Cumulative demand is the summation of previous peak demands between demand
resets. When a demand reset occurs, the peak demand values are added to the
existing corresponding cumulative demand values, and the sums are saved as the
new cumulative demands. This value will not increase until the next demand reset.
Cumulative demand is available for block, rolling, instantaneous and thermal
demand types.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-23

Operating Instructions

Continuous Cumulative Demand

Continuous cumulative demand is the sum of the previous peak demands
(cumulative demand) and the present peak demand (present demand). A demand
reset will clear the maximum demand value but will not affect the continuous
cumulative demand. Continuous cumulative demand is available for block, rolling,
instantaneous and thermal demand types.

Minimum Demand
Minimum demand is the smallest demand value that has occurred during any
complete demand interval since the last demand reset. At the end of a complete
demand interval, the present demand is compared with the current minimum
demand. If the present demand is less, it is transferred to the minimum demand.
The minimum demand is reset to zero on a demand reset. The date and time of the
minimum demand is also recorded. Minimum demand is available for block,
rolling, instantaneous and thermal demand types.

Maximum Demand
Maximum demand is the largest demand value that has occurred during any
demand interval since the last demand reset. At the end of a demand interval, the
present demand is compared with the current maximum demand. If the present
demand is greater, it is transferred to the maximum demand. The maximum
demand is reset to zero on a demand reset. The date and time of the maximum
demand is also recorded. Maximum demand is available for block, rolling,
instantaneous and thermal demand types.

Load Profile Registers

Load profile registers accumulate energy usage for an interval and then save it in
memory. Each interval in a load profile accumulates over the same period of time.
Later, all the intervals can be uploaded from the meter to get a picture over time of
the energy usage measured by the meter. There are 48 load profile registers, or
channels, available in the two separate standard load profiles (24 channels/
profile). Each load profile is independently programmed for quantities to record,
interval length, outage length, and pulse weights. Eight optional Extended Load
Profiles, each with 24 channels, are also available. Extended Load Profile has
additional capabilities. For more information, see Chapter 4, Standard and
Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event
Summary.

Instantaneous Registers
Instantaneous registers contain quantities that are continuously calculated by the
meter. Unlike the past where the meter program specifies which registers to track,
the Q1000 calculates ALL instantaneous registers every second. All instantaneous
registers are available to be displayed or read through a communications port at
any time.

3-24 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Since there are hundreds of registers that the Q1000 tracks, the complete list will
not be duplicated here. For Watt, VAR, VA, and Q registers, see the preceding
section on Energy Registers and Table 3.6. Volt and Amp registers are listed in
Table 3.7. All energy values given in these two tables are also available as
instantaneous registers.

Non-Register Values
The Q1000 also stores a significant amount of data which is informational in nature
and can be accessed by the user on the meter display and through remote retrieval.
These non-register values are organized under the Display Configuration
component of the Q1000. There are 7 folders under Non-register Values. These
non-register values are listed in the following sections.

Communication Port Information

• Optical Port Baud Rate
• Optical Port Group Address
• Optical Port Meter Address
• Optical Port Online
• Optical Port Protocol
• Optical Port Setup Line #1
• Optical Port Setup Line #2
• Optical Port Setup Line #3
• Serial Port 1 Baud Rate
• Serial Port 1 Group Address
• Serial Port 1 Interrogate Count
• Serial Port 1 Last Interrogate Date
• Serial Port 1 Last Interrogate Time
• Serial Port 1 Meter Address
• Serial Port 1 Online
• Serial Port 1 Protocol
• Serial Port 1 Setup Line #1
• Serial Port 1 Setup Line #2
• Serial Port 1 Setup Line #3
• Serial Port 2 Baud Rate
• Serial Port 2 Group Address
• Serial Port 2 Interrogate Count
• Serial Port 2 Last Interrogate Date
• Serial Port 2 Last Interrogate Time
• Serial Port 2 Meter Address
• Serial Port 2 Online
• Serial Port 2 Protocol
• Serial Port 2 Setup Line #1
• Serial Port 2 Setup Line #2
• Serial Port 2 Setup Line #3

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-25

Operating Instructions

I/O Information
• I/O Analog Input Status
• I/O Analog Output Status
• I/O Pulse Input Status
• I/O Pulse Output Status
• I/O State Input Status
• I/O State Input Status 2
• I/O State Output Status
• I/O State Output Status 2
• KYZ1 Input Pulseweight
• KYZ1 Pulseweight
• KYZ2 Input Pulseweight
• KYZ2 Pulseweight
• KYZ3 Input Pulseweight
• KYZ3 Pulseweight
• KYZ4 Input Pulseweight
• KYZ4 Pulseweight
• KYZ5 Input Pulseweight
• KYZ5 Pulseweight
• KYZ6 Input Pulseweight
• KYZ6 Pulseweight
• KYZ7 Input Pulseweight
• KYZ7 Pulseweight
• KYZ8 Input Pulseweight
• KYZ8 Pulseweight

Meter Status Information

• Battery Voltage
• Calibration Date
• Calibration Time
• Firmware Revision
• Minutes on Battery
• Seconds on Battery
• Segment Test

Metering Point Information

• Alarm Status #1
• Alarm Status #2
• Current Date
• Current Frequency
• Current Time
• Date/Time Alarm Status

3-26 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

• Demand Reset Count

• DS Input Status
• DS Output Status
• Interrogation Count
• Last Interrogate Date
• Last Interrogate Time
• Last Outage Date
• Last Outage Time
• Last Program Date
• Last Program Time
• Last Reset Date
• Last Reset Time
• Last Self Read Date
• Last Self Read Reason
• Last Self Read Time
• Last Test Date
• Last Test Time
• Line Synchronized
• Meter Reset Reason
• Next Self Read Action
• Next Self Read Date
• Next Self Read Time
• Number of Complete Initializations
• Outage Count
• Program Count
• Test Count
• Test Interval Length
• Time Left in CLPU
• Time Rem in Demand Subint

Program Information
• CLPU Time
• CT Ratio
• Custom Ratio
• Demand Reset Lock Out Time
• Display On Time
• Interval Length
• Load Research ID
• Load Research ID2
• Meter ID
• Meter ID2
• Normal Kh
• Normal Kh #2

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-27

Operating Instructions

• Number of Subintervals
• Number of Test Subintervals
• Program ID
• Register fullscale
• Serial Number
• Serial Number 2
• Test Kh
• Test Kh #2
• Thermal Interval Length
• Thermal Test Interval Length
• Transformer Ratio
• VT Ratio

Time-of-Use Information
• Active Rates (A-G)
• Current Day of Week
• Daily Pattern ID
• Holiday ID
• Latent Start Date
• Latent Start Time
• Latent TOU ID
• Latent TOU Name
• Rate A Active
• Rate B Active
• Rate C Active
• Rate D Active
• Rate E Active
• Rate F Active
• Rate G Active
• TOU Expiration Date
• TOU Rate
• TOU Schedule ID
• TOU Schedule Name

User Data Information

• User Data 01
• User Data 02
• User Data 03
• User Data 04
• User Data 05
• User Data 06
• User Data 07

3-28 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

• User Data 08
• User Data 09
• User Data 10
• User Data 11
• User Data 12
• User Data 13
• User Data 14
• User Data 15
• User Data 16
• User Data 17
• User Data 18
• User Data 19
• User Data 20
• User Data 21
• User Data 22
• User Data 23
• User Data 24

Programmable Functions
This section is a comprehensive list of all the programmable functions of the
Q1000 and the parameters that define the operation of these functions. For more
information on the individual parameters listed in each section, see PC-PRO+ 98
help or PC-PRO+ 98 Online Manual.

The information in this section has been revised to reflect changes in version 2.3 of the
PC-PRO+ 98 programming software.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-29

Operating Instructions

Figure 3.13 PC-PRO+ 98 Device Programmer

Device Operation
Table 3.8 describes parameters that define the general operating state of the
Q1000. These parameters are configured in the PC-PRO+ 98 software program.

Table 3.8 Parameters, Device Operation

Parameter Description

Use DST Enables daylight savings time.

Enable Time-of- Enables Time-of-Use.

Use Note: This field is enabled in version 2.3 and above.

3-30 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Table 3.8 Parameters, Device Operation

Parameter Description
Register Fullscale Sets maximum kW delivered (sum of phases A, B, and C). If exceeded, a
diagnostic is triggered.
Register Fullscale is the kilowatt demand value that defines the maximum
rated demand for a particular installation. Valid entries are 0.000001 to
999,999 adjusted in increments of 0.001 kW. If this value is exceeded, a
diagnostic is triggered.
Use the following formula to calculate Register Fullscale:
(V x I x Elements x CTR x VTR) / 1000
where:
V = Maximum voltage
I = Maximum current
Elements = Number of elements
CTR = Current Transformer Ratio
VTR = Voltage Transformer Ratio
Example: [(200 Volts) (10 Amps) (3) (60) (120)] / 1000 = 43,200 KW
This register fullscale value is a special threshold value that monitors Block
Interval Demand kW Delivered only. If the value in this field is exceeded,
the meter records an FS (full scale) diagnostic error which can be displayed.
It retains this error message until non-fatal errors are cleared. If kWd, block
demand is not selected in quantity selections, the value in this field is
ignored. The value monitored is the primary value (see the equation above).

Register Rollover Defines the point (in unit-hours) at which an energy register reaches its
maximum value and rolls over to 0, select from powers of 10.

# of Peaks or Defines the number of demand peaks and minimums to store in memory for
Minimums to demand quantities configured for multiple peaks or minimums. Zero to 5
Store peaks or minimums are allowed.

VA Calculation Selects the method of VA calculation, either arithmetic or vectorial for

for PF default power factor quantities and for average power factor calculation.

Global EOI Selects a source for the global EOI signal, either internal, external, or
Source external with backup.
Note: The External and External With Backup options are currently
disabled.

Interval Length Sets the interval length for the global End Of Interval source. Two seconds
up to 60 minutes is allowed.

Grace Period for Available if Global EOI Source is set to external with backup. This is the
EOI extra time, beyond the nominal interval time, that the meter waits for an
external EOI signal before initiating one itself. If the Grace Period expires
without an external EOI, the interval information that was saved at the
expected EOI time is used.
Note: This field is currently disabled.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-31

Operating Instructions

Time-of-Use
Table 3.9 describes parameters that define the Q1000 Time of Use options. These
parameters are configured in the PC-PRO+ 98 software program.

Table 3.9 Parameters, Time-of-Use

Parameter Description

TOU Selection Tab

Current TOU The name of the Current TOU Schedule that is being used for the program.
Schedule Name The Schedule is created in the TOU calendar application.

Current Schedule Displays the size of the Current TOU Schedule in bytes. You cannot edit this
Size field.

Percent of The percentage of the Current TOU Schedule size that you want to allocate
Current Schedule for Latent TOU Schedule Reconfigurations in the future.
Size Latent schedules are added later after initial TOU meter initialization.

Latent Schedule Displays the size of the Latent TOU Schedule allocation in bytes.
Size

Event Overrides Tab

Add Adds override events. For each event, you can select an override pattern if
you want the event to trigger a daily pattern and/or override rate that you
want to go into effect when the event occurs. You can make the override
rate exclusive. Making a rate exclusive turns all other rates off when this
event occurs.

Delete Deletes the selected override event.

Move Up / Down Moves the selected override event up or down in the list of events. Events
at top take priority over lower events.

Quantity Selections

Energy
The meter may be configured with up to 30 energy registers, each configured with
the parameters shown in Table 3.10.

Table 3.10 Quantity Selections

Parameter Description

Quantity Sets the quantity that should be accumulated in the energy register.

Multiplier Selects the multiplier to use for this quantity. The multiplier can be None
(1.0), CT, VT, CT X VT, or a custom multipliera.

Use TOU Enables accumulation in Time-of-Use rates, Up to 24 energy registers can use
TOU.

a
The values for the CT, VT, and Custom multipliers are set in the Device Multipliers component.

3-32 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Demand
The meter may be configured with up to 60 demand registers, including up to 25
block interval demand registers, 25 instantaneous demand registers, and 10
thermal demand registers. Each demand register is configured as shown in Table .

Parameters, Demand Configuration

Parameter Description

Quantity Sets the quantity that should be summarized in the demand summary.

Multiplier Selects the multiplier to use for this quantity. The multiplier can be None
(1.0), CT, VT, CT X VT, or a custom multipliera.

Demand Type Selects block interval, peak, instantaneous, or thermal for the type of
demand calculation.

Enable TOU Enables a separate demand summary for each Time-of-Use rate, Up to 24
demand registers can use TOU.

a
The values for the CT, VT, and Custom multipliers are set in the Device Multipliers component.

Register Options
Use the appropriate tabs on this dialog to configure registers to record demand
data. You can configure the register options for Block/Rolling Demands, Thermal
Demands, Multiple Peaks, and Instantaneous Demands.

For Thermal demand and Instantaneous Peak Demand, there is no difference between present,
previous, and projected demand. For Block Demand, there are three different demand values
available.

Parameters, Register Options Configuration

Dialog Tab Description

Block/Rolling Demand based on user-defined interval lengths. The items in the Quantity
Demands list are based on your selection of Block/Rolling Demand quantities in the
Quantity Wizard. The demand is simply the total energy accumulated during
the interval divided by the length of the interval. This includes rolling
demand intervals. You can select up to three coincident quantities you want
to combine with each block/rolling demand quantity you select. You can also
edit the coincident quantities. For block interval demand, demand
calculations are made at the end of each completed interval. For rolling
interval demand, a selected number of subintervals make up the demand
interval. At the end of every subinterval, new demand calculations occur
based on the last full demand interval. For example, a fifteen minute
demand interval can consist of three five minute subintervals. Every five
minutes, demand calculations are made based on the previous fifteen
minutes worth of energy accumulation.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-33

Operating Instructions

Parameters, Register Options Configuration

Dialog Tab Description

Thermal The response time of the demand value that simulates legacy demand
Demands recorders. The items in the Quantity list are based on your selection of
Thermal Demand quantities in the Quantity Wizard . Thermal demand
calculation is approximated exponentially. You can select up to three
coincident quantities you want to combine with each thermal demand
quantity you select. You can edit the coincident quantities. Thermal demand
intervals simulate the operation of a thermal demand meter in accumulating
energy.

Multiple Peaks Use this tab to select up to 6 quantities (in any combination of Minimum or
Peaks) for which you want to assign registers to record multiple peaks,
minimum values, or both.
Note: The hardware for analog inputs is not currently available.

Instantaneous Demand based on the most recent instantaneous data. The items in the
Demands Quantity list are based on your selection of Instantaneous Peak Demand
quantities in the Quantity Wizard. The metering process samples voltage
and current waveforms for 50 or 60 cycles, depending on your system. At the
end of the sampling cycle, the W, VAR, and accumulators are processed and
converted into energy seconds. If selected in the Normal or Alternate mode
sequences, any of these parameters are converted into kW, kVAR, and kVA
demand values. These readings are the instantaneous demand values
determined in the preceding second. You can select up to three coincident
quantities you want to combine with each instantaneous peak demand
quantity you select. You can edit the coincident quantities.

Communications Setup
You configure the meter’s ports using the Communications Setup component.
Communications Setup involves completing several dialogs to define how the
meter’s ports will be used. The number of dialogs is determined by the selections
you make on the first four dialogs. The dialogs are described in Table 3.11.

Table 3.11 Communication Setup Dialog Tabs

Dialog Tab Description

General Define modem answer delays for Mini-DLMS ports inside and outside call
windows.
Note: Mini-DLMS must be used on at least one port.

Optical Port Select the protocol and communication parameters for the optical port.

Serial Port 1 Select the protocol and communication parameters for serial port 1.

Serial Port 2 Select the protocol and communication parameters for serial port 2.
Note: If a Q1000 meter has an optional internal modem board, the internal
modem board connections are enabled and serial port two is disabled. The
RS-485 board also uses port 2.

3-34 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Table 3.11 Communication Setup Dialog Tabs

Dialog Tab Description

Advanced If you select an advanced protocol for one of the ports, then the Advanced
Protocols Protocols tab appears. Currently the Advanced Protocols include DNP 3.0,
IEC 60870-5-102, IEC 60870-5-102 Plus, and MODBUS RTU. Select the
required Advanced Protocol configuration file(s) for each port by clicking
Browse and then selecting the file(s)a.

Time If you select Time Synchronization for one of the Mini-DLMS ports, then the
Synchronization Time Synchronization tab appears. You can configure the Q1000 meter for
automatic time synchronization to a GPS (Global Positioning System) device
or a GPS message from a non-GPS device. Both methods can be
implemented on a meter port that uses the Mini-DLMS protocol. Therefore,
one port can be used for two purposes. Only one port may be selected as
the time synchronization port at a time.

a
The Advanced Protocol configuration files are created using the SchlumbergerSema Protocol
Editor program. It is supplied with the PC-PRO+ 98 CD and will install automatically on your
PC. Refer to the Protocol Editor help files and Getting Started Guide for more information.

Table 3.12 describes parameters used to define the communications setup.

Depending on the meter's configuration, some of these parameters may not be
available. For more information, see Section 6, Communications.

Table 3.12 General Tab Parameters, Communications Setup

Parameter Description

Inside Call Window Enter the number of rings the modem waits before answering the phone
when the call window is open.a Valid entries are 1-255 rings.

Outside Call Enter the number of rings the modem waits before answering the phone
Window when the call window is closed (Outside Call Window)a. Valid entries are
1-255 rings.

Never Answer If this box is checked, the corresponding Answer Delay number of rings
field is disabled.
Note: If you select this option, the meter will not answer a phone call for
the corresponding call window setting.

a
During normal operation, the meter will write the number of rings for the modem to wait
before answering to the modem as the meter changes from inside to outside call windows and
back. See “MODEMS” on page 6-2 for details.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-35

Operating Instructions

Table 3.13 Optical Port Tab Parameters, Communications Setup

Parameter Description

Protocol Selects the protocol used for the optical port.

Note: The fields that appear on the remainder of this dialog are determined
by the protocol you select for this port. If you select an advanced protocol
for any of the ports, the Advanced Protocols tab is added to the dialog. For
more information on protocols, see "Protocols" on page 6-18.

Meter Address Uniquely identifies a specific meter on a network for communication. All
values are allowed except the global address 0xFFFF which is the group
address. When communication is initiated, only the meter with the
matching address will respond. The format and range of values for the
meter address parameter for advanced protocols will change according to
the needs of the protocol.
• For Mini-DLMS and QDIP, the range is 1 to 253;
• For DNP 3.0 the range is 1 to 65535.
• For IEC 60870-5-102 and IEC 60870-5-102 plus, the meter address is the Data
Logger (Data Link) address. The range is 1 to 65535.
• For MODBUS RTU the slave address must be between 1 and 255. Standard
MODBUS restricts the address to 1-247. Address 0 is reserved for a broadcast
address. This is the address of the meter on the Q1000 port that this protocol
will run on.

Meter Address 2 For IEC 60870-5-102 and IEC 60870-5-102 plus protocols, enter the Meter
Address 2. The meter address 2 field is the Meter Address DTE (Data
Terminal Equipment). The range is 1 to 65535.

Group Address Enter the Group Address for the Mini-DLMS protocol, if applicable. The
range is 0 to 255.
Note: This field is currently disabled.

Baud Rate Select the Baud Rate that will be used to connect to this meter port. Click
the arrow to select from the drop-down list of available baud rates. Valid
settings are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14,400, and 19,200 bpsa.

Time If you selected the Mini-DLMS protocol, the Time Synchronization field is
Synchronization available. The Mini-DLMS protocol can be configured to support time
synchronization on any one port. When you select Time Synchronization for
a port, the Time Synchronization tab is added to the Communications Setup
dialog.
Note: Auto-baud detect cannot be used when a port is configured for time
synchronization.

Ignore I If you selected the Mini-DLMS protocol, the Ignore I Command field is
Command available. The I Command is a command from a software application
requesting the meter to identify itself. For multi-drop network
configurations, the meter address is used for identification instead of the I
Command. You can disable the I Command to prevent all network meters
from responding to the I Command. Each meter should have a specific
address to use before you disable the I Command.

3-36 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Table 3.13 Optical Port Tab Parameters, Communications Setup

Parameter Description
Auto Baud The Auto Baud Detect field is available if you selected Auto Modem Detect
Detect for the connection type. Check this box to enable the meter to automatically
adjust its speed according to the incoming baud rate. For the Optical Port,
the range is from 1200 to 9600 bps. To avoid locking the baud rate, provide
an Auto Baud Retry value. When you check this box, the Baud Rate field
becomes unavailable (is grayed out).

Auto Baud Retry If you check the Auto Baud Detect box, the Auto Baud Retry Time field is
Time added to the dialog. Enter the time to wait between auto baud detection
retries. Valid entries are 3 to 60 seconds. This parameter allows the port’s
server to sense the baud rate again after this number of seconds. This is
helpful for switching baud rate on the client side without having to
reprogram the meter. This value cannot be set to zero.

a
Some optical port cables cannot support baud rates faster than 9600 bps.

Table 3.14 Serial Ports Tab Parameters, Communications Setup

Parameter Description

Protocol Same as Optical Port.

Meter Address Same as Optical Port.

Meter Address 2 Same as Optical Port.

RTS to Tx Delay If the MINI-DLMS protocol is used for a serial port, the RTS to Tx Delay
(Request-to-Send to Transmit Delay) field is available. Set the time (in
milliseconds) to delay between a transition from the Request-to-Send
(RTS) signal to the Transmit Delay (Tx Delay) signal. This is the
minimum time that the RTS signal is asserted prior to the start bit being
transmitted. The value is in milliseconds. The range is 0-100.

RTS to Rx Delay If the MINI-DLMS protocol is used for a serial port, the Drop RTS to Tx
Delay (Drop Request-to-Send to Transmit Delay) field is available. Set
the time (in milliseconds) to delay between a transition from the
Request-to-Send (RTS) signal to the Transmit Delay (Tx Delay) signal.
This is the minimum time that RTS remains asserted after the last stop
bit is transmitted. The value is in milliseconds. The range is 0-100.

DCD to Rx Delay If the MINI-DLMS protocol is used for a serial port, the DCD to Rx Delay
(Data Carrier Detect-to-Receive Delay) field is available. Set the time
(in milliseconds) to delay between a transition from the Data Carrier
Detect (DCD) signal to the Receive Delay (Rx Delay) signal. This is the
minimum time that the DCD input must be asserted prior to the receiver
being turned on. The value is in milliseconds. The range is 0-100. A
value of 0 tells the meter to ignore DCD and the receiver is always on.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-37

Operating Instructions

Table 3.14 Serial Ports Tab Parameters, Communications Setup

Parameter Description

Group Address Same as Optical Port.

Note: This field is currently disabled.

Baud Rate Select the Baud Rate that will be used to connect to this meter port.
Click the arrow to select from the drop-down list of available baud
rates. Valid settings are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800,
38400, 57600, and 115200 bpsa.

Time Synchronization Same as Optical Port.

Ignore I Command Same as Optical Port.

Auto Baud Detect The Auto Baud Detect field is available if you selected Auto Modem
Detect for the connection type. Check this box to enable the meter to
automatically adjust its speed according to the incoming baud rate. For
the Serial Ports 1 & 2, the range is from 1200 to 38400 bps. To avoid
locking the baud rate, provide an Auto Baud Retry value. When you
check this box, the Baud Rate field becomes unavailable (is grayed out).

Auto Baud Retry Time Same as Optical Port.

Serial Port 1 (or 2) Select the Connection Type for this meter port. Your choices are:
• Auto Modem Detect—Use this option to allow the Q1000 to
periodically test for the presence of a modem. This setting is useful if a
modem upgrade (baud rate) is planned or if the original installation has no
modem, but a modem will be added in the future. When the modem is
added, no re-programming is required for the meter to recognize this
addition. When you select this option, you can also enable Auto Baud
Detection and set the Auto Baud Retry Time in seconds. Self-Sensing has
a five minute waiting period before it will recognize the modem.
Periodically, the meter will test for the presence of a modem and its
speed. During the few seconds that the meter is testing the port, the user
will not be able to log on to the meter.
• Direct Connect—Use this option to make a direct, hard-wired
connection to the Q1000 (RS-232/RS485). You can also use Direct Connect
for certain modem configurations.
• Modem (Internal or External)—Use this option if you want the Q1000
to assume that a modem is always connected. If you select this option,
you need to select the modem speed also. This is the best choice for an
installation where the Q1000 will always have a modem connected. For
Serial Port 1, the modem must be external; for Serial Port 2, the modem
may be internal or external. This setting is preferable to the Auto Modem
Detect option because there is no waiting and no periodic self-sensing to
test for the presence of a modem.
This option enables the Q1000 to write configuration commands to the
modem (internal or external) on power up.

Phone Home Baud If you select Modem, the Phone Home Baud Rate field is added to this
Rate dialog. Set the baud rate for the phone home signal.

a
Some computer ports cannot communicate at the highest speeds due to their COM port
hardware limitations.

3-38 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Table 3.15 Advanced Protocols Tab Parameters, Communications

Setup

Parameter Description

PDS Configuration If you are using the DNP 3.0 protocol, select the Protocol Data Server
File (PDS) Configuration file to be used for communications for the DNP 3.0
protocola.
Note: This field is not used in other protocols.

Optical Port/Serial For any port that uses an advanced protocol, select the advanced
Ports protocol configuration file.a

a
The Advanced Protocol configuration files are created using the SchlumbergerSema Protocol
Editor program. It is supplied with the PC-PRO+ 98 CD and will install automatically on your
PC. Refer to the Protocol Editor help files and Protocol Editor Online User's Manual for more
information.

Table 3.16 Time Synchronization Tab Parameters, Communications

Setup

Parameter Description

Frequency Select the Frequency to define how often the meter will look for a time
synchronization message from the external GPS device. Choose from Daily,
Hourly, and 5 Minutes.

Offset Enter an Offset to indicate the number of hours and minutes after the
selected frequency that the meter will expect the time synchronization
message. The offset defines the middle of the synchronization window.

Duration Enter the Duration. The duration defines the number of minutes the meter
should look for the synchronization message before and after the offset.
The duration establishes the synchronization window. The meter will begin
looking for the synchronization message at the value of the duration before
the offset and continue to allow a time synchronization message after the
offset until the end of the duration value. Valid range is 0 to 29 minutes.

Message Define the Message Properties as follows:

Properties • External Delay—a factor that accounts for the time it takes to send the time
message from the external source to the meter. The delay is determined by
the device and the method of communication used. Enter the number of
milliseconds of discrepancy between the time the message is sent (time= t0)
and the time the message is received by the meter (time=t1). Valid range is 0
to 65535 milliseconds.
• Message Properties Configuration—The Q1000 meter can recognize five
different GPS message formats at one time. Click the Configuration button to
define the message address format(s) and the time field(s).
• Meter Time Zone—Select the time zone where the meter will be installed.

Time Zone Select the Meter Time Zone - the time zone for the service point where the
meter is installed.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-39

Operating Instructions

Table 3.16 Time Synchronization Tab Parameters, Communications

Setup

Parameter Description

Time Adjustment Use the Time Adjustment Window fields to define what action the meter
Windows will take when a time difference (between the meter’s time and the
synchronization message time) is detected.
• No Change—If the time difference is less than or equal to the value entered,
the meter’s time is not adjusted. The range is 0 to 2000 milliseconds.
• Time Change No Logging—If the time difference is less than or equal to
the value entered, the meter’s time is adjusted, but the adjustment is not
logged—the meter will not record the adjustment. The time change is
“feathered-in” a little at a time. The adjustment takes place at the rate of 8
milliseconds per second until the adjustment is complete. The range is 1 to
500 milliseconds (1/2 second) and must be at least one millisecond greater
than the value entered for No Change.
• Small Time Change—If the time difference is less than or equal to the
value entered, the meter’s time is adjusted and the meter logs an adjustment.
You can define an Event Log to track the time adjustments. The range is 2 to
1,800,000 milliseconds (30 minutes) and must be at least one millisecond
greater than the value entered for Time Change (No Logging).
• Large Time Change—If the time difference is less than or equal to the value
entered, the meter’s time is adjusted and the meter logs an adjustment. If a
time difference is greater than the number of ms set here, the message is
considered outside the time synchronization window and no adjustment is
made. This non-event is logged as an event. The range is 3 to 1,800,000
milliseconds (30 minutes) and must be at least one millisecond greater than
the value entered for Small Time Change.

Device Multipliers/CT and VT Correction

Table 3.17 describes parameters that define the register multiplier values. Register
multipliers are used to obtain primary rated demand and energy readings.

Table 3.17 Parameters, Device Multipliers

Parameter Description

CT Ratio Sets the current transformer ratio.

VT Ratio Sets the voltage transformer ratio.

Custom Ratio Sets the ratio for a custom-rated demand or energy register.

Enable Phase A/B/C Enables VT correction for each phase.

VT Correction

Enable Phase A/B/C Enables CT correction for each phase.

CT Correction

VT Phase Correction Sets the phase angle correction for each phase of the voltage
(Phase A/B/C) transformer. Enter the phase angle correction in minutes.

CT Phase Correction Sets the phase angle correction for each phase of the current
(Phase A/B/C) transformer. Enter the phase angle correction in minutes.

3-40 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

System Loss Compensation (SLC)

Table 3.18 describes parameters that define the operation of the Basic System Loss
Compensation functions. For a complete description, see Section 7, System Loss
Compensation and the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software help files.

Table 3.18 Parameters, Basic System Loss Compensation

Parameter Description

% Watts Fe Sets the Watt Iron (Fe) constant value.

% Watts Cu Sets the Watt Copper (Cu) constant value.

% Vars Fe Sets the VAR Iron (Fe) constant value.

% Vars Cu Sets the VAR Copper (Cu) constant value.

SLC Nominal Enter the value for nominal current for this SLC configuration. The nominal
Current current (secondary rated) is the current flowing in the meter when the loss
constants for the power transformer are calculated, usually with a full load
on the transformer. SLC Nominal Current is typically the Test Amps of the
installed meter:a
• 1 Amp for Class 2 installations
• 5 Amps for Class 10 installations
• 5 Amps for Class 20 installations

a
If the user chooses to assign a different nominal current value in the calculation of the %
Watts Fe, % Watts Cu, % VARs Fe, and % VARs Cu, then that current value should be entered
as the SLC nominal current.

Display Configuration
Table 3.19 describes parameters used to define the display configuration of the
Q1000. Depending on the meter's configuration, some of these parameters may not
be available.

Table 3.19 Parameters, Display Configuration

Parameter Description

Display Options Tab

Display Scroll On Sets the time the display stays on each display page. Regardless of this
Time setting, the display values inside the meter are updated every second.

Display Scroll Off Sets the time the display is blanked between display pages.
Time

Annunciators Enables messages for EOI, demand reset, and register freeze to be
displayed.

Date Format Specifies the format for displaying the date on the display.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-41

Operating Instructions

Table 3.19 Parameters, Display Configuration

Parameter Description

Normal Display, Alternate Display, and Test Display Tabs

Displayable Items Specifies, in a hierarchical-type list, all the meter values that may be
chosen for display. This list is generated by the choices previously made
in the Quantity Selections component of PC-PRO+ 98.

Display List Defines the display screens. A separate list is available for normal,
alternate, and test display modes. Each line of each screen can be
separately configured.

Displayable Errors
Table 3.20 describes parameters used to control the displaying of error conditions
in the Q1000. For more information on error handling functions, see Chapter 9,
Testing and Maintenance.

Table 3.20 Parameters, Displayable Errors

Parameter Description

Error Condition Selects meter display actions to occur for each error condition. The choices
are to: Ignore the error, Scroll—display the error code at the end of each
display list, or Lock—display the error code and lock the display on this
error page.

Enable Locks on Enables the meter to lock the non-fatal error screen on the display if
Non-Fatal Errors configured non-fatal errors occur.

Normal Mode Register Operation

Table 3.21 describes parameters that define the demand register operations while
the meter is in normal mode.

Table 3.21 Parameters, Normal Mode Register Operation

Parameter Description

Use Global EOI Enables using the global EOI source for this component, instead of
Source defining the intervals here. When this parameter is selected, it is valid
for both normal and test modes.

Demand Interval Sets the length of a demand interval. Valid choices range from 2 seconds
Length to 60 minutes.
Note: This dialog is filled in with the Global EOI selection and grayed out
when Global EOI is selected.

3-42 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Table 3.21 Parameters, Normal Mode Register Operation

Parameter Description

Number of Select the number of subintervals in the Demand Interval. Valid choices
Subintervals are presented based on the Demand Interval Length. If you selected Use
Global EOI Source above, the choices for number of subintervals are
based on the Global EOI Interval Length which is set on the Device
Operation dialog.
• If not using the global EOI source, the user selects the demand interval
length and a number of subintervals. The subinterval length will then be the
selected demand interval length divided by the selected number of
subintervals. The subinterval length must be greater than or equal to 2
seconds, and if the demand interval is less than or equal to 1 minute, must
divide evenly into 60 seconds. If the demand interval is greater than 1
minute, the subinterval length must divide evenly into 60 minutes.
• When using the global EOI source, the user does not select the demand
interval length; the global EOI configuration defines the subinterval length.
The number of subintervals selection multiplies the subinterval length to
determine the demand interval length. The demand interval length must be
greater than or equal to 2 seconds, and if the subinterval length is less than
1 minute, must divide evenly into 60 seconds, but if the subinterval length is
greater than or equal to 1 minute, must divide evenly into 60 minutes.

Thermal Interval Select the length of the thermal interval. Valid choices range from 2
Length seconds to 60 minutes. This is the time for 90% of a change in load to be
registered in the interval.

Demand Reset Set the time required to pass after a demand reset before another
Lockout Time demand reset can occur. The range is 0 to 65535 seconds.

Cold Load Pickup Set the time required to pass after a cold load pickup before energy
Time accumulation occurs. The cold load pickup time is programmable from 0
seconds to 65535 seconds. During this time, no accumulation occurs.
When the delay time expires, demand calculation resumes.
Note: Cold load pickup time is canceled whenever the meter is placed in
the Test mode.

PO Length Before Enter the number of seconds a power outage must last before a cold load
CLPU pickup occurs. The range is 0 to 65535 seconds.

Test Mode Register Operation

Table 3.22 describes parameters that define the demand and energy register
operations while the meter is in test mode.

Table 3.22 Parameters, Test Mode Register Operation

Parameter Description

Use Global EOI If Global EOI was selected in Normal Mode Register Operation, then it
Source is automatically applied in Test Mode. If Global EOI was not selected in
Normal Mode Register Operation, then it is grayed out and not
available here.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-43

Operating Instructions

Table 3.22 Parameters, Test Mode Register Operation

Parameter Description

Demand Interval Sets the length of a demand interval while the meter is in test mode.
Length
Note: This dialog is filled in with the Global EOI selection and grayed
out when Global EOI is selected.

Number of Sets the number of subintervals in an interval while the meter is in test
Subintervals mode.

Thermal Interval Sets the length of a thermal interval while the meter is in test mode.
Length

Collect Energy in Test Enables the meter to continue accumulating energy information while
Mode in test mode.

Switch Operation
Table 3.23 describes parameters that define the behavior of the meter switches.

Table 3.23 Parameters, Switch Operation

Parameter Description

Enable Demand Enables the demand reset switch to be active. This is independently
Reset Switch programmable for normal and test mode. A demand reset can be
initiated by communications software regardless of this setting.

Enable Test Mode Enables the test mode switch to be active. Test mode can also be
Switch activated by communications software, regardless of the status of this
setting.

Enable Scroll Lock Enables the scroll lock switch to be active. This is independently
Switch programmable for normal and test mode.

Enable Alternate Enables the alternate display mode switch to be active. This is
Mode Switch independently programmable for normal and test mode.

Test Mode Switch Sets the amount of time the meter will stay in test mode before
Timeout automatically returning to normal mode.

LED Configuration
Table 3.24 describes parameters that define the behavior of the meter LEDs. There
is a separate set of these parameters for normal and test mode. LEDs may be
ordered either visible (red) or infrared.

Table 3.24 Parameters, LED Configuration

Parameter Description

Left LED Quantity Selects the energy quantity represented by the left LED.

Left LED Kh Sets the pulse constant value, or amount of energy represented by each left
LED pulse.

3-44 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Table 3.24 Parameters, LED Configuration

Parameter Description

Right LED Selects the energy quantity represented by the right LED.
Quantity

Right LED Kh Sets the pulse constant value, or amount of energy represented by each
right LED pulse.

Standard Load Profile Configuration

Table 3.25 describes parameters that define the configuration of the Q1000's two
standard load profile areas. Each area has its own set of parameters. For a
complete description of load profile functions, see Chapter 4, Load Profile and
Time-of-Use.

Table 3.25 Parameters, Standard Load Profile Configuration

Parameter Description

Use Global EOI Enables using the global EOI to define the interval length, instead of
defining the intervals here.
Note: This dialog is filled in with the Global EOI selection and then
grayed out when Global EOI is selected.

Interval Length Sets the length of a load profile interval. Valid interval lengths range
from 2 seconds to 60 minutes.
Note: This dialog is filled in with the Global EOI selection and grayed
out when Global EOI is selected.

Outage Length Sets the length of time an outage must last before the interval is
flagged. Valid range is 1 to 65535 seconds.

Disable Profile in Test Disables accumulation of energy into load profile channels while in test
Mode mode.

# of Intervals Sets the number of intervals of data to store in this load profile.

Quantities Selects the quantities that are being stored in each channel. Select the
quantities you want this profile to accumulate. For each Unassigned
item in this list, choose an item from the drop-down menu to assign to
the Quantity list. Your choices depend on the quantities you configured
previously in the Quantity Selections component. These are the energy
quantities that will be stored in each channel.
You can select a maximum of 24 quantities. Each quantity is stored as a
separate load profile channel. The number of channels you select
affects memory usage.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-45

Operating Instructions

Table 3.25 Parameters, Standard Load Profile Configuration

Parameter Description

Pulse Weights Set the pulse weight, or energy per pulse, for each channel. The values
here are secondary-rate pulse weights in Unit-Hour. Pulse values. The
list of allowed pulse weights are configured under Options | Default
Values | Pulse Weight Values. The value of 1.00000 is the default
value.
Note: If you use the SchlumbergerSema Mini-Master software,
SchlumbergerSema recommends that use a pulse weight of 0.025 or
greater. This will allow you to import data from Energy Audit for use in
Mini-Master applications.

Meter Memory Bar Shows how much memory will be required by the current state of the
program configuration. The Q1000 can be configured to perform a large
number of functions, each of which take up a variable amount of
memory. Previous meters allocated specific amounts of memory for
certain components. The Q1000 allocates memory dynamically
allowing the user to maximize the meter’s functionality at a given
location.
For this reason, the Q1000 gives you constant feedback on the amount
of memory your program is currently consuming. This feedback is a
Meter Memory bar at the bottom of the dialog indicating the amount of
meter memory currently required for the configuration. As long as the
bar is in the blue region (<100%), there is sufficient meter memory for
the configuration. If the bar displays in the red (>100%), the memory
requirements for your configuration have exceeded the amount of
memory available in the meter. You must modify your configuration to
display the bar in the blue region only. If you attempt to save a program
file while the bar displays in the red region, the Out of Device
Resources dialog displays.
The software will not allow you to continue configuring the meter
program if the amount of memory your program requires exceeds 200%
of the meter's memory.
If the percentage is >100%, but <200%, then the user can close the
software component that is active, and then open and modify another
component to reduce the memory requirements.
The program components that use portions of this memory include:
• Load Profile
• Harmonics
• Voltage Quality
• Self Reads

3-46 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Voltage Quality
Table 3.26 describes parameters that define the configuration of the voltage quality
functions in the Q1000. There are three classes of power supply interruptions and
two levels of voltage sags and swells definable. For a complete description of these
functions, see Chapter 5, Power Quality.

Table 3.26 Parameters, Voltage Quality

Parameter Description

General Tab

Cold Load Pickup Sets the time required to pass after a meter restart before voltage
Time quality functions operate.

Disable Voltage Disables voltage quality functions while in test mode.

Quality in Test Mode

Interruption to Power Supply Tab

Duration (Class 1, 2, Sets the duration for a power supply interruption required to cause an
3) event for each class.

Number of Events Sets the number of voltage quality events to record. This number is
definable for each type, class, and level of event.

Level 1/2 Sag/Swell Tab

Disable Phase A/B/C Disables voltage quality events for each phase. This check is available
for all sag and swell events independently.

Minimum Duration Enter the minimum duration length (in milliseconds) a sag or swell
event must occur on this phase to be used to determine voltage quality.
You can use any number between 0 and 65535. Negative numbers are
not allowed.
Note: The minimum sag or swell duration that the meter can detect is
½ cycle (at 50Hz - 10 ms, at 60 Hz - 8 ms).

Maximum Duration Enter the maximum duration length (in milliseconds) a sag or swell
event may occur on this phase to be used to determine voltage quality.
You can use any number between 0 and 65535. If the length of the
event exceeds the maximum duration, the event is not recorded.
Negative numbers are not allowed.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-47

Operating Instructions

Table 3.26 Parameters, Voltage Quality

Parameter Description

Threshold Voltage Set the voltage threshold which will trigger a voltage quality event
when exceeded. For sags and swells, this value is a percentage of
nominal voltage (% of Vnominal). Nominal voltage is specified in the
Service Configuration. The valid range for threshold voltage is 0% to
100% for sags and 100% to 200% for swells.
Sag Example
If nominal voltage is set to 120V and the sag threshold is 90% of
nominal, a sag is triggered when the RMS value of the voltage drops
below 108V (120 volts X 90% = 108 volts).

Swell Example
If nominal voltage is set to 120V and the swell threshold is 110% of
nominal, a swell is triggered when the RMS value of the voltage rises
above 132V (120 volts X 110% = 132 volts).

Hysteresis Voltage Set the hysteresis voltage that ends a voltage quality event by entering
the % of Vnominal you want to use for the hysteresis voltage on this phase.
For sags, this is a value above the threshold voltage and above which
the voltage must rise to end the sag. You can use any number between
0% and 100%.
For swells, this is a value below the threshold voltage and below which
the voltage must fall to end the swell. You can use any number
between 100% and 200%.

Number of Events Enter the number of voltage quality events you want the meter to record
for each phase. This number is definable for each type of event. The
number of events you can enter is based on the available meter
memory.

Imbalances Tab

Minimum Duration Enter the minimum duration length (in milliseconds) a sag or swell
event must occur on this phase to be used to determine voltage quality.
You can use any number between 0 and 65535. Negative numbers are
not allowed.

3-48 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Table 3.26 Parameters, Voltage Quality

Parameter Description
Maximum Duration Enter the maximum duration length (in milliseconds) a sag or swell
event may occur on this phase to be used to determine voltage quality.
You can use any number between 0 and 65535. If the length of the
event exceeds the maximum duration, the event is not recorded.
Negative numbers are not allowed.

Threshold The imbalance threshold defines the percentage of deviation between

the voltage for a single phase and the average voltage for all phases.
Set the threshold by entering the percentage of deviation that will
trigger an imbalance event.
Because all three phase voltages can drift together without causing an
imbalance, the imbalances are triggered off the average of all voltages.
The valid range for threshold voltage is 0 to 100 for imbalances.

Hysteresis Set the hysteresis voltage that ends a voltage quality event by entering
the percentage number you want to use for the hysteresis voltage on
this phase. This is a percentage level, less than the threshold, that the
imbalance must fall below to end the event.
For imbalances, the threshold sets the value above or below the
average that starts an event. Similarly, the hysteresis value sets the
value above or below the average that ends an event.

Number of Events Enter the number of voltage quality events you want the meter to
record. This number is definable for each type of event. The number of
events you can enter is based on the available meter memory.

Meter Memory Bar

Meter Memory Bar See page 3-46.

Harmonics
Table 3.27 describes parameters that define the configuration of the harmonics
recording functions. The Q1000 records time-averaged harmonics up to the 20th
harmonic. For a complete description of these functions, see Chapter 5, Power
Quality.

Table 3.27 Parameters, Harmonics

Parameter Description

General Tab

Use Global EOI Enables using the global EOI to define the harmonic interval length,
Source instead of defining the intervals here.

Interval Length Sets the length of a harmonic interval.

Enable Harmonics in Enables harmonic interval accumulations while in test mode.

Test Mode

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-49

Operating Instructions

Table 3.27 Parameters, Harmonics

Parameter Description

Number of Records Sets the number of harmonic interval records to keep in memory for
to Store for Each each phase.
Phase

Voltage Amplitude Tab

All Click this button to select all harmonics for recording. The selection
covers all three phases.

Even Click this button to select the even-numbered harmonics for recording.
The selection covers all three phases.

Odd Click this button to select the odd-numbered harmonics for recording.
The selection covers all three phases.

Clear All Click this button to deselect all selected harmonics. The action covers
all three phases.

Harmonics to Record Click the corresponding Phase box once to select an individual harmonic
for recording. An X signifies a selected harmonic. To deselect the
harmonic, click the box again. An empty box signifies a deselected
harmonic.

Voltage Phase Angle Tab

All Click this button to select all harmonics for recording. The selection
covers all three phases.

Even Click this button to select the even-numbered harmonics for recording.
The selection covers all three phases.

Odd Click this button to select the odd-numbered harmonics for recording.
The selection covers all three phases.

Clear All Click this button to deselect all selected harmonics. The action covers
all three phases.

Harmonics to Record Click the corresponding Phase box once to select an individual harmonic
for recording. An X signifies a selected harmonic. To deselect the
harmonic, click the box again. An empty box signifies a deselected
harmonic.

Current Amplitude Tab

All Click this button to select all harmonics for recording. The selection
covers all three phases.

Even Click this button to select the even-numbered harmonics for recording.
The selection covers all three phases.

Odd Click this button to select the odd-numbered harmonics for recording.
The selection covers all three phases.

Clear All Click this button to deselect all selected harmonics. The action covers
all three phases.

3-50 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Table 3.27 Parameters, Harmonics

Parameter Description

Harmonics to Record Click the corresponding Phase box once to select an individual harmonic
for recording. An X signifies a selected harmonic. To deselect the
harmonic, click the box again. An empty box signifies a deselected
harmonic.

Current Phase Angle Tab

All Click this button to select all harmonics for recording. The selection
covers all three phases.

Even Click this button to select the even-numbered harmonics for recording.
The selection covers all three phases.

Odd Click this button to select the odd-numbered harmonics for recording.
The selection covers all three phases.

Clear All Click this button to deselect all selected harmonics. The action covers
all three phases.

Harmonics to Record Click the corresponding Phase box once to select an individual harmonic
for recording. An X signifies a selected harmonic. To deselect the
harmonic, click the box again. An empty box signifies a deselected
harmonic.

Meter Memory Bar

Meter Memory Bar See page 3-46.

Time-of-Use Configuration
Table 3.28 describes parameters that define the Time-of-Use feature of the Q1000.
For a complete description of using Time-of-Use functionality, see Chapter 4,
Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and
Event Summary.1
The configuration shown in Table 3.28 is planned.

Table 3.28 Time-of-Use Configuration

Parameter Description

Schedule expiration Date when schedule is no longer valid.

date

Schedule ID Per rate schedule

Delay season change Option to delay season change processing until after the first demand
until after demand reset after midnight on the season change date.
reset

Rate schedule to use The status line on the display has one character reserved for the TOU
for display status line rate indication.

1. Time-of-Use is available in the PC-PRO+ 98 version 2.3 software and 5.x firmware or higher.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-51

Operating Instructions

Table 3.28 Time-of-Use Configuration

Parameter Description

Number of rate Allocates space in each pattern group

schedules

Number of pattern Allocates space for pattern group definitions

groups

Number of daily Allocates space for daily pattern definitions

patterns

Number of seasons Allocates space for season definitions

per year

Number of season Allocates space for season change date definitions

dates

Number of holiday Allocates space for holiday date definitions

dates

Number of switch Allocates space for switch point definitions

points

Time of day per 2 second resolution

switch point

Action per switch Turns a rate or output on or off

point

Rate or Output ID per Specifies what rate or output is changed.

switch point

Daily pattern ID One per rate schedule

Switch point ID of the Identifies ID name.

first switch point of
the day

Number of switch- Specifies the number of switchpoints per day.

points in day

Pattern Group ID One per day of the week

Date Sets the date of the Pattern Group ID.

Pattern Group ID #2 This pattern group will be used on the holiday date instead of the one
specified by the season.

Date Sets the date of Pattern Group ID #2.

Season ID Identifies the new season to start on the season change date.

Events to watch Up to 16 events can be watched for an override.

Rules Specifies the required states of the events to cause the override

Priority In case multiple overrides are active

3-52 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Table 3.28 Time-of-Use Configuration

Parameter Description

Type What gets overridden if rules are satisfied (and how) (pattern group,
daily pattern, rate exclusively, or rate non-exclusively)

Pattern group or rate Pattern or rate

schedule

Start date and time When the override starts

End date and time When the override ends

Priority In case there are multiple overrides

Type What gets overridden if rules are satisfied (and how) (pattern group,
daily pattern, rate exclusively, or rate non-exclusively)

Pattern Group or rate Pattern or rate

schedule

Event Configuration
Table 3.29 describes parameters that define the configuration of meter events and
diagnostic events. An event is the occurrence of a programmed condition and is
either in an ON or OFF state. Meter events can be logged in the event log and can
also be selected for inclusion in the event summary. Diagnostic events can be
selected for inclusion in the diagnostic event summary.
For more information, see "Diagnostics" on page 9-2.

Table 3.29 Parameters, Event Configuration

Parameter Description

General Tab

Loss of Potential Enter the voltage that the meter will use as a reference to determine if a
Limit Loss of Potential Limit event has occurred. If the voltage on any phase
drops below this value, the meter will register a loss of potential event on
that phase.
The upper limit is 600 Volts.

Loss of Current Enter the amperage that the meter will use as a reference to determine if
Limit a Loss of Current Limit event has occurred. If the current on any phase
drops below this value, the meter will register a loss of current event on
that phase.
The upper limit is 20 Amps.

Neutral Current Enter the amperage that the meter will use as a reference to determine if
Limit a Neutral Current Limit event has occurred. If the neutral current rises
above this value, the meter will register a neutral current event.
The upper limit is 20 Amps.

Time Allowed on Enter the number of minutes the meter will be allowed to operate from
Battery internal battery before a Time Allowed on battery event occurs. The upper
limit is 525,600 Minutes.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-53

Operating Instructions

Table 3.29 Parameters, Event Configuration

Parameter Description
Use Circular Log Check this box to enable usage of a circular event log. If the event log is
programmed to be a circular or wrap-around file, the most current 200
events are always retained. For a non-circular file, the event log fills up
the 200 events and then must be cleared before new events are recorded.

Log & Summary Tab

Event Name This column displays a list of all events defined in the meter program.

Log Check the box in this column to enable the corresponding event to be
recorded in the Event Log.
The Event Log is a collection of event records that can be used to monitor
the occurrence of certain conditions in the meter. The event log in the
Q1000 allows you to record predefined events with the date and time of
each occurrence. Up to 200 programmable events with their time of
occurrence can be recorded. The event log is stored in battery backed
RAM. To view the Event Log, while online with a meter, from the
navigation tree select Device Status | Events.
The event log is programmable to be a circular or a non-circular file. If the
event log is programmed to be a circular or wrap-around file, the most
current 200 events are always retained. For a non-circular file, the event
log fills up the 200 events and then must be cleared before new events
are recorded.

Summary Check the box in this column to enable the corresponding event to be
recorded in an Event Log Summary. A maximum of 16 event summaries
are allowed.
An event summary is a tool for monitoring the occurrence of certain events
without having to add a record to the event log. This can be used to
monitor an event that occurs frequently without needing each date and
time occurrence. The event summary reports the date and time of the
first occurrence and the date and time of the last occurrence and the
number occurrences since the last event log reset. To view the Event Log
Summaries, while online with a meter, from the navigation tree select
Device Status | Event Log Summaries.

Diagnostics Tab

Event Name This column displays a list of all events defined in the meter program.

Event Summary The number assigned to a diagnostic event when it is recorded in the
Number summary. There are seven user-configurable diagnostic event summaries
available. You can assign multiple diagnostic events to each of the seven
summaries. The eighth summary contains additional events that are hard
coded ON.

Threshold Alarm Configuration

Table 3.30 describes parameters that define the configuration of the 16 meter
thresholds. A threshold is a value against which a meter quantity is compared. If
the quantity is beyond the threshold, a threshold alarm is generated.

3-54 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Table 3.30 Parameters, Threshold Alarm Configuration

Parameter Description

Quantity Selects the register to which this threshold will apply. Demand and
instantaneous values can be monitored.

Lower Threshold Sets the lower limit for this threshold event to be activated.

Upper Threshold Sets the upper limit for this threshold event to be activated.

Mode Defines how the thresholds are interpreted. In normal mode, an event
occurs if the quantity has exceeded the upper threshold, but has not yet
dropped below the lower threshold. In inverted mode, an event occurs if
the quantity has dropped below the lower threshold but has not yet risen
above the upper threshold.

Disable in Test Enables monitoring of thresholds in test mode.

Mode

Threshold Alarm Examples

The following two graphics show alarm conditions where the Upper and Lower
Thresholds are the same values. Figure 3.14 shows the alarm points when the
threshold is in the normal mode; Figure 3.15 shows the alarm points when the
threshold is in the inverted mode.

Figure 3.14 Normal Mode Threshold Alarm Example 1

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-55

Operating Instructions

Figure 3.15 Inverted Mode Threshold Alarm Example 1

The following graphics show alarm conditions where the Upper and Lower
Thresholds are not the same values. When the two thresholds are entered as
separate values, hysteresis is automatically turned on. This function locks the
alarm on until the quantity falls below the lower (normal mode) or upper (inverted
mode) threshold again. Figure 3.16 shows the alarm points when the threshold is in
the normal mode; Figure 3.17 shows the alarm points when the threshold is in the
inverted mode.

Figure 3.16 Normal Mode Threshold Alarm Example 2

Figure 3.17 Inverted Mode Threshold Alarm Example 2

3-56 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Output Configuration
Table 3.31 describes parameters that define the output configuration of the Q1000.
There are three forms of data output using the LONWORKs I/O network: analog,
digital state, and digital pulse.
Use the fields on the Analog tab to define up to 8 analog outputs. Analog outputs
can be used to feed analog recorders, PLCs (power line carriers), or RTUs (remote
terminal units). These recording devices usually take instantaneous values from
sensors and transducers. The Q1000 meter produces an analog output for
instantaneous values, such as Amps, Volts, Watts, and so forth.
Use the fields on the Digital State tab to define up to 16 digital state outputs. The
purpose of this configuration is to assign a particular output to a threshold/alarm.
This is the option to close or open an output when the event occurs. The default is
to not trigger on an event.
Use the fields on the Digital Pulse tab to define up to 8 digital pulse outputs. These
outputs are used to collect output pulses from an external device and store those
pulses in mass memory. Configuration is similar to configuring Analog Inputs .
The pulses that are received from the network become energy quanta after the
multiplication by Ke. These energy quanta can be used in different registers: Load
Profile, Demand, or Energy.

Table 3.31 Parameters, Output Configuration

Parameter Description

Analog Tab

Quantity Select the quantity you want to measure. This instantaneous value will be
assigned to the selected analog output.
Note: For PC-PRO+ 98 v2.1 or higher, you can now select net quantities and
frequency (Hertz) for analog outputs.

K The K value is the gain factor used to convert the analog output quantity to
a percentage of full scale. The setting is based on estimates of the output
level for the particular installation location. The K value represents the
conversion coefficient between the instantaneous register value and the
analog output value. This coefficient is used to transform an instantaneous
register value to a relative range between 0 to 100% for delivered
quantities or –100% to +100% for net quantities.
Enter a floating point number for the K value for each analog quantity.
K is calculated with two methods—one for unipolar quantities and one for
bipolar quantities.

Zero Offset Zero offsets are available for meters with firmware revision 3.02 or higher.
Zero offsets can either be 0 or an integer. Integer values for Zero Offset are
typically entered as negative values. The Zero Offset defines the mid-point
value or the value of zero.
The range for the analog output value for delivered quantities is 0 to 100%.
For net quantities, the range is –100% to +100%. Defining a zero offset
allows you to improve the resolution of the analog output by sending
values in smaller increments. For more information about the analog output
range for net and delivered quantities, see Analog Output Ranges.
Typically you enter a negative value for the zero offset to “set it back” to
zero.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-57

Operating Instructions

Table 3.31 Parameters, Output Configuration

Parameter Description

Disable Analog Check this box to disable analog outputs while the meter is in Test mode.
Output in Test
Mode

Digital State Tab

Event Select the event that will trigger the digital state output from the drop-
down list.

State Select the state definition for each output line from the drop-down list.

Disable Digital Check this box to disable digital state outputs while the meter is in Test
State Output in mode.
Test Mode

Digital Pulse Tab

Quantity Select the quantity (energy value) you want to trigger an output on one of
the eight digital pulse output lines.

Ke Set the Ke value, or energy per pulse, for each digital pulse quantity.

Disable Digital Check this box to disable digital pulse outputs while the meter is in Test
Pulse Output in mode.
Test Mode

Input Configuration
Table 3.32 describes parameters that define the input configuration of the Q1000.
There are three forms of data input using the LONWORKs I/O network: analog,
digital state, and digital pulse.1
Use the Analog tab to define up to 8 analog inputs. Since each input is on a node on
the network, you must program the meter and link the physical analog inputs to
logical analog inputs. To describe an analog input, a list mapping the index (analog
input number) to the input value must be downloaded to the meter. The value
received from the network is a relative scale from 0 to 100 percent.
Use the Digital State tab to define up to 16 digital state inputs. The purpose of this
configuration is to define the action to take when there is a transition on a digital
state input. Each Digital State Input can be triggered by one or more of the
following actions: EOI, Self-Read, Demand Reset, or Blink Display. Additionally,
an input can be configured to trigger on the rising or falling edge of an input.

1. Analog inputs are not currently available in the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for a future
release.

3-58 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

The purpose of the Digital State Input configuration is to define the action to take
when there is a transition on a digital state input. Each Digital State Input can be
triggered by one or more of the following actions: Self-Read, Demand Reset, or
Blink Display. Additionally, an input can be configured to trigger on the rising or
falling edge of an input.
Digital state inputs can be used to log the closing of a relay, switching of capacitor
banks, or noting any event that can signal a contact closure. The date and time of
each opening and closing of the state inputs can be written to the event log.
The status inputs can also trigger an action in the Q1000 meter as follows:
• Register Self Read or Freeze—Enable a Self-Read action on transitions of
the digital state input lines. Selecting this option disables the Read on Digital
State Input option on the Self Read Configuration: Events tab.
• Demand Reset—Enable a Demand Reset action on transitions of the digital
state input lines.
• Blink Display—Enable a Blink Display action on transitions of the digital
state input lines.
Use the Digital Pulse tab to define up to 8 digital pulse inputs. These inputs are
used to collect input pulses from an external device and store those pulses in mass
memory. Configuration is similar to configuring Analog Inputs . The pulses that
are received from the network become energy quanta after the multiplication by
Ke. These energy quanta can be used in different registers: Load Profile, Demand,
or Energy.

Table 3.32 Parameters, Input Configuration

Parameter Description

Analog Tab

Maximum Value Sets the scale factor for each of the eight analog input lines. The input
value is multiplied by this value before being used as an instantaneous
value.

Quantity Describes the quantity for each analog input line. Can be up to 40
Description characters of text. This name is not stored in the meter.
Note: This field is currently disabled.

Digital State Tab

Self Read Check this box to enable a Self-Read action on transitions of the digital
state input lines.
Note: Selecting this option disables the Read on Digital State Input
option on the Self Read Configuration - Events tab.

Demand Reset Check this box to enable a Demand Reset action on transitions of the
digital state input lines.

Blink Display Check this box to enable a Blink Display action on transitions of the
digital state input lines.

Triggered By Select the type of transition that must occur on the digital state lines to
trigger the action for the corresponding digital state input. You can
choose an off-to-on transition, an on-to-off transition, or any transition.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-59

Operating Instructions

Table 3.32 Parameters, Input Configuration

Parameter Description

Disable Digital Check this box to disable digital state inputs while the meter is in Test
State Input in Test mode.
Mode

Digital Pulse Tab

Ke Set the Ke (pulse weight) value, or energy per pulse, for each digital
pulse input quantity. The range of values is 0.00001 to 100000.00000.

Quantity Enter up to 40 text characters to describe each digital pulse input line.
Description

Disable Input in Check this box to disable digital pulse inputs while the meter is in Test
Test Mode mode.

Call Window Configuration

Table 3.33 describes parameters that define the call window configuration of the
Q1000. A call window is a programmed period during which the meter can answer
the phone or call home. For meters with internal or external modems, the changing
from one call window to another triggers the Q1000 meter to write the number of
rings to wait to answer the phone to the modem. Each day of the week has two
independent call windows. For more information, see Chapter 6,
Communications.

Table 3.33 Parameters, Call Window Configuration

Parameter Description

Day of Week Defines which day the current configuration applies to. Separate call
windows are supported for each day of the week.

Window Operation Selects state of operation for call window one and two. Choices are
open all day, closed all day, and custom.

Start Time Sets the time at which a custom call window opens.

Stop Time Sets the time at which a custom call window closes.

3-60 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Phone Home Configuration

Table 3.34 describes parameters that define the phone home configuration of the
Q1000. For more information, see Section 6, Communications.

Table 3.34 Parameters, Phone Home Configuration

Parameter Description

General Tab

Call Home Enabled Check this box if you want to enable the phone home capability of the
meter. The remaining fields on this screen only display if this option is
enabled.

Phone #1 Select a phone number to use for phone #1. The list of phone numbers are
created using the Phone Numbers option in the Program Editor defaults. In
the Dial Type area, select whether the call will use dial tone or pulse
dialing.

Phone #2 Select a phone number to use for phone #2. The list of phone numbers are
created using the Phone Numbers option in the Program Editor defaults. In
the Dial Type area, select whether the call will use dial tone or pulse
dialing.

Display Messages Enable up to three display messages for any combination of New Events,
Current Call, and Window Activity.

Retry Strategy Tab

Maximum A clock error occurs when the meter’s CPU cannot read the time from its
Attempts on Clock clock chip at power up. This setting specifies how many times the meter
Error will attempt to call home in that case. When the CPU does not know the
time, it will ignore call window settings. The range is 1 to 255. For
Canada, this value must be less than or equal to 10.

Enable Fixed Delay Enables a phone home call to occur after a fixed delay from the last
attempt. If you choose this option, you must define the Fixed Delay Time
in seconds.

Fixed Delay Time Sets the fixed delay time that passes between call attempts.

Enable Random Enables a phone home call to occur after a random delay from the last
Delay attempt. If you choose this option, you must define the Random Delay
Minimum Time and the Random Delay Maximum Time in seconds.

Random Delay Sets the minimum delay time that passes before another call attempt.
Minimum Time

Random Delay Sets the maximum delay that could pass before another call attempt.
Maximum Time

Lock Meter After If you do not want the meter to try to phone this number again after an
Failure unsuccessful attempt to phone home, check this box. Once locked, a
phone number can be unlocked by any of the switches on the meter or by a
communication with the meter.
Note: Canadian-only feature.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-61

Operating Instructions

Table 3.34 Parameters, Phone Home Configuration

Parameter Description

Number of Canadian Installations: If you check the box above, and If this value is not
Attempts Before zero, it represents the maximum number of attempts per phone number
Lock before the meter locks itself and does not attempt to phone this number
again.
Other Installations: If you check the box above, this field fixes the number
of times the meter goes through the phone home sequence (up to 4
attempts) before waiting. Once it has waited, it repeats the process based
on the Number of Attempts and Time Between Retries set in the next two
fields. This continues indefinitely.
Note: Canadian-only feature.

Number of Retries Select the number of phone home attempts the meter will try using this
Before Wait phone number before waiting for the next retry.
Note: Canadian-only feature.

Time Between Select the time to wait between phone home attempts.
Retries Note: Canadian-only feature.

Call Window Strategy Tab

Call Outside Call The meter calls home when the window is open. However, you can
Window override this restriction by enabling this option. If enabled, the meter calls
home only once if the window is closed. If the call fails, the event is noted
so that the meter places calls later when the window opens. If the
window is open at the time of the event, the event is handled normally.

Outage Length Enter the number of seconds an outage must last in order for the meter to
attempt to call home. In this release of PC-PRO+ 98, this field will accept
a maximum value of 99999 seconds, but the allowed range is 0 to 65535
seconds.

3-62 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Phone Home Event Configuration

Table 3.35 describes parameters that define the phone home event configurations
of the Q1000. These are events which trigger phone calls home. For more
information, see Section 6, Communications.

Table 3.35 Parameters, Phone Home Event Configuration

Parameter Description

Add Click this button to add an event to the Event Name list.

Delete Select an event, and then click this button to delete an event from the Event
Name list.

Event Name This column displays the selected list of events. The Q1000 can support up
to 32 events. The events that display in this list are the ones you define
using the Add Phone Home Event dialog.

Attempt #1-4 Select up to 4 Attempt options for each event. For example, when an event
occurs, on Attempt #1 you may choose to use Phone #1 and place the call
on Port 2. If the call is not successful, the Q1000 tries again using the
parameters for Attempt #2. If you define a third and fourth attempt, the
Q1000 will continue trying those phone number / port combinations.

Priority Up The event’s priority is the number at the left of the PC-PRO+ 98 software
dialog. To change an event’s priority, you must highlight the number and
then use the buttons to move the event up or down in the priority list.
Select an event, and then click this button to move the event up in the
priority list. Each line entry shows the Phone Number / Port attempt
combinations for the calls.
When several events occur simultaneously, the event used is the one that is
nearest the top of the list. For example, if the event on line 1 occurs, the 4
attempts for line 1 are used. If the event on line 1 does not occur, the
Q1000 looks for the next line entry whose event is TRUE. In all cases, the
higher priority event takes precedence and retries start over from Attempt
#1.

Priority Down Select an event, and then click this button to move the event down in the
priority list.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-63

Operating Instructions

Self Read Configuration

Table 3.36 describes parameters that define the self read configuration of the
Q1000.

Table 3.36 Parameters, Self-Read Configuration

Parameter Description

General Tab

Number of Reads Sets the number of reads to store in memory. Valid range is 0 to 32.
to Store

Periodic Tab

Read Frequency Choose the appropriate Periodic Read Frequency option to determine how
often self reads occur, if at all. You can choose:
• No Periodic Reads—If you choose this option, no other Read Frequency
fields are available.
• Read Every N Minutes—If you choose this option, you must enter the
number of minutes between reads and the number of minutes after the top of
the hour for Read Synchronization. This allows reads to be synchronized
across other meters. Valid range is 1 to 60 minutes; this selection must be
evenly divisible into 60.
• Read Every N Hours—If you choose this option, you must enter the number
of hours between reads and the hours after midnight for Read
Synchronization. This allows reads to be synchronized across other meters.
Valid range is 2 to 12 hours; this selection must be evenly divisible into 1440.
For example, if you do the following:
• select the Read Every N Hours option,
• set the Hours Between Reads to 6, and
• set the Read Synchronization time to 3 hours after midnight,
the meter will perform self reads at 3 AM, 9 AM, 3 PM, and 9 PM.

Actions to Select the actions the meter should perform after a self read is completed.
Perform After
Read

Weekly Tab

Read Weekly Check this box to enable self reads to occur weekly. When you check this
box the other fields on this tab become available.

Time of Read Enter the time of day you want the weekly self read to occur.

Days of Week to Select the day of the week you want the weekly self read to occur.
Read

Actions to Select the actions the meter should perform after a self read is completed.
Perform After
Read

Monthly Tab

Read Monthly Check this box to enable self reads to occur monthly. When you check this
box the other fields on this tab become available.

3-64 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Table 3.36 Parameters, Self-Read Configuration

Parameter Description

Day of Month to Select the day of the month you want the monthly self read to occur.
Read

Time of Read Enter the time of day you want the monthly self read to occur.

Actions to Select the actions the meter should perform after a self read is completed.
Perform After
Read

Events Tab

Read on Digital Check this box to enable a self read to be triggered by a Digital State Input.
State Input Note: This option is not available if you have selected the Self Read
option on the Input Configuration - Digital State tab. If you select this
option, the Input Configuration - Digital State tab will display for you to
select a self read input channel. If you cancel the operation, this option is
cleared and normal operation begins again.

Read on Demand Check this box to enable a self read to be triggered by a Demand Reset.
Reset

Read on Remote Check this box to enable a self read to be triggered by a Remote Request.
Request

Read at Season Check this box to enable a self read to be triggered by a change of
Change seasons.
Note: This field is currently disabled.

Read on Test Check this box to enable a self read to be triggered when the meter is
Mode Entry placed in Test Mode.

Read on Test Check this box to enable a self read to be triggered when the meter is
Mode Exit removed from Test Mode.

Actions to For each event, select the actions the meter should perform after a self
Perform After read is completed.
Read

Registers Tab

Registers to Store Check the box beside each register you want to store in the meter’s
memory when a self read occurs. Your choices depend on the Quantities
you configured previously in the Quantity Selections component. The
maximum number of registers that can be stored in each self read is 60. All
self reads store the same registers.

Meter Memory Bar

Meter Memory See page 3-46.

Bar

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-65

Operating Instructions

Service Configuration
Table 3.37 describes parameters that define the meter's service configuration.

Table 3.37 Parameters, Service Configuration

Parameter Description

Clock Select the clock synchronization method you want to use. You can choose
Synchronization either the internal crystal or line synchronization. If the meter is powered
by an external AC or DC auxiliary supply and no line voltages are present,
the clock defaults to synchronization to the internal crystal. If any of the
three phases are present (and Line Sync is selected), the meter will sync to
line frequency provided the line frequency is between 45 and 65 Hz.
If you select Internal Crystal synchronization, the meter determines the
time from the oscillation signal of an internal crystal. If you select Line
Frequency, the meter uses a signal derived from the line frequency of the
voltage.

Line Frequency Select the line frequency that matches the line frequency at the
installation location. You can choose either 50 or 60 Hz.
This is the nominal expected frequency of the line voltage. The line
frequency can vary from 45 to 65 Hz before the meter reverts to the
internal crystal for timing.

Service Type Select the type of service to which the meter is connected. For the first
release, you can choose either 3 phase 4-wire WYE (3 element) or 3 phase
3-wire delta (2 element).
The service type you select determines which equations are used in the
calculation of quantities. For example, the calculation of the average per
phase voltage and current values must be performed with the correct
number of elements. This entry affects demand registers, energy
registers, and voltage quality events.

Nominal Voltage Enter the number you want to use to represent the nominal voltage value.
This voltage value is used throughout the program to calculate deviations
from normal voltage. Minimum = 24 Volts; Maximum = 600 Volts. The
nominal voltage is used for determining power quality events and System
Loss Compensation (SLC) for scaling voltage dependent quantities.

Nominal Current Enter the number you want to use to represent the nominal current value.
The nominal current value is for informational purposes only and does not
affect calculations. This meter nominal current is independent of the SLC
Nominal Current in the SLC component.

Note: This field is currently disabled.

3-66 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

User Data Configuration

Table 3.38 describes parameters that define the meter's user data. Up to 24 items of
user data can be programmed into the Q1000. This data can be displayed as text on
the meter display and viewed at a later time with meter programming software.

Table 3.38 Parameters, User Data

Parameter Description

User Data #1 - #24 Enter up to 24 fields of free-form text. Each field can store up to 16 text
characters. Each display line on the Q1000 will hold up to 16 characters.
User data fields can also be used in the following ways:
• You can configure a line on the Q1000 meter display to display text using the
text from a user data field. The selections for the user data fields are
available in the Non-Register Values section of the displayable items.
• The first five user data fields can be modified at program time if you select
them on the Programming Options | Electricity tab. User Field number one
in Programming Options corresponds to User Data field number one on this
dialog.
• You can use one of the first five user data fields to define a unit ID for the
QDIP protocol (QDIPID). For detailed instructions, see the online help for User
Defined Unit ID for QDIP Protocol.

Input/Output Modules
The following sections describe disassembly and re-assembly of the Input/Output
Modules as well as an overview of the components.

I/O Module Disassembly

To disassemble an I/O module perform the following steps:
1 Turn power to I/O module OFF.
2 Remove the module from any mountings and remove any connections to its
terminal strips.
3 Remove the four corner screws shown in Figure 3.18 followed by the two
terminal strips as seen in Figure 3.19.

Power Connections Terminal Strip - Top

Cover Cover
Screws Screws

Terminal Strip - Bottom

Figure 3.18 I/O Module Disassembly

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-67

Operating Instructions

Use small
screwdriver to pry
terminal strip loose
from module base

Figure 3.19 I/O Module Terminal Strip Removal

4 Push in both tabs located on the module's sides with a flathead screwdriver
and remove the center cover. Be sure to only use the screwdriver inside the
square in the black casing as shown in Figure 3.20, as other methods will
crack/snap the external cover.

Press here on both

sides with small
screwdriver to remove
the module center
cover. Do not pry on
black tab

Figure 3.20 I/O Module Center Cover Removal

5 Remove both internal boards together.

6 Remove both thin 16-pin gray ribbon cables from the power supply board.

3-68 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

7 Figure 3.21 shows the power supply board. The other board is the functional
board which depends upon which type of I/O module you possess (i.e. Digital
State Input, Pulse Input, and so forth).

Figure 3.21 I/O Module Power Supply Board

I/O Module Assembly

To assemble an I/O module perform the following steps:
1 Locate the printed text on the back of the I/O module casing. Situate the
module casing so the text is right side up.
2 Connect the power supply board (Figure 3.21) to the functional board with
both 16-pin flat gray ribbon cables.
3 Insert both boards into their respective interior tracks with the power supply
board on the topside and the terminal connector tabs in the direction of the
opening.
4 Place the clear center cover onto the module. It will only lock into position one
way. When inserted correctly the tabs on both sides will easily snap into
position.
5 The bottom terminal strip is marked with the module's serial number. Fit the
bottom terminal strip to the module case and tighten the two corner screws.
6 The top terminal strip contains the external power connections. Fit the top
terminal strip to the module case and tighten the two corner screws.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-69

Operating Instructions

IEC 2-wire KY Pulse Output Module

The 2-wire pulse output has a user-selectable pulse length. DIP switches located on
the output board of the IEC 2-wire KY Pulse Output Module allow the user to select
a 10, 20, 40, or 80 millisecond output. Following removal of terminals and viewing
cover of the module, the DIP switches on the output board are identified as shown
in Figure 3.22.

DIP Switches

Figure 3.22 IEC 2-wire KY Output Board DIP Switches

Table 3.39 shows DIP switch positions and corresponding timing parameters for
the pulse output module.

Table 3.39 IEC 2-wire KY Pulse Output Module DIP Switch Settings

Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Pulse Length

S1 = 0 S3 = 0 S5 = 0 S7 = 0 10 msec
S2 = 0 S4 = 0 S6 = 0 S8 = 0

S1 = 0 S3 = 0 S5 = 0 S7 = 0 20 msec
S2 = 1 S4 = 1 S6 = 1 S8 = 1

S1 = 1 S3 = 1 S5 = 1 S7 = 1 40 msec
S2 = 0 S4 = 0 S6 = 0 S8 = 0

S1 = 1 S3 = 1 S5 = 1 S7 = 1 80 msec
S2 = 1 S4 = 1 S6 = 1 S8 = 1

0 = switch open
1 = switch closed

3-70 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

IEC 2-Wire KY or KYZ Pulse Input Module

A single Pulse Input Module has been developed which is very flexible in
functionality and timing parameters. Internal jumpers on the input board of the
module allow the user to select the following features:
1 KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY pulse inputs
2 Wetting voltage for contacts may be supplied internally (contact closure) or
externally (voltage pulse)
3 Input pulse duration (10, 20, 40, or 80 milliseconds)
To configure the module as a KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY module, locate jumper JP1
using Figure 3.24 and refer to Table 3.40 for jumper settings.

Table 3.40 Pulse Input KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY Jumper Selections

Jumper IEC 2-wire KY KYZ

JP1 1&2 2&3

Jumpers JP2 through JP5 are used to select the source of wetting voltage for KYZ
or IEC 2-wire KY contacts. See Figure 3.24 for jumper locations and refer to Table
3.41 for jumper settings.

Table 3.41 Wetting Voltage Jumper Selections

Pulse Input Jumper Contact Closure Voltage Pulse

1 JP2 1&2 2&3

2 JP3 1&2 2&3

3 JP4 1&2 2&3

4 JP5 1&2 2&3

Input pulse duration must be selected with consideration to the timing parameters
of the transmitting device. For IEC 2-wire KY devices, the pulse duration of the
input module must match the duration of the transmitting device. For modules
configured as KYZ input modules, the duration must be set below the smallest
interval possible between pulses by the transmitting device. The timing function of
the KYZ input module is a duration in which the module will not accept incoming
pulses. This feature prevents noise or bouncing of the contacts causing false
pulses.
For example:
A SchlumbergerSema input module is configured for KYZ inputs and is connected
to a device capable of transmitting a maximum of 40 pulses per second. This
corresponds to 25 milliseconds between pulses. Pulse input duration should be
selected to 10 or 20 milliseconds.
Jumpers JP6 through JP9 are used to select the input timing parameters for KYZ or
IEC 2-wire KY modules. See Figure 3.24 and Figure 3.25 for jumper locations and
refer to Table 3.42 for jumper settings.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-71

Operating Instructions

Table 3.42 Input Pulse Duration Jumper Selections

Pulse Timing Function

Input
Jumper 10 ms 20 ms 40 ms 80 ms

1 JP6 4&5 3&6 2&7 1&8

2 JP7 4&5 3&6 2&7 1&8

3 JP8 4&5 3&6 2&7 1&8

4 JP9 4&5 3&6 2&7 1&8

A B

Figure 3.23 Pulse Input Module Input Board

The left half of the Pulse Input Module Input Board (A in Figure 3.23) is shown in a
larger view in Figure 3.24.
The right half of the Pulse Input Module Input Board (B in Figure 3.23) is shown in
a larger view in Figure 3.25.

3-72 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

JP1
JP5

JP4

JP9

JP8

JP7

JP6

Figure 3.24 Pulse Input Board Jumper Locations (JP1 & JP4-9)

JP3

JP2

Figure 3.25 Pulse Input Board Jumper Locations (JP2 & JP3)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-73

Operating Instructions

Analog Output Module Configuration Settings

The Analog Output module provides the user with a variety of useful
configurations all in one module. The Analog module can provide voltage or
current outputs. Three ranges are supported for voltage and current outputs.

Ranges
Each channel can be configured to output a DC voltage or a DC current. The range
is selectable by a DIP switch on a per-channel basis. Regardless of which
configuration you select, you should disconnect the unused wires from the I/O
module terminal strip. The current terminals are separate from the voltage
terminals.

When you select a current output, the voltages on the voltage terminals outputs have undefined
values; you should not connect any device to the voltage terminal outputs to limit susceptibility
to transients.
When you select a voltage output, the current on the current terminals outputs have undefined
values; you should not connect any device to the current terminal outputs to limit susceptibility to
transients. You should need to short the unused current terminals to preserve immunity to
transient influences. Shorting tabs are shipped with the module.

The meter sends values between -100% and 100% to the module. These values must
be translated into physical current or voltage on the module's terminals. The
generic (linear) transfer function is shown in Table 3.43.

Table 3.43 Relative Value to Physical Output Translation

Network Variable Value Current or Voltage Output Value

-100% Minimum Value of the Range—“Min Value”

0% Zero Value of the Range—“Zero Value”

100 % Maximum Value of the Range—“Max Value”

When power is not applied to the module, the output goes to a “Zero Value”.
The “Min Value”, “Max Value”, “Zero Value” are described in the next paragraphs.

Unipolar Quantities
Delivered quantities start at zero and go to the delivered maximum or full scale,
which is 100%. Therefore, the analog output range for delivered quantities is 0 to
100%.
W Delivered Range Example:
For 0 to 50,000 W delivered, 0 represents 0 Watts and 100% represents 50,000 Watts.

Bipolar Quantities
For net quantities, values can range from the negative of the full scale value to the
positive of the full scale value with zero in the middle. Therefore, for net quantities,
the analog output range is -100% to +100%.
W Net Range Example:

3-74 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

For an intertie site where watts are delivered or received, the maximum number in
either direction must be estimated. After estimating the maximum, establish that
value as the full scale value.
The positive maximum is +100% (full scale positive)
The negative maximum represents the watts received or -100% (full scale negative)

Using 4 to 20mA Range as a Unipolar Output

It is very common for industrial data acquisition systems to use a 4-20 mA in a
unipolar mode, that is, 4 mA represents 0. To use such equipment with the Q1000
Analog Output Module, simply apply the bipolar formulas for offset and gain. For
example, to produce 4 mA when 0 Watts are delivered and 20 mA when 7200 Watts
are delivered, use:

7200 – 0
K = --------------------- = 36
200

and

7200 + 0
Offset = – --------------------- = – 3600
2

Current Ranges
These selections are available when the “Current / Voltage” DIP switch is on the
“Current” position. The range selection is on a per-channel basis (2 DIP switches
per channel). You can select 3 current ranges with the switches on the module.

Table 3.44 I/O Module Current Ranges

Range ID Min Value Zero Value Max Value

Range 0 (unipolar) 0 mA 0 mA 1 mA

Range 1 (bipolar) -1 mA 0 mA 1 mA

Range 2 (bipolar) 4 mA 12 mA 20 mA

Range 2 (unipolar) 0 mA 4 mA 20 mA

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-75

Operating Instructions

Voltage Ranges
These selections are available when the “Current / Voltage” DIP switch is on the
“Voltage” position The user is able to select 3 voltage ranges with switches on the
module.

Table 3.45 I/O Module Voltage Ranges

Range ID Min Value Zero Value Max Value

Range 0 (unipolar) 0V 0V 5V

Range 1 (bipolar) 0V 0V 10 V

Range 2 (bipolar) -5 V 0V 5V

The I/O Modules receive network variable updates from the Q1000 meter. After the
network variable is received, the analog output (current or voltage) will reach a
stable level in 500 milliseconds or less. This time includes the firmware processing
of the network variable value, the correction with calibration parameters, and
communication with the Digital to Analog converter and the converter’s settling
time.
The meter updates each channel of the module every second.

Loss of Communication
When the module loses communications with the meter, the behavior of the analog
output is controlled by two LC (Loss of Communication) switches. Table 3.46
shows the configurations of the switches that are available.

Table 3.46 Loss of Communication Switch Settings

Setting Switches Comments

Zero after 10 seconds OFF, OFF Factory Default

Zero after 20 seconds OFF, ON

Zero after 60 seconds ON, OFF

Maintain Value ON, ON Output stays at last update’s value

In the “ON, ON” position, the module outputs the last value received from the
meter. This value is maintained until the power is removed or communication is re-
established.
In the other positions, the module maintains the value for a predefined time, and
then the value goes to the “Zero Value”.
This behavior is defined for ALL channels by these two switches. However, the
channels are independent and maintain an interval timer (in firmware) to keep
track of the updates. This means that a particular channel may time out and set its
value to the “Zero Value” without affecting the other channels.

3-76 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

I1+ I1- V1-V1+ I2+ I2- V2- V2+ I3+ I3- V3- V3+ I4+ I4- V4- V4+

Figure 3.26 DIP Switch and Jumper Positioning

In Table 3.47 and Table 3.48, an “x” denotes the channel number. Channel numbers
correspond to DIP switch and jumper numbers. Settings for each channel are set
independent of the other channels. In order to configure all four channels, each of
the four DIP switch and jumper banks must be configured to the desired setting.

To insure proper operation, all unused current outputs should be shorted using the supplied
shorting bars.

Table 3.47 Output Type DIP Switch and Jumper Options

Output Current/Voltage SWx-1 SWx-2 SWx-3 SWx-4 JP x01

Type Selection Position Position Position Position

OT 1 CURRENT 0-1mA UP UP UP UP 7 to 8 AND 5 to 6

OT 2 CURRENT -1 to +1mA UP UP DOWN UP 7 to 8 AND 5 to 6

OT 3 CURRENT 4 to 20mA UP DOWN UP UP 7 to 8 AND 3 to 4

AND 1 to 2

OT 4 VOLTAGE 0 to 10 V UP UP UP DOWN 5 to 6

OT 5 VOLTAGE -5 to +5V UP UP DOWN DOWN 7 to 8 AND 5 to 6

OT 6 VOLTAGE -10 to +10 UP DOWN UP DOWN 5 to 6

Table 3.48 Mode Selection

Mode SWx-5 SWx-6

NORMAL UP UP

TEST_MIN UP DOWN

90% of TEST_MAX DOWN UP

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-77

Operating Instructions

Table 3.48 Mode Selection

Mode SWx-5 SWx-6

RESERVED DOWN DOWN

Table 3.49 Time Out Selection

TIME OUT VALUE SW2-7 SW2-8

10 SECONDS UP UP

20 SECONDS UP DOWN

60 SECONDS DOWN UP

MAINTAIN LAST DOWN DOWN

The meter will hold its value for 10, 20, or 60 seconds, or until it receives a new
updated value.

If your program has more I/O modules than you are actually using, the meter will drop out
communications periodically to “look” for the other modules. To prevent this behavior, only
program the actual I/O modules you are using.

QUANTUM Q1000 Meter Keys

QUANTUM Q1000 meters with firmware version 3.02m and above include meter
keys. Earlier versions of the firmware do not support the MeterKey® feature. Keys
are updated as new firmware versions are released to support new functions.
Meter Keys are set at the SchlumbergerSema factory at the time of meter
manufacture and correspond to the meter features ordered.
The meter key settings are retained when the meter firmware is upgraded from a
3.x firmware to a higher firmware version.
Two package groups of meter functions may be ordered on a Q1000 meter. These
are the Basic Package and the Enhanced Package. Each of these standard
packages may be ordered with several additional optional features.
• The Basic Package which configures the Q1000 meter with functionality
similar to but exceeding the QUANTUM STQ meter includes 0.1% accuracy,
around 440 Kbytes of user memory, quad port communications, one standard
load profile with 24 channels, 32 I/O capability (with purchase of I/O modules
separately), System Loss Compensation - Basic, auxiliary power (optional),
one splitter communications cable and TOU (when available).
• The Enhanced Package includes the Basic Package with two standard load
profiles with 48 channels, 64 I/O capability (with purchase of I/O modules
separately), Voltage Quality and Harmonics detection, GPS time
synchronization, and choice of one of the advanced protocols.
These and many more features may be checked individually on the QUANTUM
Q1000 Hardware Specification Form when the meter is ordered.

3-78 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Firmware
The Q1000 was designed to be the most advanced meter in today's market. But
what about tomorrow? What features will be required in the future? With
deregulation and utility privatization changing the business climate of the
electricity industry, many needs will exist a few years from now that are not yet
definable today. For example, more protocols could be developed or maybe even a
universal protocol agreed upon. Also, newer power quality standards may be
instituted. To be prepared for this, we included downloadable firmware in the
meter. Downloadable firmware allows you to easily add functionality to the
Q1000. Table 3.50 describes the Q1000 meter firmware revisions.

Table 3.50 Firmware Revisions as of December 2001

Revision
Date Description
Number
1.01b June 1998 This was the first production version of the QUANTUM Q1000 that was released. The
Version 1.01b firmware was the first to be sent with the initial release of the
QUANTUM Q1000. The features listed were the first standard features of the
QUANTUM Q1000: 0.1% accuracy, quad port communications, user-configurable
memory, 1 standard load profile with 24 channels, an optional additional load profile
with another 24 channels, standard 32 I/O capability and an optional additional 32 I/
O capability (both with purchase of I/O module separately), system loss
compensation, optional auxiliary power, voltage quality, harmonics, two 1200-
115,200 bps COM ports, flexible display, thousands of quantities to select from, 16
configurable threshold alarms, 32 flexible self reads, and support for 50 or 60 Hertz
operation.

2.00a December 1998 This was the second production version of the QUANTUM Q1000. This version of
firmware was the first to include DNP 3.0 protocol.

2.03b May 1999 This was the third production version of firmware for the QUANTUM Q1000. This
firmware was the first to support Form 5 meters.

2.06e July 1999 This was the fourth production version of firmware for the QUANTUM Q1000. This
firmware included support of the 33,600 bps internal modem.

2.07a May 2000 This firmware version corrected a timing issue after a power down.

3.02m June 2000 This was the sixth revision of Q1000 firmware was release for production. This is the
first firmware the user is required to use PC-PRO+ 98 Version 2.0 or higher.
Improvements included: support for V2 and I2 quantities, subtractive totalization,
improved Advanced Protocol programming, expanded reconfigure support, Digital
State Inputs, some Last Self Read register display options, IEC 60870-5-102 protocol
support, DNP 3.0 conversion service 11 support, GPS time synchronization, software
file import and export, MeterKeys, some primary value display, Analog Output
improvements, SLC corrections, and optical port cable support from different vendors.

3.03a July 2000 This was the seventh revision of Q1000 firmware was release for production. A
calculation was revised to the firmware that computes VA Arithmetic. No other
changes were made to the firmware code.

3.03e December 2000 This was the eighth revision of Q1000 firmware was release for production. This
firmware was released to improve the performance of the GAL and PAL component in
the meter. The calibration constants are now stored in the Main board.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-79

Operating Instructions

Table 3.50 Firmware Revisions as of December 2001

Revision
Date Description
Number
4.01i January 2001 This ninth firmware version of the QUANTUM Q1000 is the first to support MODBUS
Protocol and HHF File retrievals. This is the first firmware that is used with PC-PRO+
98 Version 2.1. Low current meters are supported. SLC programming moved into
PC-PRO+ 98. New I/O bindings supported. RS-485 supported; multi-drop supported.

5.x a December 2001 This version of the Technical Reference Guide has been updated to include the
abilities of this upcoming firmware. This tenth firmware version added TOU, phone
line sharing, expanded reconfigures, DNP 3.0 protocol improvements, import/export
DST table, DST for world, MODBUS protocol improvements, CPU timing
improvements, optical port baud rate up to 19,200 bps and new TOU calendar.

a
The final version of the 5.x firmware was not available at publishing time.

Firmware Upgrades
The internal instruction set for the Q1000, or firmware, can be upgraded without
changing any physical hardware. The firmware is downloaded to the meter using
the Firmware Download Access Password and a terminal emulator program. A
SchlumbergerSema supplied file is required to perform this operation.
There are two classes of firmware upgrades; those versions that can be upgraded
directly to the latest firmware, and those that must be downgraded to a previous
version before the upgrade to the latest version can be accomplished. Table 3.51
shows these categories.

Table 3.51 Firmware Upgrades

Version Special Instructions

2.x to 4.01i You can upgrade directly from 2.x firmware (or lower) to 4.x firmware (or
higher). However, you must remember that 4.01i firmware requires
PC-PRO+ 98 Version 2.0 or higher.

2.x to 5.x You can upgrade directly from 2.x firmware (or lower) to 5.x firmware.

3.x to 4.x The method of downloading firmware requires both the existing revision
and the new revision to exist in the meter at the same time. The 3.x
firmware is too large to exist with 4.x; therefore, you cannot upgrade
directly from 3.x firmware to 4.01i firmware. You must first downgrade to
2.x firmware and then upgrade the firmware from 2.x to 4.x (or higher)
firmware as described above.

3.x to 5.x The method of downloading firmware requires both the existing revision
and the new revision to exist in the meter at the same time. The 3.x
firmware is too large to exist with 5.x; therefore, you cannot upgrade
directly from 3.x firmware to 5.x firmware. You must first downgrade to 2.x
firmware and then upgrade the firmware from 2.x to 5.x (or higher)
firmware as described above.

3-80 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Table 3.51 Firmware Upgrades

Version Special Instructions

4.x to 5.x A new loader process allows you to upgrade directly from 4.x firmware to
5.x firmware.

Firmware Upgrade Process

Specific terminal emulator commands or processes refer to the Microsoft
Accessory Program “Hyperterminal” (hereafter “HT”). Other terminal emulators
may vary in appearance, though function should be acceptable.

This process will completely reset the Q1000 and all data will be erased. The meter configuration
will revert to a default configuration. I/O bindings are retained, however.

User notes are located at the end of this section. The process is as follows:
1 To increase download reliability, copy the new firmware file to the PC’s hard-
drive. Remember where this file is written; it will need to be accessed in step
13.
2 Using PC-PRO+ 98, log on to meter.
3 Read and record all desired meter data.
4 Under “Communication Setup” in PC-PRO+ 98, reprogram meter with one
communication port defined with “LOADER” protocol (the default baud rate is
9600 bps; however this can be changed later). This is the port that will be used
for firmware downloading.

At least one port must always be defined as Mini-DLMS. If an internal modem is installed, do not
use port 2 for the download process.

5 After initializing meter, log off meter and close PC-PRO+ 98.
6 Open any terminal emulation program that supports X-Modem file transfer
protocol.

If using HT, and a Connection Description has already been created, use the open function. The
first time this process is performed, a Connection Description must be created. A “Phone
Number” dialog box will appear; change the “Connect Using” field to the appropriate COM port
on your computer and then click OK.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-81

Operating Instructions

7 Configure the following communications parameters:

Baud 9600

Data Bits 8

Parity None

Stop Bits 1 (this parameter is ignored)

Flow Control None

(This dialog may be re-edited by selecting File | Properties and then clicking
the Configure button.)
8 Select File | Properties and then select the Settings tab. On the Emulation
dialog, select TTY emulation.

For HT use the two phone icons in the toolbar at the top of the window to connect and
disconnect.

9 Using the “LOADER” port configured above, connect to the meter using the
terminal emulator. Click the Connect toolbar button and press the ENTER key.
A prompt similar to the following should be returned:
“Loader 4.01i: (9600):->”
The number following “Loader” is the firmware revision currently installed in
the Q1000 meter (4.01i: in the above example). The number in parenthesis is
the current baud rate of the meter port being used.

The Help Menu outlines the “LOADER” user options available. It is available by entering “HELP”
or any other non command character. These commands are not case sensitive. The “LOADER”
commands shown in Table 3.52 are available. To issue a command, type the command and press
the ENTER key.

Table 3.52 LOADER Commands

Command Description

HELP Display menu options

BAUD Change baud rate

PASSWORD Enter meter firmware download password for

download authorization (or press ENTER if no
password is programmed in the meter).

DL Download new firmware

EXIT Terminate password authorization

3-82 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

10 The communications baud rate can now be increased to facilitate the

download. A rate of 57,600 bps is recommended (refer to the note below for
more information).
Type the “BAUD” command and select the meter baud rate to use (follow the
screen prompts).

After changing the meter baud rate, some terminal emulators, including HyperTerminal, may
require a disconnect, change of terminal emulator baud rate, and then a reconnect to change the
emulator’s baud rate. Supported baud rates can be computer-specific; if you experience
problems downloading at 57600 bps, lower your baud rate until the download can be completed.

To change the baud rate of HT, use the disconnect phone icon. From the tool
bar, select “Properties” (the hand holding the paper); then from the “Phone
Number” tab, click the “Configuration” button. Change the baud rate to match
that selected for the meter. Next, connect to the meter (use phone icon).
The meter and the emulator are now talking at the faster baud rate.
11 Issue the “PASSWORD” command and enter the Firmware Download Access
Password (or press ENTER if no password is programmed in the meter).

The Password is case sensitive. After the password is accepted, a “DL” can be issued at any
time.

12 Issue a “DL”.
The following should occur:
The meter will display the following message:
“FIRMWARE LOADER:”
“DOWNLOADING!”
“(AWAITING START)”
The emulator will display messages similar to:
• “Stopping.”
• “Killing task “MAIN” OK”
• “Killing task “NETD” OK”
• “Killing task “SWIT” OK”
• “Killing task “DLM0” OK”
• “Killing task “DLM1” OK”
• “Killing task “LCDT” OK”
• “Killing task “DSPT” OK”
• “All Functions Stopped”
• “Ready to receive binary file”
• “Make sure you are using the Xmodem protocol.”

If using HT, small squares will begin to appear on the screen as the emulator
waits for a binary file to be specified for sending. Other emulators may
respond differently when “waiting”.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-83

Operating Instructions

13 Select the appropriate file path (for the firmware file that you will use to
upgrade the meter’s firmware) and “SEND” the binary file. Be sure that when
the file is selected for transfer that the transfer protocol “Xmodem” is also
selected.
If using HT, select “Transfer” from the menu bar and then the “Send File”
command. A dialog box will prompt for the file path. Enter the path or use the
browser. Also select the “Xmodem” protocol in this box.

This step is the last command needed to start the firmware download process. The following
information details the steps that the meter will now perform.

14 The last line of the meter display message should change to:
“STARTED”
15 During file download, HT will display a dialog box with file transfer data, a fuel
gage and approximate download time. This display will vary from emulator to
emulator.
16 When the file download is complete the following messages should appear on
the screen:
• “End of file reached>”
• “Download Results”
• “Xmodem packets received: (XXXX)”
• “Data blocks received: (XXXX)”
• “Total firmware bytes: (XXXX)”
• “The file was successfully downloaded!”
• “The new firmware is now in spare flash.”
• “Committing new firmware to executable flash”
• “The meter will reboot in ~90 seconds, watch the meter’s display”
17 The meter display should change to:
• “COMMITTING FILE!”
• “PAGES LEFT: XX”
• “PLEASE WAIT”
18 The “PAGES LEFT” field will count down as data is copied from spare memory
to the firmware executable area of memory.

This final 90 second period is the most critical portion of the firmware download process. The
new firmware is now copying itself on top of the old firmware. If the Q1000 experiences a power
outage during this period, the meter will probably need to be returned to the factory.

19 The meter will start up in customer default mode. The communications ports
will be set up with Mini-DLMS (PC-PRO+ 98) protocol.
20 Disconnect and Exit the terminal emulation program and launch PC-PRO+ 98.
21 Logon to the Q1000 meter and program the meter as desired.

3-84 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Operating Instructions

Helpful Hints
1 When connected to a Q1000 with HT, communications can be confirmed
simply by issuing a RETURN. The emulator should respond with another
prompt.
2 After a “DL” has been issued, a “CTRL X” (the Xmodem command for cancel)
will abort the operation. The baud rate will revert to 9600 bps.
3 After a “DL” has been issued, the user has approximately 5 minutes to send a
file. If a file is not sent within this time period the meter will time out. The baud
rate will revert to 9600 bps.
4 When connected to a Q1000 with HT, if the keyboard responds sporadically
(i.e. incorrect characters, long keyboard-to-screen delay times, etc.), check the
computer-meter connections. Use of an RS-232 switch may also have the same
result.
5 When using HT, it is helpful to enable the connect/disconnect beep. The check
box can be found under the tool bar icon “Properties” (the hand holding the
paper), under the “Settings” tab.
6 When downloading firmware the recommended baud rate is 57,600 bps. If this
speed does not work try a lower rate. At 57,600 bps, the download process will
take 8-10 minutes.

CT/VT Correction
CT/VT Correction is a metering scheme that corrects for the inaccuracies of the
instrument current and voltage transformers. This feature allows metering points
to be metered with a higher accuracy metering system. The correction depends on
the instrument transformer characteristics as well as the load characteristics. The
Q1000 allows for a single point correction; therefore, a point that would be
considered as the normal burden for the transformer should be selected.
PC-PRO+ 98 allows the instrument transformer’s ratio and phase angle correction
factors to be programmed into the meter. The transformer’s correction factors are
obtained from the manufacturer’s test cards shipped with the instrument
transformer.

When using PC-PRO+ 98 programming software to program the CT/VT Correction into a Q1000
meter, care should be taken to ensure that the correct units are used - Minutes. Conversions
from other units are given below and in the PC-PRO+ 98 help files.

CT and VT manufacturers can express the phase angle correction in radians, a

percentage, or minutes on their test card. When entering phase angle correction
values into your program using PC-PRO+ 98, be sure to enter values as minutes.
The following formulas can be used to calculate the appropriate units.
Where:
X = phase angle given in minutes
Y = phase angle given in radians

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 3-85

Operating Instructions

To convert to minutes:

Y ´ 360 degrees ´ 60 minutes-

Phase Angle = ----------------------------------------------------------------------
2 P radians

To convert to radians:

X ´ 2 P radians
Phase Angle = --------------------------------------------------------------
360 degrees ´ 60 minutes

To convert from percent to minutes:

·
1% = .01 = ( 1 – 0.01 ) = .99 minutes

·
5% = .005 = ( 1 – 0.005 ) = 0.995 minutes

3-86 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 4 Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter
Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

This section provides more detailed information on the capabilities and functions
of the standard and extended load profile (or mass memory), Time-of-Use (TOU),
meter time, event log, and event summary in the Q1000 meter.
• Load profile allows one or more integrated meter quantities to be saved
periodically for later system retrieval. The meter has two independent
standard load profiles, each of which can store up to 24 channels of 16 bit
resolution pulse data (or 65,535 pulses per interval). Eight additional extended
load profiles are also available.
• TOU provides the ability to record meter information in new quantities using
different billing charges based on the time of consumption by creating and
applying TOU schedules.
• The QUANTUM Q1000 meter maintains accurate timekeeping. In today’s
electricity market, the need to maintain the same time across a population of
meters spread over a wide geographic area is becoming even more important.
The Q1000 meter allows a wide flexibility to synchronize the times of these
meters.
• The event log is a collection of event records that can be used to monitor the
occurrence of certain conditions in the meter.
• The event summary tool monitors the occurrence of certain events without
adding a record to the event log. This can be used to monitor an event that
occurs frequently without needing each date and time occurrence to be
logged.
Each of these components is fully described in the following sections of this
chapter.

Memory Allocation
The meter has around 440 Kbytes of battery backed RAM in a RAM file system that
is used for data storage that can be configured by the user.1 This user memory can
be apportioned among several meter components according to their
configurations. The components that can be configured to use more or less
memory include energy, demand, load profile, harmonics, voltage quality, TOU,
and self read.
For example, all of the memory could be allocated to one load profile; it could all
be allocated to harmonics, or it could be split with 50K in one load profile, 100K in
another, 50K in energy, and so forth.

1. This user memory size assumes that the user has 5.x firmware and PC-PRO+ 98 version 2.3. Older firmware
versions allowed more user memory.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 4-1

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

The memory is allocated when the meter is restarted after initialization. The
PC-PRO+ 98 programming software utilizes a memory bar the shows the user how
much memory will be required by the current state of the Q1000 program
configuration. The Q1000 can be configured to perform a large number of
functions, each of which take up a variable amount of memory. Previous meters
allocated specific amounts of memory for certain components. The Q1000
allocates memory dynamically allowing the user to maximize the meter’s
functionality at a given location. Later, if the needs for a site change, the Q1000
meter can be reprogrammed to meet these needs.
For this reason, the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software gives you constant
feedback on the amount of memory your program is currently consuming. This
feedback is a Meter Memory bar at the bottom of the dialog indicating the amount
of meter memory currently required for the configuration. As long as the bar is in
the blue region, there is sufficient meter memory for the configuration. If the bar is
in the red region, the memory requirements for your configuration have exceeded
the amount of memory available in the meter. You must modify your configuration
to display the bar in the blue region only. If you attempt to save a program file
while the bar is in the red region, the Out of Device Resources dialog is displayed.
You are not allowed to continue configuring the meter if the amount of memory
your program requires exceeds 200% of the meter's memory. If memory usage
exceeds 200%, the 200% Warning is displayed to indicate that you cannot add
additional quantities to the configuration. Reduce the memory usage to under 200%
to continue modifying your program. It must be less than or equal to 100% before
you can save the program.

Standard Load Profile Configuration

The following attributes can be independently configured for each standard load
profile component:
• interval length
• number of channels
• number of intervals to store
• minimum outage length in seconds
• option to use the global EOI source for this load profile
• pulse weights for each load profile channel
• quantity to record for each load profile channel
• option to not update load profile registers during test mode.

Interval Lengths
The interval length for each standard load profile in the Q1000 is programmable: 2,
3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20 or 30 seconds or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30 or 60 minutes.
The interval length is the same for all 24 channels in the profile.
A second set of 24 channels is available in the 2nd standard load profile and can
use an interval length independent of the first group of channels. This capability
provides for up to 48 channels of recording in the two standard load profiles. The
interval length for all load profile information is independent of the interval length
for displayed demand quantities or harmonic recording information.

4-2 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Channel Configuration
The channel configuration for the Q1000 is completely user programmable. The
meter can be configured to have up to 24 channels of interval load profile data in
standard load profile #1 using one interval length and up to 24 additional channels
in standard load profile #2 using another interval length. The quantity recorded on
a channel is independent. For example, a quantity can be recorded that is not
configured for an energy register.
Following are some examples of the many quantities that can be assigned as
interval pulse channels:
• Watthours delivered and received
• Qhours
• Varhours lagging and leading
• Vahours per quadrant
• Amp-hours, Amp-squared-hours
• Volt-hours, Volt-squared-hours
• Compensated and Uncompensated Watthours and Varhours
• Fundamental Watthours and Varhours
• %THD V-hours and %THD A-hours per phase
• pulse input energy values
• analog input energy values1
Table 4.1 is a chart of load profile memory channels and storage capacity for
selected interval lengths and channels:
Time (in days) for recording to fill the around 440 KB of memory. For example, 10
channels of 5 minute interval data fills 500 KB in 56 days.

In Revision 5.x firmware, with its additional capabilities, there are only around 440,000 bytes of
storage available to the user. The number of bytes is (10 + 2 times the number of channels).
Therefore, with 24 channels it takes 58 bytes of storage per interval. The maximum number of
days of storage—assuming that only one load profile is being stored—can be determined by the
formula shown below.

440000
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- = Max. # days of storage
24 ´ 60 ´ 60
( 10 + [ 2 ´ Number of Channels ] ) ´ æ ----------------------------------------------------------------ö
è Interval Length in Secondsø

1. Analog inputs are not available in the current release of the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for
a future release.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 4-3

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Table 4.1 shows examples of the standard load profile data recording capacity with
Firmware version 5.x.1

Table 4.1 Standard Load Profile Data Recording Capacity (in days)

Interval Length (minutes)

1 5 10 15 30 60

1 25 127 254 381 763 1527

Number of Recording Channels
2 21 109 218 327 654 1309

3 19 95 190 286 572 1145

4 16 84 169 254 509 1018

5 15 76 152 229 458 916

10 10 50 101 152 305 611

20 6 30 61 91 183 366

40 3 16 33 50 101 203

Pulse Constants
For each data channel, the pulse constant is programmable as a floating point
number in unit-hours per pulse. Since load profile always stores secondary
information, the pulse constants apply only to secondary rated readings.

Example Calculation of kWh Pulse Weight

A Q1000 meter, 120V, Class 20, 3-element, Form 9S, is programmed so that the kWh
aggregate (sum of phases A, B, and C) is recorded into load profile storage. The
maximum 16-bit data resolution is desired for 15 minute intervals.
First, we must calculate the maximum watthour accumulation during 15 minute
intervals.
Wh, Max = 120V X 20A X 3 phases X 0.25 hours
Wh, Max = 1800 watthours (or use the expected maximum demand)
The maximum number of pulses is 65,535; therefore, the smallest pulse weight
(PWMin) that can be used is:

PW Min = æ --------------------ö = 0.0275 Wh per Pulse

1800Wh
è 65535P ø

Example 2: Calculation of Pulse Weights for Vh

A 110V, 10A, 3-element Q1000 meter is programmed. The data resolution interval is
1 minute.

1. This data was calculated using PC-PRO+ 98 version 2.3 and Firmware 5.x. Older versions of software and
firmware may allow more recording time.

4-4 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

First, we calculate the maximum volthour accumulation, assuming the maximum

secondary volts on each phase will be 115.
Vh, Max = 115volts X 1/60 hours
Vh, Max = 1.9 volthours
The minimum pulse weight to produce 65535 pulses at 115 volts in one minute
would be:

1.9
--------------- = 0.00003volt – Hours per Pulse
65535

Standard Load Profile Specifications

Bit Resolution
Each channel of the load profile is stored with 16 bit data resolution. The
equivalent pulse count resolution per interval is 65,535.

Data Storage
The Q1000 can flag an interval when a power outage exceeds a specified number of
seconds. Other statuses include short and long intervals, time adjustments,
Daylight Savings Time, saturation, clock error, checksum error, TOU rates active at
the end of the interval, and an indication if the interval was ended by an external
end of interval signal.

Extended Load Profile Specifications

Extended Load Profiles are the eight profiles that are optionally available in
addition to the standard Load Profiles. The extended profiles are numbered 3
through 10. In order to support Extended Load Profiles, the Q1000 meter must
have either been ordered from the factory with the Extended Load Profile option,
or have been upgraded using MeterKey. The firmware required to support
Extended Load Profile is version 3.x and beyond. For example, if you have a
Q1000 with version 2.0 firmware, you cannot upgrade to Extended Load Profile
without first upgrading the meter firmware. For specific details on upgrading the
Q1000 to support Extended Load Profile, contact your SchlumbergerSema Sales
Representative.

Meter Time
Timekeeping
The QUANTUM Q1000 real time clock is either synchronized to line frequency or
its own crystal. The crystal allows accurate time keeping to be maintained in the
event of an outage or a location with line varying frequency.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 4-5

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Table 4.2 Time Accuracy

Time Accuracy Temperature

+/-0.0022% -10°C to +45°C

+/-0.02% -40°C to +85°C

The time in the meter can be updated via communication ports at any time using a
variety of methods.

Adjusting Meter Time

The time in the meter can be adjusted in several ways. Meter initialization will set
the time in the meter to the time in the PC being used. In the event of an
initialization, the time can be set to any time regardless of the previous meter
setting. Initialization clears all meter data.1
A second method for changing the time in the meter is a time adjustment; this
adjustment can be made in several ways. The programming software can be used;
or one of several Advanced Protocols can be used; or the GPS time
synchronization capability can be used. When a time adjustment is performed, the
meter’s time can be changed forward or backward up to one hour each time;
multiple time adjustments can be done.2 During a time adjustment, demand and
load profile data are maintained but are modified to accommodate the time
change. In this way, the load profile structure remains consistent in spite of the
time change.
If time is moved backward, the ending time for the current interval remains the
same as it was before the adjustment, so it will simply be extended to make a
larger interval. When the real time reaches the time for end of interval, the meter
will begin with normal interval lengths again. The extended interval will be flagged
to indicate a long time adjustment.
If time is moved forward, the old interval ending times will be maintained and
empty intervals will be added to fill in the time that was skipped. Each affected
interval will be flagged to indicate a short time adjustment.
Additional time adjustment methods are included in several of the Advanced
Protocols. Refer to the respective protocol for more information.
GPS time synchronization allows for sophisticated control and setup of time
changes. Frequencies of daily, hourly, and 5 minutes are supported. 61 world time
zones are supported. Up to 5 GPS message formats may be simultaneously
monitored, and four time adjustment windows may be configured. Time can be
adjusted up to +/- 30 minutes in this method.

Time Synchronization
The internal clock in the QUANTUM Q1000 meter can be synchronized to an
external time reference in several ways. Since the meter's internal clock resolution
is in milliseconds, the meter's firmware supports up to millisecond resolution
(maximum resolution format: hh:mm:ss.sss) depending on the time resolution

1. Billing data may be retained or discarded using a prompt in the initialization process.
2. Each method of time adjustment has its own abilities. The maximum time change allowed in one adjustment is
one hour. Some methods may allow less time change in a single adjustment, but multiple adjustments are
allowed.

4-6 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

output of the external time reference. Communication between the external time
reference and the meter is available via the optical port or one of the two
communication (COM) ports.
There are five external time references that can be used to synchronize the Q1000's
internal clock:
1 The Global Positioning Satellite (GPS) is one of five external time
synchronization methods that can be used to synchronize the Q1000's internal
clock. The GPS protocol and Mini-DLMS protocol can co-exist simultaneously
on the same communication port.
The NMEA 0183 version 2.30, an ASCII based protocol, has been implemented
as the GPS time synchronization protocol. This protocol was chosen because
it is the standard for many GPS devices on the market.
2 The second form of external synchronization is a “black box” that converts
another signal (pulse, radio message, SCADA message, etc.) into the NMEA
message: $TIMESYNC*12. This message will synchronize the meter's time
with millisecond resolution for top-of-the-hour signals. This “black box” time
converter solution could enable a utility to use existing time broadcast
technology to implement meter time synchronization.
The NMEA 0183 protocol is a unidirectional protocol. There are two types of
devices connected to the network, Talkers and Listeners. Talkers are defined
as the “originators of the messages across an NMEA 0183 link” and Listeners
are “the recipients of the messages across an interconnecting link.” Use a
NMEA Listener connected to the Q1000 via any communications port to
deliver the time message to the meter. The meter accepts up to 5 configurable
time address formats. Only the address formats configured by the user in
PC-PRO+ 98 will be accepted for verification, implementation, and meter time
synchronization.
3 The third external time synchronization method is in PC-PRO+ 98. Use this
software to go online with the Q1000 meter and reconfigure the time in the
meter forward or backward up to one hour. This process uses the computer’s
time to synchronize the meter. This method also allows the user to offset the
new meter time from the computer time.
4 The fourth method to externally change the meter’s time is to use one of
several billing collection software packages to change the time after data
collection.
5 The fifth external time synchronization method is similar to the second
method. Use a SCADA RTU to send a GPS time message to synchronize the
meter’s time.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 4-7

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

The following are parameters needed for the time synchronization function. These
parameters are configurable using PC-PRO+ 98. Refer to "Communications Setup"
on page 3-34 and the PC-PRO+ 98 help files for more information.

GPS Time Synchronization

GPS (Global Positioning System) Time Synchronization is configured through the
Communications Setup component of the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software.
Figure 4.1 shows the Time Synchronization tab of the Communications Setup
component.
The resolution of time sent to the meter by the GPS device is dependent on the
capability of the GPS device. Some devices are accurate to within several seconds
while others are accurate to fractions of a second.

Figure 4.1 Time Synchronization Configuration

Using the fields on this tab, you can synchronize the meter’s clock to the time in
the GPS device. GPS time synchronization devices that use the NMEA 0183
protocol can connect to a Q1000 meter communications port that is configured for
the Mini-DLMS protocol and time synchronization.
When you select the Mini-DLMS protocol for the optical port or one of the serial
ports, a Time Synchronization checkbox is displayed. When you check this box,
the Time Synchronization tab is added to the Communications Setup dialog. Only
one port may be configured for time synchronization. The Time Synchronization
tab indicates which port has been enabled for time synchronization.
This tab allows you to configure four time adjustment windows to define the
actions the meter will take when a time difference (between the meter’s time and
the synchronization message time) is detected.:

4-8 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

• No Change—If the time difference is less than or equal to the value entered,
the meter’s time is not adjusted. The range is 0 to 2000 milliseconds (2
seconds).
• Time Change No Logging—If the time difference is less than or equal to the
value entered, the meter’s time is adjusted, but the adjustment is not logged—
the meter will not record the adjustment. The time change is “feathered-in” a
little at a time. The adjustment takes place at the rate of 8 milliseconds per
second until the adjustment is complete. The range is 1 to 500 milliseconds (1/
2 second) and must be at least one millisecond greater than the value entered
for the No Change field.
• Small Time Change—If the time difference is less than or equal to the value
entered, the meter’s time is adjusted and the meter logs an adjustment. You can
configure the Event Log to track these time adjustments. The range is 2 to
1,800,000 milliseconds (30 minutes) and must be at least one millisecond
greater than the value entered for the Time Change (No Logging) field.
• Large Time Change—If the time difference is less than or equal to the value
entered , the meter’s time is adjusted and the meter logs an adjustment. If a
time difference is greater than the number of milliseconds set here, the
message is considered outside the time synchronization window and no
adjustment is made or logged by the meter. The range is 3 to 1,800,000
milliseconds (30 minutes) and must be at least one millisecond greater than
the value entered for Small Time Change.

Time Synchronization Example

This example shows the Q1000 meter’s action if you enter the values listed below
for Time Adjustment Windows.
Settings for the Time Adjustment Windows:

No Change (0 to 2,000 ms): 50 ms

Time Change No Logging (1 to 500 ms): 100 ms

This value must be 1 ms greater than No Change.

Small Time Change (2 to 1,800,000 ms): 500 ms

This value must be 1 ms greater than Time Change No Logging.

Large Time Change (3 to 1,800,000 ms): 2000 ms

This v(alue must be 1 ms greater than Small Time Change.

The table below shows the action the Q1000 meter will take if the example values
listed above are entered in the Time Adjustment Window fields and the time
difference is as shown in column one.

Message Time and Time Adjustment Meter’s Action

Meter Time Difference Window Used

40 ms No Change The meter time is not adjusted.

90 ms Time Change No Logging The meter time is adjusted, but

not logged.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 4-9

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Message Time and Time Adjustment Meter’s Action

Meter Time Difference Window Used

450 ms Small Time Change The meter time is adjusted and

logged.

1500 ms Large Time Change The meter time is adjusted and

logged.

3000 ms Not used The time synchronization message

is outside the Large Time Change
window. No adjustment is made
and no logging occurs.

Figure 4.2 shows how GPS time synchronization messages are handled.

Large Time Change

Small Time Change Window

Time Change No Logging

No Change Window

Timeline

Synchronization
Messages A B C D E F G H I J

Figure 4.2 GPS Synchronization Message Timeline Examples

Message Time Adjustment Action

Window Used

A Not Used The time synchronization message is outside the

Large Time Change window. No adjustment is
made and no logging occurs.

B Large Time Change The meter time is adjusted and logged.

C Small Time Change The meter time is adjusted and logged.

D Time Change No Logging The meter time is adjusted, but not logged.

E No Change The meter time is not adjusted.

F No Change The meter time is not adjusted.

4-10 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Message Time Adjustment Action

Window Used

G Time Change No Logging The meter time is adjusted, but not logged.

H Small Time Change The meter time is adjusted and logged.

I Large Time Change The meter time is adjusted and logged.

J Not Used The time synchronization message is outside the

Large Time Change window. No adjustment is
made and no logging occurs.

Once a synchronization message is received inside the synchronization window,

the synchronization window is then closed. This prevents multiple
synchronization within the same window.
If a complete synchronization window passes without a time synchronization
message being received, a non-fatal error LOG message is generated.
Time adjustments are made on the next odd second after time synchronization.
Time synchronization will not occur at the hour of DST. When the programmed
hour of daylight savings time is reached, the meter will ignore the time messages
for the meter and will allow time synchronization in the next hour.
The internal propagation delays will be handled by the meter; external propagation
delay between the external device and the meter may be accounted for in the
PC-PRO+ 98 program file configured by the user.

Message Handling
GPS Time Synchronization can be enabled hourly, daily, or every 5 minutes
depending on user selection. The initial parameters for the time synchronization
function from the user are five, three-letter address formats and their
corresponding field numbers for each address format (example below). The user
will be allowed to select from a list of approved address formats and will be able to
enter an address format and time field of their choice.
For a port configured as a time synchronization port, normal port operation
continues until a dollar sign character ($) is seen. The Time Synchronization
function will then be launched to capture and save the internal meter time at that
moment. The firmware will collect the complete message and then check to see if
the incoming message contains a user selected address format. Acceptable
address formats that contain a Universal Time Coordinate (UTC) in the predefined
time field are allowed. The UTC is a time scale based on the rotation of the earth.
If the address is acceptable, the checksum is verified, and the message is then
parsed for the UTC. The external delay from the timing device to the meter can be
entered by the user and is added to the UTC of the incoming message. The
captured meter time and the altered message time are then compared. The
difference between the times will determine which time adjustment window the
meter will use in its time change.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 4-11

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Example of default Address and Time Format Strings:

Figure 4.3 Time Synchronization Message Configuration

These configurations are common UTC implementations in many GPS devices.

The dialog in Figure 4.3 is used for advanced configuration as defined in the
documentation of your GPS device. These fields define the time synchronization
message format that is sent from your GPS timing device to the Q1000 meter. The
most common address formats and times are used as defaults.
The meter uses the first Address Format and Time Field when searching the time
synchronization strings. If the first one is not found, the meter tries the second one,
and so forth. This feature allows the user to utilize up to 5 different GPS devices
with varying time implementations in one meter program.
The Address Format fields are used to find the valid incoming strings for time
information. The Time Fields correspond to the number of commas counted over
in the time message to find the time field.
The following is an example of an actual GGA message:
$GPGGA,195853,3445.984,N,08302.365,W,1,03,5.1,265.8,M,-31.7,M,,*7F*
In this example:
• $ = the GPS Time Sync Message trigger for the Q1000 meter.
• GGA = the GPS Message Type (see the next section for GPS message formats
based on the message type).
• 195853 = GPS time information for this message.
• 3445.984,N,08302.365,W,1,03,5.1,265.8,M,-31.7,M,,*7F* = miscellaneous
GPS information such as latitude and longitude that is not used by the Q1000
meter.

4-12 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Example Message Formats

For standard NMEA 0183 sentence descriptions, see the NMEA website
(www.nmea.org).

GGA Message Format

GGA - Global Positioning System Fix Data Time, position and fix related data for a
GPS receiver.
$--GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx
where:
-- = unused characters
GGA = GPS message type
hhmmss.ss = UTC of position (time)
llll.ll = latitude of position (not used by the Q1000 meter)
a = N(orth) or S(outh) (not used by the Q1000 meter)
yyyyy.yy = Longitude of position (not used by the Q1000 meter)
a = E(ast) or W(est) (not used by the Q1000 meter)
x = GPS Quality indicator (0=no fix, 1=GPS fix, 2=Dif. GPS fix) (not used by the Q1000
meter)
xx = number of satellites in use (not used by the Q1000 meter)
x.x = horizontal dilution of precision (not used by the Q1000 meter)
x.x = Antenna altitude above mean-sea-level (not used by the Q1000 meter)
M = units of antenna altitude (in meters) (not used by the Q1000 meter)
x.x = Geoidal separation (not used by the Q1000 meter)
M = units of geoidal separation (in meters) (not used by the Q1000 meter)
x.x = Age of Differential GPS data (seconds) (not used by the Q1000 meter)
xxxx = Differential reference station ID (not used by the Q1000 meter)

GLL Message Format

GLL - Geographic Position, Latitude / Longitude Latitude and Longitude of present
vessel position, time of position fix and status.
$--GLL,lll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,hhmmss.ss,A
where:
-- = unused characters
GLL = GPS message type
llll.ll = Latitude of position (not used by the Q1000 meter)
a = N(orth) or S(outh) (not used by the Q1000 meter)
yyyyy.yy = Longitude of position (not used by the Q1000 meter)
a = E(ast) or W(est) (not used by the Q1000 meter)
hhmmss.ss = UTC of position (time)
A = status: A = valid data (not used by the Q1000 meter)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 4-13

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

RMC Message Format

RMC - Recommended minimum specific GPS/Transit data
$--RMC,225446,A,4916.45,N,12311.12,W,000.5,054.7,191194,020.3,E*68
where:
-- = unused characters
RMC = GPS message type
225446 = Time of fix 22:54:46 UTC (time)
A = Navigation receiver warning A = OK, V = warning (not used by the Q1000 meter)
4916.45,N = Latitude 49 degrees 16.45 minutes North (not used by the Q1000 meter)
12311.12,W = Longitude 123 degrees 11.12 minutes West (not used by the Q1000 meter)
000.5 = Speed over ground, Knots (not used by the Q1000 meter)
054.7 = Course Made Good, True (not used by the Q1000 meter)
191194 = Date of fix 19 November 1994 (not used by the Q1000 meter)
020.3,E = Magnetic variation 20.3 degrees East (not used by the Q1000 meter)
*68 = mandatory checksum (not used by the Q1000 meter)

ZDA Message Format

ZDA - Time & Date UTC, day, month, year, and local time zone.
$--ZDA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx
where:
-- = unused characters
ZDA = GPS message format
hhmmss.ss = UTC (time)
xx = Day, 01 to 31 (not used by the Q1000 meter)
xx = Month, 01 to 12 (not used by the Q1000 meter)
xxxx = Year (not used by the Q1000 meter)
xx = Local zone description, 00 to +/- 13 hours (not used by the Q1000 meter)
xx = Local zone minutes description (same sign as hours) (not used by the Q1000
meter)

GPS Port Baud Rate Options

Often it is desirable to use the auto baud feature of a port, especially when the port
will be used both as a GPS time synchronization port and a Mini-DLMS protocol
port. A requirement of auto baud detection in the Q1000 meter is that the first
character received contains an odd number of logic “1”s. The standard NMEA 0183
protocol's first character is a '$' which contains an even number of logic “1”s.
Three scenarios for configuring the port’s baud rate are discussed:
• Often GPS devices will only support one baud rate. In this case, the port will
have to be configured to match the GPS device baud rate. Older GPS devices
standardized on 4800 baud, but newer versions provide more flexibility.
• With some other “Black Box” time synchronization devices the baud rate is
flexible. In this case the port should be configured to match the capabilities of
the time synchronization device.

4-14 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Data Backup During Power Outage

During AC power outages, the real-time clock and RAM are powered by a
removable battery. This lithium cell (2/3A) has a 10 year shelf life. Carry-over
capacity of the Q1000 battery is at least 180 days.

Auxiliary Power Backup

Loss of power to the voltage terminals normally results in a meter powering down.
With the Q1000’s optional Auxiliary Power Supply, the meter maintains power to
the electronics through a power outage while the AC or DC auxiliary terminals are
powered.

Event Log
An event is the occurrence of a programmed condition. Each event has an
associated logic state which is either ON or OFF. The Q1000 meter can record
several kinds of events. Using the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software, users can
choose which events are to be logged.
The event log is a collection of event records that can be used to monitor the
occurrence of certain conditions in the meter. The event log in the Q1000 allows
the user to record predefined events with the date and time of each occurrence
(see "Event Configuration" on page 3-53). Up to 200 event records may be
recorded. The event log is stored in battery backed RAM.
The event log is programmable to be a circular or a non-circular file. If the event
log is programmed to be a circular or wrap-around file, the most current 200 events
are always retained. For a non-circular file, the event log fills up the 200 events and
then must be cleared before new events are recorded.
While logged on to the Q1000 meter, you can use the Communications | Reset
Activity Status option to clear the event log.

Event Summaries
Also available in the Q1000 are event summaries. An event summary is another tool
for monitoring the occurrence of certain events without having to add a record to
the event log. This feature can be used to monitor an event that occurs frequently if
the user does not need each date and time occurrence. The event summary
reports the date and time of the first occurrence and the date and time of the last
occurrence and the number occurrences since the last event log reset. Sixteen
event summaries are available. They are configured in PC-PRO+ 98 in the Event
Configuration component.
Below is a list of the possible events:
• Daylight Savings Time (before and after entry and exit)—
• Automatic Time Adjustment—The meter’s internal time was automatically
adjusted.
• Clock Error—The internal clock error occurred.
• Demand EOI—A demand end-of-interval occurred.
• Demand Resets—remote or local demand reset
• Reprogramming of the meter—any reprogramming or reconfigure of the meter

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 4-15

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

• Clock adjustments—update of the clock (device time changes)

• External inputs—ON or OFF state of the digital state inputs 1 through 16
• Override Daily Pattern—ON or OFF state
• Override Rate Exclusive—ON or OFF state
• Override Rate—ON or OFF state
• External EOI—An externally triggered end-of-interval occurred.
• Fatal Error—A fatal error occurred. For a list of fatal errors, see Appendix A.
• Holiday—ON or OFF state
• Interrogations—any communications log-on to the meter
• Invalid Password—An invalid password was used when attempting to logon to
the meter.
• Load Profile EOI (1 and 2)—One of the load profile end-of-intervals occurred.
• Loss of phase—Loss of any phase(s) to the meter.
• Loss of potential (A, B, C or any)—Loss of potential to the meter with a user
defined threshold (see "Event Configuration" on page 3-53)
• Non-Fatal Error—A non-fatal error occurred. For a list of non-fatal errors, see
Appendix A.
• Optical port on-line—the active status of the optical port
• Phoned Home—The meter called home on schedule
• COM port on-line (2-ports)—the active status of both Communication ports
• Power Outage—The meter experienced a loss of input power.
• Rates A through G—ON or OFF state
• Register freeze— Self Read
• Scheduled Outputs 1 through 16—ON or OFF state
• Test Mode (entry and exit)—The meter was placed in (or removed from) Test
Mode.
• Thresholds 1 through 16—ON or OFF state
• Time Override Daily Pattern—ON or OFF state
• Time Override Rate Exclusive—ON or OFF state
• Time Override Rate—ON or OFF state

Time-of-Use Metering
The Time-of-Use (TOU) implementation in the QUANTUM Q1000 meter is
powerful and flexible. PC-PRO+ 98 and the TOU Calendar Editor are used to
configure TOU. TOU is a time-based scheme that provides the user with the ability
to assign different billing “collection buckets” (rates) based on the time of energy
consumption. These stored rates allow the user to assign a 'cost of energy' based
on when the energy is actually used. Rates are dependent on the time of day, day of
week, day type, season of the year, and the year. All of these characteristics are
configurable using the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software.
For Q1000 meters that support the TOU feature, you can implement TOU by
creating a program file that enables TOU and identifies a TOU (Calendar)
Schedule. A TOU Schedule ties blocks of time to different billing rates.

4-16 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Use the TOU Calendar Editor of PC-PRO+ 98 to create a detailed TOU schedule,
including on/off times for each rate, season start and stop dates, holidays, and
more. You must create the TOU schedule before it is available for use in a program
file. After a TOU schedule has been created, you can click the Edit button in the
Time of Use Selection component of PC-PRO+ 98 to launch the TOU Calendar
Editor and make changes to the schedule.
When you initialize a meter, the Q1000 device server checks the meter to see what
features are supported. If the meter does not support Time of Use, or does not
support the TOU Calendar Schedule selected for the program file, an error is
generated. PC-PRO+ 98 version 2.3 or higher and firmware version 5.0 or higher
are required to use TOU in the Q1000 meter.

TOU Features
The current TOU option in the Q1000 meter is called Basic TOU. Basic TOU
provides:
• Up to seven (7) day types and two holiday day types.
• Up to seven (7) available overlapping rates for energy and demand plus total.
• A memory-limited number of daily patterns (400 unique patterns maximum).
• A memory-limited number of switching events per day (665 unique events per
schedule maximum).
• Up to sixteen (16) available outputs and support for digital state outputs.
• Up to twelve (12) seasons per year maximum with the ability to be recurring
(255 unique seasons maximum).
• Up to two configurable TOU schedules, current and latent.
• A memory-limited number of years per schedule.
• A memory-limited number of holidays per schedule (500 per schedule
maximum).
• The ability to configure a meter program to handle rate and daily pattern
changes by means of the 16 digital state inputs.
• A memory-limited number of season change dates (400 season change dates
per schedule maximum).
• A dynamic memory bar to manage the memory associated with the current
TOU schedule, the TOU event overrides, the TOU energy registers selected,
and the TOU demand registers selected. See "Meter Memory Bar" on page 3-46
for a complete description of the memory bar.
• The ability to reconfigure TOU parameters without re-initializing the entire
meter program. (Latent Schedules are always programmed into the meter
using reconfigure.)

Implementing TOU
To implement TOU in a PC-PRO+ 98 program file:
1 Use the Calendar Editor to create a TOU schedule defining daily schedules and
patterns that identify the rates and the time of day when each rate begins and
ends. The daily patterns can be assigned to different days of the week,
seasons, and holidays.
2 Use the Program Editor to create the Q1000 program file as follows:
• Device Operation component—enable the TOU option.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 4-17

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

• Time of Use Selection component—on the TOU Selection tab, select the
TOU schedule you created in step 1. If desired, allocate memory to a latent
TOU Schedule, and then select the Event Override tab to set override
options for TOU patterns and rates.

Allocating memory to a Latent Schedule reserves the amount of memory you define for future
use by a Latent Schedule. You must estimate the amount of memory the Latent Schedule will
require. Use the size of the Current Schedule as a guideline. When you reconfigure TOU, you
select the Latent Schedule and the date and time when the Latent Schedule will take effect. You
do not necessarily need to reserve memory; however, to define a Latent schedule at a later date,
sufficient memory must be available to store the schedule.

• Quantity Selections component—select the TOU Energy and TOU

Demand quantities that you want to store.
• Display Configuration component—select the TOU registers that you
want to display on the meter.
• Load Profile Configuration component—enable TOU statuses to
display TOU rate codes to indicate the rate in effect for each load profile
interval.
• Digital State Outputs—Select the TOU events that you want to use to
trigger a digital state output.
• Self Reads—Select the quantities that you want to store during a self
read.
3 Logon to the meter and use the program file to initialize the meter.
4 To add (or change) a latent TOU schedule to (in) the meter, reconfigure the
Q1000 meter using the TOU calendar file that identifies the new TOU schedule.
For more details on creating program files, using the TOU Calendar Editor, using
PC-PRO+ 98, and reconfiguring a meter, see the PC-PRO+ 98 Online Help.

Event Overrides
There are a maximum of 16 Event Overrides that can be used to supersede the
Current TOU schedule when a programmed condition occurs. These overrides can
be used to start (trigger) an override daily pattern or an override rate. To use these
overrides, you must be online with and reconfiguring the meter.

Current TOU Schedule Event Overrides

The Current TOU scheduled daily pattern or rate(s) may be superseded by the
meter while an event override is active. When the override condition ends, the
Current TOU schedule resumes.

Current TOU Schedule Time Overrides

The Time Overrides allow you to implement TOU pattern or rate changes for a
specified period of time for the TOU schedule that is currently active in the meter.
At the time and date defined for the ending switchpoint, the override rate or
override pattern ends and the Current TOU schedule is resumed.

4-18 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Latent TOU Schedule Event Overrides

Once the Latent TOU schedule becomes active (becomes the Current TOU
Schedule), its daily pattern or rate(s) may be superseded by the meter while an
event override is active. When the override condition ends, the Current TOU
schedule resumes.

TOU Calendar Editor

The TOU Calendar Editor is the PC-PRO+ 98 application that allows Q1000 users
to create, view, and edit TOU schedules for supported meters that have a time-of-
use capability. Using the Calendar Editor, you can define daily patterns that
identify the rates used for the day and the time of day when each rate begins and
ends. Daily patterns are associated with day types via seasons. Day types and
Holiday types are associated with days of the week via the Typical Week. Holiday
types can also be associated with holidays. Once the schedules are created, you
can modify, print, import, and export schedules using Calendar Editor.
Holidays are defined in holiday lists, such as the US Holiday List. You can add new
holiday lists as well as edit existing lists to add holidays or modify the date(s) for
holidays. Holiday Lists are available for use in all schedules.
When portions of a schedule become outdated, the Calendar Editor provides a
means of removing the obsolete parts. This is accomplished through the Roll Off
Old Years feature.

TOU Schedule
TOU information is normally expressed in the form of a schedule. The purpose of
the PC-PRO+ 98 TOU component is to provide the means through which a user can
easily define TOU schedules for use with their SchlumbergerSema meters. The
TOU schedule:
• describes the period of time of coverage, in years.
• assigns a daily pattern to each of the days in a season.
• describes the seasons that exist within the TOU calendar.
• lists the holidays that will occur within the TOU schedule.
• describes the rates active and their switchpoints in each daily pattern.
• describes the rates and digital state outputs supported in the TOU schedule.
• describes the typical week with each day’s day type.
• describes the supported day types
The Q1000 meter supports two types of TOU schedules:
• Current—the schedule the user intends to run once the meter is initialized.
This is the only schedule the user is allowed to select in the TOU component
and program in the meter at initialization.
• Latent—a schedule that can begin running at a predetermined time in the
future. Users can allocate memory usage for the Latent TOU schedule in the
TOU component at initialization, but they can only add a Latent schedule
during reconfiguration. Reconfiguration is a process that allows users to
change the configuration of certain components of a meter’s program while
online with the meter without initializing the entire meter program. Use this
feature to create a new TOU schedule in the meter that will come active in the
future.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 4-19

Standard and Extended Load Profiles, Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary

Any schedule that exceeds 200% of the meter’s memory is not allowed. When a schedule is
entered that causes the memory to exceed 200%, a warning message is displayed. Users cannot
dismiss this error message until the schedule has been modified to resolve the memory usage
problem. Also, the TOU configuration component can be closed with the memory usage
exceeding 100%, but the program cannot be saved until the memory usage is 100% or less.

To assist in the definition of the TOU schedule, two other 'concepts' are contained
in the TOU component:
• Daily Pattern—refers to an assignable description applied to a pattern of rate
changes that occur within a 24 hour period. The TOU component allows the
user to define a collection of Daily Patterns. These Daily Patterns are then
assigned to the days of the week and holidays that are defined within a
schedule.
• Holidays—a list of holidays and exclusion days (as opposed to the regular
days of the week). These holidays are defined using the date on which they
occur.
Holidays can be recurring or singleton (single occurrence). Recurring holidays
occur on the same date every year. Singleton holidays either occur only once or
their repetition cannot be readily described.

Import/Export
Importing and exporting allows schedules to be transferred to and from
PC-PRO+ 98 systems.

TOU Energy Registers

The Q1000 meter can store up to 24 energy quantities in its TOU Energy Registers.
Each quantity is stored in its own register. TOU energy quantities are selected from
the valid list of available energy quantities through the Quantity Wizard. As the
users selects quantities, the number of registers available is decremented. The
Meter Memory Bar is updated as TOU Energy Registers are selected for use.

TOU Demand Registers

The Q1000 meter can store up to 24 demand quantities in its TOU Demand
Registers. Each quantity is stored in its own register. TOU demand quantities are
selected from the valid list of available demand quantities through the Quantity
Wizard. As the users selects quantities, the number of registers available is
decremented. The Meter Memory Bar is updated as TOU Demand Registers are
selected for use.

4-20 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 5 Power Quality

The QUANTUM Q1000 has two forms of Power Quality: Voltage Quality and
Harmonics Analysis. The meter is capable of storing power quality information to
an event log, to registers, and tod profile. Additionally, alarms and events can be
triggered based on power quality information.

Voltage Quality
The following voltage quality functions are available with the QUANTUM Q1000
meter:
• Voltage Interruptions
• Voltage Sags
• Voltage Swells
• Voltage Imbalances
Interruptions, sags, swells, and imbalances are recorded as events in the meter
when the voltage value exceeds the threshold for a time period greater than the
programmed minimum duration time and less than the programmed maximum. If
the voltage quality event does not persist for longer than the minimum duration
time period or if it persists too long, the event is not recorded. The minimum
duration can be programmed down to ½ cycle.
A cold load pickup variable can be set for voltage quality events. The cold load
pickup defines the time in seconds after power up that the meter waits before
recording voltage quality events.
Voltage quality can be programmed to be active or not active when the meter is in
test mode. This allows the choice of recording voltage quality events while
operating in test mode or ignoring them.
The voltage quality functions help the user to monitor and record voltage quality
information based upon user-defined criteria. The number of events recorded for
each of the voltage quality function is programmable.
The Q1000 can be configured to perform a large number of functions, each of
which take up a variable amount of memory. Previous meters allocated specific
amounts of memory for certain components. The Q1000 allocates memory
dynamically allowing the user to maximize the meter’s functionality at a given
location. Later, if the needs for a site change, the Q1000 meter can be
reprogrammed to meet these needs.
For this reason, the PC-PRO+ 98 software gives you constant feedback on the
amount of memory your program is currently consuming. This feedback is a Meter
Memory bar at the bottom of the dialog indicating the amount of meter memory
currently required for the configuration. As long as the bar is in the blue region,
there is sufficient meter memory for the configuration. If the bar displays in the
red, the memory requirements for your configuration have exceeded the amount of

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 5-1

Power Quality

memory available in the meter. You must modify your configuration to display the
bar in the blue region only. If you attempt to save a program file while the bar
displays in the red region, the Out of Device Resources dialog is displayed.
The meter will not allow you to continue configuring the meter if the amount of
memory your program requires exceeds 200% of the meter's memory. If memory
usage exceeds 200%, the 200% Warning displays to indicate that you cannot add
additional quantities to the configuration. Reduce the memory usage to under 200%
to continue modifying your program. Memory usage must be less than or equal to
100% before you can save the program.
The program components that use portions of this memory include:
• Load Profile
• Harmonics
• Voltage Quality
• TOU
• Self Reads

Voltage Interruptions
A voltage interruption occurs whenever the meter’s electronics experience a
complete loss of potential and records a power outage.

The meter’s electronics loss of power will depend on how it is being powered—whether through
phase voltage or auxiliary power voltage.

This function will track the power supply interruptions and separate them into
three programmable classes, based on the duration of the interruption.
The minimum duration of a voltage interruption is 1 second and the maximum
duration is 65,535 seconds. For each interruption, the start time, stop time, and
phase are recorded. The start and stop time can be recorded down to the
millisecond.

Figure 5.1 Voltage Interruptions Example

As shown by the example in Figure 5.1, if you set class 1 to 5 seconds, class 2 to 10
seconds, and class 3 to 20 seconds, an interruption of up to 5 seconds will be
recorded as a class 1 event, interruptions between 5 and 15 seconds will be a class
2 event, and an interruption between 15 and 35 seconds will be a class 3 event. Any
interruption lasting longer than 35 seconds will not be recorded.

5-2 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Power Quality

Figure 5.2 Voltage Interruptions

You can program the number of power interruption events the meter will store.
The number of events you can enter is based on the available meter memory. Each
class may be configured independently; class 3 has the highest priority.

Voltage Sags
A voltage sag is a momentary (less than a few seconds) decrease in the voltage
below a given tolerance on one or more phases. Voltage sags affect power-down
sensing circuitry on computer and large controllers and can cause equipment to
shutdown. Repetitive sags (or swells ) in the voltage cause flickering of lights,
motor stalling, reduced life of motors and equipment. Electrical equipment may
respond to a sag as it would to a power interruption.
Voltage sags are often caused when large loads, such as motors, air conditioners
and electric furnaces, are started which result in high inrush currents leading to
drops in the voltage for short periods. These disturbances can also be caused by
lightning, and power system faults such as overloaded wiring, incorrect fuse rating,
fuse and breaker clearing, ground faults, and utility switching/equipment failure.
Using a sliding-window function, the QUANTUM Q1000 continuously calculates an
RMS voltage based upon ½ cycle of the phase voltages. A voltage sag occurs when
the voltage “sags” below the user-programmable threshold for a period of time
greater than the user-programmable duration. There are two levels of sags which
can be programmed. Each phase is independently programmable.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 5-3

Power Quality

Figure 5.3 Voltage Sags

A programmable threshold typically between 75% and 100% of nominal voltage is

used to determine the threshold voltage at which the sag is registered. A
programmable hysteresis voltage level is also a programmable option. Hysteresis is
used to prevent the meter from recording the same event multiple times and filling
up the event log. The sag must remain in effect for a period of time greater than the
specified duration before it will be recorded. The minimum and maximum duration
range is selectable from 1-65,535 milliseconds. The maximum duration must be set
larger than the minimum duration. The minimum voltage, duration, date and time
(millisecond resolution for time) are stored for each voltage sag recorded. The
coincident average current magnitude during the event is also stored.
You can program the number of voltage quality events you want the meter to
record. This number is definable for each type of event. The number of events is
based on the available meter memory.

5-4 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Power Quality

Figure 5.4 Voltage Sag Example of One Phase Voltage

Voltage Sag Example

If nominal voltage is set to 120V and the sag threshold is 90% of nominal, a sag is
triggered when the RMS value of the voltage drops below 108V (120 volts X 90% =
108 volts).

Figure 5.5 Voltage Sag Example

Voltage Swells
A voltage swell is a momentary (less than a few seconds) increase in the voltage
above a given tolerance on one or more phases.
Voltage swells are often caused by large cyclic loads such as spot welders,
induction or arc furnaces, and motors when cycled. They can also be caused by
sudden load decreases or turn-off of heavy equipment, open neutral connection,
insulation breakdown, and improper wiring.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 5-5

Power Quality

Using a sliding-window function, the QUANTUM Q1000 continuously calculates an

RMS voltage based upon ½ cycle of the phase voltages. A voltage swell occurs
when the voltage “swells” above the user-programmable threshold for a period of
time greater than the user-programmable duration. There are two levels of swells
which can be programmed. Each phase is independently programmed.

Figure 5.6 Voltage Swells

A programmable threshold typically between 100% and 125% of nominal voltage is

used to determine the threshold voltage at which the swell is registered. A
programmable hysteresis voltage level is also a program option. Hysteresis is used
to prevent the meter from recording the same event multiple times and filling up
the event log. For the swell to be recorded, the event duration must be between the
minimum and maximum duration limits. The minimum and maximum duration
range is selectable from 1-65,535 milliseconds. The maximum duration must be
larger than the minimum duration. The minimum voltage, duration, date and time
(millisecond resolution for time) are stored for each voltage swell recorded. The
coincident average current magnitude during the event is also stored.
You can program the number of voltage quality events you want the meter to
record. This number is definable for each type of event. The number of events is
based on the available meter memory.

5-6 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Power Quality

Figure 5.7 Voltage Swell Example of One Phase Voltage

Voltage Swell Example

If nominal voltage is set to 120V and the swell threshold is 110% of nominal, a swell
is triggered when the RMS value of the voltage rises above 132V (120 volts X 110%
= 132 volts).

Figure 5.8 Voltage Swell Example

Voltage Imbalances
In three phase systems, voltage imbalance occurs when the three phase voltage
vectors are not the same magnitude and 120 degrees apart from each other. A
steady state imbalance is a duration of at least 2 seconds. The coupling
mechanism of imbalance is either conductive or electromagnetic. It is usually
calculated in terms of negative phase sequence voltage.
The presence of negative phase sequence voltage causes overheating in induction
and synchronous machines, reduces the margin for voltage regulation, and
increases the system losses. The most serious problem is the overheating of
induction motors, where a small amount of voltage imbalance causes motors to
draw much more imbalanced currents.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 5-7

Power Quality

Voltage imbalance can be caused by the connection of single phase or imbalanced

loads in a three phase system and by different impedances on the three phase lines.
Imbalances can also be caused by defective transformers and ground faults.
The voltage phase imbalance calculated in the Q1000 meter is a measure of the
percentage difference between a phase voltage and the average of the three phase
voltages. The equation for the percent imbalance as implemented is:
3-Element Meter (Form 9):

100 ´ ( V phase – V avg )

Percent Voltage Imbalance = ----------------------------------------------------
-
V avg

where:

Va + V b + Vc
V avg = æ -------------------------------ö
è 3 ø

2-Element Meter (Form 5):

100 ´ ( V phase – V avg )

Percent Voltage Imbalance = ----------------------------------------------------
-
V avg

where:

Va + Vc
V avg = æ ------------------ö
è 2 ø

Figure 5.9 Voltage Imbalances

5-8 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Power Quality

For the imbalance condition to be met, the percent imbalance must exceed the
user-programmable threshold and last longer than the user-programmable
duration. The threshold is programmable between 1 and 15 percent in 1 percent
increments. For the voltage imbalance to be recorded, the event duration must be
between the minimum and maximum duration limits. The range of this duration is
programmable between 0 and 600 seconds with a resolution of 1 second.
You can program the number of voltage quality events you want the meter to
record. This number is definable for each type of event. The number of events is
based on the available meter memory.

Figure 5.10 Voltage Imbalance Example of VA

Voltage Imbalance Example 1

In the following diagram, there is a greater than 8% difference between the average
of the phases and Phase A. The average of the three phases is 122 V. Phase A is
131.76 V, which represents an 8% imbalance.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 5-9

Power Quality

Voltage Imbalance Example 2

If the threshold is 5% and the voltages are 120 V, 120 V, and 112 V an imbalance will
not be triggered because 112 V is within the threshold based on the average of all
three voltages.
(120 + 120 + 112) / 3 = 117.3, 5% of 117.3 = 5.87 V
• The upper allowed voltage is 117.3 + 5.87 = 123.87 V
• The lower allowed voltage is 117.3 - 5.87 =111.43 V

Voltage Imbalance Example 3

If the voltages are 120 V, 120 V, and 111 V, an imbalance will be triggered because
111 V exceeds the threshold based on the average of all three voltages.
(120 + 120 + 111) / 3 = 117, 5% of 117 = 5.85 V
• The upper allowed voltage is 117 + 5.85 = 122.85 V
• The lower allowed voltage is 117 - 5.85 =111.15 V

Voltage Imbalance Example 4

If the voltages are 120 V, 120 V, and 130 V, an imbalance will be triggered because
130 V exceeds the threshold based on the average of all three voltages.
(120 + 120 + 130) / 3 = 123.3, 5% of 123.3 = 6.17 V
• The upper allowed voltage is 123.3 + 6.17 = 129.47 V
• The lower allowed voltage is 123.3 – 6.17 =117.14 V

Harmonic Analysis
A harmonic distortion is a voltage or current deviation from a true sine wave due
to unwanted frequencies that are multiples of the fundamental.
Harmonic distortion causes motor loads, such as compressors, pumps, and disk
drives to overheat. Harmonics can also result in serious damage to capacitors and
transformers. Harmonics will cause decreased motor performance (reduced
efficiency, over-heating, torque pulsations), premature control equipment failure,
false triggering of SCRs (silicon controlled rectifiers), interference with
computers, and amplification of harmonic levels due to resonance. Harmonics can
also cause incorrect readings on mechanical timing relays and electricity meters.
Harmonics are usually caused by the operation of any static power converter that
converts AC to DC or DC to AC, or any solid-state switch, or equipment containing
these devices. Some of the equipment which contains these devices are electric
variable speed drives, computer power supplies, dimmer switches, variable speed
drills, UPS, welding equipment, induction furnaces, arc furnaces, microwave
ovens, battery chargers, elevators. Saturated utility transformers can also cause
harmonic distortion.
The Q1000 performs Fast Fourier Transforms on each phase voltage and current.
Up to the 20th harmonic is measured for magnitude and phase angle. All phase
angles are referenced to the phase voltage. The meter also provides the average %
THD Voltage and % THD current per phase. See Harmonics Diagram for an
illustration.

5-10 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Power Quality

The meter captures harmonic content up to the 32nd harmonic in its measurement.
The time averaged value of harmonic voltage and currents up to the 20th harmonic
can be recorded and displayed. You can select the interval length and per phase
harmonic values to record.
Each Harmonic record contains the following information:
• Year
• Month
• Day
• Hour
• Minute
• Second
• Fundamental voltage magnitude
• Fundamental voltage phase angle
• Percentage of voltage fundamental magnitude for the 2nd through the 20th
voltage harmonics
• 2nd through 20th voltage harmonic phase angle
• Fundamental current magnitude
• Fundamental current phase angle
• Percentage of current fundamental magnitude for the 2nd through the 20th
current harmonics
• 2nd through 20th current harmonic phase angle
• Checksum
The meter performs Fast Fourier Transforms on each phase of voltage and current
every 60 cycles. The magnitudes and phase angles up to the 20th harmonic are
measured. The following harmonic information is available:
• THD registers
• Fundamental power registers
• Displacement power factor
• Harmonic magnitude registers
• Harmonic phase angle registers

THD Registers
Total harmonic distortion (THD) registers are available for voltage and current.
These registers include the total amount of distortion caused by harmonics 2-20 of
the fundamental waveform and are computed based on the magnitudes of the
harmonic components. The meter provides registers for percent THD for voltage,
current. The meter allows for a time based harmonic voltage and current “THD
hour register”. This register allows the user to store THD as an energy or demand
register and record pulses in load profile. Additionally, THD can be programmed to
trigger an alarm or event condition in the meter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 5-11

Power Quality

Fundamental Power Registers

The Q1000 has the capability of calculating energy and demand registers based
upon fundamental power. Fundamental Power is the active power based on
fundamental voltage and current only. Fundamental registers for voltage
magnitude, voltage phase angle, watts, and vars can also be stored in load profile.

Figure 5.11 Basic 60 Hz Waveform

Harmonic Registers and Recording

The user may select to record from the 2nd to the 20th on a per phase basis. The
percent of fundamental magnitude and associated phase angle for each of the user-
selectable harmonics can be displayed as a register. The user can also record time-
averaged harmonics up to the 20th which includes the date (year, month, day),
time (hour, minute, second), fundamental voltage magnitude, percent of
fundamental voltage (2 - 20th user selectable), fundamental current magnitude,
and percent of fundamental current (2-20th user selectable).

Figure 5.12 Basic 60 Hz Waveform with Harmonics

5-12 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Power Quality

General Harmonics Configuration

Figure 5.13 Harmonics Configuration—General Tab

Check the Use Global EOI Source box if you want to use the Global EOI to define
the harmonic interval length. If this box is checked, the Interval Length fields on
this screen are disabled and filled with the interval length of the EOI Interval
Length defined on the Device Operation screen.
Choose the Interval Length. This is the length of time you want to use for a
harmonic interval. Choices range from two seconds to 60 minutes. If you checked
the Use Global EOI Source box, this field is disabled, and the current Global End of
Interval length specified in the Device Operation dialog is used.
Check the Disable Harmonics in Test Mode box if you do not want to record
harmonics when the meter is in Test Mode.
Select the Number of Records to Store for each Phase. This is the number of
harmonic records to store in memory for each phase.
The Q1000 can be configured to perform a large number of functions, each of
which take up a variable amount of memory. Previous meters allocated specific
amounts of memory for certain components. The Q1000 allocates memory
dynamically allowing the user to maximize the meter’s functionality at a given
location.
For this reason, the PC-PRO+ 98 software gives you constant feedback on the
amount of memory your program is currently consuming. This feedback is a Meter
Memory bar at the bottom of the dialog indicating the amount of meter memory
currently required for the configuration. As long as the bar is in the blue region,
there is sufficient meter memory for the configuration. If the bar displays in the
red, the memory requirements for your configuration have exceeded the amount of
memory available in the meter. You must modify your configuration to display the
bar in the blue region only. If you attempt to save a program file while the bar
displays in the red region, the Out of Device Resources dialog displays.
The meter will not allow you to continue configuring the meter if the amount of
memory your program requires exceeds 200% of the meter's memory. If memory
usage exceeds 200%, the 200% Warning displays to indicate that you cannot add

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 5-13

Power Quality

additional quantities to the configuration. Reduce the memory usage to under 200%
to continue modifying your program. It must be less than or equal to 100% before
you can save the program.
The program components that use portions of this memory include:
• Load Profile
• Harmonics
• Voltage Quality
• TOU
• Self Reads

Voltage Amplitude Harmonics Configuration

Figure 5.14 Harmonics Configuration—Voltage Amplitude Tab

You can select the individual phases and harmonics (2nd to 20th) to record Voltage
Amplitude. Each row represents one harmonic.

5-14 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Power Quality

Voltage Phase Angle Harmonics Configuration

Figure 5.15 Harmonics Configuration—Voltage Phase Angle Tab

Current Amplitude Harmonics Configuration

Figure 5.16 Harmonics Configuration—Current Amplitude Tab

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 5-15

Power Quality

Current Phase Angle Harmonics Configuration

Figure 5.17 Harmonics Configuration—Current Phase Angle Tab

5-16 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 6 Communications

This section describes the communication architecture of the Q1000 meter.

The Q1000 supports several different communication ports. These include an
optical port, LEDs, RS-232 ports, internal modem, RS-485 ports, and I/O network
connection.
The Q1000 meter also provides powerful capabilities for talking with various
protocols over these communication ports. Protocol implementation in the Q1000
meter is flexible. A port can be configured with one of a variety of protocols; the
user may program a port with the protocol best suited to meet the needs of an
installation.
Since there are no industry wide standard protocols, SchlumbergerSema supports
many protocols in the Q1000 meter. The protocols in the Q1000 meter are divided
into two groups—Basic Protocols and Advanced Protocols. Basic protocols are
included in all meters. Advanced protocols are optional and may be ordered by the
user.
The ‘native’ protocol in the meter is Mini-DLMS. This protocol is used to program
the meter. This programming operation determines how many energy registers to
run, what demand registers to run, the load profile configuration, and many other
parameters. Once the meter is programmed using Mini-DLMS, data can be
retrieved from the meter by Mini-DLMS itself or by one of the other protocols. In
most cases, the other protocols are read only protocols. Only a limited set of write
features are supported.
The IEC1107 protocol, mainly used in Europe, and the QDIP protocol are two of
these protocols. The Q1000 QDIP implementation emulates a portion of the
QUANTUM STQ meter’s QDIP protocol implementation and allows the Q1000 to
connect to existing RTUs where QUANTUM meters are installed. These protocols
are Basic Protocols. The first Advanced Protocol the Q1000 supported was DNP
3.0; a Level 2+ implementation. Other Advanced Protocols currently supported in
the Q1000 meter include IEC 60870-5-102, IEC 60870-5-102 Plus, and MODBUS
RTU protocols.

Simultaneous Communication
The Q1000 allows you to talk through its ports simultaneously and in both
directions. These ports include the optical port, two RS-232 ports and the I/O port.
The second RS-232 port can be used to support an internal modem or an internal
RS-485 port. These features allow you to simultaneously perform functions such
as:
• implement a complex I/O scheme
• dedicate an RS-232 port to a continuous polling system
• give access through the modem to your customer
• always allow for on-site interrogation through the optical port

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-1

Communications

Optical Port (OPT)

The optical port is by definition coupled to the external world with opto-couplers.
The baud rate for the optical port is selectable from 1200 to 19,200 bps; however,
some optical port cables may limit communication speed to a maximum of 9600
bps.
This port may be connected to external modems, fiber optic circuits, or other
communication networks using the optical port cable to connect to the optical
port.

Dual Port RS-232

Two RS-232 ports are available on the Q1000. These ports support autobaud
sensing from 1200 to 38,400 bps and direct connections up to 115,200 bps. The RS-
232 ports can be connected to any number of devices such as fiber optic modems,
external modems, frame relay FRADs, 900 MHz radios, or short haul modems.
See Table 2.5 for pin assignments for the Q1000 DB-25 connector. These pin
assignments support configuring the meter as a DTE device, which can be directly
connected to a DCE device such as an external modem. The Q1000 meter can be
connected directly to a PC, which is a DTE device, by using a null modem cable.
See "Grounding" on page 2-25 for more information.

Modems
The meter supports the use of modems for communication on both ports. There
are two options for connecting a modem: an optional internal factory supplied
modem and a user supplied external modem. Modems can be used for
programming the meter and also for retrieving data.

Internal Modem
The optional 1200 to 33,600 bps auto-baud sensing internal modem provides
telephone communication. The internal modem takes the place of RS-232 port
number two. The Q1000 modem supports V.34 telephone communication standard
for initiating and receiving telephone calls. Error correction (V.42/MNP 2-4) and
data compression (V.42 bis/MNP 5) maximize data transfer integrity and boost
average data throughput up to 33,600 bps.
The modem board includes the capability to support multi-drop applications. An
internal RS-485 connector on the modem board connects to the meter’s external
DB-25 connector. A meter with an internal modem that starts the RS-485 bus is the
“master meter”.

Figure 6.1 Q1000 Phone Line Multi-drop Support

6-2 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

This connection can then be attached to a 4-wire RS-485 bus. Other Q1000 meters
will then use an internal RS-485 board to connect to the bus. This multi-drop
design can support a large number of meters on one phone line.

Program the Master meter as a Modem meter for COM 2 in Communication Setup, and then
program the other meters (with internal RS-485 boards) as Direct Connection meters for COM 2.
Log on to all of these meters with the multi-drop option using the programmable COM 2 port
address.

External Modem
An external modem can be connected to either or both external RS-232
communications ports available on the meter to allow phone line communications.
In these cases, the meter port’s baud rate is selectable from 1200 to 115,200 bps. To
allow the meter to work with a wide variety of modems, the meter is programmed
to expect a very small set of capabilities from the modem.
• Requirements:
The modem cannot echo commands issued to it. This modem feature is
usually set with an ATE0 command issued to the modem with an RS-232
terminal or terminal emulator.
Response codes are sent and the response set is kept to a minimum, result
codes 0-4. This modem feature is usually set with an ATQ0X0 command.
The response codes are issued in text (Verbose) form. This modem feature is
usually set with a ATV1 command.
• The meter does not support any form of flow control between itself and the
modem; therefore, flow control should be disabled. Some modems will require
additional AT commands to disable flow control features.
• The meter assumes that the configuration has been stored in profile 0 of the
modem. This modem feature is usually accomplished by issuing an AT&W0
command.
• After configuring the modem and saving the configuration, set the modem to
use this profile as a default on power up. This modem feature is usually
accomplished by issuing an AT&Y0 command.
• To make sure that your modem will answer, “the number of rings before
answering” should be set to a non-zero number in Profile 0.
If the phone line is dedicated to the meter only, set the number of rings to 1.
(S0=1)
If the phone line is shared with a handset, set the number of rings higher to
allow for a person to answer the phone call before the modem picks up.
If you leave your external modem’s Profile 0 with S0=0, then the modem is put
in a state to “never answer” after a power outage.

External Modem Configuration Examples

The following examples show how to apply the above general guide to different
kinds of modems.

Practical Peripherals P114MT II

1 Connect a terminal to the modem.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-3

Communications

2 Power up the modem.

3 Type: ATS0=1 <ENTER>
Modem echo’s what is typed and responds: OK
Where “S0=1” writes ‘wait for 1 ring to answer the phone’ to profile 0.
The “1” can be any number of rings. 0 means do not answer the phone;
numbers greater than 0 indicate the number of rings to wait before answering
the phone.
4 Type: ATQ0E0V1X0&Y0&W0 <ENTER>.
Modem echo’s what is typed and responds: OK
Where “&Y0” tells the modem to use profile 0 as default.
Where “&W0” writes the changes in the active profile to profile 0.
5 Type: ATZ<ENTER>
Modem does not echo what you type but does respond after a short delay: OK
6 Type: AT&V<ENTER>
Modem does not echo what you type but does respond.
ACTIVE PROFILE:
B1 E0 L1 M1 N1 Q0 T V1 W0 X0 Y0 &C1 &D0 &G0 &J0 &K0 &Q5
&R1 &S0 &T5 &X0 &Y0

S00:001 S01:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S06:002

S07:050 S08:002 S09:006

S10:014 S11:095 S12:050 S18:000 S25:005 S26:001 S36:007

S37:000 S38:020 S44:020

S46:138 S48:007 S95:000

STORED PROFILE 0:

B1 E0 L1 M1 N1 Q0 T V1 W0 X0 Y0 &C1 &D0 &G0 &J0 &K0 &Q5

&R1 &S0 &T5 &X0

S00:0011 S02:043 S06:002 S07:050 S08:002 S09:006 S10:014

S11:095 S12:050 S18:000

S36:007 S37:000 S40:232 S41:195 S46:138 S95:000

STORED PROFILE 1:

B1 E0 L1 M1 N1 Q0 T V1 W0 X0 Y0 &C1 &D0 &G0 &J0 &K0 &Q5

&R1 &S0 &T5 &X0

S00:001 S02:043 S06:002 S07:050 S08:002 S09:006 S10:014

S11:095 S12:050 S18:000

S36:007 S37:000 S40:232 S41:195 S46:138 S95:000

TELEPHONE NUMBERS:
0= 1=
2= 3=
OK

1. This field tells the modem how many rings to wait before answering the phone.

6-4 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

Hayes Accura 144 + Fax 144 Modem

1 Connect a terminal to the modem!
2 Power up the modem!
3 Type: ATS0=1 <ENTER>
Modem echo’s what is typed and responds: OK
Where “S0=1” writes ‘wait for 1 ring to answer the phone’ to profile 0.
The “1” can be any number of rings. 0 means do not answer the phone;
numbers greater than 0 indicate the number of rings to wait before answering
the phone.
4 Type: ATQ0E0N0S37=nV1X0&K0&D0 &Y0&W0 <ENTER>
Where n is the baud rate in the meter.
Modem echo’s what is typed and responds: OK
Where “&Y0” tells the modem to use profile 0 as default.
Where “&W0” writes the changes in the active profile to profile 0.
5 Type: ATZ<ENTER>
Modem does not echo what you type but does respond after a short delay: OK
6 Type: AT&V<ENTER>
Modem does not echo what you type but does respond.
ACTIVE PROFILE: DTE:19200 DCE: PARITY:NONE

B16 B1 E0 L2 M1 N1 P Q0 V1 W0 X0 Y0 &A0 &B1 &C1 &D0 &G0

&K0 &L0 &Q5 &R0 &S0 &T4

&U0 &X0 &Y0

S00:0011 S01:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S06:002
S07:050 S08:002 S09:006

S10:014 S11:095 S12:050 S18:000 S25:005 S26:001 S30:000

S36:007 S37:00n S38:020

S43:000 S46:002 S48:007 S49:064 S50:220 S63:009 S82:128

S86:000 S95:000 S97:030

S108:001 S109:062 S110:002 S136:003

STORED PROFILE 0:

B16 B1 E0 L2 M1 N1 P Q0 V1 W0 X0 Y0 &A0 &B1 &C1 &D0 &G0

&K0 &L0 &Q5 &R0 &S0 &T4

S00:001 S02:043 S06:002 S07:050 S08:002 S09:006 S10:014

S11:095 S12:050 S18:000

S25:005 S26:001 S30:000 S36:007 S37:00n S38:020 S46:002

S48:007 S63:009 S82:128

S95:000 S97:030 S108:001 S109:062 S110:002 S136:003

STORED PROFILE 1:

B16 B1 E0 L2 M1 N1 P Q0 V1 W0 X0 Y0 &A0 &B1 &C1 &D0 &G0

&K0 &L0 &Q5 &R0 &S0 &T4

1. This field tells the modem how many rings to wait before answering the phone.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-5

Communications

S00:0011 S02:043 S06:002 S07:050 S08:002 S09:006 S10:014

S11:095 S12:050 S18:000

S25:005 S26:001 S30:000 S36:007 S37:00n S38:020 S46:002

S48:007 S63:009 S82:128

S95:000 S97:030 S108:001 S109:062 S110:002 S136:003

TELEPHONE NUMBERS:
&Z0= &Z1=
&Z2= &Z3=

U.S. Robotics Sportster 336 Faxmodem

1 Set the rear panel switches as follow:
Switch #1: Modem ignores DTR (DOWN)
Switch #2: Verbal results (UP)
Switch #3: Enable result codes (DOWN)
Switch #4: Suppresses echo (DOWN)
Switch #5: Disable auto answer (UP)
Switch #6: Modem sends CD signal when it connects with another modem,
drops CD on disconnect (UP)
Switch #7: Loads Y or Y1 configuration from user-defined NVRAM (UP)
Switch #8: Enables recognition (smart modem) (DOWN)
2 Connect a terminal to the modem!
3 Power up the modem!
4 Type: ATS0=1 <ENTER>
Modem echo’s what is typed and responds: OK
Where “S0=1” writes ‘wait for 1 ring to answer the phone’ to profile 0.
The “1” can be any number of rings. 0 means do not answer the phone;
numbers greater than 0 indicate the number of rings to wait before answering
the phone.
5 Type: AT&F0X0&A0&NnY0&W0<ENTER>, where n is the baud rate in the
meter. Do not select 12,000, 14,400 or 28,800 baud, it will not work.
Modem echo’s what is typed and responds: OK
Where “&Y0” tells the modem to use profile 0 as default.
Where “&W0” writes the changes in the active profile to profile 0.
6 Type: ATZ<ENTER>
Modem does not echo what you type but does respond after a short delay: OK
7 Type: ATI4<ENTER>
Modem does not echo what you type but does respond.

1. This field tells the modem how many rings to wait before answering the phone.

6-6 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

U.S. Robotics Sportster 33600 Fax Modem Settings

B0 E0 F1 M1 Q0 V1 X0 Y0
BAUD=115200 PARITY=N WORDLEN=8
DIAL=TONE ON HOOK CID=0

&A0 &B0 &C1 &D0 &G0 &H0 &I0 &K1

&M4 &N6 &P0 &R1 &S0 &T5 &U0 &Y1

S00=001 1 S01=000 S02=043 S03=013 S04=010 S05=008

S06=002
S07=060 S08=002 S09=006 S10=014 S11=070 S12=050
S13=000

S15=000 S16=000 S18=000 S19=000 S21=010 S22=017

S23=019

S25=005 S27=000 S28=008 S29=020 S30=000 S31=128

S32=002

S33=000 S34=000 S35=000 S36=014 S38=000 S39=000

S40=001
S41=000 S42=000
LAST DIALED #:
OK

1. This field tells the modem how many rings to wait before answering the phone.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-7

Communications

RS-485 Board
The QUANTUM Q1000 RS-485 Option Board provides 1 RS-485 port or 1-RS-232
port for the Q1000. In either configuration, the RS-485 board uses COM port 2 in
the meter. Either port is isolated from the existing COM 1 RS-232 port and the AC
input.
The RS-485 port operates with cable lengths of up 4000 feet and with as many as 32
devices sharing the RS-485 bus. The RS-232 port operates with cable lengths of up
to 50 feet (up to 100 feet with low capacitance cable) and with up to 255 devices
using multidrop addressing. If longer distances are needed, then the RS-232
communication can be converted from wire to fiber optics, radio, etc. The data
rate can be up to 115,200 bits per second for either communication type.

PC
RS-232
Output

Q1000 Q1000
Example
Meter Meter
RS-232 to RS-485
Converters

TD (A)
TD (B)
B&B Electronics -
RD (A)
485TBLED
RD (B)
SHLD

TD (A) / T+ Up to 32
TD (B) / T- Q1000
Null Modem Adapter Aten - IC 485S
RD (A) / R+ Meters
RD (B) / R- Total
4-Wire RS-485 Bus
TD (A) / T+
TD (B) / T-
Null Modem Adapter IC-11
RD (A) / R+
Note: Only ground shield wire on one end of bus.
RD (B) / R-

Figure 6.2 RS-485 Connections

RS-232 to RS-485 Converters

A Q1000 meter without an internal RS-485 board supports RS-232 outputs on COM
ports 1 and 2. An external conversion to RS-485 format may be accomplished using
an external RS-232 to RS-485 converter. The following sections describe the
connections for several converters available in the market. These examples have
been tested with the Q1000 meter. Other converters are available.

B&B Electronics—485TBLED
To use the B&B Electronics—485TBLED converter, the Control jumper should be
removed and the Echo jumper should be ON. No Null Modem cable is required
with this converter. Table 6.1 shows the wiring for this converter.

6-8 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

Table 6.1 B&B Electronics—485TBLED RS-485 Converter Wiring

B&B Electronics—
Q1000 RS-485 Splitter Cable
485TBLED

TD(A) White/Red

TD(B) Red/White

RD(A) Brown/White

RD(B) White/Brown

SHLD Yellow/White

Aten—IC-485
To use the Aten—IC-485 converter, the DTE, Simu, and T-ON/R-ON switches
should be selected. A Null Modem cable is required with this converter. Table 6.2
shows the wiring for this converter.

Table 6.2 Aten—IC-485 RS-485 Converter Wiring

Aten IC-485
Q1000 RS-485 Splitter Cable
Pin Signal

1 TD(A)/T+ Red/White

2 TD(B)/T- White/Red

3 RD(A)/R+ Brown/White

4 RD(B)/R- White/Brown

IC-11
To use the IC-11 converter, the DTE and T-ON/R-ON switches should be selected. A
Null Modem cable is required with this converter. Table 6.3 shows the wiring for
this converter.

Table 6.3 IC-11 RS-485 Converter Wiring

IC-11
Q1000 RS-485 Splitter Cable
Pin Signal

1 TD(A)/T+ Red/White

2 TD(B)/T- White/Red

3 RD(A)/R+ Brown/White

4 RD(B)/R- White/Brown

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-9

Communications

Default Communications Settings

The default Q1000 communication settings are shown in Table 6.4.

Table 6.4 Default Communications Settings

Factory Default Customer Default

General
Inside Call Window 1 1
Outside Call Window 8 8
Optical Port
Protocol SCS Mini-DLMS
Meter Address N/A 1
Group Address N/A 0
Auto Baud Detect N/A Yes
Input Baud Rate N/A 9600
Serial Port 1
Protocol Mini-DLMS Mini-DLMS
Meter Address 1 1
Group Address 0 0
RTS to Tx Delay 1 1
Drop RTS to Tx Delay 1 1
DCD to Tx Delay 0 0
Auto Baud Detect Yes Yes
Connection Type Direct Connect Direct Connect
Input Baud Rate 9600 9600
Serial Port 2
Protocol SCS Mini-DLMS
Meter Address N/A 1
Group Address N/A 0
RTS to Tx Delay N/A 1
Drop RTS to Tx Delay N/A 1
DCD to Tx Delay N/A 0
Auto Baud Detect N/A Yes
Connection Type N/A Direct Connect
Input Baud Rate N/A 9600

6-10 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

A factory default reset is performed using DIP switch #3. A customer default reset
is performed by a three button reset. See Section 3, Operating Instructions, for
more details.

BPS Rates
There are three bps rates that come into effect when modems are used to connect
two devices together. The following explanation details these rates and their
purpose in a Q1000 meter set-up.
The first is the meter to modem rate, the second is the modem to modem rate, and
the third is the remote modem to remote station (PC, SCADA system, or RTU) rate.

Figure 6.3 Three Communication Rates for Modem Connections

• To control the flow rate between the meter and the modem, program the meter
to answer and/or call at a specific bps rate. The bps rate for the meter to
modem is selectable from 1200 to 115,200 bps. (Rate 1)
• Modem to modem autobaud rate sensing is supported for incoming and
outgoing calls as a standard modem feature. (Rate 2)
• The remote modem to remote station rate is controlled by the remote station.
(Rate 3)
This description is valid for both the internal and external modems.

Detection

Off-Hook Detect
The internal modem module supports parallel off-hook detect. If the line is a
shared line, then the modem will sense if an extension phone picks up the line and
the handset is toggled, and the meter will release its hold on the line. A phone-
home unit will not attempt to dial while the off-hook condition exists. Once the
condition disappears, the meter will re-initiate its call.
Off-hook detect can be disabled by connecting jumper JP1 on the Modem board as
shown in Figure 6.4.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-11

Communications

Off-Hook Detect Jumper

(J1)

Installing the Jumper

Disables Off-Hook Detect

Figure 6.4 Internal Modem Off-Hook Detect Enable/Disable Jumper

Call Windows
Call windows are time ranges that determine when a meter will answer the phone
or place calls. A window is defined by start and stop times programmed in a 24-
hour format. Different answer delays are available for inside and outside of call
windows. Use PC-PRO+ 98 programming software to configure call windows. The
meter will usually not initiate a call home when the window is closed; this action is
programmable. Certain events can attempt one call outside the window. Call
windows are programmed independently for each day of the week. There are up to
two programmable windows per day. For each day and each window you can
select “closed all day”, “open all day” or “custom”. When custom is selected start
and stop times for each window are programmable. The open and close times have
one minute resolution. The maximum length is 24 hours. The windows can overlap.
If a call is in progress while the window closes, the call will be completed.

Answer Delays
There are two separate answer delays: one for inside and one for outside the call
window. These settings are made in the Communication Setup component. See the
PC-PRO+ 98 Online Help for more information.
The meter will “write” the number of rings to wait before answering a phone call to
an internal or external modem at the start of a new call window or at a power up.

Answer in Call Windows

The meter can be programmed to answer after a select number of rings inside the
defined call windows.

Answer Outside Call Windows

The meter can be programmed to answer after a select number of rings outside the
defined call windows.

6-12 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

Ring Answer Delay

The meter has an answer delay dip switch which will cause the meter to delay 8
rings on an unprogrammed meter. This dip switch can be disabled causing the
meter to pick up the phone on the first ring. This switch function only applies to an
unprogrammed meter. The DIP switch is located on the lower left hand of the
display board in the Q1000.

Tip and Ring Polarity

The polarity of the tip and ring lines does not affect the operation of the modem.

Telephone Circuits
Dedicated Phone Line
A dedicated phone line is used in situations where one phone line connects to one
meter and no other devices or phone lines are connected to the line. Figure 6.5
illustrates a typical dedicated phone line connection.
.

Figure 6.5 Dedicated Phone Line Connection

Parallel Off-Hook Detect

The parallel off-hook detect option is useful in situations where the Q1000 meter
shares a customer’s phone line. The parallel off-hook detect circuit provides the
same customer phone hook status sensing capability as the series off-hook detect
circuit used in other devices.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-13

Communications

When implementing the parallel off-hook detect option, an RJ-11C telephone jack
should be used. The Q1000 modem is connected to the RJ-11C jack with the
provided 6-position telephone cable with RJ-11 connector.
In installations where the meter shares the phone line with customer’s phones and
in the parallel off-hook detect configuration described above, all customer’s
phones and other communication devices should be tested for proper operation
after the Q1000 meter is installed.

Figure 6.6 Meter Sharing Customer Phone Line

Though the Q1000 meter meets specified dielectric, surge and discharge tests, it
cannot protect against the large ground potential rise that can occur on the
electrical system during switching operations, lightning strikes, surge arrester
operations, or faults.
The Q1000 meets or exceeds the industry standards for transient and surge
protection; however, the specifications are in terms of 1.5 to 8 kV for dielectric,
surge, and static discharge tests. The ground potential rise between the electrical
system and the earth point (equivalent to the grounded equipment at the switching
room of the telephone company) is in the order of 15 to 25 kV.
The meter is not designed to protect against these large ground potential rises.
ANSI and IEC standards have been designed to consider the whole picture. To
protect against high surges and transients on the telephone system, the user must
install the meter and the telephone circuit in such a way that the ground potential
rise between the station ground grid and the telephone company system
(equipment and wires) is absorbed (blocked).
The telephone company and the electric utility (user) usually agree and require
that the Tip, Ring and Shield wires from the telephone company not touch the
ground grid of the station.
The user should provide this isolation protection in those utilities and in those
countries where there is not formal prohibition against the Tip, Ring and Shield
wires from the telephone company touching the ground grid of the substation.
For more information refer to the Installation and Grounding of the QUANTUM
Meters: A Suggested Practice Guide.

6-14 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

Dialing Features
The meter is capable of dialing two numbers which can contain up to 60 characters
including dial modifiers. The phone number will be a string of ASCII characters set
up by PC-PRO+ 98 programming software. Features like delay between digits are
handled by PC-PRO+ 98 programming software by inserting the following dial
modifiers in the phone string.

Table 6.5 Dial Modifiers

Dial Modifier Description

0-9#,* Digits/characters for dialing (# valid only for tone dialing)
! Hook flash
W wait for dial tone
, Delay processing of next character by number of seconds

Retry Features
If call windows are always open and a call is not answered or is incomplete, the
meter will complete the following procedure by default:
1 Wait a random delay of 6 to 255 seconds.
2 Place the call to the first specified number.
3 If the call fails and there is a second number, then the second number is
called.
If the call is not successful, the meter will:
1 Repeat the above sequence nine additional times.
2 Wait 10 minutes.
3 Repeat the above call sequence.
If the windows are used, then the meter can be programmed to place one phone
call regardless of the call window. If the call fails, the meter uses the same retry
strategy but only within the specific call window. If the meter has not reached the
master station during the call window, then it will wait until the following call
window and restart the random retry strategy.

Number of Redials
The number of redials specifies the number of times a given number is called. If
two numbers are programmed, then each number will be redialed this number of
times. The number of redials on a phone-home meter could be overridden to redial
a selected number of times if the master station fails to answer. Its range can go
from 1 to 255, but must be 15 or less for meters in Canadian markets.

Minutes to Wait Between Retry Sequences

The number of minutes between retry sequences on a phone-home meter could be
overridden to wait a selected number of minutes if the master station fails to
answer. The range is 1 to 255 minutes, but must be 60 or greater for meters in
Canadian markets.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-15

Communications

Phone Home on Event

The meter will call the master station when one of several events occurs. If the
master station is set up to receive calls and interrogate meters, then incoming calls
will be logged to alert the operator that a certain condition exists.
If the meter is programmed to call outside its windows, then it will immediately
place a call to the master station after an event has taken place. When the meter
has a call window, the meter will wait until the window is open to make the second
attempt. Only if enabled in the programming software will the meter attempt to
make a call outside a call window after an event occurs. If the phone home
attempts are not successful, then the meter will use the retry strategy specified in
the “Retry Features” section.
The user can select up to 32 events to trigger a phone call. The meter can be
configured to phone home on the following events:
• Clock Error
• Demand EOI
• Demand Reset
• Digital State Input 1-16
• Fatal Error
• Load Profile #1 & #2 EOI
• Loss of Phase
• Loss of Potential A, B, or C (see "Event Configuration" on page 3-53)
• Non-Fatal Error
• Optical Port Active
• Port 1 or 2 Active
• Power outage
• Register Self Read
• Threshold 1-16
For each of the events the user can select a port and a phone number to use. The
first event in the chart is considered to have the highest priority. Following is an
example configuration for phone home on event and the meter’s response to
events triggered.

Table 6.6 Phone Home Configuration Example

Event Name Attempt 1 Attempt 2 Attempt 3 Attempt 4

Loss of Phase PH#1/PO#1 PH#1/PO#2 PH#2/PO#2 PH#2/PO#1
CLK_Error PH#2/PO#1 PH#1/PO#1 PH#1/PO#2 PH#2/PO#2
Test mode PH#1/PO#2 PH#2/PO#2 PH#2/PO#1 No Attempt

PH#1 is phone number 1, PH#2 is phone number 2, PO#1 is port number 1, and PO#2 is port
number 2.

6-16 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

Assuming that the meter has experienced each of the above events:
• The meter tries to call home on event first using PH#1/PO#1.
• If this event is acknowledged, the meter will continue on to call PH#2/PO#1 for
the CLK error event.
• If the first event is not acknowledged, it will move to Attempt 2 and try PH#1/
PO#1.
• After the clock error is acknowledged or the call is unsuccessful, the meter
will then try the test mode event for PH#1/PO#2.
If the meter has a loss of phase and has been placed in test mode the call
sequences would be as follows:
• The meter tries to call home on event first using PH#1/PO#1.
• If the first event is not acknowledged, it will move to Attempt 2 and try PH#1/
PO#2.
• After the loss of phase error is acknowledged or the call is unsuccessful, the
meter will then try the test mode event for PH#1/PO#2.

Changing Meter Time

The Q1000 meter allows the user to change the time in the meter while continuing
other meter functions—all while the meter is in service. The time in the meter can
be changed in the several ways. A time change of up to +/- 1 hour does not require
the user to re-initialize the meter. If a time change of more than one hour is
needed, then the user can perform multiple time change commands or perform an
initialization to the meter.

Programming Software Time Change

The PC-PRO+ 98 programming software can be used to change the time in the
Q1000 meter. While on-line with the meter, go to “Communications” at the top of
the screen, and select time adjustment. A dialog will come up showing the System
clock time (the PC's time) and the Device clock time (the meter's time). The user
can then choose to change the time in the meter to the PC's time or an offset of the
PC's time.
A maximum time change of +/- 1 hour is supported with this function.

Advanced Protocol Time Change

Several of the Advanced Protocols available as options in the QUANTUM Q1000
meter allow the user to change the time in the meter or the meter's port through
the use of protocol commands. These Advanced Protocols include the DNP 3.0
protocol, the IEC 60870-5-102 protocol, the IEC 60870-5-102 Plus protocol, and the
MODBUS protocol.
For specific information about any of these protocols, refer to the Protocol Editor
software and Getting Started Guide. These sources give detailed information
about each of these protocols.

GPS Time Synchronization

In addition, the Q1000 meters now have the ability to do GPS Time
Synchronization when ordered with this function. The meter's GPS function
complies with the NMEA 0183 standard - the common standard for GPS receivers.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-17

Communications

A GPS time adjustment ability in the Q1000 meter can be configured to be accurate
to within 100 ms when used in a system that supports this fast resolution update
time.
The PC-PRO+ 98 software allows the user to program the GPS port to
• watch for the absolute time in the meter.
• watch for a “top of the hour” or “midnight” signal.
• perform a time synchronization of up to +/- 30 minutes.
Up to 5 different GPS time synchronization device configurations can be
programmed into one meter which will allow a Q1000 meter to “listen” for five
different GPS device message types simultaneously. This flexibility will allow the
meter to support multiple GPS devices in one PC-PRO+ 98 program and lets the
user switch from one external GPS device to another without having to reprogram
the meter.
Another powerful feature of the GPS time synchronization function in the Q1000
meter is its ability to support GPS signals from non-GPS devices like RTUs. In this
set-up, the meter can be configured to “listen” to a non-GPS device send a GPS
ASCII format message to perform the time synchronization function with existing
equipment at a meter's location.
The Optical port, COM 1 port or COM 2 port may be configured to communicate
using the Mini-DLMS protocol. The user determines which of these port(s) to use
for Mini-DLMS in the PC-PRO+ 98 programming software in the “Communications
Set-up” component. One to three ports may be programmed with the Mini-DLMS
protocol. For one of the Mini-DLMS configured ports, the GPS time
synchronization function may enabled too; you can only set up one port at a time
for time synchronization. This one port is “shared” between the Mini-DLMS and
GPS time synchronization functions.
Once a port has been selected as a time synchronization port in “Communication
Set-up”, an additional tab in the Communications Setup component turns on called
Time Synchronization. The dialogs in this TAB are used to configure the various
time synchronization functions. The HELP screens in the programming software
give detailed information and examples for configuring time synchronization in the
meter. Also, refer to the programming software “Getting Started Guide”.
This port is a Mini-DLMS port and can talk to PC-PRO+ 98, EnergyAudit, and
EnergyScan. Then, when a GPS time synchronization message is “heard” by the
port, the function of the port switches to GPS time synchronization, and the meter
performs the time adjustment. When this short function is completed, the port
reverts back to its normal Mini-DLMS tasks. This technological innovation in the
Q1000 meter saves the user a port by enabling one port to perform two separate
tasks.

Protocols
Since there are no industry wide standard protocols, SchlumbergerSema supports
many protocols in the Q1000 meter. The protocols in the Q1000 meter are divided
into two groups-Basic Protocols and Advanced Protocols.

6-18 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

Basic Protocols

Mini-DLMS
Mini-DLMS is the protocol that allows PC-PRO+ 98 software to program the meter
and retrieve data. The meter will force at least one port to be configured for Mini-
DLMS. Mini-DLMS is an object based protocol. An extensive number of objects
have been defined so that retrieving data is made easily and efficiently. All data
within the meter can be accessed through these objects. The firmware packs the
data in the desired format, yielding to a higher throughput for monitoring
applications where time is critical.
When configuring the Q1000, the following information is necessary to set up the
meter.
• Baud Rate—Any supported baud rate is acceptable up to 115,200 baud.
• Auto Baud Enable Option—This option is used to be able to connect to the
meter at any speed. If this option is disabled, then the meter will only talk at
the specified baud rate.
• Meter's Individual Address—This address allows several meters to exist in
the same network. The range of the address is dependent on the protocol
selected for the port. All meters connected to the same network must have
different addresses; otherwise, more than one reply will be sent, and the line
will be jammed. An address is not needed for point-to-point communications.

Different ports on a meter can be programmed with different addresses.

• Meter's Group Address—The group address may be used to send a

command to multiple meters, such as a register freeze command. (This feature
is not supported at this time.)
• RTS to Enable TX Time—This setting is the minimum time that the RTS
(Ready To Send) signal is asserted prior to the start bit being transmitted. The
range is 0 to 100 milliseconds.
• Drop RTS after Tx Time—This setting is the minimum time that RTS
remains asserted after the last stop bit is transmitted. The range is from 0 to
100 milliseconds.
• DCD to RX Time—This setting is the minimum time that the DCD input must
be asserted prior to the receiver being turned on. The range is 0 to 100
milliseconds. A value of 0 tells the meter to ignore DCD, and the receiver is
always on.

QDIP
Any of the non-LONWORKs ports on the Q1000 may be configured with the QDIP
protocol. This protocol is used by RTUs and other software packages to talk to
QUANTUM 200/300 series and the FULCRUM SQ400 meters. The QDIP protocol
that the Q1000 supports is a subset of the QUANTUM’s feature set. From the data
in the program tables, the RTU or polling software knows what registers are
programmed. Unlike the QUANTUM meter, the Q1000 does not require additional
hardware to support QDIP. The protocol is implemented in the meter’s code. The

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-19

Communications

RTU polls the meter to retrieve the register information as well as other basepage
items. The Q1000’s emulation handles a fixed normal program table that contains
26 registers. The alternate program table is empty. Below is the standard register
list in the order supported.
.
Table 6.7 QDIP Registers

Index Quantity Unit

0 Wh Delivered kilo units
1 Wh Received kilo units
2 Maximum Delivered Watt Demand kilo units
3 VARh Delivered kilo units
4 VARh Received kilo units
5 Phase A Maximum Amp Demand kilo units
6 Phase B Maximum Amp Demand kilo units
7 Phase C Maximum Amp Demand kilo units
8 Instantaneous Watts units
9 Instantaneous VARs units
10 Instantaneous Power Factor units
11 Phase A Instantaneous Power Factor units
12 Phase B Instantaneous Power Factor units
13 Phase C Instantaneous Power Factor units
14 Phase A Instantaneous Volts units
15 Phase B Instantaneous Volts units
16 Phase C Instantaneous Volts units
17 Phase A Instantaneous Amps units
18 Phase B Instantaneous Amps units
19 Phase C Instantaneous Amps units
20 Instantaneous Neutral Amps units
21 Instantaneous VA units
22 Maximum Neutral Amp Demand kilo units
23 Instantaneous Delivered SLC Watts (Present Delivered Wattsa) units
24 Instantaneous Received SLC Watts (Present Received Wattsa) units
25 a
Instantaneous Delivered SLC Vars (Present Delivered Vars ) units
26 Instantaneous Received SLC Vars (Present Received Varsa) units

a
Equivalent registers in the QUANTUM ST-Q100, 200, 300 series.

6-20 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

The following registers are added and cannot be removed from the meter
configuration when QDIP protocol is selected:
Energy Registers
• Wh d
• Wh r
• VARh d
• VARh r
Demand Registers
• Max A (a)
• Max A (b)
• Max A (c)
• Max A (n)
The following items may be configured if QDIP is chosen on one port of the Q1000
meter:
• Baud Rate—The allowed speeds are from 1200 to 115,200 baud.
• Auto Baud Enable Option—This option can be used to be able to connect to
the meter at any speed. If this option is disabled, the meter will only talk at the
specified baud rate.
• Auto Baud Time Out—This parameter allows the QDIF server to sense the
baud rate again after this number of seconds. This setting can be very helpful
for switching baud rate on the customer side without having to reprogram the
meter.
• Meter's Individual Address—This address allows several meters to exist in
the same network. The range of the address is from dependent on the protocol
selected for the port. All meters connected to the same network must have
different addresses; otherwise, more than one reply will be sent, and the line
will be jammed. An address is not needed for point-to-point communications.

Different ports on a meter can be programmed with different addresses.

• RTS to Enable TX Time—This setting is the minimum time that the RTS
(Ready To Send) signal is asserted prior to the start bit being transmitted. The
range is 0 to 100 milliseconds.
• Drop RTS after Tx Time—This setting is the minimum time that RTS
remains asserted after the last stop bit is transmitted. The range is from 0 to
100 milliseconds.
• DCD to RX Time—This setting is the minimum time that the DCD input must
be asserted prior to the receiver being turned on. The range is 0 to 100
milliseconds. A value of 0 tells the meter to ignore DCD and the receiver is
always on.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-21

Communications

IEC 1107 (SIRP)

Any one port of the Q1000 can be configured to support the SIRP implementation
of the IEC 1107 protocol with a restricted version of the Mode C implementation, a
programming mode. The baud rates for the protocol are selectable form 300 to
9600.
The following features are implemented:
• Responding to an identification message from the host.
• Negotiating a baud rate with the host.
• Supporting verification of password.
• Performing automatic data read out of supported registers (energy and
demand registers) without entering the programming mode.
• Entering the programming mode in Mode C.
• Supporting the full data readout of all the supported registers using the
SchlumbergerSema SIRP formatted codes.

SCS (factory use only)

Any of the non-LONWORKs ports can be configured with SCS protocol. This
protocol is used to calibrate the meter at the factory and serves no purpose in the
field.

Loader
This protocol is used to download new firmware in the meter. See "Firmware
Upgrades" on page 3-80 for more information.

Advanced Protocols
An Advanced Protocol is not a standard Q1000 feature. This additional
functionality must be specified as a part of the meter specification submitted to
SchlumbergerSema with the meter order. Advanced protocols currently supported
for the Q1000 meter include DNP 3.0 Level 2+, IEC 60870-5-102, IEC 60870-5-102
Plus, and MODBUS RTU protocols.
Advanced protocols are highly configurable. For advanced protocols, the meter's
firmware must support the advanced protocol and the meter must have a
MeterKey license for that protocol. The advanced protocol configuration files
reduce implementation time and the expense of developing custom SCADA
(Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition) protocol implementations. Advanced
protocols are configured by using the SchlumbergerSema Protocol Editor
software.
These protocols have a flexible, user-configurable design. The following table gives
a quick overview of the capabilities of each protocol.

6-22 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide
Advanced

Input/Output Information

Instantaneous Registers
Self Reads
TOU

Standard Load Profile

Instantaneous Harmonics
Password Protection

(Energy, Demand, Sec. Inst., etc.)

Load Profile Data
Event Status
Non-Register Values

Threshold Alarms
in Meter?

23-5 (Load Profile Data)

Supports Changing Time
Instantaneous Voltage Quality
Digital Signature of
Current Year DST Change and Read

Extended Load Profile

Display
Protocol

DNP 3.0 Yes No No Last (1) (2) No Yes Yes (3) Yes (3) Yes (4) Yes Yes (5) (2)

MODBUS RTU Yes (6) No Last (1) (2) No Yes No Yes Yes (3) Yes (7) Yes (2)

IEC 60870-5-102 No No Yes No No No No No Yes No No No Yes (8) No Yes Yes

IEC 60870-5-102 Plus (9) No Yes Last (9) No No No No Yes No No No Yes (11) (10) Yes Yes

(1) Delivered and Received: Watts, VARs, VA Arithmetic, VA Vectorial, Watts SLC Compensated, VARs SLC Compensated, VA Vectorial
Compensated.
(2) Mostly supported
(3) Supported in 5.x and above firmware
(4) TOU rate information can be retrieved (with 5.x and above firmware)
(5) State events are supported (ON or OFF)
(6) Information is retained from the last complete load profile interval
(7) Counters supported
(8) Fatal and Non-fatal errors, plus some events supported
(9) 4 of 14 billing registers from last self read (can be selected by the user)
(10) CT Ratio, VT Ratio, Pulse Weight, and Serial Number supported
(11) Fatal and Non-fatal errors, plus some events and some event summaries supported

6-23
Communications
Communications

DNP 3.0
The first Advanced Protocol in the Q1000 was DNP 3.0 with Level 2
implementation being supported. DNP 3.0 is a read/write protocol used by a wide
variety of systems including SCADA systems. The Distributed Network Protocol
Version 3.0 (DNP 3.0) is a read/write protocol that is used by SCADA (System
Control And Data Acquisition) systems. The DNP 3.0 protocol serves the need for
open, standards-based interoperability between substation computers, RTUs
(Remote Terminal Units), IEDs (Intelligent Electronic Devices) and master
stations for the electric utility industry. Using Protocol Editor, you can define a
DNP 3.0 protocol configuration for a QUANTUM® Q1000 meter. The Q1000 meter
supports a Level 2+ implementation.

IEC 60870-5-102
A read/write protocol common in Europe. This protocol is used primarily for load
profile and event retrieval. The IEC 60870-5-102 protocol is a read/write protocol
common in Europe. This protocol was previously called the IEC 870-5-102
protocol. You can use Protocol Editor to create an IEC 60870-5-102 protocol
configuration file that can be used by the Q1000 meter to communicate load profile
and event data.

IEC 60870-5-102 Plus

A read/write protocol common in Europe. In addition to load profile retrieval, the
IEC 60870-5-102 Plus protocol can retrieve 4 energy registers, self-read billing
data—4 (user-selectable) of the 14 billing registers, 16 event summaries, CT and VT
pulse weights, and information about the meter status and meter messages. The
IEC 60870-5-102 protocol was previously called the IEC 870-5-102 protocol. You
can use Protocol Editor to create an IEC 60870-5-102 PLUS protocol configuration
file that can be used by the Q1000 meter to communicate load profile data, event
data, quantity data, and protocol error data.

MODBUS
A protocol often used in industrial automation. SchlumbergerSema supports the
MODBUS RTU version of the protocol. The MODBUS message that is sent from the
master to the slave contains the address of the slave, the command function, such
as “read register” or “write register”, the data, and a check sum (LRC or CRC).
Using Protocol Editor, you can define a MODBUS protocol configuration for a
Q1000 meter. Configuration for the MODBUS protocol involves setting general
configuration items as well as defining the data that will be accessible. The general
configuration includes communication configuration (such as baud rate and
address), word order, identifier values, and other miscellaneous configurations.
The register dataset configuration defines the map of Q1000 data onto the
MODBUS data spaces: coils, discretes, holding registers and input registers.

6-24 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

Protocol Editor
The Protocol Editor software is a configuration file editor that is used to create
and modify advanced protocols that support communication with the QUANTUM
Q1000 meter. Using the Protocol Editor software, you can create advanced
protocol configuration files that are then loaded into the Q1000 meter using the
PC-PRO+ 98 version 2.0, or greater, programming software. Protocol Editor is now
a part of the PC-PRO+ 98 version 2.0 and above installation; it is installed on your
PC along with PC-PRO+ 98.
Protocol Editor is intended for a user who is familiar with an advanced protocol.
Typically, the electric utility company's protocol expert will work with the utility's
Q1000 meter expert to identify the measurement data needed from the meter. Then
the protocol-specific configuration requirements for the data retrieval system are
configured using the Protocol Editor software to create the protocol configuration
file.
Each advanced protocol is configured independently by using Protocol Editor to
create a protocol configuration file. This file defines the communication
parameters for the protocol. The Protocol Data Server (PDS) configuration file is
the file that defines the “100 item list” of meter elements to be used by the
advanced protocol(s) when communicating with a Q1000 meter.
The table below lists the Advanced Protocols and indicates whether a .pds file is
required as well as the file types extension.

Protocol PDS File Extension

DNP 3.0 Yes .dnp

IEC 60870-5-102 No .ie2

IEC 60870-5-102 Plus No .i2p

Modbus No .mbu

For a more in-depth explanation of Protocol Editor and Advanced Protocols,

please see the Help files in Protocol Editor.

Input and Output Options

The QUANTUM Q1000 meter has the capability of sending and receiving a wide
variety of Inputs and Outputs including Digital, Pulse and Analog signals. The
meter can also communicate to other Q1000 meters in some of the I/O network
options and exchange data with other LONWORKs compatible devices. I/O signals
utilize a LONWORKs Network. These I/O features are options for the Q1000 and can
be installed with the meter initially or at a later date.
The Q1000 connects to I/O modules via a two wire transformer-isolated LONWORKs
LONTALK interface. This I/O interface connection to the network is made through
the meter's DB-25 connector which can be connected to the I/O modules using
twisted pair wires to terminal strips mounted in the I/O enclosures.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-25

Communications

Using the various I/O features of the Q1000, the meter can become a data collector
which can gather information from a substation, power plant, or industrial
installation. A remote connection to a Q1000 meter with these features allows
access to a wide variety of data from a number of devices.
The output features allow the Q1000 to interact with devices including recorders,
other Q1000 meters, EMS systems, PLC systems, and analog and digital RTUs.
A fully loaded Q1000 will support a total of 12 I/O modules with 64 I/O signals.
These include:
• 4 KYZ and 4 IEC 2-wire KY pulse outputs (using two modules)
• 16 digital state outputs (using two modules)
• 8 KYZ or 8 IEC 2-wire KY pulse inputs (using two modules)
• 16 digital state inputs (using two modules)
• 8 analog outputs (using two modules)
• 8 analog inputs (using two modules)1
The network can normally span about 500 feet and uses shielded twisted pair. The
network must be physically terminated at each end. Refer to Figure 6.8 through
Figure 6.10 for connection examples. A meter with no I/O modules does not
require termination.

Outputs

Pulse Outputs (KYZ, or IEC 2-wire KY)

The pulse outputs are designed so that any energy type quantity can be output.
These outputs can control an IEC 2-wire KY or KYZ output. An IEC 2-wire KY pulse
output generates a pulse with a certain width, and a KYZ output toggles its state
every time a pulse output triggers it. The configuration is the same regardless of
what physical mechanism is chosen. The two wire output may be configured with
internal DIP switches on the board to have a 10, 20, 40, or 80 ms output.
For a diagram of the output boards, see Chapter 10, Standard and Replacement
Parts; Schematics and Drawings.
The pulse outputs are programmable through PC-PRO+ 98. The pulse weight is
expressed in unitHours/Pulse. The range of pulse constants, or Ke is: 0.00001 to
100,000.0. Ke values are expressed in secondary unithours. Register multipliers do
not affect pulse constants.
Example 1:
For a class 20 Amp meter, 120 Volt 3-phase service, use the following calculation to
determine the pulse weight for maximum pulse output resolution:

V ´ I ´ Number of Phases
Ke = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
sec onds-ö
æ 3600 -------------------- ( Maximum Pulse Rate )
è hour ø

1. Analog Inputs are not currently available in the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for a future
release.

6-26 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

( 120 Volts ) ´ ( 20 Amps ) ´ ( 3 )

Ke = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
sec onds-ö æ -----------------
æ 3600 -------------------- pulses-ö
è 40
hour ø è sec ondø

7200Watts
Ke = -------------------------------------------
æ 144,000 pulses ----------------ö
è hour ø

watthours
Ke = 0.05 --------------------------
pulse

1 40 pulses per second is the maximum number of pulses that the I/O module can output.
SchlumbergerSema recommends that 36 pulses per second (90% of maximum) be used to
allow for load growth.
2 Some pulse input devices are limited in the maximum number of pulses per second they can
receive. Remember to check your pulse input device instruction manual.

Example 2:
One channel is designated so that one primary megawatthour will be accumulated
per pulse output.
Assume a CTR = 240:1 and a VTR = 60:1
The following equation can be used to determine the pulse weight:

PW sec ondary = æ ------------------------------------------ö = 69.44 Wh per Pulse

1 MWh per Pulse
è 240 ´ 60 ø

This pulse weight is a secondary value and must be multiplied by CTR and VTR to
obtain the desired 1.0 MWh per pulse on the primary side of the transformer.
In addition, the Q1000 meter can be programmed so that one quantity can be used
for two or more outputs. For example, watthours can be programmed for pulse
outputs on channels one and two. One output could be used for a pulse recorder
and one output for the industrial customer, eliminating the need for a pulse
splitting device.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-27

Communications

Digital State Outputs

The meter has over 80 events which can be assigned to trigger a digital state
output. Using PC-PRO+ 98, the user can assign the following events to any digital
state output. These events include:
• Fatal Error—These errors require immediate attention.
• Non-Fatal Error—These errors need to be investigated to determine their
severity.
• End Of Interval (EOI)—An EOI pulse representing the end of the interval
for the Demand Interval, or either load profile interval can be output and used
for timing information or synchronization.
• Threshold Alarms—Up to 16 threshold alarms can be assigned in the Q1000.
These thresholds can be configured as normal or inverted where a normal
threshold indicates that a maximum level has been exceeded, and an inverted
threshold indicates that a minimum level has been exceeded.
• Loss of phase—An output indicating that the potential on any phase has
dropped below a user defined level may be routed to the output.
• Demand Reset—An output can be sent when a demand reset is performed.
• Port Active—An output can be sent when a port’s status changes; either when
it becomes active or when it becomes inactive.
• Clock Error—An output can be sent when the software cannot communicate
with the real time clock (RTC) using the serial interface.
• Register Freeze—An output can be sent to indicate that a self read or
register freeze has been performed.
• Rate Alert—A contact closure corresponding to a programmed TOU rate.
• Digital State Input—A contact closure corresponding to a digital state input.
• TOU Status—Several TOU statuses may be assigned to trigger a digital state
output including:
- Time Override
- Scheduled Output
- Holiday
- Event Override

6-28 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

Analog Outputs
Analog outputs can used to feed analog recorders, PLCs or RTUs. These recording
devices usually take instantaneous values from sensors and transducers. An analog
output for the Q1000 must represent an instantaneous value from the meter like
Amps, Volts, and Watts.
First, select either voltage or current outputs for each desired analog output. Next,
select the range to use.
The Analog Output module supports 3 voltage outputs and 4 current outputs. The
ranges are :

Voltage Ranges: 0 to +10 Volts (unipolar)

-5 to +5 Volts (bipolar)
-10 to +10 Volts (bipolar)

Current Ranges: 0 to +1 Milliamps (unipolar)

-1 to +1 Milliamps (bipolar)
4 to 20 Milliamps (unipolar)
4 - 12 - 20 Milliamps (bipolar)

Zero offsets can either be zero (0) or an integer. Integer values for Zero Offset are
typically entered as negative values. The Zero Offset defines the mid-point value or
the value of zero.
The range for the analog output value from the meter to the I/O module is 0 to 100%
for delivered quantities and -100% to +100% for net quantities. Defining a zero
offset allows you to improve the resolution of the analog output by sending values
in smaller increments.
Delivered quantities start at zero and go to the delivered maximum or full scale,
which is 100%. Therefore, the analog output range for delivered quantities is 0 to
100%.
For net quantities, values can range from the negative of the full scale value to the
positive of the full scale value with zero in the middle. Therefore, for net quantities,
the analog output range is -100% to + 100%.
W delivered Example:
For 0 to 50,000 W delivered, 0 represents 0 Watts and 100% represents 50,000 W.
W net Example:
For an inter-tie site where watts are delivered or received, maximum number in
either direction must be estimated. After estimating the maximum, establish that
value as the full scale value. The positive maximum is +100% (full scale positive).
The negative maximum represents watts received or -100% (full scale negative).
Typically you enter a negative value for the zero offset to “set it back” to zero.

For the Analog Output module to operate at the 0 to 100% or -100 to 100% range, you must have
the module's DIP switches and Jumpers set to the desired output range. Refer to Analog Output
Module Configuration Settings on page -61 for these output range settings.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-29

Communications

Unipolar Examples
K Value Calculation With Zero Offset Equal to Zero:
The meter is a three element meter, 120V, 20A for a three phase four-wire WYE
installation. The value to be output is Watts. The maximum value for Watts is 3
phases x120x20 = 7200 Watts. If the maximum relative value is 7200 Watts, when
7200 watts are measured, the output must be at 100%. A zero offset of 0 is used
because this is a delivered quantity with a range of 0 to 100%.
Full scale = 7200 W
Zero Offset = 0
K = [Full scale value + (- Zero offset)] / 100%
K = [7200 + (-0)] / 100%
K = 72
K Value Calculation With Zero Offset Not Equal to Zero:
If the range of values for V2H (Volts-squared Hours) is 14400 V to 19600 V, you could
set -14400 V as the zero offset. With 14400 V as zero, 19600 V would represent 100%
of the output. The scaling factor of K would equal 52 as shown below:
Full scale = 19600 V
Zero Offset = -14400
K = [Full scale value + (- Zero offset)] / 100%
K = [19600 + (-14400)] / 100
K = 52
K Value Calculation With Hertz Quantity and Zero Offset Not Equal to Zero:
To use 65 Hz as the full scale value (100%) and 55 Hz as the negative maximum
value (-100%), define -60 Hz as the zero offset value.
Full scale = 65 Hz
Zero Offset = -60
K = [Full scale value + (- Zero offset)] / 100%
K = [65 + (-60)] / 100
K = 5 / 100
K = .05
Using 4 to 20 mA Range as a Unipolar Output
It is very common for industrial data acquisition systems to use 4-20mA in a
unipolar mode, that is, 4mA represents 0. To use such equipment with the Q1000
Analog Output Module, simply apply the bipolar formulas for offset and gain. For
example, to produce 4mA when 0 Watts are delivered and 20mA when 7200 Watts
are delivered, use:

Max – Min
K = ---------------------------
200

Max + Min
Offset = – ----------------------------
2

6-30 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

7200 – 0
K = --------------------- = 36
200

and

7200 + 0
Offset = – --------------------- = – 3600
2

Bipolar Example
This example shows calculations for K (gain factor) and the Offset for Analog
Output ranges which are bipolar (centered at 0%). Analog output ranges which are
bipolar are as follows:
• -1mA to +1mA
• 4mA to 20mA (12 mA represents 0)
• -5V to +5V
• -10V to + 10 V
Calculations for K and the Offset for bipolar outputs are as follows:

K = Max – Min
---------------------------
200

Max + Min
Offset = – ----------------------------
2

where Max is the value of the measured quantity, full-scale and Min is the lowest
value of the measured quantity expected.
For example, if the maximum Watt measurement is 7200 and the minimum is 1440,
the corresponding gain factor and offset are:

7200 – 1440
K = ------------------------------ = 28.8
200

and

7200 + 1440
Offset = – ------------------------------ = – 4320
2

For this example, applying a 1440 Watt load would produce 4mA at the output of
an Analog Output Channel set up for 4-20mA range. Applying 4320 Watts would
result in a 12mA output and 7200 Watts would generate a 20mA output.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-31

Communications

Inputs

Pulse Inputs (KYZ, or IEC 2-wire KY)

Pulse inputs can be generated by meters or other devices which support either
KYZ outputs or pulse outputs.
The type of input is configured by the setting of a jumper on the I/O Module.
For a diagram of the input boards, see Chapter 10.
Data received into the Q1000 via a digital pulse input can be assigned to several
different kinds of values. These include block interval and thermal demand, energy
registers, and load profile.
Using PC-PRO+ 98, the user can assign a pulse weight multiplier for each digital
pulse input to convert the pulses received to the true value.

Digital State Inputs

Digital state inputs can be used to log the closing of a relay, switching of capacitor
banks, or noting any event which can signal a contact closure. The date and time of
each opening and closing of the state inputs can be logged in the event log.
For a diagram of the input boards, see Chapter 10.
The status inputs can also trigger an action in the meter such as listed below:
• Register Self Read or Freeze—A status input can be programmed to trigger
a self read in the meter where the user defines which registers will be stored.
• Call home on event —The Q1000 can be programmed to phone in on a status
input event.
• Real Time Billing—See Chapter 4, Standard and Extended Load Profiles,
Time-of-Use, Meter Time, Event Log, and Event Summary, for a full
description. Whenever one of the inputs is active, a corresponding TOU rate
may be programmed to become active. The time of use rates and assignment
of a digital state input to a TOU rate are programmed in PC-PRO+ 98.

Analog Inputs
Analog inputs1 are used to record data from sensors like transducers that output
analog signals. Examples include temperature and frequency. Data received into
the Q1000 via an analog input can be assigned to several different kinds of values.
These include instantaneous, demand, and energy registers that can be sent to and
stored in load profile.
For a diagram of the input boards, see Chapter 10.
The Q1000 will need to be programmed with the appropriate multiplier to convert
the input value received to the true value. Each channel will have circuitry for
input scaling and offset adjustments. The offset will allow the user to set a “zero”
for each input.

1. Analog Inputs are not currently available in the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for a future
release.

6-32 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

Input / Output Modules (Optional)

Also see Figure 1.11 on

page 1-36 and Figure
2.30 on page 2-24.

Figure 6.7 I/O Module Mounted on DIN Rail

The input/output modules allow the meter to be easily customized to a particular

application. The modules are installed external to the meter and housed in a
standard enclosure that mounts on a DIN rail. Each module has its own power
supply that operates from line 120V AC or DC or 240V DC. Input/output module
dimensions can be found in Figure 1.11 on page 1-36; a 3-dimensional view is
shown in Figure 2.30 on page 2-24.
Up to six modules types (12 modules total; two of each type) can be connected to
work with a single Q1000 meter:
• digital state output—stays in closed or open position until toggled
• pulse output—outputs a fixed length pulse
• analog output—takes a digital value and converts it to an analog value
• digital state input—provides voltage to sense a continuous contact closure
• pulse input—provides voltage to sense a pulse of fixed length
• analog input—receives an analog input and digitizes it1
Functions of the modules are described below:
• Digital State Outputs—The digital state outputs will use LCA145-type opto-
couplers to achieve isolated contact closure outputs. These are intended for
use with infrequently changing signals such as customer alerts or EOI.
• Pulse Outputs—The pulse outputs use LCA145-type opto-couplers to achieve
isolated contact closure outputs. The output format is either KYZ or IEC 2-wire
KY. For the IEC 2-wire KY outputs, the output pulses are defined by short
duration contact closures. The duration can be selected by internal DIP
switches.
• Analog Outputs—The analog outputs use LONWORKs to interface with a
multiplexed Digital to Analog Converter (DAC). The DAC's multiplexed
outputs interface with four independent output drivers.

1. Analog Inputs are not currently available in the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for a future
release.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-33

Communications

• Digital State Inputs—The digital state inputs use a single isolated DC supply
to provide the wetting voltage for the dry contacts of all the external circuits.
This supply provides the voltage for the opto-couplers so that there will be
isolation between the internal and external circuits. These input circuits are
intended for use with infrequently changing signals such as alarms or EOI.
• Digital Pulse Inputs—The digital pulse inputs use a single isolated DC
supply to provide the wetting voltage for the dry contacts of all the external
circuits. This supply provides the voltage for the opto-couplers so that there is
isolation between the internal and external circuits. Internal jumpers
determine whether the input is KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY. For IEC 2-wire KY
inputs, the customer may select the input pulse duration using internal
jumpers.
• Analog Inputs—The analog inputs use LONWORKs to interface with a
multiplexed Analog to Digital Converter (ADC). The ADC's multiplexed inputs
interface with four independent analog current input circuits. Each channel
has circuitry for input scaling and offset adjustments. For current inputs,
external resistor networks are necessary for scaling.1

I/O Network Protocol

LonTalk
The LONTALK protocol implements the 7 layers of the OSI model by the means of a
single chip called Neuron. The Neuron chip uses the Neuron C language which has
very powerful instructions, especially in handling variables over the network. Two
or more applications on the network can exchange data or share data very easily,
thanks to the concept of network variables. They behave as global variables in a C
program. In other words, a network variable on a node is visible from other nodes
without any handling by the application program. This feature is fully exploited by
our I/O modules. The state of a digital state output in the meter is seen by the
digital state output module and allows the application program to control the
output relay.
The meter uses the Neuron chip as a communication processor. The Neuron chip is
connected to a main processor and provides network access. The application is
written on the host, and the host uses the Neuron chip to communicate variables
or explicit messages to the network.
LONWORKS provides a way of upgrading easily the number of I/Os just by adding
more nodes on the network. Also, the number of wires on the meter's side does not
increase with the number of I/Os.

LonWorks Circuits
The LONWORKS circuit should use shielded twisted pair wire, 22 AWG or better.
Even though the LONWORKS circuit has good noise immunity, it is recommended to
shield the twisted pair wire and ground at one end to improve performance in
noisy environments such as a substations or power plants.

1. Analog Inputs are not currently available in the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for a future
release.

6-34 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

I/O Network
The Q1000 can communicate with numerous inputs and outputs through the I/O
network. Through this media, the Q1000 can send or receive KYZ pulse, digital
status, and analog information.
The I/O network should be a low-cost shielded twisted pair wire. The
characteristics of the wire used to implement a network will affect the overall
system performance with respect to total distance, stub length, and total number
of nodes supported on a single channel. The use of UL Level IV, 22 AWG (0.65 mm)
shielded twisted pair cable as defined in document: UL’s LAN Cable Certification
Program, Document number 200-120 20M/11/9112,13. is recommended.

I/O Bindings
Normally, I/O bindings are done at the factory as part of the assembly process.
Four versions of plug-and-play bindings are currently supported. The standard is
the Universal Plug-and-Play binding. The binding process programs the LONWORKS
network variables in both the meters and the I/O modules.

Meter Part Numbers

The part numbers of the meters always follow a predefined pattern:

36 xxx yyyy-000
Determines the physical characteristics of the
xxx meter (i.e., voltage, current rating, form, and
so forth.)
yyyy Signifies the binding of the meter.

I/O Module Part Numbers

The part numbers of the I/O modules always follow a predefined pattern:

369xxyyyy-000
Determines the physical characteristics of the
xx module (i.e., Digital State Output, Digital
Pulse Input, and so forth.)
yyyy Signifies the binding of the I/O module.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-35

Communications

Binding Codes
The three I/O binding options and the respective binding codes are:

Binding Option Binding Code

Meter-to-Meter 005A, 005Ba

ANSI Plug and Play 0004

IEC Plug and Play 0003

Universal Plug and Play 0000

a
Meter-to-Meter Binding is one binding. One meter
and its 10 I/O modules have binding 005A; the second
meter and its 10 I/O modules have binding 005B.

The specification number is used to check the binding that has been put into a
meter or I/O module.
The standard part number format for a QUANTUM Q1000 meter or I/O module is:
36xxx_ _ _ _ -xxx
The four digits to the left of the dash (-) represent the binding.
The Universal Plug-and-Play binding is shown as:
36xxx0000-xxx
If a meter and an I/O module have the same 4-digit binding number, then they
should have the same bindings and will be able to communicate.
For example:

Meter Number I/O Module Number Bindings Compatible?

36xxx0000-xxx 369xx0000-xxx Yes
36xxx0002-xxx 369xx0000-xxx No
36xxx0003-xxx 369xx0003-xxx Yes

Where x is independent of the bindings.

6-36 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

I/O Module Functionality for the Plug and Play Bindings

ANSI IEC Universal

I/O Module Plug and Play I/O Module Plug and Play I/O Module Plug and Play
Number Number Number

1 Digital State Outputs (1-8) 1 Digital State Outputs (1-8) 1 Digital State Outputs (1-8)

Digital State Outputs Digital State Outputs Digital State Outputs

2 2 2
(9-16) (9-16) (9-16)

Digital Pulse Outputs Digital Pulse Outputs Digital Pulse Outputs

3A KYZ (1-4) and 4A IEC 2-Wire KY (1-4) and 3 KYZ (1-4) and
Digital State Output (1) Digital State Outputs (1-4) Digital State Output (1)

Digital Pulse Outputs Digital Pulse Outputs Digital Pulse Outputs

3B KYZ (5-8) and 4B IEC 2-Wire KY (5-8) and 4 IEC 2-Wire KY (5-8) and
Digital State Output (2) Digital State Outputs (5-8) Digital State Outputs (1-4)

5 Analog Outputs (1-4) 5 Analog Outputs (1-4) 5 Analog Outputs (1-4)

6 Analog Outputs (5-8) 6 Analog Outputs (5-8) 6 Analog Outputs (5-8)

Digital Pulse Inputs

Digital Pulse Inputs Digital Pulse Inputs
7 7 7 KYZ or IEC 2-Wire KY
KYZ (1-4) IEC 2-Wire KY (1-4)
(1-4)

Digital Pulse Inputs

Digital Pulse Inputs Digital Pulse Inputs
8 8 8 KYZ or IEC 2-Wire KY
KYZ (5-8) IEC 2-Wire KY (5-8)
(5-8)

9 Analog Inputs (1-4) * 9 Analog Inputs (1-4) * 9 Analog Inputs (1-4) *

10 Analog Inputs (5-8) * 10 Analog Inputs (5-8) * 10 Analog Inputs (5-8) *

11 Digital State Inputs (1-8) 11 Digital State Inputs (1-8) 11 Digital State Inputs (1-8)

12 Digital State Inputs (9-16) 12 Digital State Inputs (9-16) 12 Digital State Inputs (9-16)

Binding # 0004 Binding # 0003 Binding # 0000

* Module Not Yet Available

The number(s) in parentheses following each module description indicate(s) the

I/O channel number(s) present in the respective I/O module.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-37

Communications

Meter-to-Meter Binding

KYZ Outputs (1-4) * KYZ Inputs (1-4) *

KYZ Inputs (1-4) * KYZ Outputs (1-4) *

I/O Module I/O Module

Number Number

1 Digital State Outputs (1-8) 1 Digital State Outputs (1-8)

Digital State Outputs Digital State Outputs

2 2
(9-16) (9-16)

Digital KYZ Pulse Outputs Digital KYZ Pulse Outputs

4 (5-8) and 4 (5-8) and
Digital State Output (2) Digital State Output (2)

5 Analog Outputs (1-4) 5 Analog Outputs (1-4)

6 Analog Outputs (5-8) 6 Analog Outputs (5-8)

Digital Pulse Inputs KYZ Digital Pulse Inputs KYZ

8 8
or IEC 2-Wire KY (5-8) or IEC 2-Wire KY (5-8)

9 Analog Inputs (1-4) ** 9 Analog Inputs (1-4) **

10 Analog Inputs (5-8) ** 10 Analog Inputs (5-8) **

11 Digital State Inputs (1-8) 11 Digital State Inputs (1-8)

12 Digital State Inputs (9-16) 12 Digital State Inputs (9-16)

005A Binding Side 005B Binding Side

These are virtual I/O modules. This binding incorporates their functionality by just
*
connecting the meters together with a twisted pair.
** Module Not Yet Available.

The number(s) in parentheses following each module description indicate(s) the

I/O channel number(s) present in the respective I/O module.

6-38 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

Network Terminations
It is necessary to terminate the ends of the twisted pair bus to minimize reflections.
Failure to terminate the bus will degrade network performance. The user can
terminate the network either in the meter or I/O modules. Terminations are not
polarity sensitive.
The LONWORKS bus must be a continuous bus. The twisted pair wires use
terminations to connect the twisted pairs together. Terminations can be made on
an I/O module (by the user), in a Q1000 meter (at the factory during assembly
only), or externally on a Q1000 meter (by the user).

I/O CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES

Figure 6.8 I/O Network with Terminated QUANTUM Q1000 (at one of the bus ends)

Figure 6.8 shows one internally terminated Q1000 meter with two I/O modules. The
I/O module on the left is also terminated.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-39

Communications

Figure 6.9 I/O Network with Unterminated QUANTUM Q1000 (in between)

Figure 6.9 shows the meter in between two I/O modules. This meter must be
unterminated as shown. Both I/O modules are terminated.

Figure 6.10 I/O Network with Two Unterminated Q1000 Meters

6-40 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Communications

Figure 6.10 shows how to connect more than one QUANTUM Q1000 meter in the
same I/O network. This configuration requires custom binding which includes
custom communication parameters and connection assignments. Contact your
SchlumbergerSema Sales Representative for more information.
The Q1000 on the left is unterminated and passes through the LONWORKS bus. The
Q1000 on the right is unterminated internally but has an external network
termination (part number 442045) adapter on the DB-25 connector. The I/O module
on the left is terminated, and the one on the right is unterminated.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 6-41

Communications

Notes:

6-42 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 7 System Loss Compensation

The QUANTUM Q1000 meter has the capability of providing System Loss
Compensation (SLC) to enable users to install a meter on the low voltage side of a
transformer and then compensate the billing data in the meter to a billing point on
the high voltage side of the transformer.

Figure 7.1 System Loss Compensation Scheme

System Loss Compensation is a metering scheme that provides for adding (or
subtracting) losses to meter registration when it is more economical to install the
metering equipment at a point that is different from the contractual billing point.
The SLC scheme compensates for the losses that occur between the contractual
and the actual metering point. These losses can be from the power transformer,
transmission lines, and auxiliary power equipment. These losses can be significant,
and sometimes there may be no transformer involved.
When rate schedules and service contracts permit, many metering installations are
often placed on the low voltage side of the power transformer. Significant savings
in the installed cost of the lower voltage CT and VT instrument transformers as
compared to the cost of the higher voltage CT and VT instrument transformers can
then be achieved. Also, the metering point may be located a considerable distance
from the billing point. Compensation for the associated transformer, line, and
conductor losses can be included in the QUANTUM Q1000 meter readings.
System loss compensation for active and reactive power losses may include
transformer, transmission line, and auxiliary equipment losses. Transformer no-
load core losses, and load losses for winding resistance and leakage reactance as
well as transmission line resistive and inductive load loss, and charging current
vars may be included. The meter also provides users with the ability to program
CT/VT correction in the Q1000 which will allow the user to correct for the errors in
the current and voltage transformers. Together these advanced compensation and
correction features result in a billing point accuracy that is greatly improved over
traditional measurement methods.
The current implementation of SLC in the QUANTUM Q1000 meter is the SLC -
Basic version. This version is similar to the implementation in the QUANTUM STQ
meter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 7-1

System Loss Compensation

System Loss Compensation - Basic

SLC is a metering scheme that builds on the QUANTUM meter’s Transformer Loss
Compensation (TLC) abilities.

In early PC-PRO+ 98 versions, the SLC values were programmed outside of PC-PRO+ 98. In
version 2.1 and higher, SLC configuration programming is done within PC-PRO+ 98.

SLC provides for the adding (or subtracting) of losses to meter registration when it
is more economical to install the metering equipment at a point that is different
from the contractual billing point. Many metering installations are placed on the
low voltage side of the power transformer. When the billing point is on the high
side, costly voltage and current instrument transformers are required. Using the
System Loss Compensation capabilities of the Q1000 meter to install the meter on
the low voltage side can reduce this cost.
System loss compensation in the Q1000 meter is applied by calculating all the
losses involved and applying them in equations that automatically adjust for
variations of voltage and load. The watt and var losses of transformers,
transmission lines, and substation conductors and equipment may be included.
Loss calculations in the Q1000 meter are done using calculated instantaneous
values updated once per second. Once calculated, the system loss compensated
quantities can be used as any other meter quantities, for example, in demand,
energy, load profile, and so forth. The components that can be used to make up
system losses are:
• Losses in substation conductors, bus work, and lines
• Power transformer losses
• Transmission line losses
• CT and VT correction
The following section discusses in detail the use of SLC - Basic.

Figure 7.2 SLC Basic

7-2 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 System Loss Compensation

Elements of System Loss Compensation

System loss compensation is applied by calculating all the losses involved and
applying them in equations that automatically adjust for variations of voltage and
load in real time. The watt and var losses of transformers, transmission lines, and
substation conductors and equipment may be included.

High Voltage Low Voltage

Q1000 Meter

Figure 7.3 Diagram of QUANTUM Q1000 SLC Metering

The QUANTUM Q1000 meter can be compensated to add the system losses
between the billing point and the metering point to the meter readings if the
contract calls for the customer to pay for the losses. If the billing and metering
points are reversed, and the utility agrees to cover the losses, the Q1000 meter can
be compensated to subtract the losses from the meter readings.
The objective of system loss compensation is to cause a meter to register as if it
were at another physical location, properly adding to (or subtracting from) its
registration the losses interposed between the physical metering point and the
contractual billing point. Ideally, this compensation would be perfectly accurate
under all conditions, automatically adjusting for such factors as temperature
influences on conductors and transformer windings and core losses. In practice,
assumptions have to be made for operating temperatures, core loss variations, and
other variables. The resulting errors in compensation are small compared to total
registration.

Transformer Losses
Power transformer losses are made up of core (iron) losses that vary with voltage
and winding (copper) losses that vary with current. The transformer loss data
supplied by the manufacturer includes the core watt loss and percentage exciting
current at rated voltage and frequency, and the winding watt loss and the
percentage impedance at rated load and temperature. Var losses for both the core
and windings can be calculated using this data.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 7-3

System Loss Compensation

The calculation of transformer losses is done in two parts, the core loss (iron loss
or no-load loss) and the copper loss (load loss). Figure 7.4 shows a simplified
equivalent circuit for a power transformer and two power triangles representing
the two kinds of losses. The main components making up the losses are
represented by series and shunt resistance and reactance.

Figure 7.4 Simplified Transformer Equivalent Circuit and Loss Power Triangles

Information supplied by the transformer manufacturer includes:

• The kVA rating of the transformer bank
• Rated primary and secondary voltages
• No-load watts at rated voltage
• Load watts at rated current and at 75 C
• Percent exciting current at rated voltage
• Percent impedance at rated load.
The watt losses are given for both no-load and full-load, but the var losses have to
be calculated.
The no-load (iron) losses are composed mostly of eddy current and hysteresis
losses in the core and the magnetizing reactance (represented by the shunt
resistance and inductance in Figure 7.4(a)). These losses are measured (by the
transformer manufacturer) with the transformer open-circuited and rated voltage
applied. The information furnished is percentage exciting current (%Ix) and no-
load (or Fe) watts. Using the power triangle in Figure 7.4(b), we can solve for the
no-load vars.
The full-load losses are composed of winding resistance (full load watts) and
leakage reactance (full load vars), represented by the series resistance and
inductance in Figure 7.4(a). These losses are measured with one winding shorted
and low voltage applied to the other winding, sufficient to cause rated current in
the windings. The information given by the manufacturer is full load watts and
percent impedance (%Z). Applying this information to the full-load power triangle
in Figure 7.4(c), we can solve for full load vars.

7-4 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 System Loss Compensation

No-load Var Loss Calculation

In Figure 7.4(b), the no-load losses are represented by a power triangle. The no-
load watts loss (NLW) is given directly in the manufacturer’s data. The no-load
voltamperes (NLVA) is defined as the percent exciting current (%Ix) times the
transformer bank kVA rating:

The kVAr in the following equations stands for the kilovolt-ampere rating of the transformer
bank; not kilovars.

NLVA = % Ix · kVAr

The no-load loss phase angle (a) is defined as the inverse cosine of the no-load
watts divided by the no-load voltamperes:

NLW
a = acos æ ---------------ö
è NLVAø

The no-load var loss (NLV) is the no-load voltamperes multiplied by the sine of the
no-load loss angle:

NLV = NLVA · sin ( a )

Full-load Var Loss Calculation

In Figure 7.4(c), the full-load losses are represented by another power triangle. The
full-load watts loss (FLW) is given directly in the manufacturer’s data. The full-load
voltamperes (FLVA) is calculated by multiplying the percent impedance times the
transformer bank kVA rating:

FLVA = %Z · kVAr

The full-load loss phase angle (b) is the inverse cosine of the full-load watts divided
by the full-load voltamperes:

FLW
b = acos æè ---------------öø
FLVA

The full-load var loss (FLV) is the full-load voltamperes multiplied by the sine of
the full-load loss angle:

FLV = FLVA · sin ( b )

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 7-5

System Loss Compensation

Transmission Line Losses

Transmission Line impedance needs to be known in terms of resistance per unit
length and effective inductance per unit length, after taking into account line
capacitance and compensation. Then the watt and var losses at the transformer
bank apparent power (kVA or MVA) rating can be calculated for a given line length.
Transmission Line losses are made up of series resistance and inductance and
shunt capacitance. The information that is needed to calculate the losses for the
transmission line is:
• The series resistance in ohms per unit length
• The effective series inductive reactance in ohms per unit length, after allowing
for shunt capacitance and line compensation
• The length of the line
• The primary line current at the VA rating of the transformer bank
The transmission line watt loss is three times (for the three lines) the resistance
per unit length times the square of the rated current.
The transmission line var loss is three times the inductive reactance per unit length
times the square of the rated current.
Using the transformer information, calculate the transmission line current at the
transformer rated VA. The rated line current is the one-third of the transformer
bank VA rating divided by the line-to-neutral voltage.

Substation Losses
The substation losses that are to be included in the compensation are calculated at
the secondary current of the transformer bank at its VA rating. Var loss in the
substation conductors will probably be quite small compared to the transformer
and transmission var losses, but may be included if significant. Power supplied to
cooling fans and other auxiliary equipment can also be included in the comparison.
Substation conductor losses are calculated in a similar manner to transmission line
losses, except on the secondary side of the transformer bank. The substation
conductor losses may be so small in comparison to those of the transformer bank
and transmission line that they can be neglected.

Total System Losses

All system losses have been described. The next step is to combine them in
preparation for calculation of the four loss coefficients for programming into the
meter. All of the full-load watt losses will be added together as will all of the full-
load var losses. These losses have been calculated at the kVA rating of the
transformer bank. Had there been only transmission line and substation losses (no
transformer bank involved), the calculations would be made at the base
voltampere rating of the system. Of course, in this case, there would be only
copper watt and var losses involved.
Since, in the previous examples, only the transformer bank had no-load losses, the
NLW and NLV values will be as calculated in the transformer loss section. All of the
full-load watt losses will be combined to determine TLW, the total system watt
losses, and the full-load var losses will be combined to determine the TLV, the total
system var losses.

7-6 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 System Loss Compensation

Examples
Examples are given in the following sections to illustrate how to calculate the four
loss coefficients for the compensation equations.

Calculation of System Losses

For this example, the system losses are calculated assuming a 36 mile transmission
line, 10 MVA transformer bank, and 156 feet of substation conductor. Then, the
losses will be converted to constants for the compensation equations to be used in
different metering situations.

Transformer Losses
The transformer data supplied by the manufacturer:

kVA rating of transformer bank 10 MVA

Rated primary voltage 115 kV
Secondary line-to-line voltage 12,470 V
Secondary line-to-neutral voltage 7200 V
No-load watts loss 45 kW
Copper loss watts at 75° C 135 kW
Percent impedance 7.5%
Percent exciting current 1.03%

Symbols are assigned here to the transformer data to be used in later calculations:

In the following equations the equals sign (=) means “is defined as”.

kVA rating of transformer bank

kVAr = 10MVA
Rated primary line-to-line voltage V p = 115kV
Rated line-to-neutral voltage Vr = 7200V
Rated line-to-line voltage Vs = 3 · Vr
No load watts loss NLW = 45.0kW
Copper loss watts at 75C FLW = 135.0kW
Percent impedance % Z = 7.5 %
Percent exciting current % Ix = 1.03 %

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 7-7

System Loss Compensation

Calculation of Transformer Var Losses

Calculation of No-load vars (NLV): (Refer to power triangle b in Figure 7.4.)
No-load VA (NLVA) is: ·
NLVA = ( % Ix · kVAr ) = 0.0103 ( 10MVA )

NLVA = 103kVA
No-load loss phase angle (a):

NLW
a = acos æ ---------------ö = acos æ -------------ö
45.0k
è NLVAø è 103k ø

a = 64°

No-load var loss (NLV):

NLV = NLVA · sin ( a ) = 103 kVA sin 64°

NLV = 92.65kvar

Calculation of Full-load Vars (FLV): (Refer to power triangle c in Figure 7.4.)

Full-load VA (FLVA) is: FLVA = ( % Z · kVAr ) = 0.075 ( 10MVA )

FLVA = 750kVA
Full-load loss phase angle (b)

FLW
b = acos æ ---------------ö = acos æ ------------ö
135k
è FLVAø è 750kø

b = 79.6°

Full-load var loss (FLV):

FLV = FLVA · sin ( b ) = 750k sin 79.6°

FLV = 737.75 kvar

Comment: If the transformer bank were composed of three single-phase

transformers, each individual transformer’s VA, watt, and var losses would be
determined as previously outlined. Then the values for the three transformers
would be added to obtain the total transformer loss.
Observation: The three-phase transformer watts and vars have been obtained
without reference to voltage or rated current in the system. The transformer bank
has been treated as a “black box” without any reference to the arrangement of the
transformer windings or to whether the system is a three-phase four-wire system,
or a three-phase three-wire system.

7-8 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 System Loss Compensation

Transmission Line Losses

The transmission line for this example is 36 miles long. The capacitive effect is
assumed to be low enough to be neglected. At 60 Hz and 50°C, it has 0.306 ohms
resistance and 0.451 ohms reactance per mile per line. This example calculates the
resistance and reactance per line and the line current at the transformer kVA
rating. The base current is used in cases involving transmission lines and no
transformer losses. The total load watt loss for the transmission line is calculated
multiplying the resistance per mile times the number of total miles for all three
lines times the square of the load current. The total load var loss is calculated the
same way except using reactance per mile.
Resistance per mile:
ohm
r = 0.306 -----------
mi

Inductive reactance per mile:

ohm
x = 0.451 -----------
mi

Total line length: length = ( 3 ) · 36mi

Transmission line current at primary-rated current of transformer:

kVAr 10, 000kVA
I p = ------------------- = -----------------------------
Vp · 3 115kV · 3

I p = 50.204A

Line loss watts for all three lines is three

times the resistance per line times the rated primary current squared:
·
ohm
LLW = r · ( length ) · ( I p ) 2 = æ 0.306 -----------ö 108mi ( 50.20A )
2
è mi ø

LLW = 83.297kW

Line loss vars for all three lines is three times the reactance per line times the rated
primary current squared:
·
ohm
LLV = x · ( length ) · ( I p ) 2 = æ 0.451 -----------ö 108mi ( 50.20A )
2
è mi ø

LLV = 122.766 kvar

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 7-9

System Loss Compensation

Substation Conductor Losses

For this example, the substation conductors between the secondary of the
transformer bank and metering point (instrument transformers) have a total length
(for all three conductors) of 156 feet. The conductor resistance is 0.005 ohm per
1000 feet and the reactance is 0.09 ohm per 1000 feet. To calculate the watt and var
losses, determine the secondary current at the transformer bank rating, and then
multiply its square times the resistance and reactance to obtain the losses.
The secondary rated current is one third of the transformer bank rating divided by
the secondary line-to-neutral voltage.
V r = 7200V
kVAr 10, 000kVA
I r = --------------- = -----------------------------
3 · Vr 3 ( 7200 )

I r = 462.96A

The total conductor resistance is: ohm

R cond = 0.005 ----------- · 156ft
kft
–4
R cond = 7.8 · 10 ohm

The total conductor watt loss is:

· 2 –4
CLW = ( Ir ) 2 · Rcond = ( 462.96A ) ( 7.8 · 10 ohm )

CLW = 0.167kW

The total conductor reactance is:

ohm
X cond = 0.09 ----------- · 156ft
kft

Xcond = 0.014ohm

The total conductor var loss is::

CLV = ( Ir ) 2 · X cond

CLV = 3.009 kvar

7-10 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 System Loss Compensation

Total System Losses

All system losses have been calculated. They will now be combined in preparation
for calculation of the four loss coefficients to be used in the watt and var loss
equations (1) and (2). All of the full-load watt losses will be added together and all
of the full-load var losses will be added together. These losses have been calculated
at the kVA rating of the transformer bank. Had there been no transformer bank
involved, the transmission line and substation losses would have been determined
at the base voltage and base current for the system.
The total for all load watt losses is:
TLW = FLW + LLW + CLW
The total for all load var losses is:
TLV = FLV + LLV + CLV
Table 7.1 shows a summary of all system losses from the example.

Table 7.1 System Losses Example

Type Source Watt Losses Var Losses

No-Load Losses Transformer Core NLW = 45 kW NLV = 92.65 kvar
Transformer Windings FLW = 135 kW FLV = 737.75 kvar
Transmission Line LLW = 83.30 kW LLV = 122.77 kvar
Load Losses
Substation Conductors CLW = 0.17 kW CLV = 3.01 kvar
Total Load Losses TLW = 218.5 kW TLV = 863.5 kvar

Three-Phase, 4-Wire Meter Calculations

The loss constants will be calculated first for a 4-wire grounded Y load using a
3-element meter. Later, the loss constants for the same system except with a 3-wire
delta load will be calculated.
In the previous sections, the watt and var losses of the system with reference to the
kVA rating of the transformer bank have been determined. In order to calculate the
percentage loss constants for the loss equations, the losses for differences
between the system voltage and current ratings and the metering voltage and
current ratings (as determined by the meter ratings and the instrument
transformer ratios) have to be adjusted.
The following meter and instrument transformer ratings will be used for this
example:

Current transformer ratio, CTR: CTR = 500/5 = 100/1

Voltage transformer ratio, VTR: VTR = 7200/120 = 60/1
Meter voltage rating, Vm: Vm = 120 V
Inom, meter test amps: TA = 5 A

The loss constants (or coefficients) for the system loss equations can now be
determined. In order to do this, the losses have to be scaled to the values that they
would be if operating at the nominal meter voltage and current values (at the
secondaries of the instrument transformers). Then they are converted to a
percentage of the transformer bank VA rating.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 7-11

System Loss Compensation

Watt Loss Constants

The first step is to calculate the watt load loss constant (WCU), which is the total
load watts (TLW) adjusted for the shift from the power transformer secondary
current rating to the current transformer primary rating. Since the load loss varies
as the square of the current, the ratio of the two current ratings is squared.

2 2
TA · CTR 5A · 100 218.5kW
WCU = ------------------------ · TLW = ---------------------
Ir 462.96A

WCU = 254.86kW

The watt load loss constant has to be converted from its value in watts to a
percentage for the watts loss equation. The percentage watt load loss constant
(%WCU) is the ratio of WCU to the metering VA rating, multiplied by 100.
The metering VA rating (VAm) is the product of the meter voltage and current
ratings times the product of the instrument transformer ratios and the number of
meter elements.
Meter VA rating, VAm at the instrument transformer primaries:

VA m : = 3 · V m · TA · CTR · VTR = 3(120)(5)(100)(60)

VA m = 1.08 · 10 4 kVA

The percentage load loss constant is the load loss watts normalized for the meter
VA rating and converted to a percentage:

%WCU: = -------------- · 100 = æè ----------------------------öø 100

WCU 254.86kW
VA m 10,800kVA

%WCU = 2.36

The next step is to calculate the watt no-load loss constant (WFE), which is the no-
load watts (NLW) adjusted for the shift from the power transformer secondary
voltage rating to the voltage transformer primary rating. Since the no-load watt
loss varies approximately as the square of the voltage, the ratio of the two voltage
ratings is squared.

2 2
V m · VTR · 60
WFE = -----------------------
- · NLW = 120V
------------------------ 45 kW
Vr 7200V

WFE = 45kW

The percentage no-load watt loss constant is the no-load loss watts normalized for
the meter VA rating and converted to a percentage:

7-12 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 System Loss Compensation

%WFE: = ------------ · 100 = æè ----------------------------öø 100

WFE 45kW
VA m 10,800kVA

%WFE = 0.42

Var Loss Constants

The var loss constant (VCU) is the total load vars (TLV) adjusted for the shift from
the power transformer secondary current rating to the current transformer
primary rating. Since the load loss varies as the square of the current, the ratio of
the two current ratings is squared.

2 2
TA · CTR 5A · 100 863.5 kvar
VCU = ------------------------ · TLV = ---------------------
Ir 462.96A

3
VCU = 1.01 · 10 kvar

The var load loss constant has to be converted from its value in vars to a
percentage for the vars loss equation. The percentage var load loss constant (%
VCU) is the ratio of VCU to the metering VA rating (VAm), multiplied by 100.
The percentage var load loss constant is the load loss vars normalized for the
meter VA rating and converted to a percentage:

%VCU: = ------------- · 100 = æè ----------------------------öø 100

VCU 1010kvar
VAm 10,800kVA

%VCU = 9.35

The next step is to calculate the var no-load loss constant (VFE), which is the no-
load vars (NLV) adjusted for the shift from the power transformer secondary
voltage rating to the voltage transformer primary rating. The no-load var loss varies
approximately as the fourth power of the voltage.

4 4
Vm · VTR 120V · 60 92.65kvar
VFE = -----------------------
- · NLV = ------------------------
Vr 7200V

VFE = 92.65kvar

The percentage no-load var loss constant is the no-load loss vars normalized for
the meter VA rating and converted to a percentage:

V m · VFE 4
%VFE: = æ -------------------------ö · 100 = æ ----------------------------ö 100
92.65kvar
è VA m ø è 10,800kVAø

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 7-13

System Loss Compensation

%VFE = 0.86

Three-Wire, Delta Load, 2-Element Meter Calculations

The preceding example covered a four-wire wye load metered with a three element
meter. This example is for exactly the same system except that the load is three-
phase, three-wire delta load metered with a two-element meter. The transmission
line, transformer bank, and substation losses are unchanged. But now the load is
delta instead of wye and the voltage transformers will be the same (except only
two are required). The metering VA rating will change, resulting in changes in all of
the percentage loss constants.

Two-Element Meter Loss Constants

The secondary line current and CTR are unchanged from the previous example.
However, the voltage transformer ration (VTR) and the metered voltage have
changed. This means that all of the percentage loss constants will change. The new
metering VA rating and the new loss constants to program into the meter will be
calculated.
The new voltage transformer ration is: VTR: = 12000
---------------
120

The secondary line-to-line voltage is: V s = V r · 3 = 7200V · 3

V s = 12.471kV

It is important to observe that when the system is operating at rated voltage the voltage
applied to the meter is 124.71 volts. The internal reference voltage of the QUANTUM
meter is unchanged and is 120 volts.

This formula calculates the metering VA rating for this load configuration:

VA m = 3 · V m · TA · CTR · VTR = 3 · 120V · 5A · 100 · 100

VA m = 1.04 · 10 4 kVA

7-14 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 System Loss Compensation

Figure 7.5 System Schematic; 3-Phase 3-Wire with 2-Element QUANTUM Q1000 Meter

This changes the percent loss constants. The calculation of the system’s watts and
vars is unchanged, only the base on which the percent value is based changes.
TA · CTR 2 5A · 100 2
WCU: = æ -------------------------ö · TLW = æ ----------------------ö 218.5kW
è Ir ø è 462.96A ø

WCU = 254.82kW

TA · CTR 2 5A · 100 2
VCU: = æè -------------------------öø · TLV = æè ----------------------öø 863.5kvar
Ir 462.96A

VCU = 1.01 · 10 3 kvar

Vm · VTR 2 120V · 100 2

WFE: = æ --------------------------ö · NLW = æ ----------------------------ö 45kW
è Vs ø è 12,470V ø

WFE = 41.67kW

Vm · VTR 4 120V · 100 4

VFE = æ --------------------------ö · NLV = æ ----------------------------ö 92.65kvar
è Vs ø è 12,470V ø

VFE = 79.45kvar

Two-Element Meter Percentage Loss Constants

The percentage loss constants for programming the 2-element meter are:

%WFE: = æ -------------ö · 100 = æ ----------------ö 100

WFE 41.67
è VAmø è 10,400ø

%WFE = 0.4

%WCU: = æè --------------öø · 100 = æè ----------------öø 100

WCU 254.86
VAm 10,400

%WCU = 2.45

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 7-15

System Loss Compensation

%VFE: = æ -------------ö · 100 = æ ----------------ö 100

VFE 79.45
è VAmø è 10,400ø

%VFE = 0.76

%VCU = æ -------------ö · 100 = æ ----------------ö 100

VCU 1010
è VAmø è 10,400ø

%VCU = 9.71

Testing Meters with System Loss Compensation

Uncompensated test should be run first to verify normal operation of the meter.
After the uncompensated tests are run, program the meter with the desired SLC
constants. The following steps are suggested for testing QUANTUM Q1000 meters
with SLC:
1 Run Series tests, uncompensated.
2 Run individual element tests, uncompensated.
3 Apply compensation constants (by reprogramming the meter for SLC).
4 Run Series tests. Be sure that the meter test board is set to the best accuracy
for voltage and current.
5 Compare uncompensated test results with compensated test results to see that
the expected changes occurred. This can be done easily by programming the
display to represent both compensated and uncompensated values at the same
time. Be sure to take into account the measurement uncertainties of voltage,
current, and phase angle of the test board when evaluating the results.
6 If element tests are run with SLC active, be aware that iron losses are active on
any element where voltage is present regardless of whether the current is
present in the element.
The WFE, WCU, VFE, and VCU in the following equations are the values that are
calculated and placed into the Q1000 SLC Editor. The two equations that are listed
in the following paragraphs are the same equations used by the Q1000 in
calculating compensated watts and vars.

3 Element Testing
For a 3 element meter, values for the compensation equation can be obtained
directly from the meter and per phase results can be evaluated directly.
Note that because the Wfe, Wcu, VARfe, and VARcu values are aggregate (total)
values for all elements, they must be divided by three in per-element calculation
models. The division by 3 is handled automatically by the Q1000 for internal meter
calculations.

7-16 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 System Loss Compensation

The per-element compensated watts (CWATTS) can be calculated by the following

equation:

2 Wfe 2 Wcu
CWATTS = WATTS A + ( VA ¤ Vm ) × ---------- + ( IA ¤ TA ) × -----------
3 3
2 Wfe 2 Wcu
+ WATTS B + ( V B ¤ Vm ) × ---------
- + ( I B ¤ TA ) × ----------
-
3 3
2 Wcu
WATTS C + ( V C ¤ Vm ) × Wfe
2
+ ---------- + ( I C ¤ TA ) × -----------
3 3
CWATTS = [ WATTS A + ( WATTS B + WATTS C ) ]
2 Wfe 2 Wcu
+ ( V A ¤ Vm ) × ---------- + ( I A ¤ TA ) × -----------
3 3
2 Wfe 2 Wcu
+ ( V B ¤ Vm ) × ---------- + ( I B ¤ TA ) × -----------
3 3
2 Wfe 2 Wcu
+ ( V C ¤ Vm ) × ---------- + ( I C ¤ TA ) × -----------
3 3
2 Wcu
CWATTS = WATTS + ( V A ¤ Vm ) × Wfe
2
---------- + ( I A ¤ TA ) × -----------
3 3
2 Wcu
( V B ¤ Vm ) × Wfe
2
+ ---------- + ( I B ¤ TA ) × -----------
3 3
2 Wfe 2 Wcu
+ ( V C ¤ Vm ) × ---------- + ( I C ¤ TA ) × ----------
-
3 3

The equation shows that you can begin with the uncompensated watts on a per
phase basis (first line) or begin with the total uncompensated watts and then
modify it by the compensation applied to each phase (last line). Either calculation
will give you the total compensated watts. Per phase uncompensated watts or total
uncompensated watts can be obtained directly from the meter (recommended) or
calculated from the known volts, amps, and power factor.
When you find the total compensated watts you can divide them by the total
uncompensated watts and then multiply by 100 to find the percent registration that
should be expected from the meter. The accuracy of the compensated watts
measurement is very dependent upon the accuracy of the test board voltmeter and
ammeter.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 7-17

System Loss Compensation

You can use the same steps as above to test the compensated vars. The following
equation shows how the per-element compensated vars can be calculated:

4 Vfe 2 Vcu
CVARS = VARS A + ( V A ¤ Vm ) × -------- + ( I A ¤ TA ) × ----------
3 3
4 Vfe 2 Vcu
+ VARS B + ( V B ¤ Vm ) × -------- + ( I B ¤ TA ) × ----------
3 3
4 Vfe 2 Vcu
+ VARS C + ( V C ¤ Vm ) × -------- + ( I C ¤ TA ) × ----------
3 3
CVARS = [ VARS A + ( VARS B + VARS C ) ]
4 Vfe 2 Vcu
+ ( VA ¤ Vm ) × -------- + ( I A ¤ TA ) × ----------
3 3
4 Vfe 2 Vcu
+ ( VB ¤ Vm ) × -------- + ( I B ¤ TA ) × ----------
3 3
4 Vfe 2 Vcu
+ ( V C ¤ Vm ) × -------- + ( IC ¤ TA ) × ----------
3 3
2 Vcu
CVARS = VARS + ( V A ¤ Vm ) × Vfe
4
-------- + ( I A ¤ TA ) × ----------
3 3
4 Vfe 2 Vcu
+ ( V B ¤ Vm ) × -------- + ( I B ¤ TA ) × ----------
3 3
4 Vfe 2 Vcu
+ ( V C ¤ Vm ) × -------- + ( IC ¤ TA ) × ----------
3 3

2 Element Testing
For a 2 element meter, testing is not as straightforward. Compensation of the total
values can still be directly evaluated. Evaluation of the per phase compensation is
not as direct as the 3 element. This is because the SLC calculation still happens on
a 3-phase basis even in a 2 element meter. To accomplish this, the SLC calculator
creates an equivalent 3 element system from the 2 element data, and then
calculations proceed as outlined in the 3 element procedure above. At the end,
however, the 3 element data appears in the per phase registers. The total value is
correct, but the per element values would be misleading if the user does not fully
understand the application.

It is recommended that the user evaluate the compensation based on total values to avoid the
confusion that could result from using per phase values.

Definition of Symbols
Table 7.2 shows a list of the symbols used in System Loss Compensation.

Table 7.2 Definition of Symbols

kVAr The kVA capacity of the transformer at the rated voltage

Ix The transformer exciting current

%Ix The transformer exciting current at rated voltage as a percentage of rated

current

7-18 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 System Loss Compensation

Table 7.2 Definition of Symbols

NLW The transformer iron (no-load) watts loss

NLVA The transformer no-load voltamperes

NLV The transformer no-load vars

a The transformer no-load loss angle, alpha

%Z The transformer percent impedance (the ratio of voltage required to circulate

rated current in the transformer windings when one winding is short-
circuited to the rated voltage)

FLVA The transformer VA full-load losses

FLV The transformer var full-load losses at rated current

FLW The transformer copper losses at rated current

b The transformer full-load loss angle, beta

LLW Transmission line watt losses at rated current of transformer bank

LLV Transmission line var losses at rated current of transformer bank

CLW Substation conductor watt losses at rated current of transformer bank

CLV Substation conductor var losses at rated current of transformer bank

TLW Total system watt losses, TLW = FLW + LLW + CLW

TLV Total system var losses, TLV = FLV + LLV + CLV

Vp Rated primary voltage, line to line

Ip Rated primary line current

Vr Rated secondary voltage, line to neutral

Ir Rated secondary current

Vs Rated secondary voltage, line to line

VTR The voltage instrument transformer ratio

CTR The current instrument transformer ratio

Vm The rated meter voltage

Inom The SLC nominal current (typically TA)

I The measured current at the meter

V The measured voltage at the meter

WATTS The measured watts

CWATTS The compensated watts

WFE The iron watt loss constant

WCU The copper watt loss constant

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 7-19

System Loss Compensation

Table 7.2 Definition of Symbols

VARS The measured vars

CVARS The compensated vars

VFE The iron var loss constant

VCU The copper var loss constant

VAm The primary voltampere rating of the meter

7-20 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 8 Theory of Operation

The collection of capabilities of the new QUANTUM Q1000 meter exceeds any ever
available before in the electricity metering market. Internally, it combines the
power of one neuron network controller and two 32-bit microprocessors: one
specialized for digital signal processing (DSP) of the line signal and one specialized
in multi-port, mutli-protocol communications. The meter architecture allows for
functional upgrades without changing any hardware. Four megabytes of program
memory and one megabyte of data memory provides room for expansion and
storage of large amounts of data.
External input/output modules, communicating seamlessly over a two-wire,
LONWORKs network, give the meter the flexibility to be customized for each
application and easily expanded later if needed. The LONWORKs network can also
be used to connect meters together for the sharing of data or input/output
modules. An optional internal, 33.6 Kbaud modem is available to provide high
speed telephone communications. A 4 line LCD allows for simultaneous display of
up to four metering quantities or other status messages. A standard optical port
provides convenient on-site communications; some new optical cables allow for
optical port communication up to 19,200 bps.
Active transformer technology combined with a 14-bit analog-to-digital converter
reduces measurement errors to near reference standard levels. The fundamental
accuracy of the meter is rated at 0.1% of reading. The DSP processor performs a
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) to provide harmonic analysis of the waveform up to
the 20th harmonic, allowing the user to see harmonics updated once per second.
The user can also record harmonics or trigger alarms based on harmonics. Voltage
quality (sags, swells, interruptions, and imbalances) can also be captured.
Two independent basic load profiles enable the user to specify different interval
lengths for different uses. Eight additional extended load profiles provide even
more functionality including some new and innovative functions. Thirty-five
different demand quantities are selectable, and 340 energy quantities can be
calculated. Also, there are 60 demand registers.
This chapter has been updated to comply with the upcoming release of
PC-PRO+ 98 version 2.3 and firmware 5.x.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 8-1

Theory of Operation

Major Function Boards

VTs and MOV Board
The MOV board is located closest to the transducers. It provides the bulk of the
protection from harmful or destructive signals on the line. The MOV board
localizes all “dirty” electrical circuits (subject to surges, transients and noise), and
provides “clean” (filtered and/or surge-protected) signals to other boards. This
board contains:
• Active voltage transformers for the Transducer Board
• Surge protection for the Power Supply Board
• EMI filter facilitating compliance with FCC Part 15 and CISPR 22
requirements
• Single-phase or polyphase rectifier
Voltages connected to the base terminals are first routed through inductors. These
inductors help to block spurious high frequency signals such as those appearing in
the fast transient tests of ANSI C12.1 and IEC 687. The voltages then go to both the
power supply and the voltage measurement circuit.
In the voltage measurement circuit, the voltage signal is first converted to a current
signal by means of a high voltage resistor. This precision resistor is specially
designed for stability even after high voltage surges. The small current signal flows
through the primary winding of the active voltage transformer circuit. Back-to-
back protection diodes insure that the voltage on the primary of the VT stays small.
In the secondary of the VT, the small current is changed back to a voltage and
scaled by a resistor before being routed to the Transducer Board to be sampled.
The circuit is repeated for each phase.
The power supply input circuit differs for socket-base, DIN/A-base and panel
mount meters:
• In a standard socket-base meter, the single-phase rectifier will normally be
connected to the A-phase potential connection. Optionally, the socket-base
meter may be ordered with auxiliary power. The AC/DC auxiliary power for
the socket meter may be ordered two ways. It can be routed through the
spades in the meter’s base or through a special cable, brought to the outside
via an opening in the meter base.
• In the DIN, A-base, Switchboard and Rackmount meters, the polyphase
rectifier will be connected to all available phases. Optionally, these meters may
be ordered with auxiliary power supply inputs. The rectifier will be connected
to those inputs, working as single-phase in that case.
For each power supply input, after the voltage has gone through an inductor, it is
surge protected by a series resistor, line-to-line and line-to-neutral varistors and a
line to neutral capacitor. The neutral leg also has the resistor and inductor in
series. The voltage is then rectified and filtered by a capacitor. With more filtering
by inductors, the rectified voltage then goes to the power supply board by a two
wire connector.

CTs and Transducer Board (Front End)

The Transducer Board does the measurement in the meter. It holds the active
electronics for the CTs, the A/D converter, and the 32-bit DSP processor. It receives
voltage signals from the MOV board and current signals directly from the CTs.
Once measurements are taken, they are communicated to the main
microprocessor on the Main Board.

8-2 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Theory of Operation

The voltage and current signals are first routed to a dual multiplexer where a
phase is selected by DSP control. The selected voltage phase is directly routed to a
sample and hold while the current is passed to the A/D converter. Before it reaches
the converter, a gain may be applied to the current if it is needed. This is
determined by the DSP based on outputs of comparators that compare the current
signal to reference values. The A/D has an internal sample and hold, so both
voltage and current of the selected phase are sampled simultaneously. Once the
current signal is converted, the voltage signal is routed to the A/D and converted.
Then the DSP switches the input multiplexer to the next phase, and the process
begins again. The output of the A/D converter after each conversion is sent to the
DSP through a digital buffer. Once every second, the DSP reports the battery
voltage to the Main Board for use as a battery check.
The program code for the DSP is downloaded from the Main Board over the
communication bus at power up and is stored in the RAM on the Transducer
Board. This allows for functional upgrades of measurement code without having to
change any hardware. Calibration constants for the meter are permanently stored
in nonvolatile EEPROM on the Transducer board. Address logic for the sample and
holds and multiplexers has been integrated into one programmable logic
integrated circuit.
Finally, the Transducer board passes the line frequency signal to the Main Board so
that the Main Board can keep track of time. It also passes through the early power
fail signals from the power supply to the Main Board.

Main Board (Back End)

The Main Board is the central processing and communications hub of the meter. It
holds the 32-bit communications microprocessor, 4 Megabytes of FLASH program
memory, 1 Megabyte of battery-backed memory for data storage, 2 Kbytes of
NOVRAM (nonvolatile SRAM), the LONWORKs network interface, two RS-232 ports,
and a real time clock. It is where the measurement quantities are calculated and
stored. The Main Board handles multiple communication sessions and controls the
four line display and test LEDs.
The standard single battery (see Figure 2.1) used for memory retention is a 2/3 A
size, lithium carbon monofluoride cell. It was specially selected for long term
durability and environmental friendliness. It is designed to provide at least 180
days of data retention. The dual battery configuration (see Figure 2.2) doubles the
number of days of data retention during power loss to 360 days. The access door
battery is ½ the capacity of the standard battery. Its data retention during power
loss is ½ the number of days (90 days).
Critical metering data will be stored in NOVRAM. This data will be retained even in
the event of loss of power and the loss of battery back-up. NOVRAM is a RAM that
is built in EEPROM that is written to automatically at power down.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 8-3

Theory of Operation

The following data is stored (both the energy and peak value) if selected:

Watts Delivered Aggregate Watts Received Aggregate

VAR Delivered Aggregate
VA Arithmetic Delivered Aggregate
VA Vectorial Delivered Aggregate
Watts Delivered Aggregate SLC
VAR Delivered Aggregate SLC
VA Vectorial Delivered Aggregate SLC
VAR Received Aggregate
VA Arithmetic Received Aggregate
VA Vectorial Received Aggregate
Watts Received Aggregate SLC
VAR Received Aggregate SLC
VA Vectorial Received Aggregate SLC

This Billing Data is backed up in non-volatile memory.

Data Calculation and Storage

Measurement data is received every 48 cycles from the Transducer Board. Energy
and harmonic information is accumulated on the Transducer board for 60 cycles
and then communicated to the main microprocessor. Based on the configuration,
the main processor then begins to update the selected energy quantities.
The main microprocessor requires some memory to use for calculations. The
selected quantities (including energy quantities, demand values, load profiles and
harmonics data) also require memory for storage. The microprocessor and the
selected quantities share one megabyte of battery backed SRAM. The memory
available for the selected quantities is allocated based on the user’s request. For
instance, if a large load profile is chosen (e.g. if small intervals are selected), less
memory will be available for storage of other values. This dynamic allocation of
memory allows the meter to be optimized for an individual application.

Downloadable Firmware
The internal program code is stored in FLASH memory on the Main Board. This
design allows the code to be changed when upgrades become available. This
program code includes the instructions for both the main microprocessor and the
DSP. The code is updated by connecting to one of the communications ports of the
meter (RS-485, RS-232 or Optical Port) and downloading a completely new set of
code. The download may be password protected for security.

Communications
LonWorks Network
LONWORKs is a two wire, transformer isolated communications network. It is a
commercially available product that allows the Q1000 to communicate with other
Q1000 meters and Q1000 input/output modules depending on the binding selected.

8-4 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Theory of Operation

At the time this manual was revised, four different “plug and play” bindings were
available from the factory.1 The Q1000 is configured in the factory with a user-
ordered “plug and play” factory configuration. The LONWORKs protocol knows the
address of each of the pre-configured input/output modules available and can thus
talk directly to (or receive data from) the proper module. The LONWORKs network
is capable of communicating at speeds up to 1.25Mbps at distances of up to 500
feet. This distance can be increased substantially through the use of a router.2

Optical Port
An enhanced infrared LED optical port is mounted directly on the Display board
for on-site interrogation. No cable connections are necessary inside the meter. The
optical port supports data rates up to 19,200 baud. ANSI or IEC type magnetic pick-
up holders are available. Any protocol supported by a meter may be used through
the Optical Port.

Most current optical port cables limit communication to 9600 baud; some cables can support
faster rates.

RS-232 with Multiple Protocols

The meter supports two RS-232 serial ports. These are totally independent bi-
directional serial ports that support multiple protocols and can operate
simultaneously. This capability allows for multiple independent parties to be
directly communicating with the meter at the same time while using different
protocols. These ports can be connected directly to an RS-232 interface.
Port 2 can be routed through the optional internal modem. The RS-232 ports
support data rates up to 115,200 bps when connected directly to a PC while the
internal modem will support 33,600 bps.
Another option is to route Port 2 through the RS-232 / RS-485 card. This card may
be used in either mode. In the RS-485 mode, it is a 4-wire RS-485 communication
port; communication up to 115,200 bps is supported.

Display
The display is a four line, 16 character per line LCD display. The LCD uses
'supertwist' technology for a wide viewing angle so that viewing angle adjustments
are not necessary. The four lines of the display can be completely configured to
display data, annunciators, or status information. The screens are configured with
the programming software.
The display board has two infrared LEDs for test pulse outputs. Both LEDs can be
configured to output pulses based on any energy quantity that the meter calculates.
Their factory default configuration is watt-hours on the right LED and var-hours on
the left LED.
Four switches for the meter are located on the display board. The switches control
the demand reset function, alternate display mode, test mode, and scroll lock. The
Alternate Display, Demand Reset, and Scroll Lock switches are accessible from the

1. Devices from different bindings cannot be used together in one LonWorks network.
2. A router will require the users to “custom bind” their hardware with a new binding that includes the router.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 8-5

Theory of Operation

meter’s front. The Demand Reset switch may be sealed. The Test Mode switch is
under the meter cover in all forms except the Rackmount version which provides it
on the meter face.

Power Supply
The power supply is a high-efficiency, switch mode power supply. It is able to use
AC or DC input voltages. The input range is 100 to 240 VAC with a -20% and +25%
tolerance. The socket meter has a single phase power supply and the DIN/A-base/
Switchboard/Rackmount meters have a three phase power supply. The power
supply consists of a boost converter followed by a two transistor forward
converter. It has a switching frequency about 20KHz. The boost converter steps the
input voltage up and provides power factor correction required to lower the input
VA to the meter. The forward converter provides power for the isolated +/- 12 V
and +5 V outputs.

Measurement Techniques and Quantities

Active Transformers
The Q1000 meter takes advantage of active transformer technology using
electronics to help correct some of the imperfect characteristics of passive
transformers.
An input current in the primary winding of a transformer causes a magnetic flux in
the core. This flux couples through the core to the secondary winding and causes a
current to flow in the secondary in proportion to the turns ratio of the
transformer—thus, a ratio scaled signal in the secondary that is electrically
isolated from the primary.
The problem is that normal transformers have a significant phase shift from input
to output that is caused by losses in the transformer core. As the load on these
transformers change, so does the amount of phase shift. This behavior normally
requires multiple calibration factors to correct that phase shift. If the amount of
magnetic flux in the core could be held constant, the phase shift would stay
constant and could easily be calibrated away. If the amount of flux could be kept
small, then the physical size of the transformer could be reduced without
saturating the core and causing signal distortion.
To accomplish both of these goals in the advanced Q1000 design, another winding
is added to the secondary of the active transformer. One winding is then used to
sense the amount of flux in the core and drive an op amp. The op amp then drives
the correct amount of current back into the additional winding to create a flux in
the core exactly opposite the flux caused by the input signal. Thus the flux in the
core is reduced to very close to zero. Meanwhile, the current driven by the op amp
is measured; this current is exactly proportional to the input current scaled by the
turns ratio of the transformer. (Because the flux is almost nulled, this type of
transformer is also known as a “zero flux” transformer.) Thus, a ratio scaled and
electrically isolated signal appears at the secondary but without the changing
phase shift and with a physically smaller core. Other smaller errors such as
magnetic coupling to other transformers are also reduced because the flux is so
small.

8-6 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Theory of Operation

Calibration
Calibration of the meter takes place in the factory using measurements made
against reference standards that are traceable to the United States National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). Measurements are taken under
various voltage, current and phase angle conditions and correction constants are
calculated and stored in the meter. These corrections are necessary due to
manufacturing tolerances in the analog components (CTs, VTs, resistors,
capacitors, op amps and A/D converter). The correction constants are permanently
stored on the Main board.
This process is only necessary once in the life of the meter unless some of the
analog components are changed. If changes are made in the CTs, the MOV board,
Main board, or the Transducer board, re-calibration may be necessary. The Display
board, Modem, RS-485 board, Communication boards, and I/O modules may be
replaced without re-calibration. New firmware may also be downloaded into the
meter without re-calibration.

Fixed Sampling and FFTs

The meter samples at 64 samples per line cycle synchronous to the voltage signal
zero crossing. The fixed sampling rate is needed to ensure accuracy of the
harmonic data from the Fast Fourier Transform (FFT). This sampling process
happens on each phase voltage and current for a fixed sampling rate of 3840
samples/sec at 60Hz line frequency (3200 samples/sec at 50Hz line frequency). The
line frequency and zero crossing are determined by the DSP based on an algorithm
that looks at all three phase voltages. The algorithm is designed to continue even if
two of the three phases are lost. If no acceptable line frequency is present, then the
meter will continue to sample based on the internal crystal frequency.

Front End / Back End: Calculations and Communications

The individual samples are corrected for any error caused by electronics, and then
calculations begin. The correction removes any DC component in the voltage or
current. This improvement is made by summing samples over an interval and
dividing by the number of samples to get the DC error for each sample. This value
is then subtracted from the samples in the next interval.
Four quantities are accumulated on a sample-by-sample basis: Watts, Vars, V2 and
I2. From these four quantities, VAarith and VAvect, Q, RMS Voltage, RMS Current
are calculated by the DSP. Fundamental Watts (power at the line frequency only)
and Fundamental Vars are obtained from the harmonic data. A phase correction is
applied to the watt and var values to account for the phase error of the sampling
circuit. The accumulated data along with any voltage quality events are transferred
to the main board.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 8-7

Theory of Operation

Calculated Quantities
Four types of messages are received from the front end by the back end: an energy
message (every 60 cycles), a basic quantity message that includes voltage quality
events if any, and a harmonic quantity message . Each message is processed and
updates values in the back end as follows:

Energy Message à Updates Energy Quanta Array (340 values)

Basic Quantity Message à Updates Raw Value Array (340 values) and Voltage
Quality
Voltage Quality Only Message à Updates Voltage Quality Quantities
Harmonic Message à Updates Harmonic Quantities (86 Values per phase)

The energy quanta array is then used to update the energy quantities selected, the
block and thermal demand values, the load profile data, and the test LED outputs.
All 340 energy quanta are updated every 60 cycles while only the selected energy,
demand, and load profile quantities will be updated every 60 cycles. Also note that
other inputs from the LONWORKS network (pulse inputs, analog inputs, and
adjustments from other meters) are also used to update the energy quantum array.
The raw value array is used to update the instantaneous values. The harmonic
quantities are used to update harmonic data.

Energy Quantity IDs

Up to 30 energy registers and 24 TOU energy registers may be selected by the user
from 340 energy quantities available. The energy registers are used to accumulate
the energy increments called energy quanta. Every 60 cycles the amount of energy
in the appropriate energy quantum is added to the energy register.

Demand Quantities
Demand includes instantaneous, thermal, and block interval demand. Up to 25
instantaneous demands, 10 thermal, 25 block demands, and 24 TOU demand
registers can be selected from the list of 340 quantity ID's. With each block
demand, a demand summary is updated for each interval. Thermal demand is
updated each 48 cycles. Instantaneous demands are updated every 12 cycles.
Block interval demand length can be set from 2 seconds to 60 minutes.
Subintervals can be used for sliding window demands. Subintervals must be in the
same range (from 2 seconds to 60 minutes) and be evenly divisible into the demand
interval and into 60 minutes. Thermal demand time constants can be any number
of minutes that divides evenly into 60 minutes, or any number of seconds greater
than or equal to 2 that divides evenly into 60 seconds. Thermal demand follows an
exponential response curve such that the demand registers 90% of a change over
each time constant. Thus if the thermal demand interval length is 15 minutes and
the load is constant, thermal demand will report 90% of the load after 15 minutes,
99% after 30 minutes and 99.9% after 45 minutes. Cold load pickup time is
programmable between 0 and 65535 seconds. Demand reset lockout time is
programmable between 0 and 65535 seconds.
Demand summary information includes peak, peak time of occurrence, minimum,
minimum time of occurrence, cumulative peak, and continuous cumulative peak.
Up to 3 coincident demand values can be saved at the time of the peak and
minimum, but the coincident values must be chosen from the list of the same type

8-8 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Theory of Operation

(e.g. coincident values for block demand quantities must also be from the list of up
to 25 block demands selected). At demand reset, peak value is summed to
cumulative peak, and peak and minimum value are reset.
Up to six demand quantities can be specified to track multiple peaks or multiple
minimums. Multiple peaks and minimums information consists of a set of the 5
highest peaks or the 5 lowest minimums for a demand quantity since demand reset.
Each set of multiple peaks or minimums counts toward the total of six. For
instance, if both the five highest peaks and the five lowest minimums are desired
for one demand quantity, only four other quantities could be chosen.
End of interval (EOI) can be triggered based on time, an external input, or an
external input with time backup. Timed EOI occurs when the length of time for the
interval has expired. External EOI occurs when the meter receives an external
input which is useful for triggering several devices simultaneously. External with
timed backup looks primarily at the External EOI until the specified time expires.
Global EOI triggers can come from any of the three sources.

Harmonics
Harmonic calculations are done for 12 consecutive cycles each second using the 64
samples for that cycle. The DSP calculates the voltages and currents at each
harmonic up to the twentieth for each of three phases using a Fast Fourier
Transform. Both magnitude and phase angle are calculated for each harmonic.
These results are then communicated to the back end.
The back end will average, store, and report the selected harmonic data. The
interval length over which the data is averaged can be set from 2 seconds to 60
minutes. The selected harmonic data is then stored as a record. The records are
stored in a circular buffer such that it continues to store the latest record until the
buffer is full, and then the oldest record is overwritten. The number of records
stored is configured and based on available memory.

Voltage Quality
Voltage quality (VQ) events are sags, swells, and imbalances of the voltage signals.
A loss of power to the power supply can also trigger a VQ event. VQ events are
reported when the RMS value of a line cycle drops below a defined low threshold
or rises above a defined high threshold. This value is constantly monitored by the
DSP processor, and when an event is detected, it records the level and the time.
This information is reported to the main processor that logs the events for later
reporting.

System Loss Compensation (SLC)

System loss compensation is a way of adjusting data in the meter to account for
losses in the power delivery system. The QUANTUM Q1000 has a system loss
compensation (SLC - Basic) similar to the QUANTUM STQ meter. SLC - Basic
allows the user to calculate an equivalent impedance for all of the losses to make
the compensation. Line losses allow for the inclusion of capacitive and inductive
losses in the transmission lines.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 8-9

Theory of Operation

Totalized Registers
A totalized register is a combination of other register quantities and is itself a
register quantity. Each totalized register will sum/subtract up to 4 other quantities.
Configuration will consist of a list of the registers to be summed. Totalized
quantities can be used like any other quantity. One use of a totalized quantity is to
provide a duplicate of a quantity, for example to add more coincident demands to a
demand register. Another use is to add or subtract KYZ pulse inputs from other
devices together.
Totalized registers will be calculated in order of the quantity ID number. This
implementation will allow one summed register to sum other summed registers.
But the value in a summed register having a higher quantity ID should not be used
since it will not be updated before being used.

External Inputs
There are three types of external inputs: pulse inputs, analog inputs, and digital
state inputs. All of these inputs come to the meter via the LONWORKs network and
they are treated as incoming energy messages that are added to the energy quanta
array.
The pulse inputs have pulse weights assigned by the user; the analog inputs1 are
scaled.
The meter can also receive digital state inputs. These inputs are used as status
inputs to the meter and do not contribute to the energy calculations. They can be
used for status, alarms, to trigger events, and so forth.

Load Profile
Two independent standard load profile recorders are available in the meter. Each
recorder can have up to 24 channels and have independent recording interval
lengths ranging from 2 seconds to 60 minutes. Each recorder can have completely
independent settings like interval length and recorder quantities. Each channel can
record up to 65,535 pulses per interval and each interval is time/date stamped.
Each interval also receives status indicators that show Daylight Savings Time,
short interval, time adjustment, and so forth.
In addition, meters may be upgraded with 8 additional extended load profiles.
These profiles are also independent. Extended load profiles support recording of
energy register data directly. They also support configuration of the data storage
format and flags.

Alarms
An alarm is an event or condition in the meter that can cause a digital state output
to trigger or a call-home to occur, depending on its status. The status of an alarm is
always stored in the meter so that other methods can check to see if the alarm has
been triggered. The register threshold alarm is triggered whenever the attached
data register's value strays above or below a programmed limit. The meter has 16
register threshold alarms.

1. Analog inputs are not currently available in the Q1000 meter. They are a planned enhancement for a future
release.

8-10 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Theory of Operation

Power Quality
Power quality means the measure, analysis, and improvement of voltage and
energy distribution. It is determined by the amount of deviation from the ideal
sinusoidal voltage and/or current waveform and/or influences from a wide variety
of electromagnetic phenomena. Any deviation of magnitude or frequency of the
fundamental waveform which affects the performance of electrical equipment can
be considered a power quality disturbance. The recent growing concern for these
disturbances results from the increasing number of nonlinear power electronic
devices controlling various power apparatus and systems and the increased
sensitivity of new technologies to such disturbances. With the increasing use of
electronic equipment which can cause electromagnetic disturbances or which can
be affected by power quality disturbances, the interest in monitoring and recording
power quality parameters has increased.
Typical disturbance-producing equipment are solid state switching
semiconductors, arc furnaces, welders, and electric variable speed drives.
Problems due to power quality disturbances include voltage distortion within
facilities causing equipment malfunction, excessive neutral return currents,
overheating and saturation of transformers, decreased distribution capacity, and
high levels of neutral-to-ground voltage. From an end-user’s standpoint these
disturbances can mean an increased number of power interruptions, increased
number of voltage sags and swells, and low power factors resulting in excessive
product loss in the commercial and industrial segment, computer damage in all
segments, and, in severe cases, equipment damage. With the growing problems and
interest, power quality measurement is moving from a reactionary troubleshooting
measurement to a proactive ongoing monitoring measurement.
The QUANTUM Q1000 meter provides power quality monitoring features such as
voltage sags, swells, and harmonics. These features are in addition to load survey,
system planning or tariff application requirements. In some markets, these power
quality measurements can be used as a customer service tool in order to solve
reported power supply problems. In others, the power quality features can be used
for research purposes at both the system substation and customer levels. As more
creative rates are developed, power quality features can be used as an integral part
of the rate or tariff.

Voltage Imbalance
In three phase systems, voltage imbalance occurs when the three phase voltages
are either not equal in magnitude or in phase difference. A steady state imbalance
is a duration of at least 2 seconds. The coupling mechanism of imbalance is either
conductive or electromagnetic. It is usually calculated in terms of negative phase
sequence voltage.
The presence of negative phase sequence voltage causes overheating in induction
and synchronous machines, reduces the margin for voltage regulation, and
increases system losses. The most serious problem is the overheating of induction
motors, where a small amount of voltage imbalance causes motors to draw high
unbalanced currents.
Voltage imbalance can be caused by the connection of single phase or imbalanced
loads in a three phase system and by the different impedances of the phases of
overhead and underground lines and transformers. Imbalances can also be caused
by defective transformers, loose neutrals, ungrounded neutrals, bad capacitor
banks, and ground faults.
The QUANTUM Q1000 has a log of the date and time and percentage of unbalance.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 8-11

Theory of Operation

Voltage Interruptions
A voltage interruption is a complete loss of power from a temporary interruption
of several milliseconds to a permanent interruption of several hours.
Voltage interruptions affect all equipment. Sensitive equipment may be disrupted
by outages as short as 15 milliseconds. Interruptions can result in loss of
computer/controller memory, equipment shutdown/failure, hardware damage,
product loss, and productivity loss. Interruptions may be caused by power system
faults, accidents involving power lines (tree limbs, animals, lightning), transformer
failures, and generator failures. They can be caused by the operation of protective
devices in response to faults that occur due to acts of nature and/or malfunctioning
of customer equipment.

Voltage Sags and Swells

A voltage sag is a momentary (less than a few seconds) decrease in the voltage
below a given tolerance on one or more phases. Swells are corresponding voltage
increases.
Sags affect power-down sensing circuitry on computers and large controllers and
can cause equipment to shutdown. Repetitive sags or swells in the voltage cause
flickering of lights, motor stalling, reduced life of motors and motor driven
equipment. Electrical equipment may respond to a sag as it would to a power
interruption.
Voltage sags are often caused when large loads, such as motors, air conditioners
and electric furnaces, are started which results in high inrush currents leading to
drops in the system voltage for short periods. These disturbances can also be
caused by lightning and power system faults, such as overloaded wiring, incorrect
fuse rating, fuse and breaker clearing, capacitor bank switching, ground faults,
electric system switching, and equipment failure.
Voltage swells are often caused by large cyclic loads such as spot welders,
induction or arc furnaces, and motors when cycled. They can also be caused by
sudden load decreases or turn-off of heavy equipment, open neutral connection,
insulation breakdown, and improper wiring.
Under voltages cause errors of sensitive equipment, low efficiency, and reduced
life of electrical equipment, such as some motors and heaters. Under voltages
lengthen process time of resistance heating systems and can cause hardware
damage. Over voltages cause overheating and reduced life of electrical equipment.
Under voltages are caused by circuit overloads, loose or corroded connections,
unbalanced phase loading conditions, faulty connections or wiring, overloaded
distribution system, poor voltage regulation, or incorrect transformer tap setting.
Over voltages may be caused by improper application of power factor correction
capacitors, feeder regulator settings, or incorrect transformer tap settings.

Harmonics
A harmonic distortion is a voltage or current deviation from a true sine wave due
to unwanted frequencies that are multiples of the fundamental.
Harmonic distortion causes motor loads, such as compressors, pumps, and disk
drives to overheat. Harmonics can also result in serious damage to capacitors and
transformers. Harmonics will cause decreased motor performance (reduced
efficiency, over-heating, torque pulations), premature control equipment failure,
false triggering of SCRs (silicon controlled rectifiers), interference with
computers, and amplification of harmonic levels due to resonance. Harmonics can
also cause incorrect readings on mechanical timing relays and electricity meters.

8-12 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Theory of Operation

Harmonics are usually caused by the operation of any static power converter
which converts AC to DC or DC to AC, or any solid state switch, or equipment
containing these devices. Some of the equipment that contain these devices are
electric variable speed drives, computer power supplies, dimmer switches,
fluorescent lighting, variable speed drills, UPSs (uninterruptible power supplies),
welding equipment, induction furnaces, arc furnaces, microwave ovens, battery
chargers and elevators. Saturated utility transformers can also cause harmonic
distortion.

Time-of-Use (TOU)
The Time-of-Use (TOU) function is an optional feature of the QUANTUM Q1000
meter. With the TOU option, the meter can be programmed to measure and
allocate power consumed at various times during a day, a week, or a season(s), etc.
into storage units referred to as rate buckets. The QUANTUM Q1000 TOU feature
is used in the registers, load profile, meter display, digital state outputs, and self
reads.
The QUANTUM Q1000 meter can be programmed for:
• Seven Day Types
• Typical Week Type
• Seven Rates plus Total—Rates are controlled by rate schedules which
determine when rates are active during each day until the schedule expires.
• Many user-defined Daily Patterns—A daily pattern defines which switchpoints
are to be processed during a 24-hour period.
• Many user-defined Switchpoints—A switchpoint defines a scheduled action
and a time at which the action should occur. The action can be a rate change or
a change of status of an independent output.
• Up to 16 Digital State Outputs triggered by a TOU event
• Up to 12 Seasons per Year—A season is a non-overlapping partition of a year
that specifies the daily pattern to use for each day of the week.
• One Current TOU Schedule and one Latent TOU Schedule—The TOU schedule
contains the daily and yearly information necessary to control TOU in the
meter. The current schedule is the active schedule running in the meter. A
latent schedule may be added later by reconfiguring the meter. The latent
schedule then becomes the active (current schedule) at a user-defined time in
the future.
• A user-defined number of Years
• Many user-defined Exclusions (holidays)
• User-defined Season Change Dates—Seasons can be configured to start on a
specific date and at a specific time. Only one season can be active at a time.
• Multiple Rates Active Simultaneously (Overlapping Rates)—The Daily Pattern
controls which rates are on during the day. The Q1000 meter allows the user to
program overlapping rates.
• Temporary Override of Currently Active Rates / Daily Pattern

The meter stores the TOU configuration information in battery backed RAM.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 8-13

Theory of Operation

Notes:

8-14 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 9 Testing and Maintenance

This section can be used along with Chapter 8, Theory of Operation, and Chapter
10, Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings, to troubleshoot
the QUANTUM Q1000 meter. Included in this section are maintenance procedures,
typical error messages, and general board-level troubleshooting techniques.

General Maintenance Procedures

The following sections describe the general maintenance procedures required to
support the Q1000 meter.

Scheduled Maintenance
With the exception of the battery, no scheduled or preventive maintenance is
necessary for the QUANTUM Q1000 meter.

Battery Precautions
The lithium battery used in the QUANTUM Q1000 meter is designed with a
pressure relief that vents the battery if it is short circuited or if an attempt is made
to recharge it.

Do not recharge the battery. Even with pressure relief, lithium batteries can rupture
and cause injury if mishandled. To ensure maximum safety, follow the battery handling
guidelines described below.

Battery Handling Guidelines

1 Never short circuit the battery (such as measuring current capabilities with an
ammeter).
2 Do not recharge the battery.
3 Do not store or transport batteries in metal or other electrically conductive
containers.
4 Keep batteries separated. If stored in a container where they can contact each
other, face them in the same direction to prevent short circuits.
5 Do not operate the battery at temperatures above +85 C (+185F). Dispose of
batteries where they will not be punctured, crushed, or incinerated.
6 Discard the battery using proper federal, state, and local waste procedures.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 9-1

Testing and Maintenance

System Error Diagnostics

Upon power up, the QUANTUM Q1000 meter performs a series of system checks
on its primary metering functions to verify proper operation. If a malfunction is
detected, then the meter displays an error diagnostic message.
Appendix A details each diagnostic and gives recommended actions.

Diagnostics
The QUANTUM Q1000 includes a diagnostics routine that continually monitors the
health of the meter. The diagnostic information gathered is saved so that it will be
maintained in the event of a power outage.
There are two types of error conditions that are checked.
Fatal Errors—Fatal errors are serious errors. If a fatal error occurs, then a
special fatal error screen appears; this message identifies the error and is frozen on
the display.
Non-Fatal Errors—Non-fatal errors are generally less serious. For example, only
one component of the meter may be affected. Non-fatal errors are normally
displayed in a non-fatal error screen that is appended to the current display list.
Each non-fatal error is identified by a 3 letter code. The non-fatal error screen can
show up to eight different non-fatal errors at one time. Non-fatal error conditions
can be individually enabled in the meter using the PC-PRO+ 98 programming
software for the non-fatal error screen. If an error is not enabled, then it will not
appear on the non-fatal error screen and will not cause the non-fatal error screen
to be appended to the display list.
All diagnostic information is accessible using PC-PRO+ 98 even if an error has
been disabled on the meter display.
The default in PC-PRO+ 98 for new configurations is to enable the display of ALL
non-fatal errors.
If you are trying to diagnose a problem, then you should enable all non-fatal errors
on the display. There is nothing wrong with enabling all non-fatal errors in every
meter configuration.
Individual errors can also be programmed to cause the non-fatal error screen to
lock on the display. If the non-fatal error screen is frozen on the display, pressing
the alternate button causes the display to cycle once through the display list before
returning to the non-fatal error screen. This option is only effective if non-fatal
error locking is enabled as a part of display configuration.
Once a fatal or non-fatal error occurs, it will be remembered by the meter until it is
cleared; however, a few errors are self-clearing. Specifically, loss of phase and low
battery diagnostics are self-clearing.
PC-PRO+ 98 can access complete diagnostic information that indicates more
specifically what errors have occurred. If an error code appears on the display,
then check the PC-PRO+ 98 Diagnostics Readings screen (under Device Status) for
more information.
Diagnostic information is cleared by initializing the meter. Non-fatal errors can
also be cleared by doing a demand reset or by pressing the alternate button for 5 or
more seconds.

9-2 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Testing and Maintenance

Diagnostics Data
The basic diagnostic is a flag that indicates for each error whether it has occurred
since the error information was last cleared.
Seven event summaries are provided that can be configured by the user to track
certain errors. Other errors are hard-coded to be summary #8.1 Each event
summary has a count of the number of times the error event has occurred as well
as the date and time of the first and last occurrence. Individual errors can be
configured to contribute to one of the eight diagnostic event summaries.
Diagnostics also maintains timing information for certain meter actions to help in
firmware verification. For each of these events, the maximum and minimum
duration is saved along with the number of samples.
Timing and event summary information is available in the Diagnostics Readings
screen in PC-PRO+ 98.

Error Codes
The following sections describe the fatal and non-fatal errors that the Q1000 meter
can monitor. See Appendix A for a complete listing of error code descriptions and
the recommended actions.

Fatal Errors
Fatal errors cause the display to lock on the error code due to the possibility that
billing data may have been corrupted, or that the meter may not be operating
correctly. When an error is seen in the meter, SchlumbergerSema recommends that
you first go online with the meter and check all diagnostic status prior to taking
action. Look up the recommended actions in the Help file or in this manual. This
additional information will help you to take the correct action. Appendix A
provides information about the fatal errors.

Non-Fatal Errors
Non-fatal errors can be programmed to be ignored, to scroll, or lock on the display.
If the error is programmed to be locked on the display, the user can access other
readings by pressing the alternate mode switch. In this case, the meter scrolls once
through the normal display. When an error is detected in the meter,
SchlumbergerSema recommends that you first go online with the meter and check
diagnostic status prior to taking action.

Meter Operations Tests

Shop level meter operation tests ensure the correct operation of Q1000 meters.
These tests verify proper operation, proper mass memory operation, and proper
operation of other functions. Extreme care should be taken when performing these
tests. Each section constitutes a step-by-step procedure for testing that specific
function.

1. These changes are a planned enhancement of the PC-PRO+ 98 version 2.3 and above software.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 9-3

Testing and Maintenance

In instances where displayed quantities are required, SchlumbergerSema recommends that the
meter be connected to a master station so that all registers can be uploaded and recorded
individually.

Register Calculations
Follow these steps to verify that the meter is displaying correct register data.
1 Select a demand interval length (block demand).
2 Program the meter to display present and maximum kilowatt demand.
3 Apply a constant load to the meter and perform a demand run-up test for one
interval length.
4 Stop the display (scroll lock) on present kW demand.
5 Verify that the register increases during the entire demand interval.
6 Let the display scroll to the maximum demand register.
7 Verify that it displays the correct demand reading.
8 If a PC is connected, verify that the maximum demand register displays the
correct reading at the end of the interval, and that the present demand register
resets to zero.

Infrared LED Pulse

Follow these steps to test the operation of the infrared LEDs.
1 Apply a constant delivered watts load to the meter (Wapp).
2 Program the meter with Watthours on an LED and set the desired pulse
constant KT.
3 Verify that the two LEDs pulse properly either by counting the pulses or using
a comparator to compare pulses from the meter under test to the standard. To
determine the number of pulses per second, use the following equation:

1 Hour 1
Number of Pulses per Second = W app ´ N ´ --------------------------------- ´ --------
3600 Seconds KT

where N is the coil factor for singlephase test method.

4 Do the same for both LEDs, and again in Field Test Mode, if desired.
5 Refer to Chapter 3 for more information on using the infrared LEDs for test
purposes.

Table 9.1 Coil Factors

Form Series A Phase Only B Phase Only C Phase Only

3Æ, 3 Wire, Delta 2 1 - 1
3Æ, 4 Wire, Wye 3 1 1 1

9-4 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Testing and Maintenance

KYZ Pulse Output Calculations

Follow these steps to test the operation of the KYZ pulse outputs.
1 Program the meter with a preselected Ke pulse output constant(s). Use a
current-dependent quantity such as Watthours delivered.
2 Connect the KYZ output(s) to an external recorder for analysis purposes. Let
the recorder and Q1000 record zero pulses for three (3) intervals.
3 Increase the load.
4 Record pulses on both the Q1000 and the recorder for a reasonable period of
time—at least 15 minutes.
5 Decrease the load to zero.
6 Allow the recorder and Q1000 to count zero pulses for at least three (3)
intervals.
7 Add the pulse counts for every interval in both devices.

Demand Reset Lockout Time Verifications

The demand reset lockout time prevents the meter from being reset again for a
programmed number of minutes after an initial demand reset. For example, if the
demand reset lockout time is programmed to be 15 minutes, you must wait 15
minutes after a demand reset before another demand reset can be done. Follow
these steps to test the demand reset lockout function.
1 Program the meter with a demand reset lockout time of zero minutes.
2 Press the demand reset button on the meter face. The maximum demand and
peak instantaneous registers should reset to zero.
3 Wait unit the display has stopped flashing, and then press the demand reset
button again. A message should appear again indicating another demand reset
has occurred.
4 Reprogram the meter with a demand reset lockout time of one minute.
5 Press the demand reset button. The maximum demand registers should reset
to zero.
6 Wait until the display has stopped flashing, and then push the demand reset
button again. The display should indicate that the demand reset is locked out.
7 Wait until one minute has elapsed and press the demand reset button. The
meter should allow a demand reset.

Alternate Display Mode

Follow these steps to test the alternate display function.
1 Program the meter to display a few screens of information in the Alternate
Display Mode.
2 Press the ALT button on the front of the meter. If the user has programmed a
status line on the display, it will indicate alternate mode by the letters “ALT”.
3 Verify that all selected quantities are displayed in the Alternate Display Mode.
Verify that the meter returns to the Normal Display Mode upon completion of
all displays.

Field Test Mode

Follow these steps to test the Field Test Mode function:
1 Program the meter to display a few screens of information in the Test Display
Mode.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 9-5

Testing and Maintenance

2 Put the meter into Field Test Mode by sliding the Test button down on the
meter nameplate. If the user has programmed a status line on the display, it
will indicate Field Test Mode with the letters “TST”.
3 Verify that all selected quantities are displayed in the Test Display Mode.

Verification of Bidirectional Quantities

Follow these steps to verify that the meter acknowledges changes in the direction
of power flow.
1 Program the meter to display delivered and received quantities, such as
present kilowatt demand delivered and received.
2 Apply power to the meter such that there is a delivered power flow.
3 Stop the display on the present kilowatt demand delivered register using the
scroll lock button, and verify that it is incrementing properly. Verify that the
kilowatt received demand register is not increasing.
4 Apply power to the meter such that there is received power flow.
5 Stop the display on the present kilowatt demand received register using the
scroll lock button, and verify that it is incrementing properly. Verify that the
kilowatt delivered demand register is not incrementing.

Cold Load Pickup (Demand Delay) Time

The cold load pickup time is the number of minutes the meter will wait after a
recognized power outage before restarting demand calculations. The cold load
pickup time may be set for 0 to 255 minutes.
1 Program one meter with a cold load pickup time and one meter without. Reset
the maximum demand for each meter and remove power from both meters.
2 Reapply power concurrently to both meters. Run the test for an appropriate
number of intervals and record the maximum demand reading for each meter
after each complete interval. Choose a demand delay time that is less than one
interval (for example, five minutes for a 15-minute interval). The test should
last only one interval.
3 Use the following equation to determine if the meter programmed with a cold
load pickup time is displaying the proper demand:
MAX1 = (1 - (cold load pickup time/interval length)) * MAX2
MAX1: maximum demand (meter with cold load pickup)
MAX2: maximum demand (meter without cold load pickup)

Battery Carryover Verification

Q1000 meters store the number of minutes left on battery. When the meter is first
installed, this number of minutes on battery must be set to zero. From then on, the
meter keeps the time on battery.
Follow these steps to ensure proper battery carryover operations.
1 Program a meter to record mass memory data. The number of minutes on
battery can be shown on the meter display. Let the meter run for a sufficient
time to collect some interval data.
2 Record the interval data by hand. Remove power from the meter for at least
ten minutes.
3 Reapply power to the meter. Verify that the time on battery carryover was
accurately recorded by the meter.

9-6 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Testing and Maintenance

4 Verify that the data was retained during the power down. Verify that the clock
retained its proper time.

General Display Setup

Follow these steps to ensure proper display operation.
1 Program a meter with a specified display sequence, including ID codes,
annunciators, and data fields.
2 Record the sequence of screens that the meter displays. Verify that the
displays are correct.

Infrared LED/Test Pulse Adapter Interface

Testing the Q1000 meter is similar to testing standard solid-state meters with LEDs.
Test pulses are available from the meter via two light-emitting-diodes (LEDs). The
standard configuration comes with infrared LEDs; visible LEDs are available as an
option.
Any energy quantity (including analog or digital external input-hour and system
loss compensated) can be assigned to either one of the LEDs in the Normal Mode.
The energy assignments can also be different when the meter is in the Test Mode.
The energy assignments are configured with the programming software via LED
Operation and are made available with the Quantity Selection functions.
The LEDs pulse at a rate proportional to the assigned energy quantity, with the
ratio determined by an operator-programmed constant Kh. As in the energy
quantity, each LED Kh is independently assignable in both the Normal and Test
Modes.

The LEDs flash on and off for every KT watthours. Some pickup devices may sense these two
changes of state as two pulses instead of one. Take this behavior into account when testing.

The LED pulses are detected by the use of an infrared (or visible) LED photo-
pickup device. This device is the pulse sensor for a test pulse adapter. There are
various types and manufacturers available on the market, each will have its own
functionality and benefits.

Energy Register Correction

The energy register readings of the QUANTUM Q1000 meter can be modified if
necessary. The reset and modify operations are performed using the PC-PRO+ 98
master station software. This feature benefits the utility in the following
applications:
• Energy register readings can be set to zero. This is done as part of a Reset
Billing Registers command in PC-PRO+ 98. Reset Demand also clears all
demand registers.
• Energy register readings can be modified to reflect lost energy registration
during an onsite field test or to match the readings of an existing meter that is
being removed from the installation.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 9-7

Testing and Maintenance

The procedure for modifying or clearing energy registers is described in

PC-PRO+ 98 documentation.
Clearing or modifying energy registers requires that the user is logged on under the
primary or secondary password (general write access).

Meter Adjustments
The Q1000 meters features a versatile, four-line by 16-character display. The
intensity of the display can be adjusted with the display adjustment potentiometer
on the upper left corner of the rear part of the display board (Figure 9.1).

Display
Contrast
Adjustment
Potentiometer

Figure 9.1 Rear of Display Board

Accuracy Equations and Load Curves

The Q1000 is one of the most accurate meters, solid-state or otherwise, available to
the market today. Its performance is achieved by the use of proven digital sampling
techniques and proprietary enhancements. This advanced design accounts for the
meter’s accurate performance over a wide dynamic range. Figure 9.2 shows a
typical Class 2 load curve, Figure 9.4 shows a typical Class 10 load curve, and
Figure 9.6 shows a typical Class 20 load curve.

Figure 9.2 Typical Q1000 Class 2 Amp Load Curve

9-8 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Testing and Maintenance

Figure 9.3 ANSI Meter; Class 2 Amp Certificate

Figure 9.4 Typical Q1000 Class 10 Amp Load Curve

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 9-9

Testing and Maintenance

Figure 9.5 IEC Meter; Class 5 (10) Amp Certificate

Figure 9.6 Typical Q1000 Class 20 Amp Load Curve

9-10 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Testing and Maintenance

Figure 9.7 ANSI Meter; Class 20 Amp Certificate

The Q1000 meets the error limits given in Table 1.5, Q1000 Meter High Current
Error Limits and Table 1.6, Q1000 Meter Low Current Error Limits.

Table 9.2 Balance Restrictions

Measured Balance Restrictions

Quantity
3Ph, 4W 3Ph, 3W
3 Element 2 Element

Wh None None

Varh None None

VAh None Load

Qh None None

Ah, Asqh None Load

Vh, Vsqh None None

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 9-11

Testing and Maintenance

Reference conditions for Rated Accuracy:

Voltage: Rated Voltage ±3%

Frequency: As Rated (50 or 60Hz)
Waveform: Distortion Factor less than 3%
Ambient Temperature: 23°C ± 3°C

The above accuracy specifications apply upon completion of 2 hour warmup

period. Prior to completion of the warmup period, the meter conforms to IEC
Publication 60687 Class 0.2 and ANSI C12.20.

Loss of Phase
All auxiliary powered meters will continue to operate during loss of any phase
provided that the auxiliary power is maintained. The internally powered DIN, A-
base, Switchboard and Rackmount meters will continue to operate during loss of a
phase for the 3 wire configuration and loss of two phases for the 4 wire
configurations. The internally powered socket base meter requires phase A in
order to operate but will continue to operate with loss of phase B and C.
Loss of phase is checked once a second. The phase voltage is compared to the
configured limit. If the voltage is less than the limit, a loss of phase diagnostic is
noted.
The loss of phase non-fatal error will appear on the display only while a phase is
below its programmed limit.

Troubleshooting
This section describes how to troubleshoot possible problems.

Display

No Display

Problem Resolution

Meter Electronics Not Check power to meter electronics. Check to see if your meter
Powered has Auxiliary power or not; the auxiliary connection can be
made either externally or internally. Refer to the auxiliary
power connections in Chapter 2, Installation, for more
information.
A meter with auxiliary power is always powered from the
auxiliary power leads. For meters without auxiliary power, the
Socket meter powers up from A phase. The DIN, A-base,
Switchboard and Rackmount meters have a three phase power
supply and will retain power as long as at least one phase is
active. Phase to ground voltages should be at least 80 volts.
For 57.7 V or 63.5 V service types, a phase to phase connection
is required to power the meter.

9-12 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Testing and Maintenance

Problem Resolution

Display not programmed
Check to see that the display of the meter has been
programmed for the display mode (Normal, Alternate, or Test)
that your meter is in. If no quantities have been programmed
into the meter for that mode, then the display will be blank.
Program at least one quantity to be displayed.

Display Time Set To Zero Check to see that the meter has not been programmed with a
display ON time of zero seconds. Program the register with a
minimum display time on to 1 second.

Contrast Adjustment Not Set Turn the display contrast adjustment potentiometer, R42 until
Correctly the display should become clear. Refer to “METER
ADJUSTMENTS” on page 9-15 for more information.

Display Module Not Seated Power down the meter. Make sure the display module is
Properly properly seated.

Display Frozen

Problem Resolution

Scroll Button Has Been If the meter’s display is ‘scroll locked’ and the display is
Pressed stopped on one display, then press the scroll lock button and
hold it down for a second and the display will resume scrolling.

Error Condition A fatal error may have occurred. This notification would be
frozen on the display. A non-fatal error may have occurred that
was selected to lock (freeze) on the display. This setting is
made in PC-PRO+ 98.

Locked Display If the meter is locked on a display, then power cycle the meter
(power the meter down and then power it back up). If the
condition has not cleared itself, then replace the display board.
This condition should not occur without an error code.

Infrared LED

Not Pulsing Properly

Problem Resolution

No Quantity Assigned No quantity may have been programmed for the LED. Check
the programmed state. Add a quantity assignment, if needed.

Pulse Rate Not Programmed Check the programmed value of the pulse weight (Kh) for the
Correctly LED. Each LED has its own pulse weight (Kh). Change if
needed.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 9-13

Testing and Maintenance
Problem
Wrong Display Mode
Pickup Device Not Operating
LED Broken
Wrong Value Programmed to
LED
Infrared LED Is Not Operational
Problem
No Power
Field Test LED is Disabled
Reset Mechanism
RESET Push Button Does Not Initiate Demand Reset
Problem
Reset Switch Does Not Push
Down
Reset Mechanism Does Not
Cause a Reset
Reset Button Not Held Down
Long Enough
Demand Reset Lockout
Window Not Expired
9-14
Resolution
Two pulse rates are programmed into the meter for each LED,
one for Normal Display Mode and one for Field Test Mode. If
these values are different, then check the display mode in
which the meter is operating. Change the pulse rates if
needed.
Check photo pickup device by testing it on other meters. Repair
if necessary.
Check to see if the LED is broken. Replace LED or display
register board.
An energy value other than the one being tested may be
programmed to the LED. Go online with the meter and check
the meter’s programming.
Resolution
Check to be sure the meter’s electronics are powered up.
Check to make sure that the LEDs are enabled in the Test
Mode if you are trying to use the LEDs in the Test Mode.
Resolution
The Demand Reset Switch must be turned about 60 degrees
clockwise before it can be pushed down. Also check the
alignment of the cover with the reset switch.
Check the software program. Confirm that the Demand Reset
Switch is enabled in the software program.
The reset mechanism must be depressed for at least one
second for the meter to recognize the pressing of the Reset
button.
A previous demand reset may have occurred. Wait for the
demand reset lockout time to expire and then try another
demand reset.
QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

ALT Push Button Does Not Initiate Alternate Display Mode
Problem
No Items Chosen For Alternate
Mode
Alternate Mode Switch
disabled
Alternate Display Mode
Button Not Held Down Long
Enough
Alternate Display Mode
Mechanism Does Not Contact
Switch
SCROLL Push Button Mechanism Does Not Initiate a Scroll Lock
Problem
Scroll Lock Button Not Held
Down Long Enough
Scroll Switch Disabled
Reset Mechanism Does Not
Contact Scroll Lock Switch
Remote Demand Reset Not Operational
Problem
Incorrect Security Codes
Failure in Communication
QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide
Testing and Maintenance
Resolution
Check the software program for alternate display mode list. If
there are no items selected, then the meter will not go into
alternate mode.
Confirm that the Alternate Mode Switch is enabled in the
software program. If it is not enabled, then enable and
reprogram the meter.
The alternate mode switch must be depressed for at least one
second for the meter to recognize the pressing of the Alternate
Display button.
Check cover to ensure that it has been properly aligned.
Realign the cover.
Resolution
Depress the Scroll Lock button for at least one second for the
meter to recognize the pressing of the Scroll Lock button.
Confirm that the Scroll Switch is enabled in the meter’s
program. If it is not enabled, then enable it and re-program the
meter.
Check cover to ensure that it has been properly aligned.
Realign the cover.
Resolution
To perform a remote demand reset, one of the primary,
secondary or tertiary security codes must be downloaded to
the meter. Change security codes as needed. The alternate
mode switch must be depressed for at least one second for the
meter to recognize.
Refer to Chapter 6, Communications, for troubleshooting
communications.
9-15
Testing and Maintenance
Initialization of Meter
Cannot Initialize Meter
Problem
Incorrect Security Codes
Failure in Communication
PC-PRO+ 98 screen does not
show an initialization choice
Meter Loses Its Program
Problem
Incorrect Switch Position
System Loss Compensation
System Loss Compensation Not Operating Properly in Field Test Mode
Problem
Loss Constants Programmed
Incorrectly
No SLC in Meter
Input/Output (I/O) Module
No Output Signals
Problem
Incorrect Connections
Incorrect Pulse Constant
9-16
Resolution
To perform a meter initialization, a primary security code is
required. Check current primary security code. Change as
needed.
Refer to Chapter 6, Communications, for troubleshooting
communications.
Check software security clearances; verify that your access
allows this function. You may need to check with your
manager.
Resolution
DIP Switch S6 pin number 3 enabled (toward the front of the
meter) will return the meter to the factory default mode when
the meter is powered off and then back on. This process will
erase the program in the Q1000 meter and return it to the state
it left the factory in. Return the switch to the off mode (away
from the meter front). Reprogram the meter.
Resolution
Recalculate programmed SLC constants in the meter program.
Change as needed.
Check meter program to see if SLC was enabled in meter
program. Change and reprogram meter if necessary.
Resolution
Check the wiring from the meter to the I/O modules. For more
information, refer to the section on LonWorks.
Check programmed multiplier constants in the program file.
QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide
 Testing and Maintenance

Problem Resolution

Incorrect Output Assignment Check the program file to ensure that the assignment of the
output types have been correctly configured.

Bad LonWorks Wiring Both ends of the twisted pair bus must be terminated. Check to
Termination confirm that the terminations are properly installed at both
ends.

Wiring Failure Check the twisted pair connections to make sure that the
wiring is properly installed and that the wires have not been
cut.

No Input Signals

Problem Resolution

Incorrect Connections Check the wiring from the meter to the I/O modules. For more
information, refer to the section on LonWorks.

Incorrect Pulse Constant Check programmed multiplier constants in the program file.

Incorrect Input Assignment Check the program file to ensure that the assignment of the
input types have been correctly configured.

Bad LonWorks Wiring Both ends of the twisted pair bus must be terminated. Check to
Termination confirm that the terminations are properly installed at both
ends.

Wiring Failure Check the twisted pair connections to make sure that the
wiring is properly installed and that the wires have not been
cut.

No KYZ Outputs

Problem Resolution

Only half of the proper number Refer to "LonWorks Circuits" on page 6-34.
of pulses are being recorded.

Communication Problems
The meter electronics must be powered in order to have communication. This
power can come from the voltage terminals or through Auxiliary Power inputs.

Optical Port

Problem Resolution

Dead Battery The optical port programing cable needs new batteries.

Dirty port The port needs to be clean. Clean port with Q-Tip and water
and try again.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 9-17

Testing and Maintenance

Problem Resolution

Optical noise The programming cable connector is not firmly seated on the
connector.

Wrong protocol Meter may have another protocol on the port. In order to
program the meter, the protocol must be Mini-DLMS. Power
down, and then power up to observe protocols for each port.
Mini-DLMS can be put on all ports using a customer default. If
a different protocol is seen (than the one that is desired on the
port), then the meter will need to be re-programmed to change
the optical port protocol.

Wrong baud rate Higher baud rates may not be supported by you optical port
cable. Try a 9600 bps communication.

Direct Connect

Cannot connect to the meter

Problem Resolution

Cable problem The meter and a typical computer are DTE devices. In order to
connect two DTE devices, a null modem cable must be used.

Wrong baud rate Meter may be programmed with a dedicated baud rate. Try
another baud rate.

Wrong protocol Meter may have another protocol on the port. In order to
program the meter, the protocol must be Mini-DLMS. Power
down, and then power up to observe protocols for each port.
Mini-DLMS can be put on all ports using a customer default. If
a different protocol is seen (than the one that is desired on the
port), then the meter will need to be re-programmed to change
the port’s protocol.

Security code failure The meter has a security code. Set security codes either on
logon screen or under options, global default, security codes.

Wrong computer port Insure on the logon screen that the correct port is being used.

Hardware failure Communication can also be checked with the HyperTerminal

connection under Windows accessories. Enter in a
configuration name, set for direct connect and no hardware
flow. Send a capital I. If all hardware is working and the
meter's port protocol is DLMS, then the meter will send back a
SI QM110 response. This response will only work with DLMS
protocol.

Handshake problems Handshaking is not supported in the meter; disable hardware

handshaking.

9-18 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Testing and Maintenance

Problem Resolution

Electrical noise Extreme lengths from the computer to the meter can cause
extra noise which will interfere with communications. Reduce
the length or use a short haul modem to extend the distance.
Also, try using low capacitance cable for distances greater
than 50 feet.

Transient Lock-up The meter is designed to withstand a 10kv level of surge. If

there were extreme surges and the meter locks up, then an
error will be on the display. Power down and power up the
meter to clear the display.

Can connect to Port 1, but not to Port 2

Problem Resolution

Wrong baud rate Meter may be programmed with a dedicated baud rate. Try
another baud rate or use port 1 to check the baud rate
configuration of port 2.

Wrong protocol Meter may have another protocol on the port. In order to
program the meter, the protocol must be Mini-DLMS. Power
down, and then power up to observe protocols for each port.
Mini-DLMS can be put on all ports using a customer default. If
a different protocol is seen (than the one that is desired on the
port), then the meter will need to be re-programmed to change
the port’s protocol.

Modem An internal modem is connected to the second serial port; the

user can not have a direct connect to the second port with this
modem installed. Disconnect the two cables attached to the
Modem board to remove it from service. Reprogram Port 2 for
Direct Connect.

RS-485 See RS-485 on page 9-22

Wrong DB-25 connector used The meter’s DB-25 connector has two RS-232 communication
ports. A null modem cable can be used to connect to Port 1.
The splitter cable can be used to log on to either port. See
Chapter 2 for more cable and wiring information.

Modem

Meter Will Not Answer

Problem Resolution

Modem Not Installed Check to make sure the modem is installed.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 9-19

Testing and Maintenance
Problem
Incorrect Programming
PC Communication Ports Not
Set Correctly
Incorrect Modem Initialization
String
Incorrect Internal Cabling
Incorrect External Cabling
Bad modem cable
Bad Modem
No power to the modem
No phone connection
9-20
Resolution
1 Check to see if the meter has been programmed to recognize the
modem. If the meter is programmed for autosensing, it will
recognize when a modem is connected. Also, check the program
file for the ring answer delay. This setting determines how long
the meter will wait before picking up after the phone starts to ring.
Verify that the time the PC will wait for the meter to answer is at
least 10 seconds longer than the meter’s ring answer delay. Lastly,
check if the meter has been programmed to answer only within
certain call windows and an attempt is being made to call outside
the call window. Remedy any inappropriate settings.
2 Check the ring answer delay programmed into PC-PRO+ 98 and in
the profile 0 of an external modem. These settings always require
some number of rings: one (1) ring when the phone line is
dedicated to the meter; any non-zero number of rings when the
phone line is shared with a human-accessible handset. In this
case, be sure to make the number of rings large enough to allow a
person time to answer the phone.
Verify that the software is trying to connect through the correct
communication port. If you're not sure which port is in use, try
one, then the other.
Check the modem initialization string programmed into the
modem.
Check to confirm that the two modem board cables are
plugged into their respective connectors. The external tip and
ring wires go from the RJ connector on the outside of the
meter to the J2 connector on the modem board. The 10
position ribbon cable connects the J3 connector to the Main
board.
The meter connects to the phone line via a cable that extends
from the base of the meter. Verify that this cable is correctly
connected to the phone line.
Check the connection from modem board to the external
connector. If it is bad, then replace it.
Visually inspect the modem board for signs of blown
components due to a surge or broken connections. If any are
discovered, then replace modem card. Also, check the meter
cabinet grounding connections. Read more about suggested
grounding practices in the SchlumbergerSema Installation and
Grounding of the QUANTUM Meters: A Suggested Practice
Guide.
Check pins 2 and 4 on the 10 pin ribbon cable. If there is no
voltage, replace cable. If there is still no voltage, then replace
the Main board.
Check the phone line connection to verify that it is working.
QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Meter answers, but will not communicate
Problem
Incorrect Internal Cabling
Incorrect Baud Rate
Incorrect Security Code
External Modem Configuration
Not Compatible
Line is Busy
Problem
Meter Is Attempting To Dial
Out
Extension Phone In Use
Off-hook detection does not work
Problem
Line still connected
QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide
Testing and Maintenance
Resolution
Check to confirm that the two modem board cables are
plugged into their respective connectors. The external tip and
ring wires go from the RJ connector on the outside of the
meter to the J2 connector on the modem board. The 10
position ribbon cable connects the J3 connector to the Main
Board.
Check the baud rate setting in the program file. The calling
device and the meter must be attempting to connect at the
same baud rate. See "BPS Rates" on page 6-11 for more
information.
The PC that programmed the meter keeps the security code, if
any, on file. If trying to connect with another PC, the security
code must be entered manually. To verify security code error
message, try communications two additional times. Enter the
proper security codes manually, and then try communications
again.
Refer to the section on setting up an external modem to talk to
the Q1000, and follow the suggested commands to configure
the external modem.
Resolution
Has the meter been programmed to phone home on event?
Check the program file.
Is there an extension phone in use at the meter site? If so, then
the meter has detected an off-hook condition and will not try
to use the phone line. Wait and retry the call later.
Resolution
Once the modem has released the line as a result of a
customer phone going off-hook, the customer will usually have
to hit the phone's hook flash to obtain a dial tone. This action
is required because a connection still exists over the telephone
network between the master station modem and the
customer's phone.
9-21
Testing and Maintenance

RS-485

Problem Resolution

Cannot log on to meter Check the wiring of the RS-485 connectors. Different
connectors require various wiring. Refer to the RS-485 section
for examples and your connector’s instructions. See "RS-485
Board" on page 6-8.

Wiring incorrect Check Chapter 2 to ensure that your splitter cable wiring is
properly connected.

Shield wire not properly The RS-495 bus includes a shield. This wire must be properly
grounded grounded at one end for the bus to function properly.

9-22 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Chapter 10 Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Meter Parts

Part Number Description

SOCKET
441784-001 Polycarbonate Cover; ANSI Optical Port
441784-002 Polycarbonate Cover; IEC Optical Port
512638-001 Single Internal Battery
512638-005 Dual Battery
441768-001 Socket Base Shield
DIN
441829-001 Polycarbonate Cover; ANSI Optical Port
441829-002 Polycarbonate Cover; IEC Optical Port
441829-003 Polycarbonate Cover; with battery hatch; ANSI Optical Port
441829-004 Polycarbonate Cover; with battery hatch; IEC Optical Port
512638-002 Single Internal Battery
512638-004 Battery Hatch Replacement Battery
512064-002 Terminal Cover Short
512064-004 Terminal Cover Extended
442316-001 Terminal Cover extended with Label Holder
441896-001 Schematic Sticker Form 5D with Aux. Power
441896-002 Schematic Sticker Form 9D with Aux. Power
441896-003 Schematic Sticker Form 5D
441896-004 Schematic Sticker Form 9D
A-BASE
441829-001 Polycarbonate Cover ANSI
441829-002 Polycarbonate Cover IEC
441829-003 Polycarbonate Cover; with battery hatch; ANSI Optical Port
441829-004 Polycarbonate Cover; with battery hatch; IEC Optical Port
512638-002 Single Internal Battery

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 10-1

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Part Number Description

512638-004 Battery Hatch Replacement Battery
512064-001 Terminal Cover
441896-005 Schematic Wiring Sticker (Form 5A with Aux. Power)
441896-006 Schematic Wiring Sticker (Form 5A)
441896-009 Schematic Wiring Sticker (Form 9A with Aux. Power)
441896-010 Schematic Wiring Sticker (Form 9A)
SWITCHBOARD
442101-003 Polycarbonate Dust Proof Cover; ANSI Optical Port
442101-004 Polycarbonate Dust Proof Cover; IEC Optical Port
512638-003 Single Internal Battery
520120-003 One Paddle
513160-002 Schematic Wiring Sticker Form 5F with Aux. Power
513160-003 Schematic Wiring Sticker Form 9F with Aux. Power
RACKMOUNT
512638-003 Single Internal Battery
512064-002 Terminal Cover
442241-001 Tamper Bracket
442271-001 Dummy Face Cover (black)
441896-001 Schematic Sticker Form 5R with Aux. Power
441896-002 Schematic Sticker Form 9R with Aux. Power
MISCELLANEOUS
512874-001 DB-25 Dust Cover (DIN/A-base/Rackmount/Switchboard)
512944-001 DB-9 Dust Cover (Rackmount/Switchboard)
512495-003 Dangerous Voltage Label
PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
K441838-017 PC-PRO+ 98; latest production version
LITERATURE
7000-CCC QUANTUM Q1000 Meter Technical Reference Guide; latest version

10-2 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Communications Splitter Cables

(For DB-25 RS-485 bus and I/O connections.)

Part Number Description

441885-001 Splitter Cables, DB-25 Female to Two DB-25 Male Connectors, RS-
485 bus wires (5), and I/O Network Wires (2); (Socket/DIN/DIN
Flushmount/A-Base, Rackmount)
441885-005 Splitter Cables, DB-25 Male to Two DB-25 Male Connectors, RS-485
bus wires (5), and I/O Network Wires (2); (Switchboard)

Optical Port Programming Cable

Part Number Description

440012-001 Optical Port Programming Cable, ANSI Port (Battery Powered)
512983-001 Optical Port Programming Cable, ANSI Port (PC Powered)
442381-001 Optical Port Programming Cable, IEC Port (PC Powered)

Q1000 Optional Kits

Part Number Description

K442177-001 DIN Flushmount Kit
K442211-001 External Network Termination Kit
K442208-001 I/O Mounting Kit
K512954-002 Switchboard Mounting Kit
K442386-002a A-base Adapter Kit Socket Form 5S
b
K442386-004 A-base Adapter Kit Socket Form 5S
K442386-001a A-base Adapter Kit Socket Form 9S
b
K442386-003 A-base Adapter Kit Socket Form 9S

a
Placement of AUX terminals on lower terminal.
b
Placement of AUX terminals on upper terminal.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 10-3

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Modem Retrofit Kit

For modem retrofit kit information, see "Internal Modem Kit" on page 2-44.

RS-485 Retrofit Kit

For RS-485 retrofit kit information, see "Internal RS-485 Kit" on page 2-55.

I/O Modules
Each I/O Module and the quantity must be specified as a separate line item on the
purchase order.

Plug and Play Bindings

I/O modules are currently offered in four standard plug and play binding
configuration.
For more information on I/O bindings, see "I/O Bindings" on page 6-35.

10-4 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Drawings and Schematics

Figure 10.1 Main Board Diagram

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 10-5

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.2 Display Board Diagram

10-6 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.3 Modem Board Diagram

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 10-7

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.4 RS-485 Board Diagram

10-8 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.5 Transducer Board Diagram

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 10-9

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.6 Power Supply Board Diagram

10-10 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.7 MOV Board Diagram (S-Base)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 10-11

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.8 MOV Board Diagram (DIN/A-base/Switchboard/Rackmount)

10-12 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.9 Digital State Outputs (1-8) Module 1 (Universal Binding)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 10-13

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.10 Digital State Outputs (9-16) Module 2 (Universal Binding)

10-14 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.11 Digital Pulse Outputs KYZ (1-4) and Digital State Output 1 Module 3 (Universal Binding)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 10-15

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.12 Digital Pulse Outputs IEC 2-Wire KY (5-8) and Digital State Outputs (1-4) Module 4 (Universal Binding)

10-16 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.13 Analog Outputs (1-4) Module 5 (Universal Binding)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 10-17

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.14 Analog Outputs (5-8) Module 6 (Universal Binding)

10-18 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.15 Digital Pulse Inputs KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY (1-4) Module 7 (Universal Binding)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 10-19

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.16 Digital Pulse Inputs KYZ or IEC 2-wire KY (5-8) Module 8 (Universal Binding)

10-20 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.17 Digital State Inputs (1-8) Module 11 (Universal Binding)

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide 10-21

Standard and Replacement Parts; Schematics and Drawings

Figure 10.18 Digital State Inputs (9-16) Module 12 (Universal Binding)

10-22 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Appendix A Diagnostic Errors

This appendix provides information on Diagnostic Errors. You can use the meter’s
diagnostic and error displays to help you identify errors that require user action.
You must first program the meter to display the errors you want to track.
The diagnostics are grouped into default categories based on the summary number
assigned to each diagnostic in the PC-PRO+ 98 Event Configuration component
(use the Event Configuration Diagnostics tab of the Event Configuration
component dialog to assign summary numbers for the diagnostics that can be
configured by the user). Diagnostics that cannot be configured by the user are
assigned to diagnostic category 8.

Diagnostic Errors
When you have an error condition in the Q1000 meter, log on to the meter using
PC-PRO+ 98, then go to the Device Status component, and then double-click
DIAG_READINGS.
The software will return the current status of all of the diagnostics. Note the
diagnostics that are ON, and use the information in Table A.1 to review the
diagnostic(s) and the corresponding recommended actions.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide A-1

A-2
Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors
Diagnostic Errors

When Checked?
Default Summary #
Error ID #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Category

Error
Diagnostic Setting

Cause
Type
<none> Demand A demand summary was restored from None. The meter is operating normally. Non-Fatal At power up, D8 164 1.01b
Summary non-volatile memory because the It indicates that a demand value was after
Restored From normal register had a checksum error or restored, which is normal in several reconfigures
FR because the demand peak value in circumstances.
ferro ram and the value in the normal
register are different

<none> Energy Restored An energy register was restored from None. The meter is operating normally. Non-Fatal At power up, D8 163 1.01b
from FR non-volatile memory because the It indicates that energy was restored, after
normal register had a checksum error or which is normal in several reconfigures
because the total energy value in ferro circumstances.
ram and the value in the normal
register is different.

<none> Feature Not A feature is configured to run when 1) Change the configuration to not use Non-Fatal Each second Configurable Meter Key D5 121 3.02m
Present error there is no meter key for that feature in the feature. Or 2) Contact
the meter. SchlumbergerSema to order the
feature.

<none> Front End Could not write calibration to the front None. The meter is operating normally. Non-Fatal At powerup of Configurable Calibration D7 112 4.01i
EEPROM Write end EEPROM. Calibration data is now saved in front end
error backend flash so the meter calibration
will be ok. However, if main board
needs to be replaced the meter will
have to be returned to the factory for
calibration.

<none> Reset Due to The last processor reset was caused by None. The meter is operating normally. Non-Fatal On power up D8 244 1.01b
External Input the hard reset pin being asserted or an This flag is always set when the meter
epf signal is received and the power resets.
does not turn off soon enough.

<none> Reset Due to Reset was caused by a meter power None. The meter is operating normally. Non-Fatal At power up D8 241 1.01b
Power Up loss. This flag is always set when the meter
powers up.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
Diagnostic Category
<none> Reset Due to The last reset was caused by a Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal At power up D8 246 1.01b
Watch Dog watchdog timer timeout; Transients error(s). If none, contact
Timer could cause this error. SchlumbergerSema.

<none> VQ Front End More than 8 voltage quality event None. The meter is operating normally. Non-Fatal Each second Configurable User Program D1 179 1.01b

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Sag Swell actions occurred on a phase during a 12 1) Check the electrical system's power Configuration
Overflow cycle period. quality further using the Harmonic and
Voltage Quality detection capabilities
in the Q1000 meter. 2) Voltage quality
sags and or swells may be configured
to tight for the installation. Change
configuration to have different values
of threshold and hysteresis.

BAT Low battery The measured voltage provided by the Check battery connection, or connect Non-Fatal Each second Configurable Battery D2 238 1.01b
front end is below a threshold battery, or replace battery. Recover as
indicating that the battery will soon much data as possible. Reset the meter
fail. The measured value must be low to Factory Default. Reprogram meter. If
four times in a row before this error is error repeats, then return to
set. SchlumbergerSema.

BAT Low Battery Pin The LOBAT processor input is asserted Check battery connection, or connect Non-Fatal Each second Configurable Battery D2 237 1.01b
Asserted indicating that the battery may soon battery, or replace battery. Recover as
fail or already has. much data as possible. Reset the meter
to Factory Default. Reprogram meter. If
error repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

BAT Time on Battery The accumulated time on the battery 1) Check that the time on the battery Non-Fatal Each second Configurable Battery D2 236 1.01b
Expired has exceeded the programmed limit. was reset when first installed. 2) If yes,
then replace the battery, check time
synchronization and adjust if necessary,
and reset the time on battery.

CAL Calibration Error There was a problem during Return the meter to the factory for Non-Fatal At calibration Configurable Calibration D7 110 4.01i
calibration. calibration.

A-3
Diagnostic Errors
 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

A-4
Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
CALIBRATION Calibration Lost The calibration could not be recovered Return the meter to the factory for Fatal At powerup Configurable Diagnostic Category
Calibration D7 22 4.01i
LOST error from the front end firmware. calibration.

CFG CKS Configuration The calculated checksum for a Follow recommendations for other Fatal By firmware D8 6 1.01b
Checksum Error configuration record does not match error(s). Reprogram the meter. If none, when using
the stored value. contact SchlumbergerSema. the
configuration
record

CKS Recording Data The calculated value of the checksum Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each second D8 255 1.01b
Checksum Error for some part of the recording data Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
does not match the stored checksum Default. Reprogram meter. If error
value. repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

CKS Register Data The calculated value of the checksum Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal At power up, D8 256 1.01b
Checksum Error of the storage for some register data Reset the meter to Factory or Customer on each
does not match the stored checksum Default. Reprogram meter. If error update of the
value. Data storage is frozen. repeats, then return to register data
SchlumbergerSema. storage

CLK Clock Error Bad The current time is structurally invalid. Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each real time D8 205 1.01b
Time Meter needs to be returned to the clock (RTC)
factory for repair. access

CLK Clock Error SPI Meter could not communicate with the Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal On every new D8 206 1.01b
RTC using the serial peripheral Meter needs to be returned to the message of
interface. Timing will be continued by factory for repair. this type
the processor; however, if an outage
occurs after a clock error occurs the
meter time will reset to a default time.

CLK Clock Error The 1 Hz signal from the real time clock Obsolete error. Contact Non-Fatal Each second D8 204 1.01b
Watch Dog is about a second late. SchlumbergerSema.
Timer

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
Diagnostic Category
CLK Clock Stopped The real time clock (RTC) firmware was Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Each second D8 169 1.01b
stopped. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

CLK RTC During power up the RTC chip was Check battery connection, or connect Non-Fatal During normal Configurable Battery D2 155 1.01b

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Configuration discovered to have improper
Loss configuration even though the meter
was going through a normal power up.
battery, or replace battery. Recover as power up, not
much data as possible. Reset the meter factory or user
to Factory or Customer Default. default or
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then recovery
return to SchlumbergerSema.

COM Comm Ports No DLMS port was configured. The This error should not occur since we Non-Fatal At power up, Configurable User Program D1 165 1.01b
Defaulted meter can not be programmed. So the changed the programming software to after Configuration
configuration was forced to DLMS on require at least one port to have the reconfigures
all ports. Mini-DLMS protocol programmed.
Reset the meter to Factory Default.
Reprogram meter with at least 1 port
having DLMS.

CONFIG Illegal A configuration item stored in the flash Reprogam meter. If errors repeats, then Fatal At power up D8 7 1.01b
Configuration disk contains an illegal value. note programming actions that are and after
Error causing the error and call restarting
SchlumbergerSema. after meter
configuration

CONFIG RAM File Create There is not enough room in the ram 1) Reduce the memory requirements of Fatal Initialization, Configurable User Program D1 19 3.02m
No Room error file system to create a file. the configuration and reprogram the reconfigure Configuration
meter. Or, 2) Upgrade software to 2.3 or
above and firmware to 5.x or above.

CPU DATA CPU Data Loss The meter is overburdened by the 1) Reduce the CPU requirements of the Fatal Every second Configurable User Program D1 21 4.01i
LOSS error configuration. configuration and reprogram the meter. Configuration
Or, 2) Upgrade software to 2.3 or above
and firmware to 5.x or above. Notify
SchlumbergerSema if CPU Limit
Exceeded error does not also happen.

A-5
Diagnostic Errors
 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

A-6
Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
CPU LIMIT CPU Limit The meter is overburdened by the 1) Reduce the CPU requirements of the Fatal Initialization, Configurable Diagnostic Category
User Program D1 20 4.01i
Exceeded error configuration. configuration and reprogram the meter. reconfigure, Configuration
Or, 2) Upgrade software to 2.3 or above powerup
and firmware to 5.x or above.

DAT Diagnostics Diagnostics data could not be read Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal At power up D8 211 1.01b
Loading Error from the backup file. There may be a Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
problem with the RAM File System. Default. Reprogram meter. If error
Diagnostics prior to powerup have repeats, then return to
been lost. SchlumbergerSema.

DAT DSP Error A error occurred in the front end queue. Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each second D8 177 1.01b
Posting Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Message Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DAT Front End The checksum on a message from the Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Each second D8 202 1.01b
Message front end firmware was not correct. error(s). If none, contact
Checksum Error SchlumbergerSema.

DAT Front End An error occurred in the front end Contact SchlumbergerSema Non-Fatal Each second D8 176 1.01b
Message firmware or the meter is over burdened.
Skipped

DAT Front End Silent The front end processor has not sent Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each second D8 195 1.01b
Error expected messages. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DAT Meter Input 1 The meter input should be present Check Echelon connections. Check that Non-Fatal Each second Configurable I/Os D3 145 1.01b
Silent according to the SLC configuration but the other meter is connected. Check the
no message has been seen for 3 configuration.
seconds.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
Diagnostic Category
DAT Meter Input 2 The meter input should be present Check Echelon connections. Check that Non-Fatal Each second Configurable I/Os D3 144 1.01b
Silent according to the SLC configuration but the other meter is connected. Check the
no message has been seen for 3 configuration.
seconds.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

DAT Meter Input 3 The meter input should be present Check Echelon connections. Check that Non-Fatal Each second Configurable I/Os D3 143 1.01b
Silent according to the SLC configuration but the other meter is connected. Check the
no message has been seen for 3 configuration.
seconds.

DAT Meter Input 4 The meter input should be present Check Echelon connections. Check that Non-Fatal Each second Configurable I/Os D3 142 1.01b
Silent according to the SLC configuration but the other meter is connected. Check the
no message has been seen for 3 configuration.
seconds.

DAT Meter Input 5 The meter input should be present Check Echelon connections. Check that Non-Fatal Each second Configurable I/Os D3 141 1.01b
Silent according to the SLC configuration but the other meter is connected. Check the
no message has been seen for 3 configuration.
seconds.

DAT Meter Input 6 The meter input should be present Check Echelon connections. Check that Non-Fatal Each second Configurable I/Os D3 140 1.01b
Silent according to the SLC configuration but the other meter is connected. Check the
no message has been seen for 3 configuration.
seconds.

DED Alarm Manager The alarms manager component is 1) If the meter reset during a Non-Fatal Each second D8 193 1.01b
Off inactive. reconfigure or initialize, this error is
normal. 2) If not, then recover as much
data as possible. Reset the meter to
Factory or Customer Default.
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
return to SchlumbergerSema.

A-7
Diagnostic Errors
 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

A-8
Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
DED Communications The communications manager is 1) If the meter reset during a Non-Fatal Each second D8 Diagnostic Category 231 1.01b
Inactive inactive. reconfigure or initialize, this error is
normal. 2) If not, then recover as much
data as possible. Reset the meter to
Factory or Customer Default.
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
return to SchlumbergerSema.

DED Demand Inactive The demand manager is inactive. 1) If the meter reset during a Non-Fatal Each second D8 234 1.01b
reconfigure or initialize, this error is
normal. 2) If not, then recover as much
data as possible. Reset the meter to
Factory or Customer Default.
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
return to SchlumbergerSema.

DED Display Inactive The display manager is inactive. 1) If the meter reset during a Non-Fatal Each second D8 233 1.01b
reconfigure or initialize, this error is
normal. 2) If not, then recover as much
data as possible. Reset the meter to
Factory or Customer Default.
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
return to SchlumbergerSema.

DED Energy Inactive Energy manager is inactive. 1) If the meter reset during a Non-Fatal Each second D8 225 1.01b
reconfigure or initialize, this error is
normal. 2) If not, then recover as much
data as possible. Reset the meter to
Factory or Customer Default.
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
return to SchlumbergerSema.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
Diagnostic Category
DED Eventlog The event manager component is 1) If the meter reset during a Non-Fatal Each second D8 192 1.01b
Manager Off inactive. reconfigure or initialize, this error is
normal. 2) If not, then recover as much
data as possible. Reset the meter to

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Factory or Customer Default.
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
return to SchlumbergerSema.

DED Global EOI The global end-of-interval source 1) If the meter reset during a Non-Fatal Each second D8 227 1.01b
Inactive component is inactive. reconfigure or initialize, this error is
normal. 2) If not, then recover as much
data as possible. Reset the meter to
Factory or Customer Default.
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
return to SchlumbergerSema.

DED Harmonics The harmonics manager is inactive. 1) If the meter reset during a Non-Fatal Each second D8 224 1.01b
Inactive reconfigure or initialize, this error is
normal. 2) If not, then recover as much
data as possible. Reset the meter to
Factory or Customer Default.
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
return to SchlumbergerSema.

DED I/O Inactive The I/O manager in inactive. 1) If the meter reset during a Non-Fatal Each second D8 232 1.01b
reconfigure or initialize, this error is
normal. 2) If not, then recover as much
data as possible. Reset the meter to
Factory or Customer Default.
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
return to SchlumbergerSema.

A-9
Diagnostic Errors
 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

A-10
Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
DED Information The information manager is inactive. 1) If the meter reset during a Non-Fatal Each second D8 Diagnostic Category 226 1.01b
Inactive reconfigure or initialize, this error is
normal. 2) If not, then recover as much
data as possible. Reset the meter to
Factory or Customer Default.
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
return to SchlumbergerSema.

DED Load Profile #1 The mass memory #1 is inactive. 1) If the meter reset during a Non-Fatal Each second D8 230 1.01b
Inactive reconfigure or initialize, this error is
normal. 2) If not, then recover as much
data as possible. Reset the meter to
Factory or Customer Default.
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
return to SchlumbergerSema.

DED Load Profile #2 The mass memory #2 is inactive. 1) If the meter reset during a Non-Fatal Each second D8 229 1.01b
Inactive reconfigure or initialize, this error is
normal. 2) If not, then recover as much
data as possible. Reset the meter to
Factory or Customer Default.
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
return to SchlumbergerSema.

DED Power Quality The power quality manager is inactive. 1) If the meter reset during a Non-Fatal Each second D8 223 1.01b
Inactive reconfigure or initialize, this error is
normal. 2) If not, then recover as much
data as possible. Reset the meter to
Factory or Customer Default.
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
return to SchlumbergerSema.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
Diagnostic Category
DED Self Read Off The self read manager is inactive. 1) If the meter reset during a Non-Fatal Each second D8 200 1.01b
reconfigure or initialize, this error is
normal. 2) If not, then recover as much
data as possible. Reset the meter to

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Factory or Customer Default.
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
return to SchlumbergerSema.

DED Time Manager The time manager is inactive. 1) If the meter reset during a Non-Fatal Each second D8 235 1.01b
Inactive reconfigure or initialize, this error is
normal. 2) If not, then recover as much
data as possible. Reset the meter to
Factory or Customer Default.
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
return to SchlumbergerSema.

DED TOU OFF Time of use is inactive. It has been 1) Check meter program to make sure Non-Fatal Each second if D8 228 1.01b
stopped by a remote command or due that TOU is enabled and configured TOU is
to an error (if TOU stopped is set too). correctly. 2) Confirm that your meter running or
has the TOU meter key enabled. 3) If each time
OK, then recover as much data as TOU stop
possible. Reset the meter to Factory or command is
Customer Default. Reprogram meter. If sent to the
error repeats, then contact meter.
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Abnormal This is a catch all error to indicate that Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal At power up D8 251 1.01b
Powerup something was wrong at powerup. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Calculated A calculated quantity calculation had Change the calculation used to resolve Non-Fatal Each second Configurable User Program D1 113 4.01i
Quantity Range an invalid argument and the result was this problem. Configuration
error set to 0.0. For example, in a divide, if
the denominator is zero, this error will
be set and the quotient will be set to
0.0.

A-11
Diagnostic Errors
 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

A-12
Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
DIA Communication Messages from the communications Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Every read D8 Diagnostic Category 216 1.01b
Queue Error task have been lost. error(s). If none, contact and write to
SchlumbergerSema. the queue

DIA Debug Function A debug command was sent to the Change passwords in meter. Non-Fatal Each Configurable User Program D1 120 3.02m
Executed error meter. Possible tampering. command Configuration

DIA Demand Error An error occurred in the demand Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each second D8 212 1.01b
component of the meter. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Diagnostics error This is a catch all error to indicate that Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal As needed D8 170 1.01b
something was wrong in diagnostics. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Diagnostics Diagnostics data could not be written Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal At power up D8 250 1.01b
Posting Error to the backup file. There may be a Reset the meter to Factory or Customer and on each
problem with the RAM File System. Default. Reprogram meter. If error meter update
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Display Bus Error The display board may not be properly 1) Power meter down and check display Non-Fatal Each access D8 254 1.01b
connected. board connection. 2) If problem still to the display
exists, then call SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Display Timeout The LCD interface firmware timed out Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Before a byte D8 252 1.01b
waiting for the LCD busy flag to be Meter needs to be returned to the is read to or
reset. factory for repair. written from
the display

DIA DLMS Read An error occurred putting an item into a Contact SchlumbergerSema Non-Fatal Each message D8 178 1.01b
Stream Error DLMS message.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
Diagnostic Category
DIA Double Bus Fault A double bus fault occurred. Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal At power up D8 240 1.01b
Error Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Echelon Chip The LonWorks neuron chip is not Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each minute D8 175 1.01b
Error communicating. The chip programming Meter needs to be returned to the
may be corrupted or the chip may have factory for repair.
failed.

DIA Echelon In The queue of messages form the 1) Check meter program to make sure Non-Fatal Each Configurable I/Os D3 173 1.01b
Queue Full LonWorks network to the main task is that I/O set correctly. 2) Check I/O LonWorks
full or there is some other error connections. 3) Check LonWorks message
queueing the message. Network network traffic. If error repeats, then
messages have been lost. contact SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Echelon Out A message from the main task to the 1) Check meter program to make sure Non-Fatal Each Configurable I/Os D3 172 1.01b
Queue Full LonWorks network was lost due to the that I/O set correctly. 2) Check I/O LonWorks
queue being full or some other queue connections. 3) Check LonWorks message
or memory error. network traffic. If error repeats, then
contact SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Energy Error An error occurred in the energy Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Each second D8 201 1.01b
component of the meter. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Energy Quantum The time limit for processing the new Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal On every new D8 214 1.01b
Late Error energy quantums message took too error(s). If none, contact message of
long. SchlumbergerSema. this type

DIA EPF Incomplete The meter was previously powered Check battery connection, or connect Non-Fatal At power up Configurable Battery D2 167 1.01b
down abnormally. Meter time may now battery, or replace battery. Recover as
be incorrect. much data as possible. Reset the meter
to Factory or Customer Default.
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
return to SchlumbergerSema.

A-13
Diagnostic Errors
 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

A-14
Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
DIA Error Posting Programming of meter was not Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Flash RAM D8 Diagnostic Category 152 1.01b
Flash completed correctly. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer writes
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Error Setting The system loss compensation Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each second D8 146 1.01b
Loss firmware had an error. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Compensation Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA External There was no external timesynch Check the timesynch source (GPS) Non-Fatal On close of Configurable Time D6 116 3.02m
Timesynch received during a complete timesynch connection. Or change time sync timesync
Signal Missed period. configuration to not expect a time sync. period
error

DIA False Tick Error The time in the meter has not been Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each second D8 207 1.01b
properly incremented. Also possible on Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
entry to and exit from test mode with Default. Reprogram meter. If error
old firmware. repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA FE TSI Range An error occurred in the front end Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each second D8 160 1.01b
Error firmware. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA “Flash write “An error occurred saving the new Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Binding, D8 156 1.01b
pending, bad configuration after the meter was Reset the meter to Factory or Customer reconfigure,
checksum reprogrammed. Default. Reprogram meter. If error logoff after
repeats, then return to reconfigure
SchlumbergerSema.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
Diagnostic Category
DIA Free Memory The amount of free memory is too Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each second D8 147 1.01b
Low small. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Front End Queue Front end messages have been lost due 1) Reduce the memory requirements of Non-Fatal Each second D8 218 1.01b
Error to a full queue. the configuration and reprogram the
meter. Or, 2) Upgrade software to 2.3 or
above and firmware to 5.x or above.

DIA Front End An error occurred that triggered a front Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each second D8 181 1.01b
Rebooted end reboot. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Front End Status Possible calibration errors. Upgrade firmware to 5.x or above. Non-Fatal Powerup of D8 139 1.01b
Error front end

DIA Global EOI An error occurred in the global end-of- Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Each second D8 194 1.01b
Source Error interval source firmware. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Harmonics Error An error occurred in the Harmonics Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each second D8 182 1.01b
firmware. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Harmonics Late The time limit for processing the new Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal On every new D8 213 1.01b
Error harmonics message took too long. error(s). If none, contact message of
SchlumbergerSema. this type

DIA Info Manager An error occurred in the information Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal As needed D8 159 1.01b
Error manager firmware. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

A-15
Diagnostic Errors
 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

A-16
Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
DIA Invalid OS OS information is corrupt. If firmware is less than 5.00, ignore the Non-Fatal On power up D8 Diagnostic Category 149 1.01b
Information error since nothing in these FW and restart of
versions uses the OS information that communicatio
is corrupt. If meter has FW 5.00 or ns
greater report error
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA LCD Queue Error Messages from the main task to the Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal As each D8 217 1.01b
LCD task have been lost. error(s). If none, contact message is
SchlumbergerSema. added to the
queue

DIA Line Clock Duty The line clock signal from the front end Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each second Configurable Time D6 135 2.00a
error duty cycle is out of range. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Line clock “The meter line signal from the front 1) Check the installation and verify that Non-Fatal Each second Configurable Time D6 133 2.00a
Missing error end is missing and the meter is line the voltage inputs are OK. 2) Change to
synched. If the meter is aux powered, internal clock if local power
there may be no voltage phases questionable.
connected.

DIA Line clock Period The line clock signal from the front end 1) Check the installation and verify that Non-Fatal Each second Configurable Time D6 134 2.00a
error has a period that is out of range. the voltage inputs are OK. 2) Change to
internal clock if local power
questionable.

DIA Load Profile #1 This is a catchall error for any error Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Every second D8 248 1.01b
Error detected in the mass memory 1 code. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Load Profile #10 A problem happened in extended load Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Each second D8 125 3.02m
Error profile #8. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
Diagnostic Category
DIA Load Profile #2 This is a catchall error for any error Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Every second D8 247 1.01b
Error detected in the mass memory 2 code. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Load Profile #3 A problem happened in extended load Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Each second D8 132 3.02m

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Error profile #1. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Load Profile #4 A problem happened in extended load Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Each second D8 131 3.02m
Error profile #2. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Load Profile #5 A problem happened in extended load Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Each second D8 130 3.02m
Error profile #3. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Load Profile #6 A problem happened in extended load Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Each second D8 129 3.02m
Error profile #4. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Load Profile #7 A problem happened in extended load Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Each second D8 128 3.02m
Error profile #5. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Load Profile #8 A problem happened in extended load Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Each second D8 127 3.02m
Error profile #6. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Load Profile #9 A problem happened in extended load Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Each second D8 126 3.02m
Error profile #7. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Main Loop The time limit for traversing the main 1) Reduce the memory requirements of Non-Fatal Each second Configurable User Program D1 222 1.01b
Timing Error loop has been exceeded. the configuration and reprogram the Configuration
meter. Or, 2) Upgrade software to 2.3 or
above and firmware to 5.x or above.

A-17
Diagnostic Errors
 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

A-18
Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
DIA Main to A queue filled up forcing early Data could be lost in this interval. Non-Fatal Every second D8 Diagnostic Category 105 5.00n
Acquisition processing of the queue entries. Report to SchlumbergerSema.
Manager Work
Queue Full Error

DIA Memory Not enough free memory is available. Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each D8 151 1.01b
Allocation Failed Reset the meter to Factory or Customer allocation
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA New Second The time limit for processing new 1) Reduce the memory requirements of Non-Fatal Each second D8 219 1.01b
Late Error second has been exceeded. the configuration and reprogram the
meter. Or, 2) Upgrade software to 2.3 or
above and firmware to 5.x or above.

DIA New Second When second changed, the previous Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Each second Configurable User Program D1 114 4.01i
Missed error second change had not been error(s). If none, contact Configuration
processed. SchlumbergerSema.

DIA No EPF The meter was previously powered Check battery connection, or connect Non-Fatal At power up Configurable Battery D2 168 1.01b
down abnormally. Meter time may now battery, or replace battery. Recover as
be incorrect. This could be caused by a much data as possible. Reset the meter
transient. to Factory or Customer Default.
Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
return to SchlumbergerSema.

DIA No Tracker Sync Could not synch to the second change Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Powerup D8 119 3.02m
error at powerup. Meter needs to be returned to the
factory for repair.

DIA Non-display Bus Error set when a bad address is used. Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Flag set in the D8 253 1.01b
Error Meter needs to be returned to the bus handler
factory for repair. when the bus
error occurs

DIA Not Used This diagnostic is not used. Contact SchlumbergerSema Non-Fatal N/A D8 249 1.01b

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
Diagnostic Category
DIA PDS Point Data There was some error in a Protocol Check PDS general info Mini-DLMS Non-Fatal Each pds data Configurable User Program D1 124 3.02m
error Data Server point other than offline. object for the cause of the status error update Configuration
and the point number that caused it.

DIA PDS Protocol An error was noticed by an advanced Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then Non-Fatal Every 10 Configurable User Program D1 136 2.00a

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

error protocol. return to SchlumbergerSema. seconds Configuration

DIA Possible Time The battery was low when checked Check battery connection, or connect Non-Fatal At power up Configurable Battery D2 150 1.01b
Loss during powerup per the power supply battery, or replace battery. Recover as
monitoring integrated circuit. much data as possible. Reset the meter
to Factory Default. Reprogram meter. If
error repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Power Down The real time clock was in line sync on Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then Non-Fatal Powerup Configurable Battery D2 118 3.02m
Line Sync error powerup. It should be crystal sync. This return to SchlumbergerSema.
could cause loss of time on battery.

DIA Power Down Not The real time clock was not in low Check battery connection, or connect Non-Fatal Powerup Configurable Battery D2 117 3.02m
Low Power error power mode on powerup. This could battery, or replace battery. Recover as
cause a drain on the battery if power much data as possible. Reset the meter
was gone very long. to Factory Default. Reprogram meter. If
error repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Power Quality The time limit for processing a power Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Each second D8 221 1.01b
Late Error quality message was exceeded. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Power Up Time A debug feature was used that sets the Change passwords in meter. Non-Fatal Powerup Configurable User Program D1 122 3.02m
Forced error time on powerup. Possible tampering. Configuration

DIA Priority Work A queue filled up forcing early Data could be lost in this interval. Non-Fatal Every second D8 109 5.00n
Queue Full Error processing of the queue entries. Report to SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Process the An error occurred during firmware Data could be lost in this interval. Non-Fatal At power up D8 106 5.00n
Outage Error processing in power up after an outage. Report to SchlumbergerSema.

A-19
Diagnostic Errors
 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

A-20
Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
DIA Protocol Data An error was noticed by the protocol Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Each second D8 Diagnostic Category 138 2.00a
Server error data server component. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Protocol Data The server is inactive. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then Non-Fatal Each second D8 137 2.00a
Server Inactive return to SchlumbergerSema.
error

DIA RAM File Create This error would normally occur after None. The meter is operating normally. Non-Fatal Reconfigure, Configurable User Program D1 161 1.01b
No Room initialization or reconfiguration. It is 1) Reduce the memory requirements of initialization, Configuration
caused by a lack of room for the the configuration and reprogram the factory and
changes being programmed into the meter. Or, 2) Upgrade software to 2.3 or customer
meter. above and firmware to 5.x or above. default
powerups.

DIA Raw Registers The time limit for processing the new Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal On every new D8 215 1.01b
Late Error raw registers message took too long. error(s). If none, contact message of
SchlumbergerSema. this type

DIA Reconfigure An error occurred updating the Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal During D8 157 1.01b
Error configuration of a component. error(s). If none, contact reconfigure of
SchlumbergerSema. a component

DIA Reset Due to The last reset was caused by a loss of Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal At power up D8 245 1.01b
Loss of Clock the processor clock (crystal). Meter needs to be returned to the
factory for repair.

DIA Reset Due to The last processor reset was caused by Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal At power up D8 243 1.01b
Soft Reset the soft reset instruction being Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Instruction executed. This instruction is not used. Default. Reprogram meter. If error
This error could be caused by repeats, then return to
transients. SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Reset Due to The last processor reset was caused by Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal At power up D8 242 1.01b
Soft Reset Pin the soft reset pin being asserted. This Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
pin is unused. Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
Diagnostic Category
DIA Restart Error An error occurred restarting a meter Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal During D8 158 1.01b
component after it was reprogrammed. error(s). If none, contact reconfigure of
SchlumbergerSema. a component

DIA RN Return An error occurred releasing memory. Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Memory D8 162 1.01b

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Segment Failed Reset the meter to Factory or Customer access
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Self Read Check The checksum on the self read Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Read of self D8 196 1.01b
Sum Error configuration is bad. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer read
Default. Reprogram meter. If error configuration
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Self Read Error involving self read configuration. Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal As needed D8 199 1.01b
Configuration Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Error Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Self Read Data Error involving self read freeze or self Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal As needed D8 198 1.01b
Error read data storage. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Self Read Error involving self read memory usage Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal As needed D8 197 1.01b
Memory Error (stream). Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

A-21
Diagnostic Errors
 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

A-22
Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
DIA SPI Done Int An interrupt for the SPI message Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each second D8 Diagnostic Category 171 1.01b
Failed completion was not properly received. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Stack Near The stack usage is near the limit. Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each second D8 148 1.01b
Overflow Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Standard Work A queue filled up forcing early Data could be lost in this interval. Non-Fatal Every second D8 108 5.00n
Queue Full Error processing of the queue entries. Report to SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Stop all modules Programming of meter was not Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then Non-Fatal Meter D8 153 1.01b
command completed correctly. return to SchlumbergerSema. programming
missing before
reconfigure
command

DIA Timer Allocation Not enough timers are available. Reprogam meter. If errors repeats, then Non-Fatal Each Configurable User Program D1 123 3.02m
error note programming actions that are allocation Configuration
causing the error and call
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Timing Error This is a catchall error for timing errors Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal Each second D8 220 1.01b
that do not yet have a specific error. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA TOU Stopped An error occurred in TOU module and Go online with meter, and look at the Non-Fatal Each second Configurable User Program D1 115 4.01i
error TOU stopped. TOU status. Check: schedule expiration, Configuration
schedule validity, attempt to switch to
latent with no latent schedule.
Reprogram TOU.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
Diagnostic Category
DIA Unable to Synch Timed out waiting for the second to Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then Non-Fatal At power up, D8 154 1.01b
to Second change when polling the real time clock return to SchlumbergerSema. time
Change chip. adjustment,
programming

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

DIA Update There was a problem during Return the meter to the factory for Non-Fatal At calibration Configurable Calibration D7 111 4.01i
Calibration calibration. calibration.
Failed error

DIA View Check Error A checksum error was detected in the Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each second D8 187 1.01b
Reset view status information. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA View Dispenser The view dispenser default view Ids for Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal On power up D8 189 1.01b
Checksum Error each port had a checksum error. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA View Dispenser An error occurred in the view dispenser Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal As needed D8 190 1.01b
Error firmware. error(s). If none, Contact
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA View Dispenser An error occurred writing the default Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each second D8 191 1.01b
Post Defaults views to the RAM disk. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA View Fix Error The view could not be opened properly Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal On a check D8 186 1.01b
after a check error reset. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer error reset
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

A-23
Diagnostic Errors
 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

A-24
Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
DIA View Object A view object record for a view had a Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each second D8 Diagnostic Category 185 1.01b
Check Reset checksum error. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA View Object An error occurred posting the view Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal As needed D8 184 1.01b
Error object record. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA View Object An error occurred opening the view Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal On power up D8 183 1.01b
Open Error object file. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA View Open Error An error occurred opening the view Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal On power up D8 188 1.01b
object file. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Voltage Quality An error occurred in the voltage quality Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal As needed D8 180 1.01b
Error firmware. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

DIA Work Queue An error occurred involving one of the Data could be lost in this interval. Non-Fatal Every second D8 107 5.00n
Error work queues. Report to SchlumbergerSema.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
Diagnostic Category
EEPROM EEPROM error The calculated checksum value for the Check battery connection, or connect Fatal At power up D8 5 1.01b
configuration or LonWorks bindings battery, or replace battery. Recover as
storage in the flash EEPROM did not much data as possible. Reset the meter
match the stored value. This error to Factory Default. Reprogram meter. If

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

might occur if a reconfiguration was error repeats, then return to
interrupted by a reset and the battery SchlumbergerSema.
was bad.

EEPROM FS Flash File A directory entry on the Flash file Recover as much data as possible. Fatal At power up D8 11 1.01b
System Directory system has a checksum error. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer and at each
Checksum Error Default. Reprogram meter. If error use of the
repeats, then return to directory entry
SchlumbergerSema.

EEPROM FS Flash File The file allocation table of the Flash file Recover as much data as possible. Fatal At power up D8 12 1.01b
System FAT Error system has an unrecoverable error. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

EEPROM FS Flash File This is a catchall error for any other Recover as much data as possible. Fatal At power up D8 15 1.01b
System General error detected in the Flash file system. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Error Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

EEPROM FS Flash File The Flash file system component is Follow recommendations for other Fatal Each second D8 17 1.01b
System Inactive inactive. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

EEPROM FS Flash File The storage location for a directory Recover as much data as possible. Fatal At power up D8 13 1.01b
System Storage entry is wrong. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Error Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

A-25
Diagnostic Errors
 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

A-26
Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
FS Register full- The peak kilowatts delivered aggregate None. The meter is operating normally. Non-Fatal Each second Configurable Diagnostic Category
User Program D1 203 1.01b
scale exceeded the configured limit. Check the register full scale setting in Configuration
the meter's program; increase the full
scale limit.

LOBAT Low Battery bad battery Check battery connection, or connect Fatal At power up Configurable Battery D2 18 1.01b
PWRUP Power Up battery, or replace battery. Recover as
much data as possible. Reset the meter
to Factory Default. Reprogram meter. If
error repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

NBD Echelon No The LonWorks neuron chip is not Recover as much data as possible. Non-Fatal Each minute Configurable I/Os D3 174 1.01b
Bindings properly bound with its LonWorks Meter needs to be returned to the
binding. It needs to be re-bound. factory for repair.

PHA Loss of potential The A phase voltage is below the 1) None. The meter is operating Non-Fatal Each second Configurable Low Voltage D4 210 1.01b
-A configured limit. normally. Check voltage source. 2)
Check meter's voltage connections. 3)
Check low voltage level in the meter's
program.

PHB Loss of potential The B phase voltage is below the 1) None. The meter is operating Non-Fatal Each second Configurable Low Voltage D4 209 1.01b
-B configured limit. normally. Check voltage source. 2)
Check meter's voltage connections. 3)
Check low voltage level in the meter's
program.

PHC Loss of potential The C phase voltage is below the 1) None. The meter is operating Non-Fatal Each second Configurable Low Voltage D4 208 1.01b
-C configured limit. normally. Check voltage source. 2)
Check meter's voltage connections. 3)
Check low voltage level in the meter's
program.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
Diagnostic Category
RAM Dual Port RAM A microprocessor dual port Ram Recover as much data as possible. Fatal At power up D8 2 1.01b
Error location did not retain a value written Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
to it. Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

SchlumbergerSema.

RAM Ferro-RAM The calculated checksum value for the Recover as much data as possible. Fatal At power up D8 3 1.01b
Checksum Error ferro-RAM does not match the stored Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
value. This error could be caused by a Default. Reprogram meter. If error
watchdog timer type reset during an repeats, then return to
update to the ferro-RAM, or by a bad SchlumbergerSema.
ferro-RAM cell, or by a transient
disrupting access to the memory.

RAM Ferro-RAM error A ferro-RAM location did not retain a Recover as much data as possible. Fatal During factory D8 4 1.01b
value written to it during the last ferro- Reset the meter to Factory or Customer and customer
RAM test. Default. Reprogram meter. If error reset
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

RAM RAM Error Memory error. Recover as much data as possible. Fatal Factory and D8 1 1.01b
Meter needs to be returned to the customer
factory for repair. default
powerup

RAM FS RAM File A directory entry on the RAM file Recover as much data as possible. Fatal At power up D8 8 1.01b
System Directory system has a checksum error. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer and at each
Checksum Error Default. Reprogram meter. If error use of the
repeats, then return to directory entry
SchlumbergerSema.

RAM FS RAM File The file allocation table of the RAM file Recover as much data as possible. Fatal At power up D8 9 1.01b
System FAT Error system has an unrecoverable error. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

A-27
Diagnostic Errors
 Table A.1 Q1000 Diagnostic Errors

A-28
Diagnostic Errors

Error
Cause
Type
Error ID #

When Checked?
Default Summary #
FW Support

Recommended Action

Display
Diagnostic Setting
RAM FS RAM File This is a catchall error for any other Recover as much data as possible. Fatal Each second D8 Diagnostic Category 14 1.01b
System General error detected in the RAM file system. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Error Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

RAM FS RAM File RAM file system component is inactive. Follow recommendations for other Fatal Each second D8 16 1.01b
System Inactive error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

RAM FS RAM File The storage location for a directory Recover as much data as possible. Fatal At power up D8 10 1.01b
System Storage entry is wrong. Reset the meter to Factory or Customer
Error Default. Reprogram meter. If error
repeats, then return to
SchlumbergerSema.

RCV Recovery The meter's RAM file system had many Check battery connection, or connect Non-Fatal At power up Configurable Battery D2 166 1.01b
Powerup errors. This error is usually caused by battery, or replace battery. Recover as
powering up the meter without a much data as possible. Reset the meter
battery or with a battery whose voltage to Factory or Customer Default.
has dropped below the required level. Reprogram meter. If error repeats, then
Time in the meter was reset to default. return to SchlumbergerSema.
Billing data (stored in non-volatile
memory) should still be available.

WDG Watch Dog A new error occurred during powerup Follow recommendations for other Non-Fatal At power up D8 239 1.01b
Timer Error after a watchdog timer reset. error(s). If none, contact
SchlumbergerSema.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Appendix B Status Codes
This appendix provides information on Status Codes.
Harmonics Status Codes
The status codes in Table B.1 are used for Harmonics. These status codes provide
information about the interval and may or may not indicate an error condition.
Table B.1 Harmonics Status Codes
Status Meaning Causes
Code
A Time Adjust The meter’s clock was adjusted by
time synchronization during this
interval.
C Clock Error The meter recorded this interval
while a non-fatal Clock Error was
occurring.
D Daylight Savings The meter recorded this interval
Time while in Daylight Savings Time
(DST).
E External EOI The meter closed this interval
because of a received external EOI
signal.
I Invalid No data for this interval; no
message received.
QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide
Suggested Actions
No action necessary; normal meter
operation. The time was adjusted
either by the GPS receiver or a user
through the PC-PRO+ 98 software.
Correct the condition causing the
Clock Error. Re-initialization may be
necessary. Look at on-line
Diagnostics to see if any other flags
have been set. If so, then see the
software Diagnostics section Help
for suggestions or see Appendix B of
this manual.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation.
Note: This function is not currently
supported.
Harmonics possibly disabled or the
MeterKey for harmonics is not set.
Also, if harmonics is reconfigured or
initialized and restarts close to the
interval boundary, the first interval
might have invalid status; a time
adjustment might also cause an
interval to be invalid.
B-1
Status Codes
Table B.1 Harmonics Status Codes
L Long Interval The meter’s time was adjusted
backward during this interval,
increasing the amount of time
actually spent in the interval.
O Outage The meter experienced an outage to
its power supply during this interval.
R Checksum Error The data for this interval was not
properly recorded by the meter.
S Short Interval (1) The meter completed a power-up
sequence in the middle of this
interval.(2) The meter’s time was
adjusted forward during or over this
interval, reducing the amount of
time actually spent in the interval.
T Test Mode The meter was placed in Test Mode
during this interval.
Voltage Quality Status Codes
The status codes in Table B.2 and Table B.3 are used for Voltage Quality. These
status codes provide information about the interval and may or may not indicate
an error condition.
Table B.2 Voltage Quality Status Codes
Status Meaning Causes
Code
C Clock Error The meter recorded this interval
while a non-fatal Clock Error was
occurring.
ED End in Daylight This interval was recorded at the
Savings Time end of Daylight Savings Time (DST).
B-2 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide
No action necessary; normal meter
operation. The time was adjusted
either by the GPS receiver or a user
through the PC-PRO+ 98 software.
No action necessary; normal meter
operation. Investigate outage if
necessary.
Ignore the meter data for this
interval. Look at on-line Diagnostics
to see if any other flags have been
set. If so, then see the software
Diagnostics section Help for
suggestions or see Appendix B of
this manual.
No action necessary.
1. Normal meter operation.
2. User changed meter time.
No action necessary. User placed
meter in Test mode.
Suggested Actions
Correct the condition causing the
Clock Error. Re-initialization may be
necessary. Look at on-line
Diagnostics to see if any other flags
have been set. If so, then see the
software Diagnostics section Help
for suggestions or see Appendix B of
this manual.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation.
 Status Codes

Table B.2 Voltage Quality Status Codes

Status Meaning Causes Suggested Actions

Code

R Checksum Error
The data for this interval was not
properly recorded by the meter.
Ignore the meter data for this
interval. Look at on-line Diagnostics
to see if any other flags have been
set. If so, then see the software
Diagnostics section Help for
suggestions or see Appendix B of
this manual.

SD Start in Daylight This interval was recorded at the No action necessary. Normal meter
Savings Time start of Daylight Savings Time (DST). operation.

T Test Mode The meter was placed in Test Mode No action necessary. User placed
during this interval. meter in Test Mode.

Table B.3 Voltage Interruption Reset Reasons

Status Meaning Causes Suggested Actions

Code

DBF Double Bus Fault An internal error has occurred – Recover as much data as possible.
possibly due to bad memory in the Reset the meter to Factory Default.
meter. Reprogram meter. If error repeats
then return to SchlumbergerSema.

HR External Hard Reset The meter received a hard reset due No action necessary. Normal meter
to a loss of supplied power. operation for intervals immediately
following most outages. Investigate
if necessary.

LC Loss of Processor The meter failed to receive Ignore the data for this interval. Look
Clock messages from the crystal used for at Diagnostics for other errors. If the
processor speeds. error persists, contact Customer
Support.

PU Power Up The meter completed its power-up No action necessary. Normal meter
routine during this interval. operation for intervals immediately
following most outages. Investigate
if necessary.

SR or SRI Soft Reset or Soft The processor was reset due to a Retrieve any valid data from the
Reset Instruction jump to an invalid instruction in the meter, then contact Customer
firmware code – possibly due to Support for assistance.
transients.

W Watchdog Timeout The meter missed an interval Ignore the data for this interval. Look
message between processors. Can at Diagnostics for other errors. If the
be caused by anomalies on the error persists, contact Customer
supply voltage. Support.

QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide B-3

Status Codes
Standard Load Profile Status Codes
The status codes in Table B.4 are used for Standard Load Profiles. These status
codes provide information about the interval and may or may not indicate an error
condition.
Table B.4 Standard Load Profile Status Codes
Status Meaning Causes
Code
A Time Adjust The meter’s clock was adjusted by
time synchronization during this
interval.
C Clock Error The meter recorded this interval
while a non-fatal Clock Error was
occurring.
D Daylight Savings The meter recorded this interval
Time while in Daylight Savings Time
(DST).
E External EOI The meter closed this interval
because of a received external EOI
signal.
L Long Interval The meter’s time was adjusted
backward during this interval,
increasing the amount of time
actually spent in the interval.
O Outage The meter experienced an outage to
its power supply during this interval.
R Checksum Error The data for this interval was not
properly recorded by the meter.
B-4
Suggested Actions
No action necessary; normal meter
operation. The time was adjusted
either by the GPS receiver or a user
through the PC-PRO+ 98 software.
Correct the condition causing the
Clock Error. Re-initialization may be
necessary. Look at on-line
Diagnostics to see if any other flags
have been set. If so, then see the
software Diagnostics section Help
for suggestions or see Appendix B of
this manual.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation.
Note: This function is not currently
supported.
No action necessary. No action
necessary; normal meter operation.
The time was adjusted either by the
GPS receiver or a user through the
PC-PRO+ 98 software.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation. Investigate outage if
necessary.
Ignore the meter data for this
interval. Look at on-line Diagnostics
to see if any other flags have been
set. If so, then see the software
Diagnostics section Help for
suggestions or see Appendix B of
this manual.
QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Table B.4 Standard Load Profile Status Codes
Status Meaning Causes
Code
S Short Interval (1) The meter completed a power-up
sequence in the middle of this
interval.
(2) The meter’s time was adjusted
forward during or over this interval,
reducing the amount of time actually
spent in the interval.
T Test Mode The meter was placed in Test Mode
during this interval.
V Overflow The meter’s Load Profile pulse count
for this interval overflowed the
upper limit of 65,535 pulses.
Extended Load Profile Status Codes
The status codes in Table B.5 are used for Extended Load Profiles. These status
codes provide information about the interval and may or may not indicate an error
condition.
Table B.5 Extended Load Profile Status Codes
Status Meaning Causes
Code
A Time Adjust The meter’s clock was adjusted by
time synchronization during this
interval
C Clock Error The meter recorded this interval
while a non-fatal Clock Error was
occurring.
D Daylight Savings The meter recorded this interval
Time while in Daylight Savings Time
(DST).
QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide
Status Codes
Suggested Actions
No action necessary.
(1) Normal meter operation.
(2) User changed meter time.
No action necessary. User put meter
in Test Mode.
The pulse count per interval needs
to be reduced. This can be
accomplished either by increasing
the pulse weight for this channel or
by increasing the interval length for
this set of load profile channels.
Suggested Actions
No action necessary; normal meter
operation. The time was adjusted
either by the GPS receiver or a user
through the PC-PRO+ 98 software.
Correct the condition causing the
Clock Error. Re-initialization may be
necessary. Look at on-line
Diagnostics to see if any other flags
have been set. If so, then see the
software Diagnostics section Help
for suggestions or see Appendix B of
this manual.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation.
B-5
Status Codes
Table B.5 Extended Load Profile Status Codes
Status Meaning
Code
E External EOI
L Long Interval
O Outage
R Checksum Error
S Short Interval
T Test Mode
V Overflow
J Rollover Minimum
K Reconfigure
W Access violation
B-6
Causes
The meter closed this interval
because of a received external EOI
signal.
The meter’s time was adjusted
backward during this interval,
increasing the amount of time
actually spent in the interval.
The meter experienced an outage to
its power supply during this interval.
The data for this interval was not
properly recorded by the meter.
(1) The meter completed a power-up
sequence in the middle of this
interval.
(2) The meter’s time was adjusted
forward during or over this interval,
reducing the amount of time actually
spent in the interval.
The meter was placed in Test Mode
during this interval.
The meter’s Load Profile pulse count
for this interval overflowed the
upper limit of 65,535 pulses.
Total Rolled Over Minimum
Indicates a parameter modification
for the IEC-60870-5-102 protocols.
An IEC 60870-5-102 protocol logon
attempt failed.
QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide
Suggested Actions
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation.
Note: This function is not currently
supported.
No action necessary. No action
necessary; normal meter operation.
The time was adjusted either by the
GPS receiver or a user through the
PC-PRO+ 98 software.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation. Investigate outage if
necessary.
Ignore the meter data for this
interval. Look at on-line Diagnostics
to see if any other flags have been
set. If so, then see the software
Diagnostics section Help for
suggestions or see Appendix B of
this manual.
No action necessary.
(1) Normal meter operation.
(2) User changed meter time.
No action necessary; user put meter
in Test mode.
The pulse count per interval needs
to be reduced. This can be
accomplished either by increasing
the pulse weight for this channel or
by increasing the interval length for
this set of load profile channels.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation.
No action necessary; user
programmed a IEC 60870-5-102
change in meter.
No action necessary; user used bad
IEC 60870-5-102 password.

Table B.5 Extended Load Profile Status Codes
Status Meaning
Code
^ Loss of Phase A
> Loss of Phase B
< Loss of Phase C
B Total Reset
P Loss of Potential
Y Loss of Time
Synchronization
Q Time Adjustment
<= to threshold
M Rollover
6 Time Adjustment
> threshold
7 Time Adjust Makeup
8 Backward Time
Adjustment
QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide
Causes
Phase A voltage dropped below the
limit
Phase B voltage dropped below limit
Phase C voltage dropped below limit
Value was reset to zero based on the
reset schedule
Voltage for Phase A, B, or C dropped
below the limit.
The meter detected that its clock
was not synchronized with the time
in the GPS device.
Time Adjustment was less than or
equal to the Large Adjustment
threshold (see "GPS Time
Synchronization" on page 4-8).
Total Rolled Over Maximum
Used by IEC-60870-5-102 protocols.
Time adjustment was greater than
the Large Adjustment threshold.
Time Adjustment Makeup Interval.
Set when the time is adjusted
forward out of the current interval
into an interval more that one
interval in the future. All intervening
intervals are flagged.
Time Adjustment Backward out of
interval. The time of the time
adjustment was before the start of
the current interval. For example,
with a one minute interval, if at
1:03:15 the time was adjusted to
1:02:58, this status would be set.
Status Codes
Suggested Actions
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation. Investigate low voltage if
necessary.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation. Investigate low voltage if
necessary.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation. Investigate low voltage if
necessary.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation. Investigate low voltage if
necessary.
Check time synchronization.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation.
No action necessary. Normal meter
operation.
B-7
Status Codes

Table B.5 Extended Load Profile Status Codes

Status Meaning Causes Suggested Actions

Code
9 Interval Overlap If a backward time adjustment out of No action necessary. Normal meter
interval is done, this status is set in operation.
all already recorded intervals that
ended after the new time.

B-8 QUANTUM Q1000 Technical Reference Guide

Glossary

alarm An event or condition in the meter that can cause a digital state output to
trigger or a call-home to occur, depending on its status. The status of an
alarm is always stored in the meter so that other methods can check to
see if the alarm has been triggered. The register threshold alarm is
triggered whenever the attached data register's value strays above, or
below, a programmed limit. Also see Threshold Alarm.

ALT Alternate Mode Switch

alternate display One of the three display modes. It is typically used to display quantities
that are not needed on a regular basis. For example, Kh value. It is
activated by the alternate mode switch or by communication using PC-
PRO+ 98. Also see Display Modes.

annunciator A short label on the LCD that identifies particular quantities displayed by
a register, for example Wh. Also, a text string up to 16 characters that can
be used to describe an item or provide information on the LCD.

back end The MC68360 or QUICC processor that processes data from the front end
and other sources and makes that data available to communications and
the display.

battery carryover The amount of time that the registers and real time clock are energized
by the battery when power supply voltage is absent.

block interval demand Demand based on intervals from 2 to 60 minutes in length. All
calculations of demand are based on rolling demand. To calculate block
interval demand, program the register to have one subinterval of the
same length as the demand interval.

BQ event Refers to the basic quantities of watts and energy that are sent to the
back end every 48 cycles of the line frequency.

calendar schedule Schedule which determines seasonal changes, Daylight Savings Time
changes, holidays, and daily switch points.

channel The storage of a single quantity in each interval in load profile is referred
to as a channel.

circular recording file A viewable file that contains several records. Records are added to the
file in sequential locations. When the file is full, the next record starts
over at the beginning of the file and continues writing to sequential
locations.

cold load pickup See Demand Delay.

CLIENT The CLIENT is usually the initiator of the communication session. In the
case of Mini-DLMS, the CLIENT is the PC that programs and retrieve data
from the meter which has the role of a SERVER.

complete reset A reset that puts the meter in a known default configuration. All errors
are cleared. The factory default reset and the customer default reset are
complete resets.

G-1
Glossary

CT (Current) Ratio A CT ratio is used to scale the value of the current from a secondary
value up to the primary side of an instrument transformer.

current season The season that defines the present rate schedule.

customer alerts Digital State outputs that can be used, for example, to control external
lights indicating the time of use rate which is in effect or when a self read
has occurred.

customer default
The meter configuration that is in the meter when it is first sent to the
customer from the factory. It can also be initiated with a three-button
reset. This action sets the Optical, COM1, and COM2 ports to the Mini-
DLMS protocol.
Note: All meter data is lost when this reset is executed.

DCD Data Carrier Detect modem signal. Hardware signal defined by the RS-
232-C specification that indicates that a device such as a modem is on-
line and ready for transmission.

DCE Data Communication Equipment. A communications device that can

establish, maintain, and terminate a connection (for example, a modem).
A DCE may also provide signal conversion between the data terminal
equipment (DTE) and the common carrier’s channel.

decimation Division of the sampling frequency.

demand The average value of power or a similar quantity over a specified interval
of time.

demand delay Cold Load Pickup (CLPU). The programmable amount of time required
before demand calculations are restarted after a power outage.

demand interval The specified time over which demand is calculated.

demand reset Resets the current Maximum and Minimum Demand to zero. This action
is activated with the demand reset switch or by communication with PC-
PRO+ 98.

demand subinterval The smaller blocks of time that are used in rolling demand calculations.

demand threshold A programmed value that, when exceeded by calculated demand,

initiates an alarm.

Digital State Input Module This module reads digital states on its inputs. These inputs can be read
by the meter and used to trigger actions such as EOI, Register Freeze or
Demand Reset. They can also be used to control SLC and TOU.

Digital State Output An output that is either high or low. These outputs can be sent to other
devices for EOI, alarms, and so forth.

Digital State Output Module This module has 8 relay outputs that trigger when events occur in the
meter. It is a high or low type of triggering. The output represented can
be programmed through software.

Direct Connect Describes the connection between a meter and a device (like a
computer) through RS-232, RS-485, or other communication methods
that can be configured to “look” like a direct connection, e.g., fiber-optic,
radio, etc.

G-2
 Glossary

display Four-line user-configurable visual indication of data in the meter. Normal,

Alternate, and Test display modes are available. Also see Screen.

display duration A programmed number of seconds during which a quantity displays on

the LCD before scrolling to the next quantity.

display modes Three display modes are available—Normal, Alternate, and Test.

download Transfer of a meter program or firmware from the PC to the meter.

DST time change This time refers to the changing of time in the fall and spring to and from
daylight savings time.

DSW Data Status Word. These two bytes are used in the QDIP protocol to
reflect some meter states such as bad function code received, device
trouble, and device restart.

DTE Data Terminal Equipment. End-user equipment, typically an Intelligent

Electronic Device (IED), terminal, or computer that can function as the
source or destination point of communication on the network.

Echelon The company that started the LONWORKS network products.

EEPROM Nonvolatile memory. Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only

Memory that retains its data during a power outage without the need for
a battery. Also used to refer to the meter’s flash memory.

EOI End Of Interval refers to the method of ending an interval, which on the
Q1000 can be by an external input or by an internally driven time.

end-of-interval output A Digital State output that can be initiated at the end of each interval.
Also called Customer Alert.

error codes Monitor operation of the meter. Error codes are divided into Fatal and
Non-fatal errors.

error event The occurrence of an error condition.

error event ID An integer identifier indicating what error event occurred.

external modem A modem outside of the meter connected to one of the meter’s RS-232
ports.

factory default A default meter configuration that is used by the factory to reduce the
requirements for reprogramming during the production process. This
configuration is invoked by turning on the proper DIP switch and
powering up the meter.
Note: All meter data is lost when the meter is powered up with the DIP
switch set on.

fatal error A serious error. An error message is frozen on the screen. See the section
on errors in this manual for more information.

fixed decimal A programmable format that always displays the same number of digits
to the right of the decimal.

G-3
Glossary

floating decimal In the Q1000, float will always show at least 1 digit to the left of the
decimal. If more digits are required to show significant digits to the left,
they will be used. The remaining digits in the field width will be used for
digits to the right of the decimal.

front end The Digital Signal Processor (DSP) used to acquire data. It sends data
messages to the back end through the Serial Peripheral Interface.

harmonics The meter uses harmonics 2 - 32 to calculate its quantities. Harmonics 2 -

20 are made available to the user. Harmonics information includes the
values of the fundamental current and voltage and percent of
fundamental.

harmonics information The harmonics related information obtained from Fast Fourier
Transforms in the front end, transmitted to the back end, and processed.
Included are the percent total harmonic distortion for both current and
voltage, fundamental power and displacement power factor, fundamental
voltage and phase angle with respect to phase A voltage, fundamental
current and phase angle with respect to phase A voltage, magnitude and
phase angle with respect to fundamental voltage for voltage harmonics 2
through 20, and magnitude and phase angle with respect to fundamental
current for current harmonics 2 through 20.

Hayes Compatible Modem A modem that supports the Hayes modem command set.

hysteresis Threshold alarms have an upper and lower threshold. When these
numbers are not equal, hysteresis is turned on. If the attached data
register's value rises above the upper limit, then the alarm is turned ON
until the data register's value falls below the lower limit. The hysteresis
effect holds the alarm in the ON state until the alarm threshold's lower-
limit condition is met. Voltage quality has similar hysteresis usage. See
the programming software’s online help for more information.

IEC 1107 A read/programming protocol used in Europe.

Input Modules The Q1000 is designed to communicate with three types of Input
Modules: Digital State Input Modules, Pulse Input Modules, and Analog
Input Modules.

Internal Modem The optional modem inside the meter's enclosure that connects to the
RJ-11 telephone connector.

Internal RS-485 Board A new option board for the Q1000 meter that can be configured to be RS-
485 4-wire or RS-232. This board uses meter COM port 2.

interruption A meter power down. Interruptions that do not cause meter power down
can be captured by level 1 or 2 sags.

interval Load Profile consists of many intervals. Each interval has a time stamp,
status information, and one or more integer values used to represent the
accumulated value of some meter quantities.

interval length Load Profile intervals can be ended by the clock, in which case, the
interval length is the fixed length of each interval. A normal interval
length is 15 minutes.

G-4
 Glossary

invert mode A method of reversing the logic of a threshold alarm. Unless otherwise
noted, all threshold alarms referred to in this document are in normal
mode, not invert mode.

Kh Determines the rate at which the infrared LEDs pulse. This setting does
not affect displayed values.

KYZ Input or Output Input or output where the rate of changes between 1 and 0 reflects the
magnitude of a metered quantity.

last season The season immediately preceding the current season.

LCD Liquid Crystal Display.

LED Light Emitting Diode.

Note: The LEDs typically installed on the meter may be ordered to
either emit infrared light not visible to the eye or to emit visible light.

load profile The functionality of a meter to accumulate pulses in proportion to

accumulated energy in programmed intervals. This feature refers to the
area of battery backed meter RAM that is used to store interval data. One
or more meter quantities are stored in memory each interval. The meter
stores a “pulse count” for each of the quantities programmed by the user
once each interval, in battery backed RAM. Intervals are of fixed length,
and aligned with the hour. So with a 15 minute interval, the interval times
will always be at xx:00, xx:15, xx:30, and xx:45 for any hour xx.

LONWORKS Network Binding The programming of the network variables in a LONWORKS network. For
a meter and an I/O module to communicate, they must have the same
binding.

maximum demand The largest demand calculated during any interval over a billing period.
The Maximum Demand quantity displayed in Test Mode is that value
calculated over the test interval only (this can differ from the Normal
Mode demand interval).

MC68360 The processor that is used in the Q1000. It is a 32-bit Motorola 68000
series microprocessor.

Mini-DLMS A protocol subset of MMS. It provides basic services to retrieve data and
write the meter program.

Network Variable A LonWorks variable visible from any node on the network. It behaves as
a global variable. For LonWorks devices to talk, they must use the same
network variables.

non-fatal error A less serious error than a fatal error. An error screen will display at the
end of the display list. See the section on errors for more information. A
non-fatal error will clear itself if the error-causing condition is cleared.
For example, a phase voltage returning to its normal level.

Non-Hayes Modem A modem that does not support the Hayes command set. An example is a
Bell 202 modem or a fiber optic modem.

nonvolatile memory See EEPROM.

G-5
Glossary

normal mode One of the two operating modes of the meter. It includes all routine
meter operations. Normal Mode includes the Normal and Alternate
display modes. Also see Display Modes.

off state A state in which the display is Off, meaning nothing is displayed. If no
display is programmed for a display mode, then the display of the meter
will be blank. Also, the off time between displays can be set using PC-
PRO+ 98.

on/off Do not confuse an alarm's enable/disable with its ON/OFF state. The
enable/disable is used to determine whether the Alarms Manager has
enabled the alarm or not. The ON/OFF state is used to determine if an
alarm has been triggered.

Optical Port The port on the faceplate of the meter. ANSI and IEC forms are available.
The meter can be programmed and communicated with through the
optical port.

Output Modules The Q1000 is designed to communicate with three types of Output
Modules: Digital State Output Modules, Pulse Output Modules, and
Analog Output Modules.

Percent (%) THD Percent total harmonic distortion in the electricity flowing through the
metering point.

power down To de-energize the meter.

power up To energize the meter.

primary/direct reading register A register in which the readings take into account the register multiplier.

primary rated Qualifies a register whose value is modified by a CT and/or VT ratio. The
register's value reflects the electric quantity on the primary side of the
instrument transformer(s).

pulse count The value of a metered quantity in an interval is represented as an integer

pulse count. The “pulse” part of the name refers to an old way of storing
the information as flux changes on magnetic tape. It is an integer
representation of the value of an integrated meter quantity, such as KWH.
The pulse count value (units = quantity-hours per pulse) is obtained by
dividing the accumulated value of the quantity-hours during an interval,
by the pulse weight.

pulse initiator outputs A Form C contact closure output that generates pulses per the
programmed Ke value. See KYZ output.

Pulse Input, IEC 2-wire KY, This module reads pulse inputs having a user selected pulse width.
Module

Pulse Input, KYZ, Module This module reads pulse inputs states. The module makes sure that only
valid combination of KYZs are accounted for.

Pulse Output An output that generates a pulse train. The method for outputing the
pulses is either a toggle mechanism or a pulse width. Regardless of the
physical means of outputing the pulses, a pulse output refers to the
generic concept.

G-6
 Glossary

Pulse Output, IEC 2-wire KY, This module is designed to output pulses having a defined pulse width.
Module This module does not saturate the network despite the (possibly) high
pulse frequency on the outputs.

Pulse Output, KYZ, Module This module is designed to output pulses on two relays with a toggling
mechanism. This module does not saturate the network despite the
(possibly) high pulse frequency on the outputs.

pulse speed The pulse speed is expressed in pulses/sec (or Hz). The pulse speed may
be different from the signal frequency on an output relay.

QDIP QUANTUM Digital Interface Protocol—it is one of the protocols used by

the Q1000 meter. The Q1000’s version of QDIP is a subset of the one in
the QUANTUM meter.

QUICC Quad Integrated Communications Controller—this is another name for

the MC68360.

raw register A quantity value from the front end or an external input that represents
the instantaneous measure of the quantity.

reconfigure This action is a change to the meter’s configuration. Reconfiguring allows

the user to change one part of the meter’s program without having to
perform a full initialization. Metering must be stopped before the meter
can be reconfigured. The meter configuration specifies the options and
parameters under which the meter should run.
Note: Reconfiguring an area will erase the information for that area.
Other (non-reconfigured) areas retain their information.

register full scale The kilowatt demand value that defines the maximum rated demand. If
this value is exceeded, a diagnostic is triggered.

register multiplier A programmable value which is used in calculations of energy and

demand. This number can be used by setting the register multiplier equal
to the CT ratio times the VT ratio of the installation.

register rollover The point at which a register reaches its maximum value and rolls over to
zero.

rolling interval demand A calculation of maximum demand derived from the moving average of
the smaller consecutive subintervals.

RTS Request To Send modem signal.

RX Receive Line modem signal.

sag A voltage quality event in which the rms voltage is lower than normal for
a period of time, typically from 1/2 cycle to 1 minute.

screen All the information on the four-line LCD. Also see Display.

SCROLL Scroll Lock Switch.

Scroll Lock This state is activated by the scroll lock switch. The display will freeze on
the current screen when scroll lock is activated. While the scroll lock is
on, the alternate display switch will advance the screen displayed every
time it is pushed. To leave scroll lock, push the scroll lock button again.

G-7
Glossary

SCS A proprietary protocol developed by SchlumbergerSema for reading and

programming meters.

secondary rated Any register or pulse output that does not use any CT or VT ratio.

self clearing error A non-fatal error that appears on the non-fatal error screen only while
the error condition is present. If the conditions for setting the error are
not present, then the error will be cleared from the display. Examples
include low battery and loss of phase.

Serial Port (SP) Serial Port—this type of port is used to directly interface a PC with a
serial port.

Serial Port 1 (SP1) RS-232 Port number 1.

Serial Port 2 (SP2) RS-232 Port number 2. This port can be used as an RS-232 port, as an
internal modem port, or as an internal RS-485 port.

SERVER The SERVER usually responds to requests from the CLIENT. In the case
of Mini-DLMS, the SERVER is the meter.

SLC System Loss Compensation

Standard Network Variable Type A standard type ensures that different products from different LonWorks
(SNVT) manufacturers can interoperate.

status Each interval in load profile has status information. They are boolean
values that indicate the presence or absence of some condition.
Normally, they are used for abnormal conditions.

status Indicator A symbol identifying a certain status or event. For example, EOI
indicator or I/O port state indicator.

swell A voltage quality event in which the rms voltage is higher than normal for
a period of time, typically from 1/2 cycle to 1 minute.

TEST Test Mode Switch.

test mode One of the two modes of register operation. When configured, this mode
allows testing of the meter without altering billing data. It is activated by
the test mode switch or by communication using PC-PRO+ 98. Also see
display modes.

THD Total Harmonic Distortion

three button reset
This action is a meter reset that occurs when two buttons (ALT and
RESET) on the face of the meter are depressed with the TEST switch on
and held during power up. This reset sets the meter to the customer
default configuration.
Note: All meter data is lost when the reset is executed.

threshold alarm The Q1000 allows a constraint to be set on an attached data register's
value. If the attached data register's value surpasses the threshold
alarm's limit, then the alarm is set to ON. Also see Alarm.

G-8
 Glossary

timestamp The meter stores timestamps that represent the time of an event. In the
case of load profile, the timestamp normally contains the contents of the
meter clock at the instant that the interval was ended. The time stamp
includes year, month, day, hour, minute, and second. The interval also
includes an indication of whether Daylight Savings Time was in effect.

TOU Time of Use

translation system A computer system that acquires metering information from the Q1000
meter.

TX Transmit Line modem signal

voltage imbalance The ratio of the voltage on a phase to the average voltage on all phases.

voltage quality The meter stores the last n events of each of several event types,
including voltage sags and swells, interruptions, and imbalances. The
number of events (n) is programmable.

voltage quality event An aberration of the voltage on a phase. The events tracked include
interruptions, imbalances, sags, and swells.

VT Ratio A VT ratio is used to scale the value of the voltage to the primary side of
an instrument transformer.

G-9
Glossary

Notes:

G-10
Index

NUMERICS board replacement 2-63–2-71

900 MHz radio 6-2 bonding
meter enclosure 2-25
A
accuracy 9-8, 9-11 C
active transformer technology 8-6 cable
address 6-19, 6-21 null modem 6-2
adjustments calibration 8-7
meter 3-1, 9-8 call window 6-12, 6-15
alarm 8-10 configuration 3-60
alarms call windows 6-12
threshold 8-10 circular file 4-15
ALT button 2-1, 3-1, 3-18, 9-5, 9-15 clock error 4-15, 6-16
Alternate Display button 3-1 coincident demand values 8-8
alternate display mode 8-5 cold load pickup 3-5, 5-1, 8-8, 9-6
switch 3-13 communication
alternate mode 3-6 problems 9-17
switch 9-3 protocol support 1-9
Amperehours 4-3 settings 6-10
analog input 1-3, 1-8, 1-10, 3-26, 3-34, 3-57–3-59, 4-3, 6-26, compensated
6-32–6-34, 8-8, 8-10 registers 1-12
analog output 1-10, 1-23–1-24, 1-27–1-28, 3-21, 3-26, Varhours 4-3
3-57–3-58, 3-74–3-76, 3-79, 6-26, 6-29–6-31, 6-33 Watthours 4-3
annunciators 1-5 configuration
answer delay 6-12 customer 3-18, 6-11
ring 6-13 default 3-18, 6-11
autobaud factory default 6-11
enable 6-19, 6-21 continuous cumulative peak 8-8
sensing 6-2, 6-11 contrast adjustment screw 3-17–3-18
auxiliary power 1-15, 9-12 correction
auxiliary voltage supply 3-4 factors 3-85
phase angle 3-85
B CT/VT Correction 3-40, 3-85
battery 2-8 cumulative
carryover 9-6 demand 3-23
life 1-37 peak 8-8
maintenance 9-1 current
memory retention 8-3 transmission line 7-9
packaging 2-2 current transformer 3-40
voltage 1-37 customer configuration 3-18, 6-11
battery backed RAM 3-5, 3-7, 4-15
battery back-up 1-37 D
baud rate 3-81–3-82, 3-85, 6-3, 6-19, 6-21 data
optical port 6-2 billing 8-4
billing data 8-4 loss 8-3
billing registers 1-12, 3-4–3-5, 3-7 retention 3-4, 4-15, 8-3
binding 1-23–1-25, 3-14, 3-80–3-81, 6-35–6-38, 6-41, 8-4–8-5, Daylight Savings Time 4-15, 8-10
10-4, A-14, G-5 DB-25 connector
block demand 9-4 pin assignments 6-2
registers 3-22 DB-9 connector
block interval demand 3-22, 8-8 Switchboard/Drawout configuration 2-38

I-1
Index

dedicated phone line 6-13 quantities 8-8

default configuration 3-18, 6-11 quantity IDs 8-8
demand registers 1-28, 3-6, 3-13, 3-19, 3-22, 3-32, 3-43, 6-1,
cumulative 3-23 6-21–6-22, 6-32, 9-7
EOI 4-15, 6-16 values 4-3
interval 6-28 energy registers 6-32, 8-8
registers 1-28, 3-8, 3-12, 3-19, 3-33, 3-42–3-43, 6-1, EOI 1-14, 3-5, 8-9
6-21–6-22, 6-32, 8-8, 8-10 demand 6-16
reset 4-15, 6-16, 6-28, 8-5 EOI pulse 6-28
reset button 9-5 equipment rack 2-26
reset lockout time 9-5 error
reset mechanism 2-1 codes 9-3
reset switch 3-12 types 1-37
demand interval 8-8 errors
demand interval length 9-4 clock 4-15, 6-16
demand quantities 8-8–8-9 fatal 1-37, 9-2
demand registers 6-32 non-fatal 1-37, 9-2–9-3, 9-12
diagnostic checks 3-3 event 1-9
diagnostic events 3-53 log 4-1, 4-15
diagnostics module 9-2 records 4-1, 4-15
digital pulse input 3-58, 6-32 summaries 4-15, 9-3
digital pulse output 3-57 THD 5-11
digital signal processing 8-1 events
digital signal processor 8-4, 8-7 configuration 3-53
digital state input 1-3, 1-10, 1-24, 3-12, 3-58–3-60, 3-65, 3-69, diagnostic 3-53
3-79, 4-16–4-17, 6-16, 6-26, 6-28, 6-32–6-34, 8-10 phone home 3-63, 6-16–6-17
digital state output 1-3, 1-10, 1-23–1-25, 3-57–3-58, threshold 3-54
4-17–4-19, 6-26, 6-28, 6-33–6-35, 8-10, 8-13, G-1–G-3, G-6 voltage quality 8-9
digital state output module 6-34 external
dimensions 1-29 connectors 2-28
DIP switch 3-1, 3-13, 6-11 inputs 8-10
direct link 1-11 modem 6-2, 6-11
display
LCD 8-5 F
display adjustment 9-8 factory default
display annunciators 1-5 configuration 6-11
Display Board 8-5 factory default configuration 3-14
display formats 3-9 Fast Fourier Transform 1-9, 8-1, 8-7, 8-9
display lists 3-8 fatal errors 1-37, 9-2
display messages 3-11 FFT 1-9, 8-1, 8-7, 8-9
display mode 3-8 firmware 1-11, 3-82, 6-19
DNP 3.0 protocol 1-39, 3-35–3-36, 3-39, 3-79–3-80, 6-1, 6-17, upgrade 3-80, 3-85
6-22–6-25 FLVA 7-5
DSP 8-4, 8-7 FLW 7-5
DST 4-15, 8-10 frame relay 6-2
DTE device 6-2 full-load
loss angle 7-5
E loss phase angle 7-5
end of interval 3-5, 8-9 losses 7-4
end-of-interval 1-14 var loss 7-5
demand 4-15 voltamperes 7-5
load profile 4-16, 6-16 full-load losses 7-5
energy full-load watts loss 7-5
quanta array 8-8 fundamental

I-2
 Index

varhours 4-3 digital pulse 3-58, 6-32

vars 8-7 digital state 3-58
watthours 4-3 external 8-10
watts 8-7 instantaneous
fundamental power demand registers 3-23
registers 5-11–5-12 interval demand 3-23
registers 3-8, 3-19, 3-24, 9-5
G instantaneous registers 1-13
Global EOI 3-7, 4-2, 8-9 instrument transformer correction 3-40
ground 2-27 internal
grid wires 2-27 modem 6-2, 6-11
single-point 2-26 internal modem 1-10, 6-1
grounding 2-25 retrofit kit 2-37
CT and PT circuits 2-27 interruptions 1-9, 3-47, 5-1, 5-3, 5-8, 8-1
hardware specification 1-37 interval
group address 6-19 length 1-3, 1-8, 4-2–4-3, 8-1, 8-10
make-up 3-5
H interval data
hardware specification 1-37 RAM storage 1-8
harmonic interval length 4-2
analysis 5-1, 5-11
calculations 8-9 K
components 5-11 Ke
distortion 8-12 pulse output constants 9-5
magnitude registers 5-11 values 6-26
measurements 1-12 kit
phase angle registers 5-11 internal modem 2-37
registers 3-9, 5-12 KYZ pulse outputs 9-5
harmonics 3-49, 4-1
Hayes Accura 144 + Fax 144 Modem 6-5 L
hysteresis 1-9 LCD 1-3, 3-1
LCD display 8-5, 9-8
I LED 8-5
I/O module 2-23 LED configuration 3-13
IDs normal mode 3-44
energy quantity 8-8 test mode 3-44
IEC 1107 protocol 6-1, 6-22 LEDs 1-10, 3-1, 3-7, 8-3
IEC 60870-5-102 Plus protocol 3-35–3-36, 6-1, 6-17, 6-22–6-25 infrared 3-13, 8-5, 9-4, 9-7
IEC 60870-5-102 protocol 1-39, 3-35–3-36, 6-1, 6-17, 6-22–6-25 meter 3-44
imbalances 1-9, 3-47, 5-1, 5-3, 5-8, 8-1 line loss
infrared LEDs 3-13, 8-5, 9-4, 9-7 vars 7-9
input watts 7-9
analog 1-3, 1-8, 1-10, 3-26, 3-34, 3-57–3-59, 4-3, 6-26, line losses 7-6
6-32–6-34, 8-8, 8-10 liquid crystal display 1-3, 3-1, 8-5
configuration 3-58 load profile 1-3, 1-8, 1-40, 4-1–4-2, 8-1
digital state 1-3, 1-10, 1-24, 3-12, 3-58–3-60, 3-65, 3-69, configuration 3-45
3-79, 4-16–4-17, 6-16, 6-26, 6-28, 6-32–6-34, end-of-interval 6-16
8-10 EOI 6-16
pulse 1-3, 1-8–1-10, 1-24–1-25, 3-7, 3-26, 3-59–3-60, interval length 4-3
3-69, 3-71, 3-73, 4-3, 6-26–6-27, 6-32–6-35, memory channels 4-3
8-8, 8-10 recorders 8-10
input/output module 1-3, 6-33 registers 1-9, 3-19, 3-24
inputs load research 1-40
analog 3-58 LONTALK protocol 6-34

I-3
Index

LonWorks 1-3, 1-9–1-10, 1-29, 1-37, 2-23, 3-57 LED configuration 3-44
circuit 6-34 NOVRAM 1-37, 3-4, 8-3
LonWorks Binding 6-35, G-5 null modem cable 6-2
LonWorks I/O Module Mounting 2-25, 6-33
LonWorks Network 1-10, 8-3, 8-5 O
LonWorks port 6-19, 6-22 off-hook detect 6-11
loss angle 7-5 parallel 6-13
loss of phase 9-12 operating modes 3-5
loss phase angle 7-5 optical port 1-9, 1-11, 2-30, 3-1, 6-1, 6-16, 8-4–8-5
baud rate 6-2
M problems 9-17
Main Board 2-8, 8-2–8-4, 8-7 option boards
maximum demand 3-24 modem 2-2, 2-28–2-29, 2-39, 2-47–2-48, 2-50–2-51, 2-71,
memory channels 4-3 3-11, 3-34, 6-2, 6-11, 9-19–9-21
memory retention RS-485 1-10, 2-2, 2-29, 2-32, 2-39, 2-55, 3-34, 6-3, 8-7
battery 8-3 output
messages 3-11 analog 1-10, 1-23–1-24, 1-27–1-28, 3-21, 3-26,
meter address 6-19, 6-21 3-57–3-58, 3-74–3-76, 3-79, 6-26, 6-29–6-31,
meter adjustment 9-8 6-33
meter case ground 2-27 configuration 3-57
meter cover digital state 1-3, 1-10, 1-23–1-25, 3-57–3-58, 4-17–4-19,
removal 2-7 6-26, 6-28, 6-33–6-35, 8-10, 8-13, G-1–G-3, G-6
meter dimensions 1-29 pulse 1-3, 1-10, 1-13, 1-24, 1-29, 3-21, 3-26, 3-57–3-58,
meter enclosure 3-70, 6-26–6-27, 6-32–6-33, 8-5, 9-5
bonding 2-25 relay 6-34
meter events 3-53 outputs
Meter Interface Connector 2-31 analog 3-57
meter register 1-14, 3-8 digital pulse 3-57
meter standards 1-22 digital state 3-57
meter termination 2-24
microprocessor 1-28, 8-4 P
Mini-DLMS protocol 2-36, 2-47, 3-34–3-37, 3-81, 3-84, parallel off-hook detect 6-13
4-7–4-8, 4-14, 6-1, 6-10, 6-18–6-19, 9-18–9-19 part numbers
minimum demand 3-24 Standard External Meter Interface Cable 2-33
MODBUS protocol 1-39, 3-35–3-36, 3-80, 6-1, 6-17, 6-22–6-25 PC-PRO+ 98 2-12
modem 1-11, 6-2 call windows 6-12
external 6-2, 6-11 CT/VT Correction 3-85
internal 1-10, 6-1–6-2, 6-11 diagnostics readings 9-3
rate 6-11 digital pulse inputs 6-32
RS-485 bus 6-2 energy registers 9-8
modem board 2-2, 2-28–2-29, 2-39, 2-47–2-48, 2-50–2-51, errors 9-2
2-71, 3-11, 3-34, 6-2, 6-11, 9-19–9-21 firmware upgrade 3-80
MOV Board 8-2 Online Manual 3-29
multi-drop networks 1-10 phone numbers 6-15
peak
N cumulative 8-8
Neuron chip 6-34 peak time of occurrence 8-8
no-load loss phase angle 7-5 phase angle 1-14
no-load var loss 7-5 phase angle correction 3-85
non-circular file 4-15 phone home
non-fatal errors 1-37, 9-2–9-3 configuration 3-61
loss of phase 9-12 phone home event 6-16–6-17
non-register values 3-25 configuration 3-63
normal mode 3-6 phone line

I-4
 Index

dedicated 6-13 demand 8-9

pin assignments QUANTUM STQ Meters
DB-25 connector 6-2 retrofitting 2-72
polyphase meter 2-13
port R
optical 6-1 radians 3-86
RS-232 6-1 RAM
RS-485 6-1 battery backed 4-15
power loss 8-3 RAM storage 1-8
power outage 3-4, 4-5, 4-16, 6-16 ratio error corrections 1-14
power quality 1-3, 1-12, 5-1, 8-11 recorders
power quality registers 3-9 load profile 8-10
Power Supply Board 8-2 register
power transformer losses 7-3 meter 1-14, 3-8
power up parameters 3-6
system checks 9-2 register data 1-5
Practical Peripherals P114MT II 6-3 register freeze 3-11, 4-16, 6-19, 6-28, 6-32
Pre-December 1999 Q1000 Meters 2-35, 2-53 register information 1-3
previous demand 3-23 register multipliers 1-13, 3-40, 6-26
programming software 1-11, 2-12, 2-47, 2-57 register self read 6-16, 6-28, 6-32
projected demand 3-23 register threshold alarm 8-10
protocol registers 1-13, 3-4–3-5, 3-7, 3-21, 5-1, 5-11
DNP 3.0 1-39, 3-35–3-36, 3-39, 3-79–3-80, 6-1, 6-17, billing 1-12, 3-4–3-5, 3-7
6-22–6-25 block demand 3-22
IEC 1107 6-1, 6-22 compensated 1-12
IEC 60870-5-102 1-39, 3-35–3-36, 6-1, 6-17, 6-22–6-25 demand 1-28, 3-8, 3-12, 3-19, 3-33, 3-42–3-43, 6-1,
IEC 60870-5-102 Plus 3-35–3-36, 6-1, 6-17, 6-22–6-25 6-21–6-22, 6-32, 8-8, 8-10
Mini-DLMS 2-36, 2-47, 3-34–3-37, 3-81, 3-84, 4-7–4-8, energy 1-28, 3-6, 3-8, 3-13, 3-19, 3-22, 3-32, 3-43, 4-3,
4-14, 6-1, 6-10, 6-18–6-19, 9-18–9-19 6-1, 6-21–6-22, 6-32, 8-8, 9-7
MODBUS 1-39, 3-35–3-36, 3-80, 6-1, 6-17, 6-22–6-25 fundamental power 5-11–5-12
QDIP 3-36, 3-67, 6-1, 6-19, 6-21 harmonic 3-9, 5-12
protocol support 6-1 harmonic magnitude 5-11
communication 1-9 harmonic phase angle 5-11
pulse instantaneous 1-13, 3-8, 3-19, 3-24, 9-5
constant 4-4 instantaneous demand 3-23
count resolution 4-5 load profile 1-9, 3-19, 3-24, 4-2
EOI 6-28 non-register values 3-25
pulse input 1-3, 1-8–1-10, 1-24–1-25, 3-7, 3-26, 3-59–3-60, power quality 3-9
3-69, 3-71, 3-73, 4-3, 6-26–6-27, 6-32–6-35, 8-8, 8-10 QDIP 6-19–6-20
pulse output 1-3, 1-10, 1-13, 1-24, 1-29, 3-21, 3-26, 3-57–3-58, rolling interval demand 3-23
3-70, 6-26–6-27, 6-32–6-33, 8-5, 9-5 THD 5-11
constants 9-5 thermal demand 3-23
pulse outputs 6-26 totalized 1-8–1-9, 8-10
pulse weight 6-27 uncompensated 1-12
minimum 4-5 remote
multiplier 6-32 modem 6-11
station rate 6-11
Q RESET button 3-1, 3-18, 9-14
Q1000 Meters RESET mechanism 2-1
Pre-December 1999 2-35, 2-53 retrofit installation
QDIP protocol 3-36, 3-67, 6-1, 6-19, 6-21 QUANTUM STQ Meters 2-72
QDIP registers 6-19–6-20 retrofit kit 2-37
Qhours 4-3 revenue billing 1-12
quantities ring answer delay 6-13

I-5
Index

RJ-11 connector 2-37 T

RMS Current 8-7 termination 2-24
RMS Voltage 8-7 TEST button 3-18
rolling interval demand registers 3-23 test LEDs 8-3
RS-232 1-11, 2-33, 8-4 test mode 3-6, 8-5
port 6-1 LED configuration 3-44
serial ports 1-9, 8-5 test mode switch 3-13
RS-485 8-4 Test Switch 3-1, 3-8
board 1-10, 2-2, 2-29, 2-32, 2-39, 2-55, 3-34, 6-3, 8-7 THD 1-9, 5-11
bus 6-2 THD events 5-11
module 1-10 THD registers 5-11
port 6-1 thermal demand 8-8
RS-485 board 2-55 thermal demand registers 3-23
RTU 1-39, 6-1, 6-19, 6-24 thermal interval demand 3-23
three button reset 3-18
S threshold 1-9, 5-9, 6-16
sags 1-9, 3-47, 5-1, 5-3, 5-8, 8-1 threshold alarms 3-54, 6-28, 8-10
sampling process 8-7 threshold event 3-54
SCADA Interface 1-39 thresholds 3-54, 6-28
SCROLL button 3-1, 9-15 meter 3-54
SCROLL LOCK button 2-1 time adjustment 1-10, 4-6
scroll lock switch 3-12 time of occurrence 8-8
SCS protocol 6-22 time of use rates 6-32
secondary readings 4-4 Time-of-Use
security codes 1-11 configuration 3-51
self read 4-1 TOO 8-8
configuration 3-64 total harmonic distortion 1-9
serial port 8-5 totalized registers 1-8–1-9, 8-10
service configuration 3-66 Transducer 1-37, 3-3
service connections 2-17 Transducer Board 8-2–8-4
shared line 6-11 transducers 6-32
single-point ground 2-26 transformer losses 7-4
SLC 8-9, 9-16 transmission line
description 7-1 current 7-9
software losses 7-6
programming 1-11, 2-12, 2-47, 2-57 var loss 7-6
Standard External Meter Interface Cable 2-33 watt loss 7-6
standards 1-22
swells 1-9, 3-47, 5-1, 5-3, 5-8, 8-1 U
switch 3-44 U.S. Robotics Sportster 33600 Fax Modem 6-7
alternate display mode 3-13 uncompensated
alternate mode 9-3 egisters 1-12
demand Varhours 4-3
reset 3-12 Watthours 4-3
scroll lock 3-12 unterminated meters 2-24
test mode 3-13 user data 3-67
system checks
power up 9-2 V
System Loss Compensation 8-9, 9-16 VAarith 8-7
description 7-1 Vahours per quadrant 4-3
system losses 7-7 var loss 7-5
system planning 1-40 transmission line 7-6
Varhours
lagging 4-3

I-6
 Index

leading 4-3
vars
fundamental 8-7
VAvect 8-7
voltage imbalance 8-11
voltage interruptions 8-12
voltage quality 1-9, 4-1, 5-1
imbalances 3-47, 5-1, 5-3, 5-8, 8-1
interruptions 3-47, 5-1, 5-3, 5-8, 8-1
sags 3-47, 5-1, 5-3, 5-8, 8-1
swells 3-47, 5-1, 5-3, 5-8, 8-1
voltage quality event 1-9, 8-9
voltage sag 8-12
voltage swell 8-12
voltage transformer correction 3-40
voltamperes 7-5
Volthours 4-3

W
warranty 1-iv
watt loss
transmission line 7-6
Watthours
delivered 4-3
received 4-3
watts
fundamental 8-7

I-7
Index

Notes:

I-8